JP2022031504A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress reduction of a game motivation of a player.

SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that privilege game execution means executes a privilege game which can vary a state of variable ball entry means to a permissive state, whose state can be varied to a regulation state in which ball entry is regulated and the permissive state in which ball entry is permitted. The game machine further comprises ball entry means which is individually provided from the variable ball entry means, and which can apply a first privilege when the ball enters. When the ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, a second privilege different from the first privilege is applied by privilege application means. Therefore, during the privilege game, when the ball enters the ball entry means other than the variable ball entry means, the second privilege different from the first privilege can be applied.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (winning game, etc.) and a gaming state (probability change) that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player when the ball passes through. Etc.) can be given.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-174874

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced due to the frequent occurrence of balls that do not win the variable winning device during the privileged game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in a player's willingness to play.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a permissible state that allows the ball to enter and a regulated state that restricts the ball-entry, and specific conditions. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable ball entry means to the permissible state based on the establishment, and a ball entry means provided separately from the variable ball entry means and capable of entering a ball. And a privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, the privilege granting means said the ball entering while the privilege game is being executed. When a ball enters the means, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, in which a first state in which a ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. It has a setting means capable of setting and.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the setting means has a plurality of paths through which the ball can pass and a distribution means for distributing the ball to the plurality of paths. The distribution means can pass at least a first path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set by the setting means and a ball can pass when the second state is set. The sphere is distributed to any of the second paths.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the plurality of routes can pass a ball when the first state is set separately from the first route. The first path has a third path, which allows the ball to enter the ball entry means in a shorter period of time than the third path, and the distribution means is the third path. When the state of 1 is set, the sphere can be distributed to the first path and the third path.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the distribution means distributes balls to the plurality of routes in a predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the variable ball-entry means that can be changed between the permissible state of allowing the ball to enter and the regulated state of restricting the ball-in are allowed by the privileged game executing means. A variable bonus game is executed. A ball-entry means that is provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and can be given the first privilege by the ball entering the ball is provided. Then, when the ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

As a result, when the ball enters a ball entry means other than the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game in which the ball is inserted into a ball entry means other than the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed by the setting means, and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than in the first state. The state and is set.

As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball while the privilege game is being executed. The game will be played with the expectation that the second privilege will be given to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distribution means has a first path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set, and a second path through which the sphere can pass when the second state is set. The sphere is distributed to the route.

As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball depending on the path through which the ball passes. As a result, the player pays close attention to the flow of the ball, which has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a plurality of paths, apart from the first path, there is a third path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set, and the first state is set. The sphere is distributed to the first path or the third path by the distribution means.

As a result, when the first state is set, the timing at which the ball enters the ball entry means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 3, the balls are distributed to a plurality of routes in a predetermined order by the distribution means, so that the privileged game can be achieved. By letting a plurality of balls flow down to the distribution means during the execution, it is possible to surely allow the balls to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game while the privilege game is being executed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed navigation is displayed, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed warning image is displayed. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen when a ball enters a high value winning opening during a jackpot. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating a display screen on which a warning image is displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (A) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the sphere that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the sphere that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is open. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of a sphere. It is a figure which shows the upstream side of the path provided on the right side of a game board. It is a figure which shows the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of a game board. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the first specific winning opening is opened, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the second specific winning opening is opened. (A) is a diagram showing the path of the ball in a state where the first specific winning opening is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball in a state where the first specific winning opening is open. (A) is a diagram showing the path of the ball in a state where the second specific winning opening is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball in a state where the second specific winning opening is open. (A) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of a ball that has entered the second variable winning device with the probability-changing ball opening closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the ball that has entered the second variable winning device, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable winning apparatus in the state of being. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change between the state of the second specific winning opening and the state of the flow path in the second variable winning device in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the timekeeping change between the state of the 2nd specific winning opening and the state of the flow path in the 2nd variable winning device in the round. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of RAM in a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the error notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-time notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the normal time notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is closed, and (b) is a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is open. It is an exemplary figure. It is a front view of the storage device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating a case where a ball flowing into a storage device is guided to a high-value winning opening when the storage valve in the second embodiment is closed, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the case where the ball has flowed into the storage device. 2 is a diagram illustrating a case where a ball flowing into a storage device is guided to a small value winning opening when the storage valve in the second embodiment is closed. It is a figure which illustrates the traveling direction of the sphere which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is open. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second embodiment. be. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage time notification processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the release notification processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the display screen during the jackpot in the modification of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a plan view of the storage device and the second variable winning device in a state where the slide member of the modified example of the first embodiment is projected toward the front side of the front view, and (b) is a modification of the first embodiment. It is a top view of the storage device and the 2nd variable winning device in a state where the slide member of an example is buried in the back side of the front view. It is a figure which shows the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening closing process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-time notification processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device in the state that the ball stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment is arranged in a disadvantageous arrangement for a player. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device with the ball stored in the storage device in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment in a state which is advantageous arrangement for a player. It is a figure which shows the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the release suggestion display process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the storage state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the third embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving (probability variation) medium-big hit table in the third embodiment. c) is a figure which shows the rule content of the time saving (probability change) middle-out table in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the open scenario setting table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the open scenario setting table (normal) in the third embodiment. c) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the open scenario setting table (probability change) in the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rule content of the expectation degree display selection table in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the opening operation of the jackpot A in the normal gaming state in the third embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the opening operation of the jackpot A in the probabilistic gaming state in the third embodiment. be. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opening scenario setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing 3 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage state determination process which is executed by MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving medium display processing executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the fourth embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the second open scenario setting table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the second open scenario setting table (normal) in the fourth embodiment. (C) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the second open scenario setting table (probability change) in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the opening operation of the jackpot B in the normal gaming state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the opening operation of the jackpot B in the probabilistic gaming state in the fourth embodiment. be. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect processing executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the fifth embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the third open scenario setting table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the third open scenario setting table (normal) in the fifth embodiment. (C) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the third open scenario setting table (probability change) in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the pseudo-effect number setting table in the fifth embodiment. .. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game when the big hit in 5th Embodiment is won. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game when the big hit in 5th Embodiment is won. It is a figure which shows the flow of the simulated production in 5th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot type determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage valve opening process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related processing which is executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect processing 5 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-effect process executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example of 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a wind turbine (movable member 310 are shown, and others are shown). (Not shown), rail 61, 62, general winning slot 63, first ball slot 64, second ball slot 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal ball slot (not shown). The through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, the storage device 600, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 600 are formed by router processing to form a base plate 60. It is arranged in the through hole formed in the above, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally opens the entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the ball is performed for the ball entering the second ball opening 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, waits for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Or, the operation of opening (until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probability variable ball opening 654 and normal ball entry) for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special gaming state. A mouth 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although the details will be described later, when the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 in the special game state, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probability change entrance 654 during the special game state, the "normal symbol time saving state" is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. There are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B" (see FIG. 18 (b)). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the ease of entering the ball into the probabilistic entry opening 654 is different.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, the hit / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. It is also displayed and is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 15 rounds in a special gaming state (15R big hit). Further, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability change entrance 654, the pachinko machine 10 has a high special symbol from the end of the big hit to the next big hit as an added value after the end of the big hit. It shifts to the probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probability change entrance 654 in the special game state, as an added value after the jackpot ends, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. For a while, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol. In addition, when shifting to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. The low probability state of this special symbol continues until the next big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the "big hit B", the ball is more likely to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the big hit state) than in the "big hit A". That is, since the "big hit B" is more likely to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, it is more likely to be the big hit again at short intervals after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than the "big hit A".

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent big hit increases as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high-probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol. Further, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) means a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game in which neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the time reduction of the normal symbol is increased (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is reached. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased from the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 10 times, and after the lottery of the special symbol is completed 10 times. May be configured to be set to the normal state. Further, the number of times that the special symbol is in the probable change state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 in the special game state, the normal symbol time is shortened until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. However, the time saving period of a normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily set.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entry port 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is reserved up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17), for example, the upper, middle, and lower parts are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) in the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is displayed. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the liquid crystal display, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. Yes, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", and the main symbol with an odd number (1,3,5,7,9) is , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., which is almost full on the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers is added. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined motion, and sometimes a special motion different from the predetermined motion is performed, or another character performs a predetermined motion. A notice production will be performed by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640. The number of times the ball is entered is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, the reserved ball does not exist. Note that FIG. 4B is an example in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the first entry port 64 is four. When a reserved ball corresponding to the entry into the second entry port 640 is generated, the reserved ball number symbol in a mode different from the reserved ball number symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed. Will be done. As a result, the player can easily determine how many reserved balls correspond to the entry into the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the second entry opening 640. You can check.

In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5A, a display (right-handed navigation) prompting the third symbol display device 81 to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is displayed. The display contents when it occurs will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily released when the special symbol is probablely changed or the normal symbol is shortened, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, although the details will be described later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a "big hit B" than when a big hit is made by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball. Therefore, in the probable change state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit or the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right-handed strike. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probable change state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right, which is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probable change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player displays the probabilistic state of the special symbol by displaying the image (right-handed navigation) illustrated in FIG. 5A. It is configured so that the benefits of being in a time-saving state of ordinary symbols can be surely obtained.

As illustrated in FIG. 5A, in the right-handed navigation, the characters "Aim to the right !!" are displayed for the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and the characters are oriented to the right above and below. Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to surely make the player obtain the benefit of being in the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed to the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). The warning image illustrated in FIG. 5B shows a right-handed hit even though it is not a period in which the player should hit the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed to the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the image is being executed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640). For this reason, if a right-handed strike is performed in a normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the ball is launched aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed strike. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, a "warning" is given to the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). And the characters "Play left-handed !!" are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). In addition, the hall clerk also confirms the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen (see FIG. 5 (b)) to determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of right-handed in a normal state. It can be easily identified.

As a method of determining whether or not a ball is hit right, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) where the ball can flow in when the ball is hit right. .. More specifically, when a ball enters any of the general winning openings 601 and 602 provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) or the out openings 603a to 603c (in each entry opening). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the provided ball entry switch), it is determined that the player is hitting right.

Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) has a state in which it is easy for the ball to flow down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and a state in which the ball flows down to the general winning opening 602 according to the gaming state. It is set to two types of states, one is an easy state (see FIG. 9B). Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (probability change state of the special symbol, time saving state of the normal symbol, normal state), the ball is set to a state in which the ball can easily flow down to the general winning opening 601. The general winning opening 601 is a winning opening in which the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters is smaller than that of the general winning opening 602 (for example, three). Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is performed in a normal state, there is little merit of allowing the ball to enter the storage device 600 (the number of balls held cannot be increased). That is, if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the lottery of the special symbol is reduced and the number of balls held is also reduced, so that the player is configured to be disadvantaged. For this reason, a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed in order to prevent the player from continuing to perform a game method that is disadvantageous to him (a game method in which he strikes right in a normal state). It is configured as follows.

As a factor for determining whether or not to display the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only the ball is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 which is easy to win in the normal state, but also the winning is won. It is also determined whether or not the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which is difficult to do, because the possibility of illegal game is taken into consideration. That is, under normal conditions, by continuously illegally injecting balls into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 15 payouts), without going through a big hit. There is a possibility that an illegal game method to obtain a large number of prize balls will be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has won (winned) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player is hit to the left (right). A right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) urging the player not to hit is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal games.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the entry ports (general winning openings 601 and 602, out openings 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. Was configured to display a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with many prize balls to be paid out in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), an illegal game is performed. It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that it has been performed. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the hall computer is fraudulent. It may be configured to output a signal indicating. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraudulent activity is being performed.

In the present embodiment, the player makes a right-handed hit based on detecting the entry of a ball into each entry opening (general winning openings 601, 602, out openings 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the player is doing the right-handed hit, the method of determining whether or not the player is hitting right is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine that the ball is hitting right when it passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A known sensor capable of detecting the passage of the ball may be arranged on the top, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the player is hitting right.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state) will be described. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when it becomes a big hit, for example, an image in which a boy character 710 discovers a treasure box 715 filled with treasure is displayed. This treasure suggests a large amount of prize balls that the player obtains in the special gaming state (big hit state). This display can amplify the joy of winning the prize ball, and thus give a feeling of satisfaction to the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, a display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the example of FIG. 6A, the characters "ROUND3" are displayed on the display area 714. By checking this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot.

Further, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed in the same manner as in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed for the small area Ds3, and right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the jackpot state). be able to. If a left-handed hit is made despite the special game state (big hit state), it is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and is released in the special game state (big hit state). It becomes impossible to put the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it becomes impossible to win a large amount of prize balls, and the player loses. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) is displayed even in the special gaming state (big hit state) to encourage the player to perform right-handed hitting. As a result, the player is configured to be able to win a prize ball at the jackpot.

In addition, a winning number display area MA for displaying the number of winnings (balls) to the general winning opening 602 is formed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in 6 (a), for example, the characters "EXTRA BONUS x 10" are displayed in the winning number display area MA. The characters "EXTRA BONUS" mean that the prize ball is obtained by a method different from the prize ball obtained by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a prize ball is obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602. Further, the character "x10" indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 in the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball is entered into the general winning opening 602 10 times in the 1st to 3rd rounds.

Further, a schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the characters "EXTRA BONUS x 10", and the characters "EXTRA BONUS gate is open" are displayed above the schematic diagram. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). Further, in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon with the characters "Aim!" Is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. .. With this balloon, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is advantageous when the ball is inserted into the general prize opening 602 (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained).

Further, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the display contents when the ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6B, when a ball entering the general winning opening 602 is detected during the jackpot, the characters "GET" are displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which the ball enters the portion corresponding to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. Further, in the winning number display area MA, the display content is changed from "EXTRA BONUS x 10" to "EXTRA BONUS x 11". As a result, the player can easily recognize that the prize ball has been obtained by the ball entering the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 602.

In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 during the jackpot, the winning ball is different from the entry into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot. It is possible to make the player recognize the number of times the player has won. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the number of times of "EXTRA BONUS" (the number of times of entering the general winning opening 602) will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. 7. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a left-handed warning image displayed to the third symbol display device 81 when left-handed in a special gaming state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that the player is left-handed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. Also, in the large display area, the characters "warning" are displayed in large size, and the characters "Aim for the attacker by hitting right!" Are displayed below the characters "warning". By displaying these characters in the large display area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current game method (left-handed) is an erroneous game method. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can surely acquire a large amount of prize balls.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the player is hitting left is determined by whether or not the ball has entered the first entry port 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), it is determined that the player is hitting the left side, and the left-handed warning image ( Control is performed so as to display (see FIG. 7A).

In the present embodiment, a left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. .. For example, a passage sensor for detecting the passage of a ball is provided on a path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and a left-handed warning image (left-handed warning image) when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor during a big hit. It may be configured to display FIG. 7 (a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, the case where a ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is detected in spite of the special gaming state (big hit state), or the special gaming state (big hit state). When a ball is detected in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 even though it is not in the state), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the text "Call the gate error staff" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

In addition, if the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of winning balls that are always paid out, due to illegally changing the wiring, etc., the hole The clerk can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity only by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and the ball is launched aiming at the storage device 600 to suppress fraudulent acts that increase the number of balls without going through a big hit. be able to.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game. As a result, during the probable change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the open state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. ing. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a winning lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. It may be performed by using a part of the device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball of the normal entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of assembly of the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made at 110 (see FIG. 17), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 (below the normal ball entry port 67), a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

Further, the first entry slot 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize, respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the second entrance 640 may be different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 is set to 5. May be good.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. It becomes easier to display the symbol of "○" on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the prize in the second entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state depending on whether the ball wins in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. be. However, as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit B) that makes it easy for the ball to enter the probability variation entry slot 654 during the special game state is the second entry slot 640. The case where the ball wins the ball is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first ball opening 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Therefore, the first entry ball without the electric accessory is provided. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and a lot of chances for a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port 67, and the second entry is made. Since it is easy to win a prize in the ball opening 640, a ball is launched toward the second entry port 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and a normal entry is made. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit B by passing the ball opening 67 to open the electric accessory and winning a prize in the second entry port 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a game depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is in the probable change, the normal symbol is in the time saving, or the normal state is in the normal state). It is possible to make a person change the way of firing a ball between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (lower left side of the second ball opening 640), and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery caused by winning a prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 14 times (14 rounds), for example. More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds in the special gaming state, the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (opening / closing solenoid) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided above the second variable winning device 650. .. The opening / closing plate covering the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by projecting toward the front side of the front view (see FIG. 14A). ). On the other hand, it became a big hit by lottery of special symbols, and in the 12th round, the opening and closing plate covering the second specific winning opening 650a slides to the back side of the front view and is buried in the back side of the game board 13, and the ball is the first. 2 An open state in which a ball can be entered into the variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14 (b)).

As described above, based on the fact that the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in the special gaming state (during the jackpot) enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650. , After the end of the big hit, it shifts to the probable state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special gaming state, or even if the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal entry opening 655. If you do, the game will shift to the normal symbol time saving state after the jackpot ends.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as the winning openings opened in the special gaming state. On the contrary, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. The storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of entry openings (general winning openings 601 and 602 and out openings 603a to 603c) inside the storage device 600, and allows the entered balls to flow down to any of the entry openings. be able to. Further, the storage device 600 can store (stop the flow) only one ball that has entered the inside of the storage device 600. Further, the storage device 600 is covered on the front side of the front view with a transparent cover body, and which entry port the ball that the player has flowed into (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. Is configured so that it can be easily confirmed. The details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured so that a ball can enter the inside of the storage device 600 via the guide flow path 605. The storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits the right side, one ball enters into approximately three of the launched balls. The ball that did not enter the induction flow path 605 flows down the upper left side of the storage device 600 in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, in the special gaming state, a part of the ball launched by the player toward the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600 via the guide flow path 605. It is configured in.

As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branch member 604 are provided downstream of the guide flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 606 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front. Most of the balls flowing down the induction flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 601a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, the number of three prize balls is paid out. In addition, on the left and right of this general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, balls that did not enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though they flowed down the induction flow path 606 are discharged. Out ports 603a and 603b for this purpose are provided. With these out ports, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the spheres from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and to reliably discharge the spheres that have flowed down the induction flow path 606. Further, these out ports 603a and 603b are provided with detection switches 603a and 603b1 (not shown), respectively, as in the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. With these detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, the number of ejected balls can be accurately determined.

Inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 607 through which a ball can flow down is provided on the right side of the front view. Most of the game balls flowing down the guidance flow path 607 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 602a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, more prize balls can be obtained when the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. can. Out ports 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right sides of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, respectively. These out ports prevent (suppress) the balls that did not enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and allow the balls flowing down the induction flow path 607. It can be reliably discharged. Further, the out port 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown), similarly to the out ports 603a and 603b. The detection switch 603c1 can accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ball is set to be in a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 when the special gaming state (big hit state) is reached. , In a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is set to a state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special gaming state, in addition to obtaining a large amount of prize balls by opening the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, the general winning opening (high value winning) in the storage device 600 is obtained. Mouth) It is configured so that a prize ball can be obtained by winning a prize in 602. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is relatively large. The ball is set in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few numbers. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, there is little merit of letting the ball enter the storage device 600, so even in a state other than the special gaming state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, a large amount of payout is to be received. It is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method. As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one ball enters the storage device 600 in approximately three balls hit to the right. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be performed, and the number of balls cannot be increased by paying out the ball to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to hit left.

The induction flow path 607 is provided with a storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a can block the guide flow path 607 by projecting toward the front side of the front view, and can prevent the sphere from flowing down to the guide flow path 607. That is, the ball can be stopped (stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a solenoid 610 for a storage device (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the solenoid 610 for the storage device, the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the front side of the front view (the state where the induction flow path 607 is blocked) and the storage valve 607a moves toward the back side of the front view. It is configured to be switchable to a buried state (a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 607). The ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the induction flow path 606 side by being surrounded by the inner wall of the induction flow path 607 and the branch member 604. .. That is, the protruding portion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set sufficiently high so that the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a does not flow out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing the operation of a ball that has entered the storage device 600 in a state where the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the front side, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation of the ball which entered the storage device 600 in the state of being buried in.

As shown in FIG. 9A, more than half of the lower end of the guide flow path 605 overlaps with the upper end of the guide flow path 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide flow path 606 is located on the left side of the central axis 605a of the guide flow path 605 and hardly overlaps with the lower end portion of the guide flow path 605. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the induction flow path 605 can easily proceed to the induction flow path 607.

The ball that has advanced to the induction flow path 607 is blocked from flowing down by the storage valve 607a and stops at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the ball is stored). Then, when the ball is stopped (the ball is stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a and another ball newly flows down the induction flow path 605, the ball newly flows down the induction flow path 605. The ball that has come in contact (interference) with the ball stored on the storage valve 607a. Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (flowing direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the induction flow path 605 changes.

Since the induction flow path 607 is provided slightly to the right of the induction flow path 605 (see FIG. 9A), the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a is newly provided in the induction flow path 605. In most cases, it is stopped on the right side of the ball flowing down. Therefore, the ball newly flowing down the induction flow path 605 collides with the left side of the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and thus repels the left side in the front view. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guidance flow path 605 advances to the guidance flow path 606 provided on the left side of the front view. As described above, most of the balls flowing down the induction flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of winning balls (three prize balls). That is, in a state where the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side of the front view and the ball cannot flow down the induction flow path 607 (a state in which the induction flow path 607 is closed), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 are general. Enter the winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.

On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried in the back side of the front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the ball from flowing into the induction flow path 607, so that the induction flow path 607 The ball that has progressed to the point flows down the induction flow path 607 as it is, and enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. As described above, the general winning slot (high value winning slot) 602 is a winning slot with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out (15), so there are many merits for the player to win a prize.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 607 when a big hit occurs (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, in the special game state, by hitting right to win a ball to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained and the ball is ejected by hitting right. A prize ball can be obtained by a part of the ball being awarded to the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 in the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as described above, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a and relatively paid out. It is set in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, there is little merit of letting the ball enter the storage device 600, so even in a state other than the special gaming state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, a large amount of payout is to be received. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the game method.

In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction flow path 607 enters the general winning opening 602. It is configured to do, but is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each induction flow path, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. May be good. As a result, even if the guide flow path 606 is flown down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize balls into the winning openings having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestedly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning openings. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the induction flow path 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the induction flow path 607. For example, the induction flow path is configured by using an electromagnet or the like. It may be configured to store the sphere in the middle of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and the electromagnet is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the induction flow path 607 can be attracted to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be configured to be stored side by side.

In the present embodiment, the out opening is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out opening, a winning opening for paying out the prize balls may be provided. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters each winning opening may be different. More specifically, for example, 6 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603c. May be provided with 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to more interestingly observe the case where the ball flows down the guide flow path 606 and the guide flow path 607 to which winning opening the ball enters. Further, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning openings for any ball to enter are more random. .. As a result, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be observed more interestingly until the ball enters one of the winning openings. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set an entrance where the ball can easily enter by the clerk in the hall. Therefore, the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, a route when the player ejects the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when hitting to the right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 10, the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 is provided with a normal ball entry port 67 above the flow path (path). As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, when the normal symbol is hit, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “◯” symbol indicating the hit of the normal symbol after the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed. Then, based on the fact that the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 provided downstream of the normal entry opening 67 is provided. It is released for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds x 1 time or 1 second x 2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, the ball hit to the right can easily enter the second entrance 640. As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter, and the opening period of the electric accessory becomes longer. 2 It becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entry port 640. Therefore, by performing a right-handed hit, it is possible to receive a special symbol lottery without reducing the number of balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Further, a first variable winning device 65 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 65. (See Fig. 11). That is, among the balls that have flowed down to the downstream of the path (flow path) on the right side due to the player's right-handed strike, the balls that have flowed down to the downstream without flowing into (entering) the storage device 600 are the first. 1 Flows down in the direction of the variable winning device 65. Further, the ball that flows down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65 and does not enter the first specific winning opening 65a flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650.

In this way, the ball can be made to flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 simply by the player hitting the right side. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a simply by hitting the right, and a large amount of balls can be entered. You can win a prize ball. Further, a part of the ball launched aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600. Then, as described above, in the special gaming state (big hit state), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), The player can win more prize balls during the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be openable toward the front of the front view. By opening the first specific winning opening 65a, the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the first specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a has 10 balls or until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds elapses) in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). It will be released (until you win a prize). Then, when a ball enters the first specific prize opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the second specific winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 can be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding toward the back side of the front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) in 12 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). Then, when a ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and has reached the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. First, FIG. 13A is a diagram when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 13A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it falls into the space on the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13A). Then, the ball that has fallen toward the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down the flow path provided below the first specific winning opening 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning opening 65a is inclined in the direction of the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball flows down in the direction of the second specific winning opening 650a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a open, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 1 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 13B, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball ejection port 65c, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning opening 65a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball ejection port 65c, all the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a enter the ball ejection port 65c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and reached the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. First, FIG. 14A is a diagram when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it flows down the upper part of the second specific winning opening 650a and falls to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). Then, the ball that has fallen to the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down to the out opening 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a open, as shown in FIG. 14B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 2 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball ejection port 650c, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning opening 650a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface portion 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined toward the ball ejection port 650c, all the balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a enter the ball ejection port 650c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the structure downstream of the ball discharge port 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball enters the ball. It is configured to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The probabilistic entry ball port 654 is provided in one of the two flow paths (induction flow path 652 and guidance flow path 653) provided downstream of the ball discharge port 650c (induction flow path 652). Has been done. Further, at the upper ends of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650d for setting a flow path through which the ball flows down is provided. This flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the sphere cannot proceed, and open the other flow path so that the sphere can proceed. Has been done. The flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated around the switching shaft 650e as a rotation shaft by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17), and in the 12th round of the jackpot, depending on the elapsed time. The arrangement can be switched.

15 (a) and 15 (b) are views showing the operation of the sphere for each arrangement of the flow path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the induction flow path 652 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c cannot proceed to the induction flow path 652 because it is blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the induction flow path 653 (see FIG. 15 (a)). A ball entry port 655 is usually provided downstream of the induction flow path 653. That is, during the arrangement shown in FIG. 15 (a), the ball cannot enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. In this embodiment, the flow path switching valve 650d is configured to have the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A by turning off the flow path solenoid 611.

On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611. In the case of the arrangement in which the induction flow path 653 is closed, the ball entering the ball discharge port 650c can proceed to the induction flow path 652 without being blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the ball advances to the induction flow path 653 and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided downstream thereof.

When the ball enters the probability change entrance 654, it is set to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the twelfth round in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is completed, a suggestion effect for suggesting the gaming state after the end of the big hit to the player is executed in the subsequent rounds. That is, if the ball enters the probabilistic ball opening 654 in the 12th round, the display effect suggesting that the special symbol shifts to the probabilistic state in the 13th to 15th rounds is the third symbol display device 81. Is executed in. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the probabilistic entry slot 654 in the 12th round, the display effect suggesting that the normal symbol shifts to the time saving state in the 13th to 15th rounds is the third symbol display device 81. Is executed in. In this way, by setting the round in which the large 2 specific winning opening 650a is opened as the 12th round, a sufficient period for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the gaming state after the end of the big hit is secured in the remaining rounds of the big hit. be able to.

As described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream from the entrance of the storage device 600, so that the ball is connected to the storage device 600. The easier it is for the ball to flow in, the harder it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B. On the contrary, the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the easier it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which the ball can flow into the storage device 600, the rate of ball entry into the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 can be changed. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of inflow to the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, the more the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to be closer to each other, the more difficult it is for the ball to pass between these two nails, and the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. .. Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the probability change ball opening 654, so that it is possible to easily shift to the probability change state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the more the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to be separated from each other, the easier it is for the ball to pass between these two nails, and the easier it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. .. Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B, the ball easily flows into the probabilistic entry ball opening 654, so that it is difficult to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance of the storage device 600, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 (ratio of the probable change state of the special symbol) can be changed, so that the pachinko machine can be changed according to the business policy of each hall. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is different between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. As a result, the jackpot B is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the probability variation entry slot 654 in the special gaming state (big hit state) than the jackpot A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change between the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the twelfth round of the jackpot A. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 16A shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 16A. The lower figure is a diagram showing the timing change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction flow path 652 on the downstream left side of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the guidance flow path 653 on the right side is open). be.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time is set. After (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the open state is set based on the elapse of 7 seconds. This open state continues until the end of the 12th round. Specifically, 10 balls enter the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening opening) 650a, or the open state is set until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round. Will be done. Then, when the 12th round is completed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side thereof is closed and the ball can flow down the guidance flow path 652 on the left side (FIG. 15). See (b)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round, and the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the reverse direction based on the elapse of 6.5 seconds. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the flow path can be switched before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 becomes a big hit next, and continues until the end of the 11th round. Then, based on the end of the 11th round and the interval period of 3 seconds, the induction flow path 652 is set to a state in which the ball can flow down (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, during most of the period during which the player is playing the game, the ball can pass through the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The sphere can pass through the induction flow path 652 only for a limited period from the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of the 12th round to 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Only the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of causing the ball to enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a other than the 12th round in the special gaming state is performed, the ball enters the probabilistic entry opening 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal acquisition of the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

The timing for switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to switch to the open state of the induction flow path 652 at the start of the 12th round, or in the middle of the interval period set after the end of the 11th round (for example, after the interval starts). It may be configured to switch (after 0.5 seconds have passed). As a result, the period during which the induction flow path 652 is opened can be limited to a shorter period, so that the ball is illegally entered into the second variable winning device 650 while the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Even if it is allowed to do so, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. That is, fraudulent activity can be prevented.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the period during which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open and the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a are open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set so that the period is almost non-overlapping (overlapping only for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12 rounds). Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

The reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that it is a big hit A immediately after the start of the 12th round. Is. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b), but in the jackpot B where it is easy to enter the ball into the probability variation entry opening 654, the second specific winning opening (the second large opening opening) immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is released. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round between the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the jackpot B this time will be the jackpot B. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, the time change between the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the twelfth round of the jackpot B will be described. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 16 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 16 (b). The lower figure is a diagram showing the timing change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction flow path 652 on the downstream left side of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the guidance flow path 653 on the right side is open). be.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set to the open state. Then, the open state is maintained until 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a before 5 seconds have elapsed, the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a will still be used. It will be closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, as described above, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow path switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as the jackpot A. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the 11th round, the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d is closed so that the ball can flow down the guidance flow path 652 on the left side. (See FIG. 15 (b)). Then, when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the 12th round, the flow path switching valve 650d is switched in the opposite direction. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the period during which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open and the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a are open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set so that the period overlaps with the period for a maximum of 5 seconds. Therefore, in many cases where the jackpot B is reached, the ball can be entered into the probability change ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that the ball is set to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It will be easier.

The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this, and the pattern is such that the ball can easily enter the probability changing ball opening 654 and the probability changing ball opening 654. If it is possible to set a pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, it may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 at the start of the 12th round (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6. After 5 seconds) has elapsed, the flow path switching valve 650d may be set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds, for example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 654, so that it is possible to make it easier for the special symbol to be in the probability-changing state after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the motivation of the player for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the out openings 603a to 603c are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out openings 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. Run.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, but the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is any determination value specified in the first random number table 202a. If it matches with, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot A, most of the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured so that the flow path 653 is open (see FIG. 16A). Therefore, it becomes difficult to allow the ball to flow down to the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d, so that the ball is moved to the probabilistic entry ball port 654 provided downstream of the guidance flow path 652. It becomes difficult to enter the ball. That is, when the jackpot A is reached, it becomes difficult to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot B, the induction provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d for the entire period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round. It is configured so as to overlap with the period during which the flow path 652 is open (see FIG. 16 (b)). Therefore, the flow path switching valve 650d can be obtained simply by allowing the ball to enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open. The ball can flow down to the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the. Then, as described above, a probabilistic entry ball port 654 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 652. Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached, it becomes easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 99", the jackpot B is associated and defined. That is, the number of determination values that become the jackpot B is larger when the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 than in the case where the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1. Therefore, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is more likely to be a big hit B.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, the probable change state of the special symbol that is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be the big hit B when the big hit is made, and the probable change of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in a state, is likely to be repeated, it becomes easy for the player to obtain a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, "5 to 28" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and a second ball entry corresponding to a prize in the first ball opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four hold areas (holds 1st to 4th areas). A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a prize in the mouth 640 is provided, and each of these areas has a timing for entering the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. In addition, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation state of the special symbol, which of "0 to 9" is the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is discriminated and any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", the judgment value of the big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". The probability of becoming 1/40 (10/400). Further, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200", and if it is "200", it is determined to be a big hit. Of the 400 possible values of the random number counter C1 per first, there is only one judgment value of "200" that is a big hit, so the special symbol is placed in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In the present embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that is the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, and when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is "big hit A". Further, the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a big hit, and when the random number value is any of "50 to 99", the big hit type is "big hit B". Further, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and when the random number value is any of "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is "big hit A". Further, the lottery of the special symbol 2 results in a big hit, and when the random number value is any of "20 to 99", the big hit type is "big hit B".

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the number of jackpots is not limited to one, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Further, it is configured so that the same jackpot type is selected with the same value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case where the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the case where the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2. You may. With such a configuration, the amount of data in the first type selection table 202b can be reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time loss, long-time loss, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d storing the random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. ing.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. , Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for big hits. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. , Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for the low probability time of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C), and the hit of the normal symbol from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high-probability times (the period in which the normal symbol is in the time-shortened state and the period in which the special symbol is in the probable change state) (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)), and each of them is included in each of them. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of winning between the low probability of the normal symbol (normal state of the normal symbol) and the high probability of the normal symbol (time saving state of the normal symbol). Is changed.

As shown in FIG. 18 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (202c1 in FIG. 18 (c). reference). As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol (during the time reduction of a normal symbol and during the probability change of a special symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". .. These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Here, the details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability change valid flag 203o It has a probability variation effective timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time reduction / medium counter 203r, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on the winning of 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second ball opening 640 are stored for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , Other configurations are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 202b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift processing is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). 3 This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held by the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls is stored by winning a prize in the second entrance 640. Since it is only different, the detailed explanation will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

If the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S703: No).

The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability change state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the probability variation flag 203g becomes a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set. In the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power failure occurs. If so, it is configured to back up the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has entered the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 during the special gaming state (big hit state). .. When the game ball enters the probability variation entry port 654, the entry is detected by a probability variation switch (not shown), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 202h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power is turned off, and when it is determined that the probability change switch has been passed, the probability change setting flag 203h is determined. May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power supply is cut off by whether or not the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to be turned on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch in one round (in the present embodiment, the twelfth round of the jackpot) during the jackpot state. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability change pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability change switch (S1411 in FIG. 38). Further, after executing the process of whether or not the number of game balls flowing into the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). The value of the probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second specific winning opening) of the second variable winning device 650 in each round in the jackpot game. Large opening) A counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the 650a. Specifically, based on the detection of ball entry by the winning sensors (not shown) provided in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, the balls are added and updated one by one. (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (value of the winning number counter 203j). ) And the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the discharge number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are determined, and then the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to 0.

As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is opened, so that the winning number counter 203j is substantially in each of the above rounds. Therefore, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the 12th round, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened, so that in the 12th round, the winning number counter 203j is substantially the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening). The number of balls that have entered the large opening) 650a will be counted.

In the present embodiment, a prize is won when it is detected that a ball has entered either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. Although it is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j, it is entered at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, respectively. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of balls that have been hit.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the elapsed time since the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). .. That is, the elapsed time from the time when the flow path solenoid 611 is set to ON and the ball is set to the state where the ball can enter the probability variation entry port 654 is timed (counted) by the operation counter 203k. In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path switching valve 650d rotates clockwise with the switching shaft 650e as the rotation axis by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611 based on the completion of 11 rounds of the jackpot. The induction flow path 652 is opened.

In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period during which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, a counter value corresponding to a total of 9.5 seconds, that is, an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The value of this operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power supply is cut off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to the initial value of 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open in one round. Indicates that it has been set to a closed state. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for ejecting the game ball flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203n is set when the preset 1 round is completed and the 1st specific winning opening (1st large opening) 65a is closed (1st to 11th rounds, 13th to 15th rounds), or the second. When the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds), it is necessary for the game ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged. It is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, since the time required for the game ball winning in the first variable winning device 81 to be ejected is 2 seconds, it corresponds to 3 seconds (2 seconds + 1 second) including a 1 second margin. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated and the value reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds) or the second variable winning device 650 It is determined whether or not the number of winnings in (12 rounds) and the number of dischargings match (S1507 in FIG. 39). Then, if it is determined that the number of winnings and the number of dischargings do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that ball clogging has occurred inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of the jackpot to allow the ball to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. Cheating can be suppressed.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if the flag is on, the probability change setting even if the ball enters the probability change entry ball opening 654. The configuration may be such that the flag 203h is not set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

Further, in the present embodiment, either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. When it was detected, the counter value was started to be updated by the remaining ball timer 203n, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

The probabilistic valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the probabilistic entry is valid when the game ball enters the probabilistic entry port 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. Is. When the probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON, the ball flowing into the induction flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B) based on the flow path solenoid 611 being ON is a probability change entry ball. It shows that it is less than the time required to enter the mouth 654. That is, it is shown that the ball entering the probable change ball opening 654 is a normal operation.

The probabilistic valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203o is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for the ball to normally enter the probability change entry port 654. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball flowing into the induction flow path 652 to enter the probability variation entry port 654 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds including a margin of 0.2 seconds. If the ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 after this 1.2 seconds have elapsed, there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, so the probability variation setting flag 203h is controlled so as not to be updated. ..

As a result, in a state where the flow path switching valve 650d closes the induction flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the probability change entry port 654), the ball can be entered into the probability change entry port 654 or the probability change entry ball can be entered. Damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from the downstream of the mouth 654 to pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 654, or misleading the ball to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 by radio waves or the like. Can be suppressed.

The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball ejection port switch (not shown) for detecting the ejection of a ball. The discharge number counter 203q is incremented by 1 each time a ball discharge is detected by the ball discharge port switch (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the value of the ejected number counter 203q is the initial value. Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. At this time reduction / medium counter 203r, 100 is set when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of the normal symbol 100 times is given.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete deviation, reach deviation, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

Further, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , A probability change state flag 223f, a time saving state counter 223g, a jackpot medium flag 223h, and an allowable time counter 223i are provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is displayed. Is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 hold ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it is different only in that it is done, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The probability change state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223f is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). According to the state of the probability change state flag 223f, it is determined whether or not the present is the probability change state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the probable change state of the special symbol, and the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)). Is determined whether or not to display.

The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the normal symbol. When the time saving state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. The time saving state counter 223g is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current time saving state is the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)). Is determined whether or not to display.

The jackpot middle flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state). If this jackpot middle flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special gaming state (big hit state), and if it is off, it indicates a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (probability change state of special symbol, normal). Indicates that the symbol is in either the time-saving state or the normal state). This jackpot middle flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off when an ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to off when the special game state (big hit state) ends. Corresponding effects are set according to the state of the jackpot middle flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6 (a)) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7 (a)). Refer to) to determine whether to display.

In the permissible time counter 223i, the ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 606 or the induction flow path 607 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 607a goes to either entry port (general winning opening 601 or general winning opening 602). It is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters (ball throwing time). By counting the ball brushing period, when a ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is more accurately determined whether or not the entry is a normal operation. be able to. The permissible time counter 233i is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Further, each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

As described above, with the storage valve 607a closed, a ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or with the storage valve 607a open, the ball enters the general winning opening 601. When the ball enters, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the induction flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. May be done. Similarly, if a ball flows into the induction flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. It may be a ball. In order to treat these as normal ball entry (not to display the warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, the allowable time counter 233i is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed). It is configured as follows.

The winning number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a big hit. The value of the winning count counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is 1 each time a winning information command corresponding to a ball entering the general winning slot (high value winning slot) 602 is received at the jackpot. They are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See Fig. 6 (a)). The winning number counter 223j is referred to in order to accurately update the number of winnings displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the variable image when the power of the "○" symbol is turned on at the lower right position facing the screen and the variable image when the power is turned on of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, the player started the game while the main image at the time of turning on the power was displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 or the second entry port 640 was detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 as displayed in. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. It has at least 223i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be opened. It is a production, and the round production is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 23).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, in the example of FIG. 23). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 48) (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 50B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50 (b) see S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 24) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 50 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 24) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 50 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 39. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through due to the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is executed. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. The jackpot game is included in the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process is shifted to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A or a big hit B.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. If it is a big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set (S217) based on the jackpot type, and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening (first opening opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). In the 12th round, it is shown that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the jackpot type. When the processing of S218 is completed, the notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out of order (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0). If it is determined (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S221), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol change start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302), and if it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the value for high probability time are used. Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. It may be a different random value. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values to be big hits, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are big hits may be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "200" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit). It is determined what kind of jackpot is among A and jackpot B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

The fluctuation patterns specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement normal reach" as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. Various types of "outside super reach" and various types of "outside special reach" are stipulated. In addition, various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and various "special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot B. It is stipulated, and various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 34). Will be sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. , It is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process of the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set. , RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The only difference between the processes S407 to S412 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball opening 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when each process of S407 to S412 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S413), and this process is terminated.

Next, the look-ahead process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

In this look-ahead process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 (S501), and any of the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. If there is no new prize (S501: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the probabilistic state of the special symbol. If the determination is made (S502) and the special symbol is in a probabilistic state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process is shifted to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for the low probability time (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Move to. In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the determination results of the jackpot, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, if it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the current time is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is inside (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. The jackpot game is included in the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state). That is, if it is easy to hit a normal symbol, it becomes easy for a ball hit to the right to enter the second special winning opening 640, so that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is reached. It becomes difficult for the ball to reach. Therefore, during the special game state (during the big hit state), the hit probability of the normal symbol is prevented from increasing, and the ball is easily reached to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. There is.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the second random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for the probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is currently underway. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, when the ball hits the normal symbol, as in the low probability state of the normal symbol, The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is used in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S911) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process is shifted to S914.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S914, a command (status command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, the number of times of the normal symbol time reduction, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the time reduction counter 203r and the state of the probability change flag 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the recognition of the gaming state can be matched between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed even though the special symbol is in the low probability state, or conversely, the player is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) from being displayed when the player strikes right-handed. That is, it is possible to match the gaming state with the effect to be executed.

When the processing of S914 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S915). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first Jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The process is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened according to the opening scenario set by the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state. And set the closure. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, the first symbol display device 37 The executed variation display is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27). Display (light up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 30), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 30). Lit display).

Next, based on the stored prize detection information, the prize information command setting process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the prize information is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set by the winning information command setting process (S1008), the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 607a. It is also determined whether or not the player is playing an irregular game (left-handed during the jackpot state, left-handed in the probable change state of the special symbol, etc.).

When the processing of S1008 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102).

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

When the processing of S1102 is completed, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and this processing is completed. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the balls that have entered the storage device 600 can flow down the induction flow path 607, so that the general entry port with a large number of prize balls to be paid out (15). It becomes possible to put a ball into 602 (see FIG. 9 (b)).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600, a first variable winning device 65, and a second variable winning device 650 in a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, during the special game state, in order to win the prize ball, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is launched. A part of the ball enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special gaming state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific prize opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, the general prize provided in the storage device 600 is provided. It is possible to have the player acquire a prize ball based on the entry into the mouth (high value prize opening) 602. Therefore, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the start to the end of the big hit can be increased, the player can be made to play the game more looking forward to becoming a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probabilistic state of a special symbol or a time-saving state of a normal symbol is given after the end of the big hit. As described above, in these states, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, so that the player tries to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by hitting right. (Trying to receive a lottery for special symbol 2). This allows the ball to flow into the storage device 600 in many cases before the next jackpot begins. Then, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state, so that the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, when the next big hit is made and the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. That is, the player can acquire a large amount (15) of prize balls immediately after the big hit is started. Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot is won but the ball possession is exhausted, it is possible to secure the possession ball for the jackpot game without newly requesting the rental of the ball.

If the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. The jackpot game is included in the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1104 that the special symbol is being hit (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation for setting the operation of the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, etc. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the 12th round of the jackpot is newly started (S1201), and it is not the 12th round (that is, the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds). If it is determined (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process is shifted to S1206.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). As a result, in the case of the jackpot A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16A is executed, and in the case of the jackpot B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16B is controlled to be executed. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, the induction flow path 652 is set to be closed 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a read by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205), and the processing is shifted to S1206.

In the process of S1206 executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 is completed, a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1206), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such troubles can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611? Discrimination (S1107). When it is determined that the operation timing is in the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the end of the final round of the big hit, the 15th round, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the inside of the is elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined by the process of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1109), and this process is terminated.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1301 is completed, the storage valve 607a, which was set to the open state at the start of the jackpot, is then set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. As a result, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), even if the ball flows into the storage device 600, it is blocked by the storage valve 607a and becomes a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. You will not be able to let the ball flow down. That is, since the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls, the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), by always aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls to be thrown only by paying out the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is fundamental. It is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a big hit by drawing a lottery of a special symbol in a state other than the special game state (big hit state).

As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one ball enters the storage device 600 out of approximately three balls hit to the right. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be performed, and the number of balls cannot be increased by paying out based on the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play the game with the aim of winning a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a part of the ball hit to the right enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. In the time saving state of (that is, in the state where the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 provided in the path on the right side of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further improved by hitting right. Can be made to. Therefore, even though the special symbol is in a probable state and the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, and the player is in an advantageous state, the number of balls held is steadily decreasing, which is an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming unable to feel it. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls held in the probable change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The number of prize balls for entering the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be reduced (for example, one prize ball may be used). As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress that the number of payouts becomes too large and the number of balls held increases too much in the probable change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640), the merit of right-handed hitting can be further reduced.

When the processing of S1302 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1303), and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, the ball goes to the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. Since it means that the ball has entered, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). As a result, after the end of the big hit, it shifts to the probable change state of the special symbol. After the processing of S1304, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to off (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probability change state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off in the processing of S1303 (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. In order to set the time saving period of 100 ordinary symbols after the end of the big hit, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203r (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and this process is terminated. The state command set in the process of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By receiving the state command by the voice lamp control device 113, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on at the end of the jackpot game, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. That is, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is turned on can be matched regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the probability variation entry port 654. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the ball can be entered into the probability change ball opening 654 during the special game state (big hit state), the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the big hit, so that during the special game state (big hit state). It is possible to be interested in whether or not the ball enters the probabilistic entry port 654 (during the state).

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the ball is entered (winning) in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, or the probability change. A winning process for monitoring the entry (winning) of a ball into the entry port 654 is executed (S1111). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1111).

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the round game is set for a set period (round valid period) (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not the period is from the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball is within the valid period of the round (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1401: Yes). S1402). In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). , The process shifts to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined that no ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 is skipped and the processing is performed to S1404. And migrate.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the winning opening set to the open state of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process shifts to S1408. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it is determined that the ball brushing time for discharging the ball remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in progress. can.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1404 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time which is the period until each round of the jackpot ends (30 in the present embodiment). Seconds) have elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the processing of S1405 (S1405: Yes), the processing is shifted to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process is shifted to S1408.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408), and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the probability change entry port 654 (whether or not the ball has passed a probability change switch (not shown)) (S1410). ). When it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203i to update (S1411), and the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). The process shifts to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the probability change switch (S1410: No), each process of S1411, and S1412 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1413.

In the process of S1413 executed after the process of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413), and if it is determined not to be 0 (S1413: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the induction flow path 652 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid 611 to off (S1414), and the probability change is effective. The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and this process ends. By setting the probability change effective flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow path switching valve 650d is switched and the induction flow path 652 is closed, the sphere remaining in the induction flow path 652 is the probability change switch. When passing through, the probability variation setting flag 203h can be controlled to be set on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 in the process of S1408 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the probability change valid flag 203o is not on (that is, it is off) (S1416: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probabilistic valid flag 203o is on (S1416: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2s in this embodiment) (S1418), and if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation is valid. The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). As a result, even if the passage of the probability change switch is detected, the value of the probability change setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. As described above, when the passage of the probability change switch is detected after the value of the probability change effective timer 203p becomes the upper limit value, it is highly possible that the detection is due to some kind of fraudulent activity. Therefore, by turning off the probability change valid flag 203o, the update of the probability change setting flag 203h is prohibited, and fraudulent acts are suppressed.

When the process of S1419 is completed, the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is reset to 0 (S1420), which is the initial value, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value (less than the upper limit value) (S1418: No), the process shifts to the above-mentioned S1410.

As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch, so that the probability change state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the sphere brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time during which the passage of the probability change switch is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the probability change switch and being given a probability change state of a special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1111) is executed, an abnormality process for detecting an abnormality generated during the special gaming state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1501), and if it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1501: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. Determined (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball ejection number counter 203s is updated by 1 (S1503), and the process shifts to S1504. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process shifts to S1504.

In the processing of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball brushing period is in progress, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that measures the ball brushing period. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, whether 3 seconds have passed since the closure of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a was set). If it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1505 that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of balls discharged (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharged counters 203q) is determined. , It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

If it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of ejected balls and the number of winnings match (S1507: Yes), the process is shifted to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls ejected and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process shifts to S1509. The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an error signal output is set for the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the ball through the probability change switch.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to the initial value 0 (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1511), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. As described above, the winning information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the passing status of the ball to the various winning openings (entry openings).

In this prize information command setting process, first, the prize detection information saved in the switch read process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether or not new winning detection information exists (whether there is a new winning ball for any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603), it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1602 that new prize detection information exists (S1602: Yes), the winning slot (winning slot) that detects the winning ball (winning) according to the new winning detection information. A winning information command including the information of (S1603) is set. The winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each winning opening, an out opening, or the like is associated with each bit of the 2 bytes. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (entry opening) that detects the entry (winning) of the ball is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning opening (entry opening) in which the ball has not entered is set to 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the process of S1603 is completed, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and the present process is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a problem in the intellectual storage device 600, whether or not the player is playing an irregular game, and the like, in response to the winning information command. Then, when a defect or the like has occurred, a display error command according to the type of the defect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display error command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 notifies the error.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1816 (see FIG. 42) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1816. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1816 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1702: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1816 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the data shifts to S1708.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1816. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is executed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1816 is executed, the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S1711) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1708 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1708 via the processing of S1704 to S1706 is started. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Next, the probability change state flag 223f and the probability change state counter 223g are updated (S1711) according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110, interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the process proceeds to the main process. Transition. By updating the probability change state flag 223f and the probability change state counter 223g based on the state command, it is possible to match the game state recognized by the main control device 110 with the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that when the processing of S1708 is reached via the processing of S1704 to S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1801 this time was executed (S1801), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1802 to S1810, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1811 and the variable display setting process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1809, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal display effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1811). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, the variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off process is executed (S1816). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1817), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to the process of S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1814: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1901: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control unit 110 (S1904). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times of the variation display in the special symbol N1), or the special symbol 2 hold ball of the main control device 110. The value of the number counter 203e (the number of holdings N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the process of S1908, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1908 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning prize is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start prize or drawing a special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S1908 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1909). Then, when the state command is received (S1909: Yes), the probability change state flag 203f and the time saving state counter 203g are updated according to the game state notified by the state command (S1910), and this processing is terminated. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1911). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball was a normal ball based on the winning information command, and if there is a possibility of a defect or fraud, an error is notified. The error notification process for the operation is executed (S1912), and this process is terminated.

on the other hand. In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1913), and if the opening command has been received (S1913). S1913: Yes), the jackpot medium flag 223h is set to ON, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, the display opening command is set (S1915), and this process is terminated. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot.

In the process of S1913, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1916). When it is determined that the ending command has been received by the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second corresponds to the value of the allowable time counter 223i. Is set (S1917), the display ending command is set (S1918), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1916, if the ending command is not received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1919). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, the details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of a defect or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this error notification process (S1912).

In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is on (S1931), and if it is on (S1931: Yes), among the winning information notified by the received winning information command. It is determined whether or not the winning information for the first ball opening 64 is included in (S1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information for the first entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player makes a left-handed strike despite the big hit, and as a result, the first entrance 64 It means that the ball has entered the ball. That is, the player is performing a game method (striking method) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a in spite of the special gaming state (big hit state). It means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order for the player to acquire the prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state), a display error command corresponding to the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933) and processed. To S1934.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. By receiving this display rear image change command, the display control device 114 displays a left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) on the third symbol display device 81. The left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) can be used to encourage a player who is left-handed in a special gaming state (big hit state) to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money and to obtain the prize ball more reliably.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1932, if it is determined that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the entry to the first entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is performed. To S1934.

In the processing of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934), and if the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot. If there is, a hit notification process for notifying is executed (S1935), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1934: No), the ball bonito period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is set. Since it means that the process has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, when a ball that has flowed (advanced) into the induction flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the ball bleeding period, a problem occurs. It is prevented that it is judged.

On the other hand, in the process of S1931, when it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 223h is not on (off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the permissible time counter 233i is 0 (S1936). If it is determined to be 0 (S1936: Yes), it is notified when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during normal time (either the probability variation state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol, or the normal state). The normal time notification process for performing the above is executed (S1937), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is thrown after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the jackpot. Since it means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the process of S1937 is skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, when a ball that has flowed (advanced) into the induction flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 during the ball bleeding period, a problem occurs. It is prevented that it is judged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit-time notification process (S1935) for notifying when a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this hit-time notification process (S1935).

In the hit notification process (S1935), first, the winning information command determined to have been received in the processing of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) is used to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the jackpot where the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the induction flow path 606. That is, it is possible that the storage valve 607a cannot be opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a or the like, and the ball is continuously stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and as a result, the ball is guided to the induction flow path 606. There is sex. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

The ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 606 may also enter the out port 603a arranged on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, but the ball may enter the out port 603a. The corresponding winning information is not a target for determining whether or not a defect has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because, of the balls that have flowed into the induction flow path 606, the proportion of the balls that flow down to the out port 603a is small, and most of them enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and are a big hit. Since a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred by monitoring the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Further, by discriminating only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out opening 603a. , The processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

If it is determined in the processing of S1941 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command is general. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is performed. If the information is included (S1943: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning count counter 223j (S1944). Then, in order to update the image in the jackpot according to the value of the winning number counter 233j after the update, a display rear image change command is set (S1945).

The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. By receiving this display rear image change command, the display control device 114 updates the display content of the winning number display area MA in the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, it is updated after the image in which the number of balls entered (the number of EXTRA BONUS) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 shown in FIG. 6B is additionally displayed for a certain period of time is displayed. The image shown in FIG. 6A corresponding to the number of subsequent ball entries is displayed. By displaying the number of winnings for the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot to the winning number display area MA, the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot can be achieved. Separately, the player can be made to recognize the number of times the prize ball has been won. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the number of times the ball will be entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included. However, even when the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out port 603a, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a defect has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, for notifying when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during the normal time (either the probable change state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol, or the normal state). The normal time notification process will be described. In this normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined that it is not on (S1951), the present is not the probability change state of the special symbol (S1951). Since it means that it is in a low probability state of a special symbol), it is nextly determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it is determined that the present is neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol (normal state). means.

In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player is hitting right and whether or not there is a problem in the operation of the storage valve 607a, first, the received prize information command is added to the general prize opening (high value). (Winning opening) It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Means that it is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the reservoir valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or the player illegally causes the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

The balls flowing into the induction flow path 607 with the storage valve 607a left open due to a malfunction are the out ports 603b arranged on the left and right of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. , 603c may also be entered, but the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out ports 603b and 603c is not a target for determining whether or not a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because a small proportion of the balls that have flowed into the induction flow path 607 flow down to the out ports 603b and 603c, and most of them enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. This is because if the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is monitored, it can be sufficiently determined whether or not a problem has occurred. Further, by discriminating only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out openings 603b and 603c. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in the processing of S1953, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning opening is performed. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the mouth (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955), and if it is determined that the winning information is not included, this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955: Yes), the normal time (probability change state of the special symbol, It means that the player is hitting right in spite of either the time saving state of the normal symbol or the normal state). That is, it means that the player is playing the game by a game method in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and there is little chance of receiving a lottery for a special symbol. Therefore, in this case, the game is played by displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) that urges the player to play the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by left-handed. It is possible to prevent a person from losing money and receive a lottery for the special symbol 1.

When it is determined in the processing of S1951 that the probability change state flag 223f is on (S1951: Yes), or when it is determined in the processing of S1952 that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952: Yes). It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1957). Then, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1957 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Nevertheless, it means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream side of the storage valve 607a. That is, it is possible that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or the player illegally enters the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 while the storage valve 607a is closed. expensive. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included. However, even when the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out ports 603b and 603c, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a defect has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variation display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1812). This variation display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2006 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the variation pattern is processed in S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2006). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2006: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, and therefore S2007 to S2013. Each process up to is skipped, and the process is transferred to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a stop type (S2008). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

When the processing of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S2010: No), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2010: No). No), the process shifts to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time saving state counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after subtraction is 0 (S2012), and if it is determined to be 0 (S2012), the time saving state of the normal symbol is changed to the normal state (low) of the normal symbol. Since it means that the state has been switched to the stochastic state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process is shifted to S2014.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, so that the back surface corresponding to the time saving state of the normal symbol No need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped and the process is transferred to S2014.

The rear image displayed in the time saving state is specifically a rear image in which a right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big hit is completed, the right-handed navigation is displayed regardless of the big hit type. Then, when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends, it is switched to the rear image for the normal state in which the right-handed navigation is not displayed. If the special symbol becomes a probable change state after the end of the big hit, the probable change state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit, so there is no change from the back type where the right-handed navigation is displayed.

In the processing of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the permissible time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2014), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the permissible time counter 223i is set to 1. Subtract and update (S2015), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and the present process is terminated. By the processing of S2014 and S2015, the value of the permissible time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

In the present embodiment, the back type set for the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol is common, but different back types may be displayed. This makes it possible to realize a wide variety of productions. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the remaining time saving period according to the value of the time saving state counter 203g. As a result, the player can easily recognize the remaining time saving period.

In the present embodiment, the permissible time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be updated in a process (sound editing / output process, liquid crystal display effect execution management process, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 42). As a result, the allowable time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 48, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2201.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2202, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2202, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2101 in FIG. 48) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2201. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S2202, the process of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S2201 to S2205 may be executed without performing the process of S2201 and S2202. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 48. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2103, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2104). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2104, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 59 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)), a simple command determination process (FIG. 50 (b) S2408) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2105, the interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing this V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. The command determination process (S2402) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55.

In the display setting process (S2403), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), which are determined in the task process (S2404), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the missed, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed to shift to the process of S2404.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2503).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505), the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2601).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2601 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2603, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2606), the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2605, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2602e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2604, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2701), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S2702).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2703), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2703, and the identification thereof is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2701, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S2702.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2506, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S2508: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2803). S2804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2805), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2802. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the reading speed is slow, so that the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. After receiving the display round number command, if the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, there is a lot of waiting from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that the player would feel uncomfortable and anxious about whether the operation had stopped due to the time required.

Further, the display ending command instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 15 rounds). If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , The transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and the round effect is all (15 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81. ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2508, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2510: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2510, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2512: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3003). S3004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3006), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2512, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S3101). .. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the rear image corresponding to other rear image types is turned on. The determination flag is set to off (S3102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3102 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2514, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2516), and there is an error command. If (S2516: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3202). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S2902. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2516 (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2518), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), The processing of S2502 to S2518 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2518 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 52 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 52 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2601. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3302), S3303 to S3304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 56. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3305.

In S3305, the pointer update process is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3503), and if it is a demo display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer is used. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), this process is completed, and the display is performed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3506). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 56 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is on (S3309: Yes), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315. , The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3316, if the demo display flag is on (S3316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the details of the transfer setting process (S2405) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 59 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3702). In the process of S3702, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S3702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3703. Further, as a result of the processing of S3701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3703.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Further, in the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

In the process of S3806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3807. Further, as a result of the processing of S3805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3807.

In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3810), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image indicated by the rear image discrimination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). The start address is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The discrimination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S3813, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3813 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2404) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3901). That is, in the processing of S3901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S3902 (S3903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) as winning openings opened in the special gaming state (big hit state). ) Is provided so that either winning opening is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Both of these two types of winning openings are configured as winning openings in which a large amount (15 pieces) of winning balls are paid out when the balls enter. Further, the two types of winning openings (the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a) are both provided in the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. As a result, the ball can be entered even if any of the winning openings is opened by simply launching the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (striking to the right) during the special gaming state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls paid out in the special game state (big hit state) can be made less likely to be affected by the skill of the player, so that even a beginner can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the routes (flow paths) provided on the right side of the game board 13, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) are used. A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning openings is arranged on the upstream side. The storage device 600 is configured so that when a player makes a right-handed hit, a part of the launched ball can flow into the inside of the storage device 600, and the flowed ball is moved to a different winning opening. A plurality of flow paths are provided for flowing down. Specifically, the number of prize balls is compared with the guide flow path 606 for flowing the balls down to the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of prize balls (three prize balls). A guide flow path 607 for allowing the ball to flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of prize balls (15 prize balls), is provided. Since the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be different depending on the type of the guiding flow path to flow down, the flow path in which the ball flows down to the player when the ball flows into the storage device 600. The type can be observed with interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, a storage capable of closing the guide flow path 607 for flowing the balls down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls (15 prize balls). A valve 607a is provided in the induction flow path 607. The storage valve 607a is set to the open state during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state), and is set to the closed state during the other gaming states. Further, the game balls that have flowed into the storage device 600 are basically arranged so that the game balls flow into the guide flow path 607 more easily than the guide flow path 606 (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9). b) See). Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, the prize ball is provided downstream of the induction flow path 607. A prize ball can be obtained by inserting a ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. A storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the player simply hits right to make the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the second specific winning opening 650a. This is because the ball can be inserted into any of the storage devices 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the prize is won, and if the lottery result is a winning lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened and the specific winning opening is reached. Some give a large amount of prize balls based on the entry of balls (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177). In this conventional gaming machine, a plurality of winning openings are provided in addition to the specific winning openings, and by adjoining the specific winning openings and other winning openings, a specific winning opening can be created. Some of the balls that are aimed and launched are configured so that they can enter both a specific winning opening and other winning openings. Here, since it is common to control to close a specific winning opening with a specific number of balls entering a specific winning opening as an opportunity, the number of winning balls for a specific winning opening. The more the ball enters another winning opening before the number reaches a specific number, the more prize balls the player can obtain. Therefore, by adjoining a specific winning opening and another winning opening, the number of prize balls in a hit can be increased, so that the player's expectation for a hit can be further improved.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there are cases where an irregular gaming method is used in which a winning ball is obtained by launching a ball at another winning opening adjacent to a specific winning opening even in a state other than a hit. rice field.

On the other hand, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the induction flow path 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, one ball can be stored in the space formed by the upper portion of the storage valve 607a and the upstream portion of the induction flow path 607. Therefore, the storage device 600 is the first storage device 600 after the storage valve 607a is closed. The ball that has flowed into the inside of the storage valve 607a is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the ball flows into the storage device 600 with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, the ball collides with the stored ball and the flow direction changes, and as a result, the ball enters the induction flow path 602. (See Fig. 9 (b)). Therefore, even if the ball is put into the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few prize balls. Therefore, the merit of putting the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls to be played only by paying out the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is fundamentally not established, and the special game method is not established. In a state other than the game state (big hit state), it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured so that one ball enters into approximately three balls hit to the right. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. In other words, even if a right-handed hit is executed in a game state other than the special game state (big hit state), it is difficult for the special symbol to be drawn, and the payout is based on the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is also not possible to increase the number of balls. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play the game with the aim of winning a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction flow path 607 enters the general winning opening 602. It is configured to do, but is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each induction flow path, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. May be good. As a result, even if the guide flow path 606 is flown down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize balls into the winning openings having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestedly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning openings. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the induction flow path 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the induction flow path 607. For example, the induction flow path is configured by using an electromagnet or the like. It may be configured to store the sphere in the middle of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and the electromagnet is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the induction flow path 607 can be attracted to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With such a configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. Further, in this case, the width of the induction flow path 607 is widened (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the storage valve 607a are deleted), and the induction flow path 605 of the induction flow path 607 is used. The electromagnet may be embedded only in the portion directly below, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be provided directly below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Further, when there is a sphere attracted by the electromagnet and stopped flowing, the stopped sphere and another sphere come into contact with the electromagnet portion to change the flow direction, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. The portion may be flowed down and may be configured to flow down in a direction different from that of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Then, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be arranged below the portion of the induction flow path 607 in which the electromagnet is not embedded. As a result, the branch member 604 can be abolished, so that the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be configured to be stored side by side.

In the present embodiment, the ball is configured to be able to be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the induction flow path 607 so that the ball cannot flow into the induction flow path 607 when the storage valve 607a is closed. By making the configuration in which the balls are not stored, even if the ball is hit to the right in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the balls can be discharged without remaining inside the storage device 600.

In particular, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 is likely to be opened in the high probability state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit or the time saving state of the normal symbol. Further, in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the start winning prize to the second entry slot 640), the game is compared with the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the start winning prize to the first entry slot 64). It is easy to become a jackpot B that is advantageous to the person. Therefore, when the jackpot is completed, the player launches the ball in an attempt to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. Therefore, for example, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends, the ball is stored in the storage device 600 with high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been damaged. On the other hand, by providing the storage valve 607a at the upper end of the induction flow path 607 so that the storage device 600 does not store the ball, the player can feel that the ball has been used up without waste. .. Therefore, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player.

In the present embodiment, the general winning openings (small value winning openings) 601 and 602 and the out openings 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the second ball-entry opening 640 may be arranged at a position where the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, of the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13, the second entry port 640 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is moved to the inside of the storage device 600. You may. Further, in this case, as an opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is configured to be opened when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 1000 times without becoming a big hit after the big hit is completed. You may.

As a result, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 1000 times after the big hit is completed, the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 by right-handing, so that the special symbol 2 can be entered. Lottery can be executed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640 is five, but in the case of this modification, three are paid out. It should be configured so as to be. That is, since the number of balls that can be entered into the storage device 600 when hitting right is 1 in 3 balls, by hitting right after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball can be hit. It is possible to enter the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of 1 ball out of 3 balls. That is, it is possible to receive a lottery for the special symbol 2 while maintaining the holding ball. With this configuration, even if the lottery of special symbols is repeated without becoming a big hit (even if a so-called big hit occurs), the game is expected to open the storage valve 607a. Can be done. Therefore, even if the period during which the jackpot is not a big hit becomes long, the motivation of the player for the game can be maintained. By increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640 (for example, 10), after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball can be hit just by hitting right. It may be configured to increase. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the merit when the special symbol lottery is missed 1000 times or more in a row. Therefore, after the big hit is over, we hope that the lottery of special symbols will be a big hit again, and if we continue to lose the lottery of special symbols, we will continue to lose the lottery of special symbols 1000 times or more in a row. I can make you wish. Furthermore, after the storage valve 607a is opened, the number of balls will increase just by hitting the ball to the right. It can be hoped that the state of continuous increase will continue for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of lottery of the special symbol, it is possible to make the player wish to be a big hit of the special symbol or to continue to be out of the lottery of the special symbol. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the storage device 600 is configured to provide only one storage valve 604a, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the induction flow path 606 may be configured to branch in two directions, and one flow path may be provided with a storage valve that is open only during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). That is, the same configuration as the guide flow path 606, 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 606. A general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, and the flow path without the storage valve has a small number of prize balls (for example). 3, 3) General prize openings may be provided. With this configuration, a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, so that a special gaming state (big hit state) is started and each storage valve is opened to store the balls. The balls that have been played can be flowed all at once to a general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15). Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. Even in this configuration, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased as in the case where a plurality of storage valves are provided.

In the present embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640, and the first variable winning device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. 65 is provided, and the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and any arrangement may be used. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged on the upstream side of the second ball opening 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball launched to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650 is the second entry opening first. It may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a due to the ball entering the 640, but the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be used. By arranging it on the upstream side, the prize ball can be obtained more smoothly during the special game state (during the big hit state).

Further, by arranging the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side and arranging them on the upstream side of the storage device 600, the storage device is placed during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the ball at about 600 and making it difficult for the ball to reach the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, each round during the special game state (during the jackpot state) can proceed more smoothly.

In the present embodiment, the first entry slot 64 and the second specific entry slot 640 are provided as the entry openings that trigger the lottery of the special symbol, but either one may be abolished. For example, the second ball entry port 640 may be abolished and an electric accessory 640 may be provided for the first ball entry port 64. As a result, there is less merit in launching the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), so that the anomaly in which the ball is launched aiming at the storage device 600. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) a typical game method.

In the present embodiment, when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 600 in a special game state (big hit state), the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has many prize balls to be paid out. In addition to this, the number of balls that have entered the general entry port 602 in one special game state (big hit state) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to do so. As a result, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to acquiring a prize ball by winning a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, how much extra prize ball is obtained. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the prize has been created. Therefore, since it is possible to make the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 think that more balls are to be entered, it is possible to have a target for the number of balls to be entered. The number of winnings in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily have to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be provided separately. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the jackpot state can be executed in a wider display area.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the ball entering (winning) the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls paid out based on the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are all the same number (15). , Not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is transferred to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. May be configured to be less than the number of prize balls paid out based on winning (winning) (for example, 10). As a result, even if the ball flows into the storage device 600 as a result of the direction of travel of the ball being biased in the special gaming state (big hit state), the disadvantage to the hole can be reduced.

Further, contrary to the above, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 65a. It may be configured to be larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) into the winning opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out by entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is set to 10, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening). The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) to 602 may be 15. As a result, the profit that the player can enjoy by flowing the ball into the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's interest in the big hit game can be further improved. can.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. However, the trigger for opening and closing the storage valve 607a is Is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened only for a shorter period than the present embodiment, or it may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times in the jackpot. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to open based on the interval period set between the jackpot rounds and close the storage valve 607a based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period in which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot from becoming too large. That is, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in one big hit to vary, so that it is possible to easily predict the sales of the pachinko machine 10. Further, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, the storage valve 607a is provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the interval period (that is, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are closed). A part of the sphere that has reached the downstream of the path (flow path) can flow into the storage device 600. That is, even during the interval period, the prize ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general prize opening 602. Therefore, the ball can be less likely to be wasted even during the interval period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the ending effect of the jackpot, but it may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. As a result, a part of the spheres remaining on the board surface at the start of the ending effect can flow into the storage device 600. That is, the prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602 during the ending production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending effect. Further, the storage valve 607a is left in the open state until a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect is completed, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. It may be configured to switch to a state. As a result, a part of the spheres remaining on the board surface at the end of the ending effect can flow into the storage device 600. That is, the prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted after the ending effect is completed.

In addition, the storage valve 607a is opened when a game state different from the special game state (big hit state) is set, and the storage valve 607a is changed from the set game state to another game state. May be closed. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during a period in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. As a result, in the probable change state of the special symbol, while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to be a big hit B by hitting right, the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Can be entered. Therefore, the probabilistic state of the special symbol can be made more advantageous to the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time saving state of the normal symbol is a state in which the player has less merit than the probabilistic state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a should be configured to be opened during the time saving state of the normal symbol. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time is shortened for a normal symbol.

Further, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, the storage valve 607a of the storage valve 607a is switched at any timing of the player. It may be configured so that the state can be switched. As a result, each player can be made to play the game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his / her taste.

In the present embodiment, the out opening is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out opening, a winning opening for paying out the prize balls may be provided. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters each winning opening may be different. More specifically, for example, 6 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603c. May be provided with 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to more interestingly observe the case where the ball flows down the guide flow path 606 and the guide flow path 607 to which winning opening the ball enters. Further, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning openings for any ball to enter are more random. .. As a result, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be observed more interestingly until the ball enters one of the winning openings. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set an entrance where the ball can easily enter by the clerk in the hall. Therefore, the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid for the storage device 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 607a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the opening command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the ending command is received. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) in the special gaming state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state). It was configured to do, but it is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. Further, it may be configured to switch based on the result of a lottery held regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. May be good. Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the lottery is won and the ball can flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set to the open state (released state), the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Since it is possible to enter the ball, it is possible to have the player play the game in the expectation that more lottery will be won. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In the present embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the jackpot (big hit B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at the timing when it is easy to enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot, and the probability variation entry ball. There is a big hit (big hit A) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the mouth 654. It may be configured to suggest whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each round of the jackpot 1 to 11 rounds, the ally of justice and the monster may fight each other. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, it may be notified that it is a jackpot B, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that it is a jackpot A. That is, if the ally of justice wins, the player can be made to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the probable state of the special symbol. This makes it possible for the player to observe the result of the production performed at the jackpot more interestingly.

In addition, there is a high possibility that the ally of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot A) and the content of the production in which the ally of justice is highly expected to win (easily selected in the case of jackpot B) by providing variations in the content of the production. (Easy to be selected) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning is high, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed. It may be configured to increase the possibility of defeat if the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result can be predicted by the flow of the production leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the content of the production performed by the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight, and it can be suggested that the jackpot B is advantageous and the jackpot A is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B. Any aspect may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 is directed to search for the treasure and the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that it is a jackpot B, or the boy character 710 may be configured to search for the treasure. It may be configured to display the effect of eating big eaters and to notify that it is a big hit B when all the provided foods are eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, the condition that the image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image and the storage valve 607a is opened, the merit when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the demerit when the ball is hit right in the closed state. It may be configured to display an image (explanatory image) for explaining. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, when a right-handed hit is performed in a normal state (a low-probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) and it is detected that a ball has entered the storage device 600, a right-handed warning image is obtained. Although it was configured to display (see FIG. 5B), it may be configured not to display the right-handed warning image under predetermined conditions. For example, when the player is hitting right in a state where the ball is not stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, a right-handed warning image (FIG. 5B) until the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. (See) may be configured not to be displayed. By keeping the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, it becomes a big hit of the special symbol after that, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The balls stored in the can be immediately entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used for the big hit game. Therefore, even if the ball is exhausted even though the ball is a big hit, the big hit game can be performed without borrowing a new ball.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is arranged inside the storage device 600 in the special gaming state (big hit state). It was configured so that a prize ball could be obtained by inserting a ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the prize ball is paid out by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ball is sent to the storage device 600. It was configured so that the prize ball would be paid out by letting the ball enter. As a result, more prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is further improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (normal gaming state), the ball is closed by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a. Was configured to make it difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and to be able to store the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. Then, when a ball stored inside the storage device 600 exists in the normal gaming state, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact). It was configured as follows. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored balls occurs, the flow direction of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls. It was configured to change in the direction of (direction of the induction flow path 606). As a result, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal game state, it is anomalous to try to increase the number of balls held without going through the jackpot. It was configured so that the game method would not be fundamentally established.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, whether or not to store the ball in the storage device 700 is configured to be switched by the operation of the player. Further, when the ball is stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the ball can flow are provided, depending on the flow speed and approach angle of the ball flowing into the storage device 700, the adjustment condition of the nail, and the like. , It is configured so that the sphere can flow into either flow path.

Further, in the second embodiment, there are two flow paths, one is a winning opening that is easy to enter when the ball is not stored (the state where the storage valve 704a is open), and the other is a flow path that is easy to flow in when the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a. The two types of winning openings provided downstream of each are configured so that the number of prize balls to be paid out is different. That is, the two types of winning openings that can be won when the balls are stored in the storage valve 704a are the winning openings with a large number of winning balls to be paid out and the winning openings with a small number of winning balls to be paid out. It is configured as follows. Further, the winning opening where the ball can win in the state where the storage valve 704a is open is configured to be in the middle of the above two types of payout numbers. That is, it is possible to switch between a state in which balls can be entered in both a winning opening with a large number of winning balls and a winning opening with a small number of winning balls, and a state in which balls can be stably received by flowing the balls into the storage device 700. Can be done. Therefore, the playability when the ball is flowed into the storage device 700 can be switched according to the player's preference, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first ball entry port 64. 2 The variable winning device 650 is abolished, the storage device 700 is provided in place of the storage device 600, and the release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. The point is that the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the execution is performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entry port 64. The second variable winning device 650 provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 in the first embodiment has been abolished. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball can be made to enter the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a by hitting left.

Further, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. In this storage device 700, the number of nails around the entrance is smaller than that in the vicinity of the entrance of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment, and the ratio of balls flowing in when hitting right is the storage device of the first embodiment. It is configured to be less than 600 (eg, 1 in 10 balls). The details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a probable change state of a special symbol or a time saving state of a normal symbol (a period in which the player does not lose even if a right-handed stroke is performed). It is a figure. FIG. 63A shows the display content in a state where the release button 800 is not pressed (a state in which the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63B shows the release button 800 being pressed. The display content in the state (the state in which the storage valve 704a is open) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 in the first embodiment is set in the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds (FIG. 5 (FIG. 5). Instead of a) Ds2), the text "Press the button to open the gate!" Is displayed. By displaying this character, the player can press the release button 800 (button) to set the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 to the open state. It can be easily recognized. Since the display contents in the display area other than the small area Ds2 are the same as the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment, the detailed name description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the characters "Gate is open" are displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

Next, the details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide flow path 707 for flowing down a ball flowing in from the upper portion thereof, and three flow paths are provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 707. (The downstream of the induction flow path 707 branches in three directions). Specifically, the guide flow path 706 for flowing the inflowing sphere in the lower left direction of the front view, the guide flow path 704 for flowing down the inflow direction in the front view, and the guide flow path 704 for flowing down in the lower right direction of the front view. A guide flow path 708 for the purpose is provided. As shown in FIG. 64, since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided downstream of the guide flow path 705, the ball is to the right or to the left while flowing down the guide flow path 705. Even so, the flow direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the induction flow path 705 tends to flow into the induction flow path 704 provided on the central side downstream of the induction flow path 705.

Downstream of the induction flow path 706, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 6) is provided. Further, downstream of the induction flow path 704, there is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 with a smaller number of prize balls (for example, three) paid out as compared with the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is provided. Further, as entry openings other than the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out openings 703a to 703e in which the prize ball is not paid out even if the ball enters are It is provided. Then, the game ball flowing down the induction flow path 708 enters the out port (small value winning opening) 703d or the out port (small value winning opening) 703e, so that when the ball flows down the induction flow path 708. In addition, there is no merit for the player. A ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 706 but has not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. Will be done. Further, a ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 704 but has not entered the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703b or the out opening 703c. Will be done. These out ports 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the ball from accumulating under the storage device 700 even if the ball moves irregularly due to vibration or the like, and ensure that the ball is discharged. Can be done.

The induction flow path 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a. Similar to the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a closes the induction flow path 704 to store one ball flowing into the storage device 700 after the closure in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. be able to. Unlike the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured so that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the operation of the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) by the player. Has been done. In the state where the spheres are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the flow direction is changed by the impact caused by the spheres flowing into the storage device 700 interfering with (contacting) the stored spheres. This change (switching) in the flow direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the trajectory (flowing direction) of a ball when the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 flows down in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65 (a), a case where a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels the left side of the front view due to the impact of the interference will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and repels to the left in the front view. The sphere flows into the induction channel 706 and flows down the induction channel 706. Here, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 706, a relatively large amount of balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. (For example, 6 prize balls) will be paid out. Therefore, if the ball repels to the right, it is advantageous for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), a case where the sphere that interferes (contacts) with the stored sphere repels to the right side of the front view due to the impact of the interference will be described. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the ball that has flowed into (entered) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and repels to the right in the front view. The sphere flows into the induction channel 708 and flows down the induction channel 708. Here, since the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the ball enters either of the out openings. That is, when the ball repels to the right side of the front view, the prize ball is not paid out, so that there is no merit for the player.

As described above, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the balls flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 repel. Therefore, when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 700, it is expected that the ball will repel to the left in the front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. You can play games. That is, since the flow direction (repulsion direction) of the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 can be confirmed more interestingly, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, the direction in which the ball is likely to repel changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of entry into the storage device 700, and the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, so that the ball easily repels the guide flow path 706 for the player. It is possible to devise a way of hitting so that it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing the game, the pachinko machine 10 in which the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is selected in consideration of the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b. Can be done. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the pleasure of searching for the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to be advantageous to oneself.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is set to the open state will be described. When the sphere flows into the storage device 700, the sphere first flows down the induction flow path 705. Since the nails 709a and the nails 709b are provided on the left and right downstream of the guide flow path 705 (see FIG. 66), the ball is to the right or to the left while flowing down the guide flow path 705. Even so, the flow direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the induction flow path 705 flows into the induction flow path 704 provided on the central side downstream of the induction flow path 705.

When the storage valve 704a is open, the sphere can flow down the induction flow path 704. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed into the induction flow path 704 flows down the induction flow path 704 downstream, and the general winning opening (middle). Value winning opening) Enter 701. As a result, a smaller number (for example, 3) of prize balls than the prize balls for entering the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 702 is paid out.

In this way, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, the flow direction does not change due to repulsion and does not flow into the induction flow path 706 or the induction flow path 708. That is, instead of being unable to enter the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, which has a large number of winning balls, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. There is no chance that you will not be able to get the prize ball. Therefore, when the ball is put into the storage device 700, the prize ball can be stably obtained, so that the player can feel a sense of security.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player can operate the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by leaving the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e. It can be in a state (a state with high gambling ability in which a large number of prize balls may be obtained, but a prize ball may not be obtained). Further, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stable). It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, and each player selects the playability that suits his / her taste. You can play a game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the RAM 203 in that the provisions of the random number table 202b per first of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment. The part has been changed, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. It differs in that. Since other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205. The release button 800 is arranged at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) where the player can arbitrarily press (operate). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (pressing detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that the pressing has been detected is output to the input / output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the solenoid 610 for the storage device so as to open the storage valve 704a based on this pressing detection signal. That is, the solenoid 610 for the storage device is set to ON.

Next, the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a). The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, as in the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

In the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each jackpot type. That is, unlike the first embodiment, the value of the same first hit type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit. The jackpot type is associated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (FIG. 68 (a). ) 202b1). The jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the end of the jackpot C, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given as an added value (the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot C continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

On the other hand, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot D is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 68 (a)). The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the end of the jackpot D, the probabilistic state of the special symbol of the special symbol is given as an added value (shifts to the probabilistic state of the special symbol). In addition, the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot D continues until the next jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined depending on the winning jackpot type. That is, a configuration more general than that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is adopted. Along with this, in the second embodiment, the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed.

Next, the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment has a probability variation setting flag 203h, a probability variation passage counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability change effective flag 203o, the probability change effective timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q have been deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in relation to determining whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit in the second specific winning device 650. That is, in the present embodiment, the game state to be set at the end of the big hit is determined in advance according to the big hit type, and whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol during the special game state (during the big hit state). Since no determination is made, it is not necessary to use each of the above configurations in this embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with the release flag 203s. The release flag 203s indicates whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (whether or not the state in which the ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is released). It is a flag indicating). The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

Next, returning to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 of the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment is abolished, and a storage state flag 223k and a flow time counter 223k are added. There is.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state. When this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed and the ball can be stored in the upper part thereof. On the other hand, when the storage state flag 223k is off, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state and the ball can flow down the induction flow path 704. Each time the storage state flag 223k is received from the main controller 110, the storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

In the flow time counter 223k, the ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 704, the induction flow path 706, or the induction flow path 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a is one of the entry ports (general winning opening 701, general winning opening). It is a counter for counting the time (ball ejection time) until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out mouth 703d, or the out mouth 703e). By counting the ball brushing period, the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) When a ball enters the winning opening) 703e, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the entry is a normal operation. The flow-down time counter 233k is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time a storage state command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Further, each time the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 42) is executed, the value is subtracted by 1.

In the present embodiment, with the storage valve 704a closed, a ball enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704a, or the storage valve 704a is opened. If the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e in the state, a warning image (Fig. 7 (Fig. 7) b) See) is configured to be displayed. However, if the ball flows into the induction flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball becomes a general winning opening (medium value) after the storage valve 704a switches to the closed state. Winning opening) There is a case where the ball enters 701. Similarly, if a ball flows into the induction flow path 706 or the induction flow path 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball is generally used after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. There are cases where the ball enters the winning slot (high value winning slot) 702, the out slot (small value winning slot) 703d, and the out slot (small value winning slot) 703e. In order to treat these as normal incoming balls (the warning image is not displayed), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the flow time counter 233k is set for a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, the ball is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or When the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e, it is configured to determine that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 69) is changed from the first embodiment. In the following, only the various processes executed in this main process (see FIG. 69) will be described, and the detailed description of the other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 69, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main process. Similar to the first embodiment, in this main process, the main process of the game is executed.

In the main process (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) is replaced with the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Is different in that it is executed. It is also different in that after the second symbol display update process (S1007) is completed, the storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is executed. It is also different in that the error command process 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state (big hit state), various effects according to the jackpot are executed, and the first 1 This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

In each of the jackpot control processes 2 (S1021), S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, the jackpot control processes (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109. The same process as each process of is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, the process of S1103 (process for setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is abolished. In the second embodiment, since the storage valve 704a is set to the open state based on the player operating the release button 800, the state of the storage valve 704a regardless of whether or not it is in the special gaming state (big hit state). This is because is switched.

Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a Opening is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1122), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or when the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a has passed. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won after opening, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S1123 that the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. It is closed (S1124), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the 15 rounds of the special game state (big hit state) are completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), first, the ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1125 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probability variation jackpot) (S1126), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot D (that is, a jackpot C) (S1126: No), 100 is set in the value of the time saving medium counter 203r (S1127), and this processing is terminated. By setting 100 to the time reduction counter 203r, it is possible to set the time reduction period of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times after the end of the big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S1126, when it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot D (probability variation jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in order to give the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (probability variation jackpot). S1128), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1109, if it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), the present process is terminated. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment.

By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening is provided during the jackpot. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine (that is, a more general pachinko machine) in which the state after the end of the big hit is predetermined according to the type of big hit.

Next, the storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1022). As described above, this storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001), and if it is determined that the release flag 203s is on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is opened (storage device 700). Since the state in which the ball can be stored is released), it is next determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the press detection signal is detected) (S4002: Yes), in order to keep the storage valve 704a in the open state, This process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the press (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (that is, the press detection signal has not been detected) (S4002: No), the storage valve 704a is closed for the storage device. Set the solenoid 610 to off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is closed, the release flag 203s is set to off (S4004), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this process is terminated.

The storage state mand set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear side type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the character "When the button is pressed, the gate is opened!" Is displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800.

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state in which the ball can be stored in the storage device 700 is set). Then, it is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

If it is determined in the process of S4006 that the press (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (that is, the press detection signal has not been detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept in the closed state. In order to keep it, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the press detection signal is detected) (S4006: Yes), the solenoid 610 for the storage device is turned on in order to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be open, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the open state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear side type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the character "gate is open" is displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

By executing this storage control process, opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set according to the operation status of the release button 800. As a result, by storing the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 704a at any timing of the player, either the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d or 703e It is possible to switch between a state in which the crab ball enters and a state in which the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 flows down toward the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and detailed description of other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (1811) in the present embodiment. In this command determination process, in each of the processes S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same processes as the processes S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are performed. Each is executed.

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a defect such as a failure in the storage valve 704a. Then, a warning process for giving a warning when a problem has occurred is executed (S1921), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), then whether or not the storage state command has been received is determined. Determined (S1922). Then, when it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (release state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. If so, set the storage status flag 223k to off. When the storage status flag 223k is updated, the rear image (see FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)) corresponding to the updated storage status is also set to display the third symbol display device 81. Update the content.

When the processing of S1923 is completed, a counter value corresponding to one second is set for the flow time counter 223l (S1924), and this processing is terminated. By using the ball splashing time set for the flow-down time counter 223l, it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of a defect in the storage valve 704a. If it is determined in the process of S1922 that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process shifts to S1919.

As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the release state command and the closed state command from the main control device 110. A command for causing the display control device 114 can be set. As a result, the player can easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. As described above, this warning process (S1921) is a process for determining the presence or absence of a defect such as a failure in the storage valve 704a and giving a warning when a defect occurs.

In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101), if it is on (S4101: Yes), and then whether the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0. Whether or not it is determined (S4102). When it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state) and the ball-draining period has elapsed. Therefore, in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a, a storage time notification process for notifying a defect is executed (S4103), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 in the processing of S4102 (S4102: No), it means that the ball shaving period associated with setting the storage valve 704a to the closed state is currently in progress. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the above-mentioned storage notification process (S4103) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (S4201). If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down to the downstream of the storage valve 704a and enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, it means that the storage valve 704a is not normally closed even though the storage valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202). , End this process.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7 (b)) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the clerk in the hall can easily be made aware of the occurrence of the defect, so that the defect can be quickly resolved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4104: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) and the ball-draining period has elapsed. Therefore, in the open state (release state) of the storage valve 704a, a release notification process for notifying a defect is executed (S4105), and this process ends. The release notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the release notification process (S4105). In this release notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received prize information command includes the prize information corresponding to the ball entering the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process is shifted to S4303.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command is sent out. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302), and the entry to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is supported. If the winning information is not included (S4302: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S4302 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the processing is shifted to S4303. When the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. In the processing of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the winning ball of the ball is included (S4302: Yes), a display error command corresponding to the defect of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this processing is performed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the induction flow path 704, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or out The reason why the ball enters the mouth (small value winning mouth) 703d, 703e is that there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7 (b)) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the clerk in the hall can easily be made aware of the occurrence of the defect, so that the defect can be quickly resolved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 700 capable of storing balls inside the pachinko machine 10. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 704, 706, 708) inside the storage device 700, and is configured to allow balls to flow down to different entry ports. Further, the induction flow path 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a capable of closing the flow path. When the induction flow path 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one ball can be stored (retained) in the upper part thereof.

Further, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the induction flow path 704 (compared to the induction flow path 706 and the induction flow path 708, to the induction flow path 704). Since it is configured so that the ball can easily flow in), the ball can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the induction flow path 704. Therefore, by inflowing the ball into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably receive the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the spheres are stored in the upper portion thereof, the spheres that have flowed into the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with the stored spheres, so that the induction flow path 706, Alternatively, it repels in either direction of the induction flow path 708. That is, either the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, which has a large number of winning balls to be paid out due to the change in the flow direction due to repulsion, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e, in which the winning balls are not paid out. Enter the crab. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball launched onto a gaming board. In this conventional gaming machine, the held ball can be discharged to the gaming board by the operation of the player and can be entered into a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction (the ball can be entered into a predetermined winning opening provided in the direction of travel). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190443).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player because the ball released by using the holding device is only put into a predetermined winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can operate the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by leaving the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e. It can be in a state (a state with high gambling ability in which a large number of prize balls may be obtained, but a prize ball may not be obtained). Further, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stable). It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, and each player selects the playability that suits his / her taste. You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a can be switched by the release button 800 at any timing of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. As a result, each player can start the game during the period when the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his / her taste. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be basically in the closed state (storage state), and a lottery is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. You may.

Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the ball is easily entered into the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed due to the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball is stored by lottery. The game can be played with the expectation that the valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, if the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easier for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the ball continues to be out of the lottery. The game can be performed with the expectation that the storage valve 704a will continue to be closed. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In the present embodiment, there are two types of flow paths through which the ball can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed, the guide flow path 706 and the guide flow path 708, but the present invention is not limited to this. More channels and winning openings may be provided. In addition, more variations may be given to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters each winning opening. As a result, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be increased, so that the player can observe the flow direction of the balls that have entered the storage device 700 more interestingly. Can be made to.

Further, a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down when the storage valve 704a is open may be provided. Then, when each flow path flows down, a different number of prize balls may be provided to be paid out. As a result, even when the storage valve 704a is open, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be given randomness, so that the player can see the flow direction of the balls entering the storage device 700. Can be observed more interestingly.

In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second ball entry port 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 upstream, it is possible to facilitate the flow of balls into the storage device 700.

In the present embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as the winning opening opened in the special gaming state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during the period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period when the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (reservoir state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. With this configuration, the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, so that the number of operations by the player can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the button 800 may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a playability that suits his or her own taste.

In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed by characters for the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, depending on the state of the storage valve 704a, either a live-action image in a state where the storage valve 704a is open or a live-action image in a closed state may be displayed. Further, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Further, in the present embodiment, the display showing the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the front side of the third symbol. Further, the mode of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the mode of the third symbol.

In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be controlled by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid for the storage device 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 700 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the front view of the first entry opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting right in the special gaming state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state) can be played. Can be more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for a big hit.

In the present embodiment, when the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact), the flow path through which the newly flowing ball flows down is It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the spheres are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the spheres newly flowing into the storage device 700 to be distributed to the induction flow path 706 and the induction flow path 708 is substantially the same. It was configured, but not limited to this. For example, the width of the storage valve 704a is widened (for example, 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere), and the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a takes a position to the right of the front view or to the left of the front view. It may be configured to obtain. When the ball is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a on the left side of the front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 tends to collide with the right side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the right side in the front view, so that the ball is likely to flow down the induction flow path 708. As described above, since the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the player cannot win the prize ball (it is disadvantageous to the player). .. On the other hand, when the ball is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a on the right side of the front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 tends to collide with the left side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the left side in the front view, so that the sphere is likely to flow down the induction flow path 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the player can acquire a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player). Will be). In this way, the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a can form an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, the storage valve 704a is in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. It is possible to make people aware of the arrangement of the spheres stored in the upper part of the. Therefore, if the arrangement of the spheres is unfavorable (that is, if the spheres are stored on the left side of the front view), the storage valve 704a can be released (released) by pressing (operating) the release button 800. can. In addition, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, if the balls are stored on the right side of the front view), the player can be made to want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. .. Therefore, since it is possible to give the enjoyment of determining whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. In the first embodiment described above, the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (open state or closed state) and the state of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 (open state or closed state) are independent of each other. The storage valve 607a is controlled to be always open in the privilege game state (big hit state), while the second specific winning opening 650a is set for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (FIG. 16). It was configured to be set to the open state only during the open period specified for each jackpot type shown in. Further, two types of flow paths (induction flow path 652 and guidance flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the guidance thereof is performed only when the sphere flows down the guidance flow path 652. It was configured to be able to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652. That is, even if a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot, it is configured so that the ball does not shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends unless the ball flows down the induction flow path 652. rice field.

On the other hand, in this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage are obtained by using the slide member 900 instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the first embodiment and the storage valve 607a. The state of the device 600 can be switched. That is, it is configured so that the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a and the opening / closing control of the induction flow path 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed by one member, and the states are switched in conjunction with each other. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state, the induction flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also in the open state, and when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the closed state, the guidance flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also in the open state. ) Is also configured to be closed. When configured in this way, both the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 (that is, the winning opening opened during the jackpot by the slide member 900) are both winning openings for obtaining a winning ball during the jackpot. Can be treated as.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 650, only the guide flow path 652 leading to the probabilistic entry ball port 654 is provided, and the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide flow path 653, and the normal ball entry port 655 are provided. Is obsolete. That is, if the ball can be put into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is configured to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. In addition, it is configured to change the winning opening opened in the 12th round according to the jackpot type. That is, in the 12th round, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are set to be open (V route open jackpot), and the first specific in all rounds of the jackpot. The winning opening 65a is set to the open state (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are not opened during the jackpot). The jackpot (V route closed jackpot) is provided. Has been done.

With these changes from the first embodiment, the end conditions for each round of jackpots have also changed. Specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the jackpot, a ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Is changed so that the round game ends (the first specific winning opening 65a is closed) when the total number of cards is 10 or 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round. Further, in the 12 rounds, the total number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will be 10 or the round. It is changed so that the round game ends (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment with a member for switching the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (closed portion 910). , The point that the member (ball storage portion 920) for switching the state of the guide flow path 607 is composed of one member (slide member 900), and is paid out when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the contents of the ROM 202 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is performed. Is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of the V route open jackpot (big hit F). explain. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 12 rounds of the V route open jackpot (big hit F), the characters "ROUND 12" are displayed on the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. Further, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning opening 650a has been opened is formed in the upper center of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANGE !!" and the characters "Probability change route is being opened !!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the ball is inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Since other display contents such as the boy character 710 are the same as the display contents displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the configuration on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second are the same as in the first embodiment. A variable winning device 650 is provided. Further, a member for opening or closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 (closed portion 910) and a member for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600 (ball storage portion 920). Are arranged so as to line up in a straight line. The details will be described later, because the closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are both part of the slide member.

Further, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600. The hall clerk can adjust the rate at which the balls flow into the storage device 600, for example, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before the hall opens. By changing the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the number of balls entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 in the 12th round of the jackpot. can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball launched by right-handed striking can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the prize balls that the player can obtain in the big hit. Therefore, since the player's expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

On the contrary, when the nails 921a and 921b are adjusted to make it difficult for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second designated winning opening 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600 are provided. It is possible to increase the number of balls that reach the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. In addition, since it is easy to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round, it is possible to easily shift to the probable change state of the special symbol when the jackpot F is reached. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the jackpots will be continuous in a short period of time, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The configuration for adjusting the ease with which the ball flows into the storage device 600 (the ease with which the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a) is not limited to the nail. For example, a wind turbine may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 so that the ease of rotation can be adjusted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the slide member 900 including the above-mentioned closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are cross-sectional views when the game board 13 is cut along the line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77, respectively. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidably displaced toward the back side or the front side of the front view with respect to the game board 13, and is second specified by sliding displacement toward the front side of the front view. The winning opening 650a and the induction flow path 607 can be closed, respectively. On the other hand, by sliding the slide member 900 toward the back side of the front view with respect to the game board 13, the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 can be opened, respectively.

FIG. 78 (a) is a view when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 are each closed by the slide member 900 and viewed from above of the game board 13. On the other hand, FIG. 78 (b) is a view when the second specific winning opening 650a and the induction flow path 607 are opened, respectively, when viewed from above of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closing portion 910 and a ball storage portion 920 protrude from the right end portion and the left end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 930, respectively (substantially "". It has a U-shaped "shape"). The closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 may be projected toward the front side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 via the opening portions 940a and 940b made in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

In a state where the slide member 900 is slid and displaced toward the front side of the front view, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the upper portion of the second specific winning opening 650a is closed by the closing portion 910, so that the ball is secondly variable. It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the inside of the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guide flow path 607 is closed by the ball storage unit 920, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guidance flow path 607. become unable.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the slide member 900 is slid and displaced toward the back side of the game board 13, the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 is opened and the guide flow path 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the induction flow path 607 and the second specific winning opening 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

As described above, in this modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow path 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specific winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as drawing a special symbol and determining the fluctuation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The effect on the game will be large. On the other hand, in this modification, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the first type selection table 202b in this modification will be described. As described above, in the present modification, when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the probabilistic entry opening 654. As the jackpot type, a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650 is opened in the 12th round and a jackpot in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the 12th round are provided.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed, or the ball is hit). It is a big hit that is opened (until 10 balls enter). That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball cannot be entered into the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 arranged inside the second variable winning device 650, so that the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100 after the big hit is completed. Granted times.

On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). This jackpot F is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 elapse for a predetermined time (30 seconds). Until, or until 10 balls enter), and in the 1st to 11th rounds and 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls enter). It is a big hit that is opened (until it hits the ball). In the jackpot F, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so if the ball can be entered into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round, the special symbol is in a probable change state after the jackpot ends. Is given. On the other hand, in the 12th round, the ball did not hit right, or even though it hit right, the ball entered only the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and as a result, the ball went to the second specific winning opening 650a. If the 12th round is completed without entering the ball, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the jackpot F.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 34) is changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the difference is that the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. ing. In the following, only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described, and detailed description of other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031). The jackpot control process 3 is a process of opening and closing the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of the jackpot state.

Among the jackpot control processes 3, in each of the processes S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, S1101, S1102, and S1104 executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, and the same processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), the processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108, which were executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, are abolished.

Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). Instead of, the jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) described above. The jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the states (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

Of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), the processes S1201 to S1203 and S1206 are the same as the processes S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in this modification, when it is determined that the 12th round is in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), then the jackpot type this time is jackpot F (V route open). It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1211).

If it is determined that the jackpot is not F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: No), it means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is the jackpot E that is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. , The opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process shifts to S1206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1211 that it is a jackpot F (S1211: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round, so that the second specific is specified. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closed portion 910 that closed the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage portion 920 that closed the induction flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. It is a part of (a part of the slide member 900), and the closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 slide and displace in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a by the processing of S1203, the induction flow path 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened. Ru).

After setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a , And in order to notify the voice lamp control device 114 that the induction flow path 607 is set to the open state (release state), a storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) is set (S1212). , The process shifts to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage status command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANGE !!" and "Probability change route is being opened !!" are displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that it is an opportunity to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol.

If the special symbol shifts to the probabilistic state, it becomes easy for the player to win the jackpot again in a short period of time after the jackpot ends, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the player can be made to launch the ball more seriously aiming at the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere task for obtaining a prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state).

As described above, the ratio of the balls that reach the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a among the balls hit to the right is the nails 921a, 921b provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600 ( It can be changed by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right side of the front view or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left side of the front view (opening the nail), the ball hit to the right flows into the storage device 600 more. It will be easier to do. Therefore, the proportion of balls that reach the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. In addition, if 10 balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 without being able to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol. When the ball easily flows into the storage device 600, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a larger number of prize balls to be paid out than the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9 (b)). As a result, the player can win a large amount of prize balls, so that the player's interest in the jackpot can be improved.

Here, in many cases, the player makes a right-handed hit aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a in the first to eleventh rounds, so that the player is placed downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Balls also flow into the installed storage device 600. Therefore, by the time the 12th round starts, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. Therefore, when the 12 rounds are started and the slide member 900 is displaced by sliding and the upper part of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is opened, the ball stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 is opened as the general winning opening. (High value winning opening) Flow down to 602. As a result, out of the balls that hit right in the 12th round, 9 balls hit the 2nd specific winning opening 650a by the time they entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. If the ball cannot be entered, the 12th round will end.

On the other hand, by adjusting the nails 921a and the nails 921b so as to be close to each other (closing the nails), it becomes difficult for the right-handed ball to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, since the proportion of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650 is relatively high, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. As a result, it becomes easy to win the jackpot again in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot F, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this way, by changing the ease with which the ball can enter the storage device 600 when hitting to the right, the second ball entry port 650a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be reached. You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is obtained only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 12 It is easy to win many prize balls in the round, but it is possible to switch between playability that makes it difficult to shift to the probable state of special symbols. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), The winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process shifts to S1112. The details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 82.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in this modification. Of the winning processes 2 (S1122), the processes S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the processes S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

Further, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in this modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the processing of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a, the second specifying. When it is determined that the total number of balls entered into the winning opening (second large opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or more) (S1404: Yes), or the round time. When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has elapsed (S1405: Yes), one of the open winning openings (1st specified winning opening (1st large opening opening) 65a or 2nd specified) The winning opening closing process (S1431) for setting the closure of the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process is shifted to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). This winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process for setting the closing of the winning opening when the conditions for closing the winning opening are satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

In this winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the 12th round (S4401). If it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the currently open winning opening is the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a, so that the first specific winning opening (first) is used. 1 Large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4401, if it is determined that the current round is the 12th round (S4401), the winning openings are different depending on the jackpot type, so this jackpot is the jackpot F (V route). It is determined whether or not it is an open jackpot) (S4403). If it is determined that the jackpot is not F (V route open jackpot) (that is, the jackpot E (V route closed jackpot)) (S4403: No), the currently open winning slot is the first specific winning slot (S4403: No). Since it means that it is the first large opening port) 650a, the closing of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set by shifting the processing to S4402 (S4402), and this processing is performed. finish.

In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. It means that the second specified winning opening (second big opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently open. Therefore, in this case, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are set to be closed (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is set. In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the mouth) 650a and the general winning mouth (high value winning mouth) 602 are closed, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state (storage state) is set (the storage state command). S4405), this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage status command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the chance of shifting to the probable change state of the special symbol has ended.

By executing this winning opening closing process (S1431), the open winning opening can be accurately closed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the processing content of the command determination processing is partially changed from the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from the main control device 110 in the jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment. Execute the process. Since the processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the command determination process in this modification, the error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. This error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the error notification process 2 (S1971) described above. In each of the error notification processes 2 (S1971), S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same processes as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in the present modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. (See), the hit notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process is terminated. Similar to the hit notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, the hit notification process 2 (S1981) is a process for notifying when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot. Is.

Next, the above-mentioned hit-time notification process 2 (S1981) will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the hit notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). In the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0. If not (S1992), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 in the processing of S1992 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball bleeding period has elapsed. Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1993).

Then, when it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state). It means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (off) (S1991: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). If it is determined that the value of the flow time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the processing of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then the received winning information command is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S1996, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). It means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the ball brushing period has passed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process is shifted to S1994 in order to notify the malfunction of the storage valve 607a.

By this hit notification process 2 (S1981), when a defect occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the defect can be promptly notified, so that the defect can be quickly resolved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open and close the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the induction flow path in the storage device 600. It is configured so that the opening / closing operation of 607 can be performed at the same time. That is, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit.

Since the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow path 607 can be realized only by sliding the slide member 900, the second specification can be performed as in the first embodiment. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as drawing a special symbol and determining the fluctuation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The effect on the game will be large. On the other hand, in this modification, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

Further, in this modification, only the probability-changing ball opening 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball flowing into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 always enters the probability-changing ball opening 654. It is configured to be a sphere. As a result, if the ball can be put into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple playability of shifting to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a playability that even a beginner can enjoy. Further, since the flow path switching valve 650d, the induction flow path 653, and the normal ball entry port 655 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment are abolished, the second variable winning device 650 The structure of can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Further, in this modification, the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 among the right-handed balls is adjusted by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

Here, for gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is drawn based on whether or not a game ball wins at the starting winning opening, and whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state is separately determined. There is something to draw. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hit from becoming a mere task for obtaining a large number of balls, to allow the player to play the hit game with the expectation of shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. I am trying.

Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area in which the gaming ball can enter only during the hit, and the probability fluctuates after the hit by allowing the gaming ball to enter the predetermined area. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-180999).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the ratio of the gaming ball entering the predetermined area during hitting is preset for each model, so in order to make the ratio of shifting to the probability fluctuation state different, the hole is used. There was no choice but to introduce a different model on the side. In other words, with conventional gaming machines, there is no degree of freedom in the rate of transition to a probability fluctuation state, and it has been difficult to flexibly respond to different sales policies for each hall. Therefore, there has been a demand for a more versatile gaming machine.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600 when hitting right can be easily changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. It is configured in. This makes it possible to change the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 650a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is obtained only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which is special. It is possible to switch between playability that makes it difficult to shift to a probable change state of the symbol. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that the versatility can be improved.

In this modification, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is configured to be opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in the 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be arbitrarily set. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, the opening time may be set to, for example, 2 seconds. By shortening the opening time, various striking methods are performed in order to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in a limited time, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the nails 921a and 921b are closed more. Can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to be absorbed in the game by the pachinko machine 10.

In this modification, an entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for varying the proportion of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, an out opening or a winning opening in which the prize ball is paid out when the ball enters may be provided. Then, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured so that the open / closed state can be switched by a single member. Even with this configuration, the proportion of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to change the ease of entering the out opening or the winning opening. Can be made to. Further, by replacing the storage device 600 with an out opening or a winning opening, the structure can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, the ease of inflow into the storage device 600 does not necessarily have to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, a columnar member fixed to the board surface may be provided. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible for the hole side to adjust whether or not the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so that the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Even if you don't hit the ball, you can prevent the point of disappointment from heading toward the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling distrust of the hall.

In this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are configured to be opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be open in the first round. As a result, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that the game can be played with peace of mind in the subsequent special game state (big hit state). Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in the 15th round. As a result, it is not determined until the final round, the 15th round, whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's expectation for the probabilistic state of the special symbol can be maintained for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot game. Further, for example, when the jackpot F is obtained, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened in the 12th round and the 13th round. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12th round, and the ball storage unit in the 13th round. It is possible to make the state where the sphere does not exist on the upper part of the 920. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a.

In this modification, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of spheres can be stored. For example, it may be configured so that four balls can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. In this case, the end condition of the 12 rounds is changed, and the 12 rounds are ended when, for example, a total of 5 balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602. It may be configured to do so. In the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, the game is played in an attempt to make the ball enter the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting right, so in many cases, the ball is placed on the upper part of the reservoir 920 before the start of the 12th round. The maximum number (4) is stored. That is, when the 12 rounds are started and the ball storage unit 920 is opened, the four stored balls flow into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 all at once, so that immediately after the start of the 12 rounds. In the specific winning opening (1st specific winning opening 65a, 2nd specific winning opening 650a, and general winning opening 602), 4 balls are entered. Therefore, 12 rounds are completed when one more ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (a total of five balls are the second specific winning opening). Since the situation is such that the ball enters the 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602), the opportunity to enter the second specific winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more nervous and play the game for 12 rounds. Also, in the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, while hoping that the balls do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 does not reach the upper limit of 4, but 12 You can have them play a jackpot game (hoping for a round). Therefore, since the game can be played with a feeling of tension even during the jackpot, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming merely a task for obtaining a prize ball, and the player's jackpot game. It is possible to improve the interest in.

The number of balls that can be stored in the specific winning opening, which is the end condition of the 12 rounds, and the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the end condition of the 12 rounds may be set to be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. This makes it possible to play the game with a stronger desire that the ball will not be stored inside the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round. On the contrary, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stored in the ball storage unit 920 may be reduced. As a result, even if the upper limit number of balls is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the start of the 12th round, the opportunity to enter the balls into the second specific winning opening 650a multiple times in the 12th round is given. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this modification, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage portion 920 is opened, but the effect during the jackpot is limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to notify whether it is a jackpot E or a jackpot F based on the result of the effect executed by the 11th round of the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in each round of the 1st to 11th rounds, a production in which a ally of justice and a monster fight may be performed. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, it may be notified that it is a jackpot F, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that it is a jackpot E. That is, if the ally of justice wins, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can recognize that it is a chance to shift to the probable state of the special symbol. This makes it possible for the player to observe the result of the production performed at the jackpot more interestingly.

In addition, there is a high possibility that the ally of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot E) and the content of the production in which the ally of justice is highly expected to win (easily selected in the case of jackpot F) by providing variations in the content of the production. (Easy to be selected) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning is high, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed. It may be configured to increase the possibility of defeat if the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result can be predicted by the flow of the production leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the content of the production performed by the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight, and it can be suggested that the jackpot F is advantageous and the jackpot E is more disadvantageous than the jackpot F. Any aspect may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 is directed to search for the treasure and the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that it is a jackpot F, or the boy character 710 may be configured to search for the treasure. It may be configured to display the effect of eating big and to be notified that it is a big hit F when all the provided food is eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, the condition that the image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image and the storage valve 607a is opened, the merit when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the demerit when the ball is hit right in the closed state. It may be configured to display an image (explanatory image) for explaining. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are both treated as winning openings for obtaining a big hit prize ball, but the general winning opening (high value winning opening) is treated. The winning opening) 602 may be treated as a normal winning opening. That is, as a condition for ending each round of the jackpot, each round of the jackpot ends when 10 or more balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (generally at the end of the round). It may be configured so that the number of balls entered into the winning opening 602 is not involved). As a result, the more the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the more profitable the player is, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ball is made into the storage device 600. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball does not easily flow in, the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the ratio of shifting to the probable state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be changed, but the ratio of shifting to the probable state of the special symbol is changed. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600 constant, a probability variable entry ball opening 654 and a normal entry slot 655 are provided inside the second variable winning device 650 as in the first embodiment. It may be configured. Then, the clerk in the hall may be configured to adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 to the probabilistic entry slot 654 and the normal entry slot 655. More specifically, for example, the second variable winning device 650 in this modification is replaced with the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, and then switched to the flow path switching valve 650d. Abolish the shaft 650e. Then, for example, a nail may be struck at the branch position between the guide flow path 652 and the guide flow path 653 (that is, above the portion where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment). Further, the position for hitting the nail may be, for example, upward by a distance of about the radius of the sphere from the place where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15). That is, it may be a position where the sphere flowing down the guide flow path 651 can come into contact (collision), and the sphere can flow down with respect to the guide flow path 652 and the guide flow path 653. With this configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the game ball flowing down the induction flow path 651 easily comes into contact (collision) with the left side surface of the nail. Therefore, the ball is likely to be repelled to the left in the front view. Therefore, since the ball easily flows into the guidance flow path 652 provided on the left side of the front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, it becomes easy to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to easily change the special symbol after the end of the big hit. On the contrary, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the left side, the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 651 easily comes into contact (collision) with the right side surface of the nail, so that the ball faces the front. It becomes easy to be repelled to the right of the view. Therefore, since the ball easily flows into the guidance flow path 653 provided on the left side of the front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, it becomes easy to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be in a probable change state after the end of the big hit. In this way, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall by setting the configuration so that the ease of entering the ball into the probabilistic entry port 654 can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

Further, as another specific example in which the ratio of transition to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be changed, the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is opened in place of the nails 921a and 921b in this modified example. A variable member may be provided to switch between the closed state and the closed state. Then, the variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is turned on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set to the open state and the period set to the closed state are The ratio may be configured so that the hall can be adjusted. More specifically, for example, an operating means that can be set to a plurality of states such as a DIP switch is provided. Then, for example, if the state of the switch indicates (0000000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be set to the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, the game ball is set to be in a state where it is most likely to flow into the storage device 600. Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the entrance of the storage device 600 is always set to the closed state. That is, the ball that flows into the storage device 600 at the jackpot disappears, and the state is set so that it is most likely to flow into the second specific winning opening 650a. When the DIP switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which the DIP switch is closed may be longer from (0000000000B) to (11111111B). That is, the ball may easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a toward (11111111B), and the probability variation state of the special symbol may be easily set after the end of the big hit. With this configuration, in a hole where you want to use the pachinko machine 10 as a game machine with playability that is unlikely to be in a probable change state of a special symbol, for example, the variable member is closed for 0.5 seconds and 2.5 seconds. The DIP switch settings may be adjusted so that the open state is repeated. On the contrary, in a hole where the pachinko machine 10 is to be used as a game machine having a game property that tends to be in a probable change state of a special symbol, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state for 2.5 seconds and an open state for 0.5 seconds. Just adjust the DIP switch settings. As a result, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that it is possible to provide highly versatile playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94. The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is configured such that the induction flow path 704 provided inside the storage device 700 can be closed by the storage valve 704a so that one ball can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a in the closed state. It was composed of. Then, in the state where the balls are stored, the balls can be easily entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e, which have many prize balls to be paid out. In the state where the storage valve 704a is open, the ball is easily inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 in which the number of winning balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to the closed state, and is configured to be in the open state when the player operates the release button 800. That is, if the storage valve 704a is closed, there is a possibility that a ball may enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e (prize). There is a possibility that you can get a lot of balls, but there is a possibility that you will not get a prize ball. It is in a state where the ball can be entered into the mouth (medium value prize opening) 701 (a state in which a small amount of the prize ball can be stably obtained). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, and each player selects the playability that suits his / her taste. It was configured so that the game could be played.

On the other hand, in this modification, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, it becomes easier for the balls to enter the entry port (it becomes easier to enter the general winning opening 702, or it enters the out opening). Is it easier to ball?) Is configured to change. That is, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, it is easy to recognize whether or not it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is configured to be able to.

The only difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. The second execution is for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in this modification, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward in the lower right direction in the front view. Therefore, most of the spheres that first flowed into the induction flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stationary in a state of being biased to the right side of the induction flow path 704 due to the inclination of the storage valve 704a. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, in the induction flow path 704, the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is longer than that of the second embodiment. Further, the guide flow path 704 does not have a width sufficient for two spheres to be lined up side by side. For this reason, when one sphere is stored to the right inside the guide flow path 704 and another sphere flows into the guide flow path 704, in many cases, it is newly stored on the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. (A new ball is stored between the previously stored ball and the inner wall portion on the left side of the induction flow path 704).

In the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (the first stored ball is stored to the right and the second stored ball is stored to the left), the balls that have subsequently flowed into the storage device 700 are stored. It becomes easy to collide with the right side surface of the second stored ball. Therefore, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to the impact due to the collision (contact) with the stored ball. That is, the ball flows into the induction flow path 708 and enters either the out port (small value winning port) 703d or 703e.

In this way, in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can flow into the storage device 700, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. The player cannot get the prize ball because the ball is thrown. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player.

In the guide flow path 704, on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a, a ball entry sensor 704b for detecting the ball when the ball is present on the front side of the front view is provided. The placement of the ball can be determined by the ball entry sensor 704b. More specifically, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 87. An image (see FIG. 89) that prompts the player to press the release button 800 when a certain period of time has elapsed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 by determining whether or not the arrangement is shown in FIG. 87. ) Can be displayed. As a result, the disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the ball flowing into the storage device 700 easily enters the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e continues for a long time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Next, another example in the case where two spheres are stored will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the game ball that first flowed into the induction flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed is stored to the left with respect to the induction flow path 704, and is stored in the second induction flow path. The sphere that has flowed into the 704 is stored to the right of the induction flow path 704. When the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is reached, the spheres that have subsequently flowed into the storage device 700 are likely to collide (contact) with the left side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, since the flow direction of the ball that collides (contacts) with the stored ball tends to change to the left, the number of prize balls that flow down the induction flow path 706 and are paid out is large (6 payouts) in general. It becomes easier to enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

In this way, in the storage state shown in FIG. 88, by flowing the ball into the storage device 700, the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. , It is an advantageous state for the player who can expect to win the prize ball every time the ball flows in.

Since the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right, the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is more difficult to realize than the storage state shown in FIG. 87. For example, when two balls flow into the induction flow path 704 almost at the same time after the storage valve 704a is closed, or the ball that first reaches the storage valve 704a is the storage valve 704a or the induction flow path 704. This can be realized when a second ball flows into the induction flow path 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repelling in the upper left direction.

Most of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but in this modification as well, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. .. That is, the spheres can be stored in the storage device 700 in the expectation that the storage state will be reset and the storage state will be restored as shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with the goal of achieving the storage state shown in FIG. 88, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player, and the prize is awarded by continuing to enter the ball into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. You can have a feeling of expectation that you can get a lot of balls.

Further, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is deviated from the ball entry sensor 704b (the ball does not shield the front side of the ball entry sensor 704b), so that even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 continues for a long time. , It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of an image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, it is possible to continue the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, an image (suggestion display image) for prompting the pressing of the release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (suggestion display image) for prompting the pressing of the release button 800. This suggestion display image is an image shown in FIG. 87, which is displayed when it is determined that the arrangement disadvantageous to the player is continuous for a certain period of time (1 minute). More specifically, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for 1 minute, it is determined that the ball is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, and the suggestion display image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, the characters “Unfavorable placement” are displayed for the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 for the player is disadvantageous to the player (the arrangement in which the ball flowing into the storage device 700 is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). You can make them recognize that. In addition, below the characters "Unfavorable placement", the characters "Press the button to reset the placement !!" are displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player recognize that the disadvantageous state is eliminated by pressing (operating) the release button 800.

As described above, in this modification, the disadvantageous arrangement is notified to the player by the suggestion display image, and the disadvantageous arrangement is promoted by pressing (operating) the release button 800, and the advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88). The game can be played with the aim of (arrangement in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702). Therefore, it is possible to make the player more actively participate in the game.

In the present embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed when a long time (1 minute) elapses in a state disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched to the open state (released state). That is, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the ball is stable in a disadvantageous state, and the arrangement of the ball stored in the storage device 700 is reset. In order to do so, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be open. This makes it possible to prevent even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 from playing a game for a long time without noticing a disadvantageous state.

In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened when the ball is continuously detected for 1 minute by the ball entry sensor 704b, but the arrangement of FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). ) Is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to shorten the period in which the player is in a disadvantageous state. Further, by increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency of displaying the suggestion display image can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. The electrical configuration in the modified example of the second embodiment is that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed from the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, and the voice lamp control device 113 The difference is that the ball entry sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225. Since the other electrical configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the disadvantage time counter 223m and the suggestion display flag 223n are added to the RAM 223 in the modified example of the second embodiment at least.

The disadvantageous time counter 223m is a counter used for determining the elapsed time after the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87. The value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 228 (S4503 in FIG. 92). Further, in the state where the counter value is added (the state of the value larger than 0), if the ball is not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, when it is determined based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m that the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87 (the state in which the ball is guided to the out openings 703d and 703e). The above-mentioned suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is controlled to be displayed.

The suggestion display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If the suggestion display flag 223n is on, it means that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed, and if it is off, it means that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. Shows. The suggestion display flag 223n is set to on when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, the storage valve 704a is set to off when a storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (release state) is received (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described.

In each of the main processes (see FIG. 92) in this modification, the same processes as those in S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment are executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in this modification, when the liquid crystal display execution management process (S1810) is completed, the release suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed (see FIG. 89). S1821), the process shifts to S1811. The details of this release suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG. 93.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the release suggestion display process (S1821). In this release suggestion display process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is on (S4501), if it is determined to be on (S4501: Yes), then the suggestion display flag 223n is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S4502). If the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to display the suggestion display image. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m (S4503), and the disadvantage time after the update. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60,000 (S4504). Here, since the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by 1 (every 1 ms) every time the main process (see FIG. 91) is performed, the counter value 60000 corresponds to 1 minute.

If it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 60,000 or less (S4504: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504: Yes), a suggestion for notifying the player that a long time (1 minute) has passed since the disadvantageous arrangement was made. The display rear image change command for displaying the display is set (S4505), the suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the ball entry sensor 228 does not detect the ball (the ball entry sensor is off) (S4501: No), the arrangement is not disadvantageous (see FIG. 87). Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). If it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 as a result of the determination by the processing of S4507 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the disadvantage time counter 223m has been initialized and does not need to be initialized again, so the processing of S4508 is skipped. This process ends.

By executing this release suggestion display process (S1821), the player plays a game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the command determination process executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. In each of the command determination processes S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processes as those of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment are executed, respectively. .. Further, in the command determination process in this modification, when it is determined that the storage state command has been received from the main control device 110 in the processing of S1921 (S1921: Yes), the image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. (S1929), the storage state command process of the above is executed, and this process is terminated.

The details of this storage state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command processing (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage valve 704a is notified that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) by the storage state command (S4601). Then, when it is determined that the switch to the closed state (reservoir state) has been notified (S4601: Yes), then the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63 (a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, by setting the display rear image change command to display (S4602) and setting the storage state flag 223k to ON, it is shown that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state (S4603), and the process is sent to S4604. And migrate.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the notification by the storage state command is not the closed state (storage state) (notified that the switch to the open state (release state) has been performed), (S4601: No). Next, a display rear image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63 (b)) corresponding to the open state (release state) to the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and a storage valve is set. The storage state flag 223k is set to off to indicate that the current state of the 704a is the open state (released state) (S4606). Then, in order to show that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to off (S4607), and the process shifts to S4604.

In the processing of S4604 executed after the processing of S4603 or S4607, the flow time counter 223l is used to determine whether or not the ball has been removed during the period from when the storage valve 704a is switched until the ball is released. A counter value corresponding to 1 second is set (S4604), and this process ends. By executing this storage state command processing (S1931), the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be appropriately updated in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, as the storage state when the sphere is stored inside, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken. These storage states have different entry ports where balls that have flowed into the storage device 700 can easily enter. Further, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily visually determined. Therefore, the player can be made to select whether or not it is better to reset the storage state by temporarily setting the storage valve 704a to the open state.

Further, an advantageous storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and an unfavorable storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the out opening shown in FIG. 87). By providing and, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88) will be obtained. Then, even if the storage state becomes unfavorable (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a, and the game aims at the advantageous storage state again (see FIG. 88). Can be done. In addition, by being in an advantageous storage state, it is possible to give a sense of accomplishment to the player, and by continuing to put the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, a large number of prize balls are obtained. You can have a sense of expectation for what you can do.

The pachinko machine 10 of this modification is configured to store two balls inside the storage device 700, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal structure capable of storing three or more balls may be used. .. In this case, if the ball entry sensor 228 is provided on the left side near the upper end of the guidance flow path 704, it can be easily determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is in a disadvantageous arrangement to be guided to the out port.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, by providing the ball entry sensor 228 on the left side near the upper end of the induction flow path 704, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 disadvantageous to the player? Although it was configured so that it could be determined whether or not it was, the mounting position of the ball entry sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged to the right near the upper end of the induction flow path 704. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 are arranged as shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, but when the arrangement is shown in FIG. 88, the stored balls are not detected. The ball entry sensor 228 may be arranged so that the upper ball among the stored balls is detected by the ball entry sensor 228. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is arranged so as to easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entry sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 228 for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. .. Therefore, it is notified that the ball is in an advantageous arrangement for the player as shown in FIG. 88 and that the stored ball is in an advantageous arrangement. Can be done. As a method of notification, for example, the characters "advantageously arranged" and the characters "right-handed big chance!" Are displayed on the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. You may. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous, so that the release button 800 is erroneously pressed (operated) to cause the ball stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. It is possible to prevent the problem (reset the advantageous arrangement).

Further, the number of ball entry sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of ball entry sensors 228 may be provided. More specifically, for example, the ball entry sensor 228 may be provided near the upper end of the induction flow path 704 to the right and to the left, respectively. As a result, when the sensor provided on the left side continues to detect the sphere for, for example, 5 seconds, it can be determined that the sensor is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87. Further, when the sensor provided on the right side continuously detects the sphere for, for example, 5 seconds, it can be determined that the sensor is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (arrangement disadvantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the out openings 703d and 703e), the above-mentioned suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed for the game. It is possible to urge a person to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. Further, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (arrangement advantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image notifying the player that the arrangement is advantageous to the player (for example, "advantageous"). By displaying the character "arranging" and the character "right-handed big chance!" Displayed in the small area Ds2), it is recognized that the current state is advantageous, and the game is played. You can improve your motivation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be tilted downward to the lower right, but the tilt may be reversed. As a result, it becomes easy to realize a storage state (see FIG. 88) that is advantageous for the player, so that the player can more actively aim at the storage device 700 and launch the ball. Further, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. This makes it possible to completely randomize whether the storage state is favorable or unfavorable.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but another trigger may be provided. For example, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be set to the open state during the jackpot, or may be configured to reset the storage state periodically. If the opportunity to reset the storage state is completely entrusted to the player, once the storage state becomes advantageous (see FIG. 88), the game will be continued while maintaining the storage state, and the hall will not be able to do so. It may be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is configured to be reset periodically, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the advantageous storage state from continuing for a long time, and thus it is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the hall.

In this modification, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. As a result, each player can start the game during the period when the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his / her taste.

Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be basically in the closed state (storage state), and a lottery is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. You may. Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an unfavorable arrangement in which the balls are easily guided to the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d, 703e (see FIG. 87), the lottery is won. As a result, the game can be performed in the hope that the storage valve 704a is opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the storage valve 704a is opened. You can let them play the game in the hope that they will continue to be out of the lottery so that they will not be lost. Therefore, it is possible to expect different lottery results depending on the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that it is possible to provide a novel playability. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In this modification, since the storage device 700 having a peculiar configuration that is not mounted on a general gaming machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. It may be configured to do so. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during the period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period when the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (reservoir state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. With this configuration, the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, so that the number of operations by the player can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the button 800 may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a playability that suits his or her own taste.

In this modification, when a certain period of time (1 minute) has elapsed since the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to release the player. Although it was configured to prompt the pressing (operation) of the button 800, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be integrally configured (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are collectively used as one operation button, and the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 may be used. On the other hand, they may be electrically connected to each other). Then, when it is determined that the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 704b for a certain period (1 minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be configured so that the variable type in which the effect is developed can be easily selected. As a result, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) in order to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state (release state) at the same time. In general, the player observes the result of the variable effect that informs whether or not the jackpot is the most interesting, so that when the variable effect that develops the effect by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the frame button 22 is surely pressed. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is being prompted. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

In this modification, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the front view of the first entry opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting right in the special gaming state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state) can be played. Can be more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for a big hit.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided with each storage valve by sliding to the front side of the front view and the back side of the front view. The flow path was closed and the ball could be stored in the upper part of the flow path, but the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to stand vertically with respect to the inner wall portion of the flow path to close the flow path, and in the open state, the storage valve collapses in the downstream direction of the flow path. The flow path may be configured to allow the sphere to pass. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not need to completely close the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a is shortened and the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a protrude toward the front side of the front view, the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704 are partially opened. It may be configured to be. Further, the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the price of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. Further, when the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704 is set to the open state (released state) by the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a, the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704 does not have to be completely opened. .. That is, a part of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be in a state of protruding into the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704. Further, the width of the open portion in the guide flow path 607 or the guide flow path 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the operating range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed, so that the power consumed for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. can. Further, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the inflowing sphere may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a to reduce the momentum of the flow, but the sphere will eventually flow down. (It can be made difficult to be stored (retained) at the positions of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even in this configuration, the same operation as in each of the above embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which a sphere can be stored on the guide flow path 607 and the guide flow path 704, and a state in which the sphere that has flowed into the guide flow path 607 and the guide flow path 704 flows down downstream. ..

In each of the above embodiments, both ends of the ball inlets provided in each storage device are out ports, but the out ports at both ends may be abolished. Even if the out port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can enter another entry port. Further, by eliminating the outlets at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of out ports are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the out ports provided inside the storage device, the out ports 66 provided below the front view of the game board 13. It may be a flow path for the ball to flow down to (see FIG. 2). As a result, it is possible to make one out port, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls that have entered the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of ejected balls. Therefore, since the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, one ball (a first embodiment, a modified example of the first embodiment, and a second embodiment) or two balls (a modified example of the second embodiment) is stored in the upper part of the storage valve. ), But the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured so that three or more balls can be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be configured to be stored side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve may be countable. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls may be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. .. As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls flow down to the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 602 all at once, so that a large amount (5 x 15) of prize balls is paid out in a short time. Can receive. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that he / she wants to store the ball inside the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be configured to be closed while the power supply is shut off. That is, when the power cutoff is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of power cutoff is restored. You may. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud in which a ball is made to enter the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power supply is cut off, and the prize ball is immediately obtained at the time of power recovery.

In each of the above embodiments, the entry port (winning opening) into which the ball flowing into the storage device enters is fixed by the induction flow path through which the ball flows down (that is, the arrangement of each entry port). Was fixed), but it is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a known crune or the like may be arranged on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning opening (ball entry opening) may be provided in a ring shape on the crune. Then, by rotating the crune, the winning opening (entry opening) into which the ball flowing down each induction flow path flows may be given randomness. As a result, the player can be made to watch the entrance of the ball that has flowed into the storage device with interest. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In each of the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is made visible, but the inside of the storage device may be made difficult to see from the front.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening and closing of the storage valve are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid 610 for the storage device may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 118. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 (upstream side in the direction in which the ball flows down the game board 13), and the special game is provided. In the state (big hit state), the prize ball is configured to be obtained by inserting the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 arranged inside the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the prize ball is paid out by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ball is sent to the storage device 600. It was configured so that the prize ball would be paid out by letting the ball enter. As a result, more prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is further improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (normal gaming state), the ball is closed by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a. Was configured to make it difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and to be able to store the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. Then, when a ball stored inside the storage device 600 exists in the normal gaming state, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact). It was configured as follows. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored balls occurs, the flow direction of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls. It was configured to change in the direction of (direction of the induction flow path 606). As a result, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal game state, it is anomalous to try to increase the number of balls held without going through the jackpot. It was configured so that the game method would not be fundamentally established.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the second storage device 1600 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. The detailed configuration of the second storage device 1600 will be described later with reference to FIG. 96, but the second storage device 1600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can flow, and the sphere is caused by the flow path flowing down. It is configured so that it is possible to win a prize in a specific general winning opening (probability changing winning opening) 630a and a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 630b. Further, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1601a capable of storing a ball flowing down a part of the flow path. The storage valve 1601a is opened (released) when a specific condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed) since the jackpot started), and the storage valve 1601a is opened in the second storage device 1600. The ball stored by the storage valve 1601a is configured to flow down in the second storage device.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the second variable winning device 650 is deleted, and the second storage device 1600 is used instead of the storage device 600. The points provided, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the configuration executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed. The partial processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. .. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. As shown in FIG. 95, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the area on the right side of the game board 13 with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, that is, the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The various configurations provided in the area provided in (hereinafter referred to as the right side area) are different. Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 provided in the right area of the game board 13 in the first embodiment has been deleted. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right side area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed to reach the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a. It is configured to allow the ball to enter.

Further, in the third embodiment, the second storage device 1600 is provided in the right side region of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 96, the second storage device 1600 has an opening (flow) formed by a frame body 1612 forming the outer shape of the second storage device 1600 and an outer peripheral wall of the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 95). It has an entrance) 1610a. The opening width of the opening (inflow port) 1610a is formed to be about 15 mm, and simultaneously restricts a plurality of balls from flowing into the second storage device 1600.

A plurality of nails are planted in the vicinity of the opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600 so that the ball launched by the right-handed game collides with the multiple nails and bounces off the right side region. It is configured. By making the flow direction of the ball irregular by the plurality of nails in this way, the ball flowing down in the right side region is distributed in the direction of flowing into the second storage device 1600 or the direction of passing through the first variable winning device 65. ..

Specifically, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13 so that one of the 20 balls fired in the right-handed game flows into the second storage device 1600. In addition, by changing the planting position of a plurality of nails or changing the inclination of the nails, the flow direction of the balls flowing down the right side region is changed, and the ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 is changed. Can be adjusted.

In the third embodiment, a plurality of nails provided in the vicinity of the opening (inlet) 1610a of the second storage device 1600 flow into the second storage device 1600 among the balls launched by the right-handed game. Although the ratio of the spheres to be struck can be set, other configurations may be used, and for example, a member capable of alternately switching the flow direction of the spheres may be provided. By using such a configuration in which the balls are regularly distributed, the ratio of the balls actually flowing into the second storage device 1600 can be easily compared with the preset ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600. Can be approximated.

Further, in the third embodiment, the nail P2 provided in the vicinity of the opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600 is adjusted to the upper left direction (upper left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) to perform a right-handed game. The ball fired by can be easily flowed toward the first variable winning device 65, while the nail P2 is adjusted to the upper right direction (upper right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) by the right-handed game. The fired ball can be easily flowed toward the second storage device 1600.

Specifically, by adjusting (moving) the nail P2 in the upper left direction (upper left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), one out of every 40 balls launched by the right-handed game becomes the second storage device 1600. By adjusting (moving) the nail P2 in the upper right direction (upper right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), which is set to flow in, one out of every 15 balls launched by the right-handed game is the second storage device 1600. Is set to flow into.

With this configuration, for example, when the nail P2 is adjusted to reduce the proportion of balls entering the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 As a result, the probability change state is likely to be given after the jackpot game is completed, while the ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game is reduced. The ratio of balls entering the winning device 65 increases, and the speed at which the jackpot game is digested can be increased. Therefore, no matter how the nail P2 is adjusted, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player.

In the third embodiment, by adjusting the nail P2, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the first variable winning device 65 and a state in which it is easy to enter the second storage device 1600. However, for example, there are a state in which it is easy to enter the first variable winning device 65 and a state in which it is easy to enter the second storage device 1600 by a member that is constantly variably controlled after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be on. It may be set to switch periodically, or a switching member is provided to switch between a state in which it is easy to enter the first variable winning device 65 and a state in which it is easy to enter the second storage device 1600 according to the gaming state. Alternatively, a selection member may be provided which can arbitrarily select either a state in which the player can easily enter the first variable winning device 65 or a state in which the player can easily enter the second storage device 1600.

Next, the internal configuration of the second storage device 1600 in the third embodiment will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 95. The second storage device 1600 has a plurality of flow paths through which the spheres can flow down, and is provided with a distribution device (distribution members 900 to 902 (see FIG. 96)) for distributing the flowing spheres to the plurality of flow paths. ing. Further, among the plurality of flow paths, a storage valve 1601a for limiting the flow of the sphere (storing the sphere) is provided in a part of the flow paths (first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96)). ..

The second storage device 1600 is provided with a specific general winning opening (probability variation winning opening) 630a and a general winning opening 630b in which a ball flowing down the second storage device 1600 can enter. (Probability change winning opening) When a ball enters the 630a, one prize ball is paid out, and when a ball enters the general winning opening 630b, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Furthermore, during the jackpot game, during the period from the execution of the first round game to the end of the final round game (hereinafter referred to as the probabilistic prize valid period), the specific general prize opening (probability change prize opening) ) When the ball enters the 630a (the ball passes through the probability change switch provided in the specific general winning opening 630a), a probability change game state which is an advantageous game state for the player is given after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to be possible. Details of the internal configuration of the second storage device 1600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98.

Further, in the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where a ball that has not flowed into the second storage device 1600 can pass, and a through gate 67 is provided below the first variable winning device 65. It is provided. The through gate 67 is arranged at a position where a part of the ball flowing down the second storage device 1600, which will be described later, can also pass (enter). A second entry port 640 is provided at a position where a ball that has passed (entered) the through gate 67 can enter.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows into either the second storage device 1600 or the first variable winning device 65 by a plurality of nails. The balls that are distributed so as to pass through and flow into the second storage device 1600 flow down in the second storage device 1600, and can enter the specific general winning opening 630a and the general winning opening 630b.

On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 is guided to the through gate 67 by a nail planted in the game board 13, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second entry port 640. It is configured.

Therefore, during the jackpot game, a ball is entered into the first variable winning device 65 by performing a right-handed game, and a part of the ball fired by the right-handed game (5% in this embodiment) is the second. It flows into the storage device 1600.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a provided in the second storage device 1600 during the probable change winning valid period, and the probable change is made after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to be able to give a game state.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is a game in which a player is allowed to enter a ball into the first variable winning device 65 to obtain a prize ball only by performing a right-handed game during a big hit game. By inserting a ball into the specific general winning opening 630a in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to simultaneously execute a game in which a probabilistic state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is given after the jackpot game is completed. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved during the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second storage device 1600, which are opened during the jackpot game, are arranged in the right side area of the game board 13, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, the second storage device 1600 may be provided in the left side region of the game board 13 (the left side of the variable display device unit 80), and the first variable winning device 65 may be provided in the right side area of the game board 13. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to select the target area during the jackpot game, and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, the configuration of the right side region of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is an enlarged view of the region of the two-dot chain line XCVI of FIG. 95.

As shown in FIG. 96, a second storage device 1600 is provided in the right region of the game board 13. The second storage device 1600 includes a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 1601 to 8th flow path 1608) through which balls can flow down, a storage valve 1601a capable of storing balls flowing down the first flow path 1601, and a seventh. The specific general winning opening 630a where the ball flowing down the flow path 1607 can enter, the general winning opening 630b where the ball flowing down the fifth flow path 1605 or the eighth flow path 1608 can enter, and the flow path of the ball. A plurality of distribution members for distribution (first distribution member 900 to third distribution member 902) and a plurality of sensors for detecting the passage or storage state of a sphere (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, It has a passage sensor 1600c to 1600e).

Here, with reference to FIG. 96, various configurations of the second storage device 1600 will be described in detail. First, each flow path formed in the second storage device 1600 will be described. The second storage device 1600 is provided with a partition wall 1611 for partitioning the area in the second storage device 1600, and the left side of the partition wall 1611 in the second storage device 1600 (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 96). The first flow path 1601 is formed in the region of No. 1, and the second flow path 1602 is formed in the region on the right side of the front view (right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 96) of the partition wall 1611 in the second storage device 1600.

The first flow path 1601 is formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) through which one ball can pass, and the storage valve 1601a described above is provided in a downstream portion thereof.

As shown in FIG. 96, the first flow path 1601 is formed by a partition wall 1611 so as to have a length (about 40 mm) capable of storing four balls when the storage valve 1601a is closed. The surface of the partition wall 1611 forming the first flow path 1601 is formed in a substantially arc shape in order to guide the sphere flowing down the first flow path 1601 to the storage valve 1601a.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the first flow path 1601 from colliding with the storage valve 1601a while falling (naturally falling), and it is possible to prevent the storage valve 1601a from being damaged. It has the effect of being able to. Further, when the storage valve 1601a is changed to the open (release) position, there is an effect that the ball stored in the first flow path 1601 can be smoothly flowed down.

Then, the sphere flowing down the first flow path 1601 falls on the first distribution member 900. The first distribution member 900 has a third flow path 1603 formed on the left side of the front view of the first distribution member 900 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) and the right side of the front view of the first distribution member 900 (FIG. 96). The spheres can be alternately distributed to the 4th flow path 1604 formed on the right side from the viewpoint of. The detailed configuration of the first distribution member 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

The third flow path 1603 is formed by a second partition wall 1613 provided in the second storage device 1600 so that the flow direction on the downstream side is a direct downward direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). A third distribution member 902 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the three flow paths 1603 falls. The third distribution member 902 has a seventh flow path 1607 formed on the left side of the front view of the third distribution member 902 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) and the right side of the front view of the third distribution member 902 (FIG. 96). The spheres can be alternately distributed to the 8th flow path 1608 formed on the right side from the viewpoint of. Since the detailed distribution configuration of the third distribution member 902 is the same as that of the first distribution member 900 described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96, the second flow path 1602 formed in the region on the right side of the front view of the partition wall 1611 is restricted from the direct flow of the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 by the guide nail P1. In the state where the upper limit number (4) of spheres is stored in the first flow path 1601, when a new sphere flows into the second storage device 1600, it newly flows into the second storage device 1600. The formed sphere is formed so as to be guided by colliding with the sphere stored in the first flow path 1601.

Further, even when the upper limit number (4) of balls is not stored in the first flow path 1601, the guide nail P1 and the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 95) collide with the outer peripheral wall, which causes a failure. A ball that bounces off the rules is configured to allow it to flow down the second flow path 1602. Specifically, about 5% of the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 are configured to flow into the second flow path 1602. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, about 5% of the balls launched in the right-handed game flow into the second storage device 1600, and about 5% of the balls that flow into the second storage device 1600. 5% is configured to flow into the second flow path 1602.

Regarding the inflow ratio of the above-mentioned balls, the planting positions and inclinations of the plurality of nails (guide nails P1) planted on the game board 13 may be changed, or the partition wall 1611 may have a different shape (for example, the partition wall 1611). It can be adjusted by changing the shape (shape to widen the distance between the top of the guide nail P1).

The second flow path 1602 formed in this way is configured such that the spheres distributed to the fourth flow path 1604 by the first distribution member 900 join on the downstream side thereof. The second flow path 1602 and the fourth flow path 1604 are partitioned by the first partition wall 1611, and a sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 may join the fourth flow path 1604 or be the first. The lower end of the first partition wall 1611 is extended in order to prevent a situation in which the distribution member 900 comes into contact with the distribution member 900.

Further, as will be described in detail later, a working piece 900 g attached to the first distribution member 900 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 can come into contact with the second flow path 1602. The distribution order of the first distribution member 900 can be changed by contacting the ball flowing down with the working piece 900 g.

The sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 abuts on the second partition wall 1613 and flows down in the direct downward direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). It falls to the second distribution member 901. The second distribution member 901 has a fifth flow path 1605 formed on the left side of the front view of the second distribution member 901 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) and the right side of the front view of the second distribution member 901 (FIG. 96). The spheres can be alternately distributed to the sixth flow path 1606 formed on the right side from the viewpoint of. Since the detailed distribution configuration of the second distribution member 901 is the same as that of the first distribution member 900 described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The spheres distributed to the 5th flow path 1605 are guided so as to be able to enter the general winning opening 630b in the same manner as the spheres distributed to the 8th flow path. On the other hand, the spheres distributed to the sixth flow path 1606 pass through the opening (discharge port) 1610b and are discharged to the outside of the second storage device 1600.

Next, the configuration of the storage valve 1601a will be described with reference to FIG. 96. The storage valve 1601a has a closed position in which the ball cannot flow down (difficult) in the first flow path 1601 of the second storage device 1600 and a state in which the ball can flow down (easily) in the first flow path 1601. It is configured to be variable to the open position.

Specifically, the storage valve 1601a is positioned in the closed position by projecting toward the front view of the second storage device 1600 (front direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), and is located in the back direction of the front view of the second storage device 1600. It is composed of a shutter member located in the open position by being buried (in the back direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), and can be changed to the open position by setting the solenoid for the storage device 610 (see FIG. 99) to ON. It is configured to do.

The control for setting the solenoid 610 for the storage device to ON will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 111, but in the third embodiment, it is predetermined based on the execution of the jackpot game. The storage device solenoid 610 is set to be turned on at the same timing (for example, in the case of the jackpot A, 3 seconds after the jackpot game is executed).

Next, the configuration of the distribution device (first distribution member 900 to third distribution member 902) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. The second storage device 1600 has a first distribution member 900, a second distribution member 901, and a third distribution member 902 as distribution members capable of distributing balls in the left-right direction. The first distribution member 900 receives the ball flowing down from the first flow path 1601 at the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When the ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the first distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 96) due to the weight of the ball, and distributes the ball to the third flow path 1603. Here, the first distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees around each of the left and right sides, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c.

On the base body provided on the back side of the second storage device 1600, the base side magnet 900e is arranged at a position where the magnet 900b of the first distribution member 900 comes directly above (directly above from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). There is. The magnet 900b of the first distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 900e are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 900e is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip portion. The base side magnet 900e is arranged and fixed so that the tip portion thereof faces the first distribution member 900 side.

Like the base side magnet 900e, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the first distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 900e side. The base side magnet 900e and the first distribution unit 900 are at a position where the first distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodation unit 900a and the accommodation unit 900c is directly above (directly above from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). The magnet 900b is closest to the magnet 900b (the tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other, and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c faces directly upward. It will not stop at, and will be maintained at the position rotated to the left or right.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 900e repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates to the left to guide the ball to the third flow path 1603, and then the first distribution member 900. Can be prevented from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the sphere to the third flow path 1603, the accommodating portion 900c is in a state of facing upward, and then the sphere flowing down from the first flow path 1601 enters the accommodating portion 900c and becomes a sphere. Due to the weight, the first distribution member 900 rotates to the right and guides the sphere to the fourth flow path 1604. In this way, the first distribution member 900 can alternately guide the spheres flowing down from the first flow path 1601 to the third flow path 1603 and the fourth flow path 1604.

Here, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a case where the first distribution member 900 is stopped in a state where the accommodating portion 900c is rotated to a position facing upward. In this case, when the ball flows down from the first flow path 1601, the ball is housed in the accommodating portion 900c, the first distribution member 900 rotates clockwise due to the weight of the ball, and the ball is distributed to the fourth flow path 1604. Be done. After the sphere is distributed to the fourth flow path 1604 by the first distribution unit 900, the first distribution member 900 stops at a position where the accommodating unit 900a faces upward as shown in FIG. 97. After that, when the ball flows down from the first flow path 1601, it is housed in the accommodating portion 900a and the ball is distributed to the third flow path 1603. Therefore, the spheres can be alternately distributed to the third flow path 1603 and the fourth flow path 1604. A third distribution member 902 is provided on the downstream side of the third flow path 1603, and a second distribution member 901 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 1602. Since the second distribution member 901 and the third distribution member 902 have the same distribution structure as the first distribution member 900 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, a working piece 900 g is provided in the lower part of the first distribution member 900 (on the side of the second flow path 1602), and the first distribution member 900 is rotated to a position where the accommodating portion 900c is directed upward. When stopped in the state (see FIG. 96), the sphere is configured to come into contact with the actuating piece 900g as it passes through the second flow path 1602. Therefore, when the sphere passes through the second flow path 1602, the sphere comes into contact with the working piece 900g, so that the first distribution member 900 rotates clockwise and the accommodating portion 900a faces upward (see FIG. 97). ) Will stop.

With this configuration, the first distribution member 900 can change its rotation position without performing an operation of distributing the balls flowing down from the first flow path 1601. Therefore, the direction in which the balls of the first distribution member 900, which is configured to distribute the balls alternately and regularly, can be randomized, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the distribution destination of the balls. It has the effect of being able to.

Next, a plurality of winning openings (specific general winning opening 630a and general winning opening 630b) provided in the second storage device 1600 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a specific general winning opening (probability changing winning opening) 630a. The specific general winning opening (probability changing winning opening) 630a is configured so that the privilege given depends on the timing at which the ball enters. Specifically, during the jackpot game, if a ball enters while the first variable winning device 65 is open (during the probability variation winning valid period), a predetermined number of prize balls (one in the present embodiment). Is given, and after the jackpot game is completed, a probability fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variation state) in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set high is given.

On the other hand, if the ball enters at any other timing (during the normal game state or the big hit game, while the first variable winning device 65 is not open (during the probability variation winning invalid period)), a predetermined number of balls are entered. Only a prize ball (one in this embodiment) is awarded.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released differs depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 100b, but when a specific jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) is selected, the opening period from the start of the jackpot game to the opening of the first variable winning device 65. The storage valve 1601a is released at the timing (3 seconds after the start of the big hit) when the ball stored by the storage valve 1601a during the (probability change winning invalid period) enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

On the other hand, when a jackpot type other than a specific jackpot type (for example, jackpot B) is selected, the jackpot game is started and stored during the period when the first variable winning device 65 is open (probability variable winning valid period). The storage valve 1601a is released at the timing (10 seconds after the start of the big hit) when the ball stored by the valve 1601a enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

As a result, it is possible to make the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a different depending on the jackpot type selected when the ball is won in the state where the ball is stored in the storage valve 1601a. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the timing at which the storage valve is released after winning the jackpot, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the third embodiment, the release timing of the storage valve 1601a is set differently according to the jackpot type, but the timing at which the ball stored by the storage valve 1601a enters the specific general winning opening 630a. If the period during which the first variable winning device 65 has not started to be opened during the jackpot game (probability variable winning invalid period) and the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (probable variable winning valid period) can be set. Often, for example, the release timing of the storage valve 1601a may be fixed, and the length of the opening period of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game may be set to be different for each jackpot type. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a depending on the jackpot type, as in the third embodiment.

Further, depending on the jackpot type, both the release timing and the opening period of the storage valve 1601a may be set differently, and conditions other than the jackpot type (for example, the gaming state when the jackpot is won (normal game)) may be set. The release timing of the above-mentioned storage valve 1601a and the opening period in the jackpot game may be set differently depending on the state, the probabilistic game state, etc.)). As a result, it is possible to complicate the timing of entering the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a when the jackpot is won, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing of entering the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, if the timing of the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a is during the probable change winning valid period, the probable change state is given after the jackpot ends. The probabilistic winning valid period is specifically the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open (round game period) and the end condition of one round (10 balls are entered or 30 seconds have elapsed. ) Is established and the period (interval period) from the establishment of the first variable winning device 65 to the opening of the first variable winning device 65 in the next round is included.

Therefore, even during the interval period during the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is closed), when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, a probable change state is given after the jackpot game ends. Will be done. That is, in the configuration used in the third embodiment, the big hit is caused by the ball passing through the specific winning opening (for example, the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65) opened during the big hit game. It is possible to set a period (a period during which the probability change state can be given) that is continuously advantageous to the player during the jackpot game, as compared with the case where the specific area to which the probability change state is given is provided after the end.

Further, in the third embodiment, a specific winning opening (for example, the first variable winning device 65) is opened during a big hit game in a specific area (specific general winning opening 630a) to which a probabilistic state can be given by passing a ball. Since it is provided in a place other than the specific winning opening 65a), it is in a probable change state due to a ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, that is, a ball (waste ball) that had no merit for the player in the past. A game will be played to determine whether or not the player can win. As a result, during the jackpot game, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 65 to acquire a prize ball and a game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a to acquire a probable change state are simultaneously advanced. It becomes possible. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a plurality of playability to the player at the same time, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, like the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the specific general winning opening 630a are located at positions where winning can be achieved in a game aiming at the same area (in this embodiment, a right-handed game). It is good to provide. By doing so, it is possible to easily and simultaneously advance a plurality of games to the player.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, even if the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the right side region and the specific general winning opening 630a is provided in the normal gaming area (left side region). good. As a result, during the round period during the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open), the right-handed game is performed, and the interval period (the end condition of one round (10 balls or 30 balls)) is performed. During the period from the establishment of (seconds) to the opening of the first variable winning device 65 in the next round), a normal game (left-handed game) is performed, and the ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be configured to execute a game of making a ball.

This makes it possible to complicate the game during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the monotonous game.

Further, the general prize opening 630b provided in the second storage device 1600 is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out when the balls enter.

Next, the flow of the sphere that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG. 96 is an enlarged view of the region surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI of FIG. 95, and is a diagram showing an example of a case where the storage valve 1601a is in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 96, the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 flows down the first flow path 1601 and stays (stores) on the storage valve 1601a located in the closed state. The first flow path 1601 is configured so that four spheres can be stored, and the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 with the four spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 are the first flow. It comes into contact with the sphere stored in the road 1601 and flows down to the second flow path 1602 (see the arrow in the figure).

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 96, the first distribution member 900 is in a state of rotating to the left side, and the actuating piece 900 g is located at a position where the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 abuts. The sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 pushes 900 g of the working piece up in the traveling direction of the sphere (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 96).

Here, the state after the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 pushes up the actuated piece 900 g will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is an enlarged view of the region surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI of FIG. 95, and is a diagram showing an example in which the state of FIG. 96 is advanced. As shown in FIG. 97, in the state shown in FIG. 96, the actuating piece 900 g attached to the first distribution member 900 is pushed up by the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602, and the first distribution member 900 is rotated to the right. It changes to a moving state. In the state where the first distribution member 900 is rotated to the right, the actuated piece 900 g moves to a position where the sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 does not abut (slightly abuts), so that the second flow. The first distribution member 900 does not rotate to the left due to the ball flowing down the path 1602.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the direction in which the first distribution member 900 distributes the sphere can be changed by the sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602. Further, when the first distribution member 900 is varied by the sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602, the first distribution member 900 is in a state of rotating to the right. The state in which the first distribution member 900 is rotated to the right is a state in which the ball dropped on the first distribution member 900 is distributed to the left side, which is advantageous to the player in the third embodiment. It is possible to reduce the number of balls required to put a ball into the specific general winning opening 630a.

More specifically, the spheres that enter the specific general winning opening 630a are the spheres that have flowed down into the first flow path 1601, the third flow path 1603, and the seventh flow path 1607. First, the sphere flowing down the first flow path 1601 is distributed to the third flow path 1603 by the first distribution member 900 with a probability of 1/2, and the sphere flowing down the third flow path 1603 is distributed to the third flow path 1603. By the member 902, it is distributed to the 7th flow path 1607 with a probability of 1/2.

That is, in order to ensure that the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 1601 enter the specific general winning opening 630a, it is necessary to allow a maximum of four balls to flow down. However, by keeping the first distribution member 900 in a state of rotating to the right, the ball that first fell into the first distribution member 900 is distributed to the third flow path 1603, so that the specific general prize is surely won. The number of balls required to enter the mouth 630a can be set to 3, and the number of balls required to enter the specific general winning opening 630a can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 97, the explanation will be continued. The sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 1602 falls on the second distribution member 901. In the state shown in FIG. 97, since the second distribution member 901 is rotating to the right, the ball that has fallen into the second distribution member 901 is distributed to the fifth flow path 1605, and the general winning opening 630b Enter the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a state in which the storage valve 1601a is changed to an open (released) state and a ball stored in the first flow path 1601 flows down will be described. FIG. 98 is an enlarged view of the region surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI of FIG. 95, and is a diagram showing an example of a case where the storage valve 1601a is opened (released) in the state of FIG. 97.

As shown in FIG. 98, when the storage valve 1601a is opened, the balls (4 pieces) stored in the first flow path 1601 flow down to the first distribution member 900. In the third embodiment, the first flow path 1601 is formed so that the interval at which the spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 reach the first distribution member 900 is 0.5 seconds apart. Has been done.

In the state shown in FIG. 98, among the balls stored in the first flow path 1601, the ball stored first (the ball stored on the most downstream side) wins a prize in the specific general winning opening 630a. As described above, the first distribution member 900 and the third distribution member 902 are located.

The time required for the ball stored on the most downstream side of the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is 1.5 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is opened (released). be. Further, as described above, since the interval at which the spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 reach the first distribution member 900 is 0.5 seconds, they are stored in the first flow path 1601. The time required for the second ball (the second ball from the downstream side) to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is 2 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is opened (released). Similarly, the storage valve 1601a opens (releases) the time required for the third ball (third ball from the downstream side) stored in the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. ), And the time required for the fourth ball (top ball) stored in the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is the storage valve 1601a. It has been 3 seconds since was opened (released).

As described above, in the present embodiment, four balls can be stored in the first flow path 1601 in the second storage device 1600, and the balls are surely stored in the specific general winning opening 630a. It is configured so that a maximum of four first flow paths 1601 must flow down in order to allow the ball to enter the ball. Therefore, by storing the balls up to the upper limit (4 pieces) in the second storage device 1600, the balls can be surely put into the specific general winning opening 630a when the storage valve 1601a is opened (released).

As a result, for example, even if the reserved storage number of the special symbol reaches the upper limit, the player can be made to continuously play the game in order to store the ball in the second storage device 1600, and the operation of the game can be performed. It has the effect of being able to increase.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls that can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a is configured to be able to be stored, but for example, the upper limit number that can be stored may be three. In this case, when the storage valve 1601a is opened (released) due to the rotational state of each distribution member (first distribution member 900 and third distribution member 902), a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. Since whether or not to play the ball changes, the player can watch the flow of the ball and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

Further, in this case, by letting the ball flow down to the second flow path 1602, the rotation position of the first distribution member 900 is set to a rotation position advantageous to the player (a position rotating to the right side). , The number of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 are first guided to the first flow path 1601 and stored in the first flow path 1601, but the second storage device 1600 A plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can flow down are provided between the opening 1610a and the region where the sphere can be stored (first flow path 1601), and a part of the sphere that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 is stored. It may be configured as such, or a distribution means (means for randomly distributing balls) other than the configuration in which the balls are regularly distributed between the area where the balls can be stored and the specific general winning opening 630a like a distribution member. ) May be provided.

By using such a configuration, the flow of balls in the second storage device 1600 can be complicated, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting tired of the monotonous game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 900 is provided with a working piece 900g, and the ball flows down the second flow path 1602 to move the first distribution member 900 to a rotation position advantageous to the player ( Although the configuration of rotating) is used, a similar working piece may be provided on other distribution members. Further, the distribution member may be rotated to a rotation position which is disadvantageous to the player by operating the working piece.

As a result, even when a distribution member capable of regularly distributing spheres is used, the flow of spheres can be complicated. Further, since the balls flow down through the plurality of flow paths in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to change the number required for the balls to enter the specific general winning opening 630a, so that the number is as small as possible. It is possible to continuously play the game so that the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a by the number of balls, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Next, various sensors (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, passage sensor 1600c to 1600e) provided in the second storage device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. The signals output from various sensors (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, passage sensor 1600c to 1600e) provided in the second storage device 1600 are output to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, and are output thereof. The number of balls that flowed into the second storage device 1600 based on the signal, the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600, the number of balls that passed through the flow path in the second storage device 1600, and the second storage device. It is configured so that the number of balls stored in 1600 can be managed.

The inflow detection sensor 1600a is a sensor that detects a ball passing through the opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600. Based on the signal output from the inflow detection sensor 1600a, the number of balls that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 can be grasped.

Next, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b is a sensor that detects that the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 of the second storage device 1600 has reached the upper limit amount (4 pieces). This upper limit detection sensor is configured to output a detection signal when a sphere to be detected is continuously detected for a predetermined time (2 seconds). This prevents the detection signal from being erroneously output when the sphere passes through the first flow path 1601, and reliably detects the state in which the sphere is accumulated (retained) in the first flow path 1601. Can be done.

The pass sensor 1600c is a sensor that detects that a sphere has passed through the first flow path 1601, the pass sensor 1600d is a sensor that detects that a sphere has passed through the second flow path 1602, and the pass sensor 1600e is an opening. It is a sensor that detects that a sphere has passed through the portion 1610b.

In this way, by providing a sensor for grasping the passage or storage status of the ball with respect to the second storage device 1600, for example, each winning opening (specific general winning opening 630a and general) provided in the second storage device 1600. By combining with the information indicating the number of balls entered into the winning opening 630b), it becomes possible to easily grasp that a problem such as ball clogging has occurred in the second storage device 1600.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b can detect that the sphere stored in the first flow path 1601 has reached the upper limit. For example, the sphere stored in the first flow path 1601 can be detected. The detection sensor may be arranged so that the number of the sensors can be grasped. This makes it possible to grasp the storage status of the spheres in the second storage device 1600 in more detail.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the third embodiment is such that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The configuration of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the flow path solenoid 611 connected to the input / output port of the main control device 110 has been deleted, and the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 has various types. The difference is that the sensor group (inflow detection sensor 1600a to passage sensor 1600e) is electrically connected. Since other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the third embodiment, various sensor groups 229 are electrically connected to the input / output port 225. In the various sensor group 229, the upper limit is the number of balls stored by the inflow detection sensor 1600a for detecting the inflow of balls into the second storage device 1600 and the storage valve 1601a provided in the second storage device 1600. An upper limit detection sensor 1600b for detecting that the sensor has reached, a passage sensor 1600c for detecting a sphere passing through the first flow path 1601 in the second storage device 1600, and a second flow path 1602 in the second storage device 1600. It is composed of a passing sensor 1600d that detects a passing ball and a passing sensor 1600e that detects a ball passing through the sixth flow path 1606 in the second storage device 1600, and the detection signals from the various sensors described above are voice lamps. It is output to the control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 makes it possible to determine whether or not the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 is normally discharged by receiving the detection signals output from the various sensors described above. Specifically, the number of balls that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 is calculated based on the signal output from the inflow detection sensor 1600a. Then, based on the signal output from the passage sensor 1600e, the number of balls passing through the sixth flow path 1606, that is, the number of balls discharged to the outside of the second storage device 1600 is calculated.

Further, the number of balls entered into the specific general winning opening 630a and the general winning opening 630b is calculated based on the winning information command output from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to compare the total number of spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 with the total number of spheres that have been discharged from the second storage device 1600. More specifically, the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 are calculated in chronological order, and a predetermined time difference (about 5 seconds), that is, If the increase / decrease in the number of balls matches with the time difference of the time spent for the game balls to flow normally in the second storage device 1600, it is determined to be normal.

Further, since a maximum of four balls can be stored in the second storage device 1600, the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 in a normal gaming state (a state in which the storage valve 1601a is closed). When comparing the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 with the number of balls discharged, an error of four balls is allowed, and in the jackpot game state (state in which the storage valve 1601a is open), the first 2 Since there are no balls stored in the storage device 1600, it is advisable to perform a comparison without considering the above-mentioned tolerance (4 balls).

Further, by providing a sensor capable of detecting the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to easily grasp the existence of balls illegally staying in the second storage device 1600.

For example, it is specified when the ball is intentionally retained in the second storage device 1600 and a state advantageous for the player (a state in which a probability change is given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a). One ball in the general winning opening 630b, which is set to pay out more prize balls than other general winning openings (general winning opening 63) by inserting a ball into the general winning opening 630a. It is possible to discover the act of repeatedly entering the ball.

The method of monitoring the ball flow in the second storage device 1600 based on the above-mentioned various signals is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. In the present embodiment, the total number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the total number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 are calculated to determine the presence or absence of balls staying in the second storage device 1600. Although it is possible, for example, the number of balls flowing down the first flow path 1601, the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 1603, the number of balls flowing down the fourth flow path 1604, and the specific general winning opening 630a are entered. Even if the number of balls is calculated and it is determined whether or not a ball that can enter the specific general winning opening 630a (a ball that has flowed down the first flow path 1601a) is retained in the second storage device 1600. good. When the configuration is used in this way, the open / closed state of the storage valve 1601a and, when the storage valve 1601a is closed, the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 can be calculated by the storage valve 1601a. It is good to set it to. As a result, it is necessary to properly grasp the situation in which the ball is illegally entered into the winning opening (specific general winning opening 630a) which is most advantageous to the player among the winning openings provided in the second storage device 1600. Is possible.

In the above-mentioned example, the illegal entry into the specific general winning opening 630a is targeted, but the illegal entry into the general winning opening 630b may be targeted.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (a). FIG. 100A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, the contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed and the open scenario setting table 202e is added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. It differs in that it is.

Here, the first type selection table 202b in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (b). FIG. 100B is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection table 202b in the third embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment adds a jackpot C as a jackpot type to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) in the first embodiment described above, and each of them. The difference is that the contents specified in the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) have been changed and the hit of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) has been changed. However, the other configurations are the same as those of the type selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Is stipulated. This jackpot A is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 8 rounds and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened is set 3 seconds after the start of the jackpot. The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". This jackpot B is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened is set 10 seconds after the start of the jackpot. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99", the jackpot C is associated and defined. This jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for two rounds and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened is set one second after the start of the jackpot.

In this way, since the number of rounds in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened are set according to the jackpot type, the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is set. It is possible to give different advantageous states to the player.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, the jackpot B is associated and defined in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is associated and defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 99". There is. Since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C specified corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the special symbol 1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 50%, the jackpot B is selected at 20%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 30%. If the player wins, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 20%, the jackpot B is selected at 70%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 (b), but among the jackpot A to the jackpot C, the ball stored in the storage valve 1601a during the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. The jackpots B and C are the jackpots for which the storage valve 1601a is released at the timing when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

The total ratio of the jackpot B and the jackpot C is set to be 50% when the jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 and 80% when the jackpot is won in the special symbol 2. That is, the special symbol game using the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player (the probability variation state is likely to be given) than the special symbol game using the special symbol 1.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned content is only the ratio of the balls stored by the storage valve 1601a entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 during the big hit game. That is, as in the third embodiment, when the specific general winning opening 630a is provided at a position where the ball launched in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game can enter, the jackpot game is in progress. There is a possibility that a ball fired at the ball (a ball that is not stored in the storage valve 1601a) enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

As a result, when the ball stored in the storage valve 1601a enters the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing other than the timing when the probability change state can be given, or when the big hit is won in the state where the ball is not stored in the storage valve 1601a. Even if there is, it is possible to enter the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game. In this case, since the number of balls fired during the jackpot game increases as the jackpot game period is longer, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101A is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third embodiment. The variation pattern selection table 202d includes the normal medium jackpot table 202d1 in which the variation pattern when the special symbol jackpot is won among the variation patterns of the special symbol in the normal gaming state, and the special symbol in the normal gaming state. Of the fluctuation patterns, the normal center-out table 202d2, which defines the fluctuation pattern when the special symbol jackpot is not won, and the special symbol jackpot among the fluctuation patterns of the special symbol in the time-saving (probability change) gaming state. Of the time-saving (probability variation) medium jackpot table 202d3 in which the variation pattern when winning is specified, and the variation pattern of the special symbol in the time-saving (probability variation) gaming state, the variation pattern when the special symbol jackpot is not won is The specified time saving (probability variation) middle / out table 202d4 is set.

In each table 202d1 to 202d4, for example, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. As a variation pattern for big hits, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 101 (b) and 101 (c), the fluctuation pattern referred to in the time-saving (probability variation) gaming state will be described in detail. FIG. 101 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving (probability-changing) medium-big hit table 202d3, and FIG. 101 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving (probability-changing) middle-out table 202d4.

First, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), as the variation type corresponding to the case where the jackpot is won during the time saving (probability variation) game, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the hit is normal. 5 seconds) is specified in association with each other, and as a variation type corresponding to the case where a big hit is won during a time saving (probability variation) game, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is a hit in the range of "100 to 198". Long (60 seconds) is associated and specified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 150" as the variation type corresponding to the case where the jackpot is not won during the time saving (probability variation) game. Normal (3 seconds) is associated and specified, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "151 to 198" as the variation type corresponding to the case where the jackpot is not won during the time saving (probability variation) game. Is specified in association with the off-long (60 seconds).

In this way, during the time-saving (probability change) game, the fluctuation pattern in which the relatively short fluctuation time is defined is set so that it is easy to select, and the number of fluctuations per unit time is larger than that in the normal gaming state. It is set. Although not shown, the normal medium-sized jackpot table 202d1 and the normal medium-sized hit table 202d2 define a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a normal fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, as described above, the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be selected even during the time reduction (probability change). This is a time provided for the player to perform an effect of inciting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the right-handed game is executed during the time reduction (probability change), it is a game state in which a plurality of balls can be stored by the storage valve 1601a which is in the closed state. In this storable game state, if the next big hit is won in a short period of time, the big hit game may be started without the balls being stored in the storage valve 1601a.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be executed while the time is shortened (probability change). As a result, the jackpot is won in a short period of time during the game state in which the ball can be stored in the storage valve 1601a (probability change), and the jackpot game is started without the ball being stored in the storage valve 1601a. It has the effect of suppressing the storage.

The configuration used in the third embodiment may be used as long as it is configured to prevent the gaming state in which the ball can be stored in the storage valve 1601a from ending in a short period of time. For example, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time may be set from the start of the time saving (probability variation) state until the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), or the special symbol may be set. A fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time may be set only when the winning result of is a big hit. Further, it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time until the number of balls stored by the storage valve 1601a reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), and when the fluctuation time reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the fluctuation time is reached. May be configured to facilitate the selection of short variation patterns.

Next, the open scenario setting table 202e in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario setting table 202e in the third embodiment. The open scenario setting table 202e defines the setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the first hit type selection table 202b and the gaming state (usually, probability variation) when the jackpot is won.

Here, the open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1 defined in the open scenario setting table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1. This open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the normal game state, and corresponds to the selected jackpot type, the opening period, the inter-round interval period, and the ending in the jackpot game. Each period is set.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is set to "10 seconds", the interval period is set to "4 seconds", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is jackpot B. In this case, the opening period is set to "1 second", the interval period is set to "5 seconds", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds". If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening period is "1 second". The interval period is set to "2 seconds" and the ending period is set to "1 second".

In this way, by changing the opening period, interval period, and ending period according to the jackpot type, it is possible to set the timing of entering the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game in a complicated manner. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), the open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202e2 is also set in the open scenario setting table 202e. FIG. 102 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202e2. This open scenario table (probability change) 202e2 is a table that is referred to when a big hit is won during the probability change (time reduction) state, and the set time is different from the above-mentioned open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1. The tables differ in that they are the same, otherwise they are the same table.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is set to "1 second", the interval period is set to "1 second", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is jackpot B. In this case, the opening period is set to "4 seconds", the interval period is set to "1 second", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds". If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening period is "1 second". The interval period is set to "20 seconds" and the ending period is set to "1 second".

With this configuration, if a jackpot is won during the probability change (time reduction), the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released is specified during the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is being opened during the jackpot game. It is the timing when the ball can enter the general winning opening 630a. Further, in the jackpot C, since the interval time between rounds is set to 20 seconds, the jackpot period is longer than the jackpot game when the jackpot C is selected in the jackpot won in the normal state, and the probability changes. It is possible to increase the probability that the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the period when the state can be granted.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the normal state. It is possible to make it easier to continuously provide an advantageous game state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment has an operation counter 203k, a remaining ball timer flag 203m, a remaining ball timer 203n, a probability change effective flag 203o, and a probability change effective timer provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. 203p has been deleted, and the timer 203r and the probability variation winning valid flag 203s have been added.

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving / medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag 203h is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 112). That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of the normal symbol 100 times is given.

The probability variation winning valid flag 203s is a flag for setting a period for granting a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game. If a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a while the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to ON, in addition to the payout of the prize ball (one in the present embodiment) preset as the general winning opening. , A probable change state is given after the jackpot game is over.

The probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to on when the first round is started in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) (S1156 in FIG. 111), and it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If (S1109: Yes in FIG. 111), it is set to off (S1157 in FIG. 111). If a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a when the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is not set to on (set to off), the winning ball preset as the general winning opening ( In this embodiment, one) is paid out.

Next, returning to FIG. 99, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. The ROM 222 in the third embodiment has an expectation display selection table 222b added to the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. The expected degree display selection table 222b will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 105.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, when the player wins the jackpot in the probability variation (time saving) state in which the right-handed game is executed with respect to the first embodiment described above, the probability variation state is given after the end of the current jackpot. An effect of displaying the degree of expectation (probability change degree of expectation display effect) has been added.

This probability variation expectation display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 104. First, with reference to FIG. 104 (a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the probable change (time reduction) state will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts as in the first embodiment described above, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640 is the holding ball. The number is displayed, and further, a "right-handed display (game guidance display)" indicating that the current game state is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed is displayed in the small area Ds3, and the small area Ds2 is displayed. Guidance (game guidance display) to the effect that it is advantageous for the player when the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 is a letter (“Chance when the ball enters the right warp”) and a figure (upper right area of the game board 13). It is magnified and displayed as a right warp (the figure showing the path through which the ball flows into the second storage device 1600) with an arrow).

By displaying the game guidance in this way, the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 (closed state) in addition to the game in which the player wins a big hit with a normal special symbol during the probability change (time reduction) state. It is possible to easily grasp that the game of storing the ball by the storage valve 1601a), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the game.

As the game guidance display in the probabilistic (time reduction) state, any configuration other than the configuration used in this embodiment may be used as long as the configuration guides the game in which the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 during the probabilistic (time reduction) state. good. For example, a display device (sub-display device) different from the display device that displays the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to display an effect according to the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the effect performed on the second display device may be lively. As a result, when the special symbol is out of order, the player pays attention to the sub-display device, so that it becomes difficult to recognize that the special symbol is out of the lottery.

Further, the content of the effect displayed on the sub-display device may be determined based on the result of pre-reading of the special symbol. Further, even if the display device (third symbol display device 81) on which the third symbol is displayed and the sub display device are configured to be movable, control to move each display device according to the game situation is executed. good.

This is advantageous for the player in the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of simultaneously executing a plurality of games (a game in which a big hit lottery is performed with a special symbol and a game in which a ball flows into the second storage device 1600). There is an effect that the player can be surely notified of the game result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104 (b), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state will be described. FIG. 104B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the special symbol jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state, the same numbers of the third symbols are displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, the degree of expectation that the probability change state is given after the end of this big hit game is displayed in the small area DS2 (“80%” in this figure).

Here, the probability variation expectation display displayed in the small area Ds2 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a predetermined period during the jackpot game (during the jackpot game (condition device is operating), while the first variable winning device 65 is being opened (operation of the accessory continuous operating device). When a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a in (middle))), a probable change state is given after the jackpot game is completed.

A storage valve 1601a is provided in the flow path (first flow path 1601) capable of entering the specific general winning opening 630a in the second storage device 1600, and the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 is provided. It is configured to be storable. This storage valve 1601a wins a jackpot with a special symbol, is released (opened) after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the case of jackpot A) has elapsed since the jackpot game was started, and a ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It becomes a state.

This second storage device 1600 is configured to be able to store up to four balls, and when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) and the first ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, the storage valve A flow path is formed so that the ball enters 1.5 seconds after the 1601a is released (opened). Next, when the second ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, two seconds after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened), the third ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. In this case, 2.5 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened), if the fourth ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) and then 3 A flow path is formed so as to enter the specific general winning opening 630a after a second.

That is, in the third embodiment, it is specified by the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 before the jackpot is won, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened), and the length of the jackpot game period. The degree of expectation that a ball enters the general winning opening 630a and a probable change state is given changes.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 104 (b). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the selected jackpot type and the ball storage information in the second storage device 1600 are based on the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m. Then, a numerical value specified in the expectation degree display selection table 222b, which will be described later, is selected, and the numerical value is displayed as a probability variation expectation degree in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, by displaying as a numerical value the degree of expectation that the probability change state will be given after the end of this big hit game when the jackpot is won, for example, when the probability change expectation is high, the player feels reassured. On the other hand, when the probability change expectation is low, the game of inflowing the ball into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game can be positively performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, instead of displaying the probability change expectation to the player in a state where it is decided in advance whether or not the probability change state is given, the specific general winning opening 630a is displayed at the timing when the probability change state can be actually given. Since the possibility that the ball will enter is displayed as the expected degree, it is possible to execute a numerical display with high reliability for the player.

In the third embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the winning jackpot and the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m are used as information when selecting the numerical value of the probability change expectation, but other information is used. It may be used to calculate the probability variation expectation. For example, the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 can be detected, and the number of balls information indicating the number of balls stored when the jackpot is won or the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 is provided. It is configured so that the distribution status of a plurality of distribution units can be detected, and the numerical value of the probability variation expectation degree is calculated using the ball number information indicating the number of balls required for the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be configured to be selected. In this way, by selecting the numerical value based on a plurality of information, the reliability of the numerical value of the probability variation expectation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is increased, and the player is notified of the highly reliable numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that a numerical value having a low reliability is displayed and the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Here, the expectation degree display selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the expectation degree display selection table 222b. The expectation degree display selection table 222b is a table referred to when the numerical value of the above-mentioned probability variation expectation degree display effect is selected with reference to FIG. 104 (b), and is a winning jackpot type and a special ball. Each numerical value is configured to be selected according to the setting status of the flow flag 223m and the value of the effect counter.

When the expectation degree display selection table 222b is won by a big hit (S5002: Yes) in the time saving medium display processing (S1852 in FIG. 118) described later, and it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to ON (S5002: Yes). S5003: No), referred to (S5005).

Specifically, when the winning jackpot type is jackpot A and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the production counter is set to "50" corresponding to the range of "0 to 159". , "40" is set corresponding to the range of "160 to 198". In addition, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to off in the jackpot A, the value of the effect counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "40" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". Then, "50" is set respectively.

If the winning jackpot type is jackpot B and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the production counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "80" is set to "160". "60" is set corresponding to the range of "to 198". Further, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to off in the jackpot B, the value of the effect counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "60" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". Then, "80" is set respectively.

Furthermore, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the production counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "20" is set to "160". "10" is set corresponding to the range of "to 198". Further, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to off in the jackpot C, the value of the effect counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "10" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". Then, "20" is set respectively.

As described above, the expectation degree display selection table 222b is configured so that various numerical values are selected based on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won and the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m. .. Next, the numerical value indicating the probability variation expectation degree selected in the expectation degree display selection table 222b will be described.

If the jackpot is won in the probability change (time reduction) state, each period (opening period, inter-round interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game is set by the open scenario setting table (probability change) 202e2 (FIG. 102 (c)). reference). As described above, in the jackpot types A to C, the jackpot B is the jackpot type that is most likely to be given a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game, and then the jackpot A and the jackpot C are set in this order. ing.

Further, the special ball flow flag 223m, which will be described in detail later, indicates that the balls have flowed down the second flow path in a state where the maximum number of balls are not stored in the first flow path of the second storage device 1600. It is a flag, and when this special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, it indicates that the first distribution unit 900 in the second storage device 1600 is in a position to guide the ball to the left side. be. Therefore, it indicates that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a by passing at most three balls through the first distribution unit 900.

In this way, since the numerical value indicating the probabilistic change expectation degree is selected based on the determination result of how much the condition that makes it easy to give the probabilistic change state to the player is satisfied, the numerical value having high reliability should be displayed to the player. Can be done.

Further, depending on the value of the effect counter, it is possible to select any numerical value when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to on or off. This is to prevent the player from surely grasping the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m. This has the effect of allowing the player to entertain whether or not the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a when the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

Even if the jackpot C, which has the lowest probability variation expectation value in the probability variation expectation display selection table 222b, is won in the probability variation (time reduction) state, the interval period between rounds is set to 20. (See FIG. 102 (c)). This is 10 times longer than the case where the jackpot C is won in the normal game state. As a result, the period of the jackpot game becomes longer, which increases the possibility that the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

In this way, even if the numerical value selected in the probability variation expectation display selection table 222b is low, by allowing the ball to flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game, it is possible to reach the specific general winning opening 630a by itself. Since it is possible to insert the ball, the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the entrance of the second storage device 1600 is provided in the same area as the first variable winning device 65 (the area aimed at in the right-handed game) opened during the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can simultaneously perform a game aiming at both the first variable winning device 65 and the second storage device 1600 by performing a right-handed game during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved during the big hit game.

Further, a right-handed game is performed during the jackpot game, and each device (first variable winning device 65 and second storage) so that most of the balls that did not flow into the second storage device 1600 enter the first variable winning device 65. Since the device 1600) is arranged, it is possible to suppress the game aiming at only the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

Further, since it is possible to allow the ball to flow into the second storage device 1600 even during the inter-round interval in which the first variable winning device 65 is closed during the jackpot game, the player fires the ball during the inter-round interval. It is possible to prevent the act from being stopped.

Returning to FIG. 99, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the RAM 223 in the third embodiment, the winning count counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment has been deleted, and a storage upper limit flag 223k, a special ball flow flag 223m, and a storage valve opening flag 223n have been added. ing.

The storage upper limit flag 223k is a flag indicating that the number of spheres stored in the second storage device 1600 has reached the upper limit. Specifically, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b (see FIG. 96) provided on the upstream side of the first flow path shown in FIG. 96 detects that the upper limit has been reached by detecting the retention of the sphere. This storage condition flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined in the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 117) that the storage sphere is the upper limit (S4904 in FIG. 117), and the command determination process 3 (S145 in FIG. 115). In S1811), it is set to off when an opening command is received (S3911 in FIG. 115).

The special ball flow flag 223m is a flag indicating that the ball has passed through the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) in a state where the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to ON. Specifically, the sensor 1600d (see FIG. 96) passes through the sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) due to the bounce of the sphere even though the first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96) has a space for storing the sphere. This is a flag that is set to ON when (see 96) is detected. The special ball flow flag 223m is determined in the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 117) that the storage ball is not the upper limit (S4902: No in FIG. 117), and the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) is sphered. Is set to on (S4907 in FIG. 117) when it is determined that has passed (flowed down) (S4905: Yes in FIG. 117), and turned off when an opening command is received in the command determination process (S1811 in FIG. 115). It is set (S3912 in FIG. 115). Then, it is referred to when the numerical value displayed in the probability variation expectation display effect is selected based on the expectation display selection table 222b by the time saving medium display process (S1852 in FIG. 118) (S5005 in FIG. 118).

In the third embodiment, even if the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96) has not reached the upper limit (4), the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 are still present. Since the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) is configured to flow down (about 5%), the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223 m is used for the production. For example, the first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96) When the flow path is formed so that the balls do not flow down the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) when the number of balls stored in (see FIG. 96) has not reached the upper limit. When this special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the abnormality notification may be performed.

The storage valve opening flag 223n is a flag indicating that the storage valve is open, and is specifically set to ON when a storage valve opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S3914 in FIG. 115). , Set to off when a storage valve closing command is received from the main controller 110 (S3915 in FIG. 115). While the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON, the storage state determination process (S1851) shown in FIG. 117 is skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the load of control processing.

In the third embodiment, the storage state determination process (S1851) is skipped while the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON. For example, the storage valve opening flag 223n is configured to be skipped. The first flow is when the storage upper limit sensor 1600b (see FIG. 96) detects the stagnation of a sphere even though is set to on, or when the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to off. When it is detected that a sphere passes through the road, a process for determining an abnormality may be executed. By executing such a process, it is possible to easily grasp the operation abnormality of the storage valve 1601a or the fraudulent activity in the second storage device 1600.

Further, by providing a sensor (state detection sensor) capable of actually detecting the operating state (whether or not the storage valve 1601a is in the open (released) state), the main control device 110 executed the storage valve 1601a. It is possible to compare and grasp the operation instruction and the actual operating state of the storage valve 1601a, and it is possible to separately grasp the operation abnormality of the storage valve 1601a and the fraudulent activity in the second storage device 1600. It will be possible.

In the third embodiment, the process of intensively monitoring the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a is used, but the ball entering another winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 630b) is used. You may provide a process to monitor.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the flow of operation of each device in the jackpot game of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 (a) is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state (normal state) and the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, and FIG. 106 (b) is a probability variation. It is a timing chart which shows the operation of each apparatus when a jackpot is won in a game state (probability change state), and jackpot A is selected as a jackpot type.

First, the operation of each device when the jackpot is won in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (a). The jackpot A is a jackpot of 8 rounds as shown in FIG. 100 (b), and the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) 3 seconds after the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot A is selected in the normal state, the opening period is set to 10 seconds, the inter-round interval period is set to 4 seconds, and the ending period is set to 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 102 (b).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the storage device (storage valve 1601a) is opened at the timing when the jackpot game is started and 3 seconds have passed. Since this timing is still in the opening period of the big hit, the probability change state is not given even if the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. Even if the upper limit of four balls is stored in the second storage device 1600, the storage device (storage valve 1601a) is in the open state for the time when the fourth ball reaches the specific general winning opening 630a. Since it is configured to be 3 seconds after the start of the game, even if the player performs an act of storing the ball in the second storage device 1600 to the upper limit in the normal state, the stored ball causes a probable change state. Is not given.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being performed in the normal state, and the time saving state ends in the state where the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 during the time saving state, which is normal. When the state is changed, the game can be ended without worrying about the balls stored in the second storage device 1600.

Then, 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started, the large opening (first variable winning device 65) is opened and the first round (round game) is started. From the start of the opening operation of the large opening (first variable winning device 65) during the jackpot game to the end of the final round (8th round) (from the start of the first round), the specific general winning opening When the ball enters the 630a, the probability change state is given after the end of the jackpot game (probability change prize valid period), and the probability change prize valid flag 203s is set to on during that period (see FIG. 111). ).

The round game ends when a predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined number (10) of balls have entered the large opening (first variable winning device 65), and the inter-round interval (4) Seconds) and then move on to the next round game. During this inter-round interval period, the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and it is impossible (difficult) to allow the ball to enter the first variable winning device 65, but the ball is moved to the second storage device 1600. The right-handed game will continue to be executed in order to make it flow.

As described above, when the jackpot A is selected in the normal state, even if the balls are stored in the second storage device 1600, the stored balls will be the specified general winning opening during the probable change prize validity period. Since it is configured so that it does not enter the 630a, if the ball is not allowed to flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game and the ball is not entered into the specific general winning opening 630a, it is in a probable change state after the jackpot game is completed. Is a jackpot that is not given (a jackpot that is not advantageous to the player).

On the other hand, when the jackpot B is selected in the normal state, the ball stored in the second storage device 1600 is configured to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning validity period, and further, the jackpot is configured. Since 16 rounds, which are longer than the jackpot A (8 rounds), are set as the period of the game, the jackpot is a jackpot (a jackpot advantageous to the player) that is more likely to be given a probable change state after the jackpot game is completed than the jackpot A.

Next, the operation of each device when a big hit is won in the probabilistic gaming state (probability change state) will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (b). When the jackpot A is selected in the probabilistic state, the opening period is set to 1 second, the inter-round interval period is set to 1 second, and the ending period is set to 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 102 (c).

By setting in this way, the ball stored in the second storage device 1600 will enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning valid period. Therefore, when the jackpot is selected in the probabilistic state, the jackpot is likely to be given the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends (a jackpot advantageous to the player).

Further, since the interval period between rounds is set to 1 second and is set shorter than when the jackpot A is selected in the normal state (4 seconds), the period of the jackpot game, especially the first variable winning device 65. It is set so that the period during which the ball does not enter is shortened and the jackpot game can be executed in a short period of time.

That is, in the jackpot game in the probabilistic state, the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 while the right-handed game is being executed in the probabilistic state, and when the jackpot game is started, the stored ball wins the probabilistic change. The main game is to keep the probabilistic state by entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the valid period.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, in order to prevent the jackpot from being won in a short period of time during the probabilistic state, the variation having a long variation time (60 seconds) as the variation time of the special symbol during the probabilistic state. The pattern is set to be selected (see FIG. 101).

In addition to the fluctuation time of the special symbol, for example, the ending period of the jackpot may be set to be long in order to prevent the jackpot from being won in a short period of time during the probability change state. In this case, even if the ending period is set long if the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning valid period, and the ending period is set short if the ball does not enter. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the variation time is selected based on the game state and the value of the variation type counter CS1, but as another configuration, for example, a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state) is selected. ), The fluctuation time may be selected by referring to a special table (special selection table) until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times).

In this case, the fluctuation time specified in the special selection table may be longer than the fluctuation time specified in the table for selecting other fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds on average). As a result, since a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected for several rotations after shifting to a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state), it becomes easy to store the ball in the second storage device 1600.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the immediate transition to the normal gaming state even though the gaming state is favorable to the player (time saving state or probable change state). It has the effect of being able to.

Further, even if the jackpot is won without storing the balls in the second storage device 1600 during the probability change state, the balls flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game and enter the specific general winning opening 630a. Since it is possible to continue the probabilistic state by making the ball ball, it is not determined whether or not the probabilistic state is given after the big hit is completed until the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically perform the jackpot game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 113, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the contents of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) and the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (FIG. 111) are changed from the first embodiment. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment described above will be described, and other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be described. The detailed description of the process of is omitted.

First, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. Similar to the first embodiment, this timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example.

When the timer interrupt process is executed, the processes S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above. Next, the special symbol variation process 3 (S104) is executed. This special symbol variation processing 3 (S104) is different from the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above in that the detailed contents are partially changed, and the details are detailed. The description will be described later with reference to FIG. 108.

When the special symbol variation process 3 (S104) is completed, the processes S105 to S108 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and then the abnormal winning process (S151) is executed. This abnormal winning process (S151) is a process for determining whether or not the winning of the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a is normal, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 110. When the abnormal winning process is completed, the process of S109 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and then the process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 3 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 3 (S104). The difference between this special symbol variation processing 3 and the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above is that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S214: Yes), and the lottery result this time is a big hit. (S216: Yes) The point is that the content of the processing executed when it is determined to be is different. Since the other processes are the same as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 3 (S104) is executed, the processes from S201 to S216 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above. If it is determined in the process of S216 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 to S223 are executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), and this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), the open scenario setting process (S251) is executed. This opening scenario setting process (S251) is a process for setting each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game based on the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state when the jackpot is won. .. The detailed contents of this open scenario setting process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

When the open scenario setting process (S251) is completed, the process of S218 and S219 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, and then this process is terminated. Although not shown in this flowchart, a stop command indicating that the change of the special symbol is stopped is set after the processing of S219 and S223 is completed. This stop command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the command output process executed in the main process of the main control device 110. Upon receiving the stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 stops the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to match the stop timings of the special symbol and the third symbol.

Next, the opening scenario setting process (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the open scenario setting process (S251). In this open scenario setting process (S251), as described above, a process for setting each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game is executed.

When the open scenario setting process (S251) is executed, the type of the current jackpot is first acquired (S4701). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S103 (see FIG. 107) is selected from the first hit type selection table 202b.

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state in which the lottery for the special symbol is executed is normal (S4702). This means that the gaming state is the normal gaming state when the probability variation flag 203g is set to off at the timing when the processing of S216 (see FIG. 108) is performed and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0. When the probabilistic flag 203g is set to ON at the timing when the determination (S4702: Yes) and the processing of S216 (see FIG. 108) is performed, or when the value of the time saving counter 203r is larger than 0, the gaming state is changed. It is determined that the game is not in the normal gaming state (S4702: No).

If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the gaming state is not normal (S4702: No), the content of the opening scenario corresponding to the acquired jackpot type is set based on the opening scenario setting table (probability variation) 202e2 (S4702: No). S4703), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4702 that the gaming state is normal (S4702: Yes), the content of the opening scenario corresponding to the acquired jackpot type is input based on the opening scenario setting table (normal) 202e1. Set (S4704) and end this process. In this way, for each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game, different periods are set according to the game state (normal state or probable change (time reduction) state). Therefore, even if the same jackpot type is selected, different jackpot games will be executed according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to provide various jackpot games to the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, even during the big hit game, the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is during the opening period (the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is started). If it is not during the period), the probability change state is not given after the jackpot game, and the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game is during the round period (opening of the first variable winning device 65). Since the probability change state is given after the big hit game during the period during which the operation is executed), even if the same big hit type is selected, for example, depending on the game state. By setting different periods as the opening period, it is possible to change the probability that the probability change state will be given after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the abnormal winning process (S151) executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 107) of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal winning process (S151). This abnormal winning process (S151) is a process for determining whether the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a is normal or abnormal.

First, when the abnormal winning process (S151) is executed, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is being hit (S4801). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S4801: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage valve 1601a is open (S4802). Here, if it is determined that the storage valve 1601a is open (S4802: Yes), this process ends. That is, while the storage valve is open, the abnormal winning of the specific general winning opening 630a is not determined in this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4801 that the current is not a big hit (S4801: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the storage valve 1601a is not open (closed) ( S4802: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (winned) in the specific general winning opening 630a (S4803).

If it is determined in the process of S4803 that a ball has entered (winned) in the specific general winning opening (S4803: Yes), an error command is set (S4804), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4803 that the ball has not entered the specific general winning opening 630a (S4804: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, in the abnormal winning process (S151), it is always determined whether or not the ball has entered (winning) the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing other than during the big hit or at the timing when the storage valve 1601a is closed. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely grasp that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a at the timing when the ball does not enter (win) in a normal game.

Although not shown in detail, this abnormal winning process (S151) has a predetermined grace period from the execution of the determination of S4801 and S4802 to the determination of the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a. (4 seconds) is set. This is sufficient time for the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 to be discharged to the outside of the second storage device 1600.

By providing this predetermined grace period (4 seconds), even if the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 during the big hit enters (wins) the specific general winning opening 630a after the big hit, the winning is abnormal. There is no need to distinguish. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring abnormal winnings can be improved. In other words, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which an abnormal prize is mistakenly determined.

Further, the above-mentioned grace period may be controlled so that the determination of abnormal winning is not performed until the grace period elapses under any circumstances, and the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the second storage The remaining number of balls discharged to the outside of the device 1600 is compared, and even if a grace period remains at the time when it is determined that no balls remain in the second storage device 1600, the determination of abnormal winning is performed. Controls that reset the grace period may be used. As a result, since the grace period can be set as short as possible, it is possible to execute the determination of the abnormal winning for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring the abnormal winning.

The error command set in S4804 of this abnormal winning process (S151) is the voice lamp control device 113 or the external in the external output process (S1001 in FIG. 34) executed in the main process of the main control device 110. It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via an output device (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 inputs an error command, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies that an abnormality has occurred by using the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, or the lamp display device 227.

Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1004) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1004). The jackpot control process 4 has the content of control for opening the storage valve 1601a, the content of the ending process 3 (S1110), and the winning process 3 (S1111) with respect to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment described above. ) Is changed and the error handling (S1112 in FIG. 34) is deleted. Other processes are the same as the jackpot control process in the first embodiment. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the jackpot type is selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202b, and then each period (opening period, between rounds) in the jackpot game is referred to with reference to the open scenario setting table 202e. Interval period, ending period) is set. As a result, the operation timing of each device (the storage valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 and the first variable winning device 65) in this jackpot game is determined. Then, the jackpot game is executed by reading the operation scenario corresponding to this operation timing from the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and updating the operation scenario using a counter (not shown).

In this way, by setting the operation timing of each device (reservoir valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 and the first variable winning device 65) in one operation scenario in the jackpot game, the operation timing of each device, particularly each device. It has the effect of suppressing the deviation of the operating interval and appropriately executing the jackpot game.

Other control methods may be used as the control process during the jackpot game. For example, the operation control between the first variable winning device 65 and the storage valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 is controlled by using different counters. You may control it. This makes it possible to execute complicated operation patterns of each device executed during a jackpot by combining the operation control of each device, and reduce the amount of information (number of operation patterns) stored in advance. It has the effect of being able to.

Returning to FIG. 111, the description will be continued. First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1004) is executed, it is determined whether the jackpot has started (S1101). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot has started (S1101: Yes), then the opening command is set (S1102), and this process ends. In the first embodiment described above, when it is determined that the jackpot has started, the storage valve is set to open (S1103 in FIG. 34), but in the third embodiment, the jackpot start timing and storage are set. It is determined that the jackpot has started because the storage valve 1601a is configured to be opened after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the case of jackpot A) has elapsed since the jackpot started, not at the same time as the opening timing of the valve 1601a. The storage valve 1601a is not opened in the process executed when it is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is not the timing at which the jackpot has started (S1101: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is currently in progress (S1104). Here, if it is determined that the current is not a big hit (S1104: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a (S1153).

The opening timing of the storage valve 1601a is specified according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 100 (b)), and the operation scenario updated by the counter (not shown) provided in the main controller 110 is the current operation scenario. When the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the jackpot is reached, it is determined that the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a is reached.

Here, if it is determined by the processing of S1151 that it is the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a (S1151: Yes), the solenoid for the storage device 610 (see FIG. 99) is set to be turned on in order to open the storage valve 1601a. (S1152). As a result, the storage valve 1601a is opened. Next, the storage valve open command is set (S1153), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1151 that the timing is not the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a (S1151: No), then a new jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above is performed. Determine if it is the start timing of the round. If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), a round number command indicating the newly started round is set (S1154), and then the number of newly started rounds is the first round. (S1155).

Here, if it is determined that the number of rounds newly started this time is the first round (S1155: Yes), the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (S1156), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1155, if it is determined that the number of rounds newly started this time is not the first round (S1155: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the third embodiment, a specific period (start of the first round) during the jackpot game (during the operation of the condition device) is set as a period in which a probabilistic state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a. The period from to the end of the final round (the period during which the continuous accessory actuator is operating) is set. Therefore, it is controlled to set the probability variation prize valid flag 203s, which is a flag indicating the period during which the probability variation state can be given (the probability variation prize validity period (see FIG. 106)), at the timing when the first round is started.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then, as in the above-mentioned jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 35), S1107 to The process of S1109 is executed. With reference to the opening scenario set in the processing of S1107, the variable operation (opening operation, closing operation) of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 is executed in the processing of S1108. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the winning process 3 is executed (S1111), and this process is terminated. The winning process 3 (S1111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 113.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (the start timing of the ending period) (S1109: Yes), then the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to off (S1157). The ending process 3 is executed (S1110). Then, this process is terminated. The ending process 3 (S1110) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 112.

As described above, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004) in the third embodiment, a process for determining the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a is provided separately from the jackpot start timing, and different timings are set for each jackpot type. The opening operation of the valve 1601a is configured to be appropriately feasible. In addition, the ending effect is started from the start timing of the first round by the probability variation prize valid flag 203s indicating the period during which the probability variation state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a (the final round ends). Until then, it is configured to be set to on.

Therefore, there is an effect that the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment can be properly executed and the interest of the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, the timing for setting the probability variation winning valid flag 203s to off is set as the start timing of the ending effect (start timing of the ending period), but the timing at which the final round ends can be determined so that the final round can be determined. When it is determined that the game has ended, the probability variation winning valid flag 203s may be set to off.

Further, when it is determined that the jackpot start timing is as in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above, the storage valve 1601a is set to be open and the storage device solenoid 610 is opened. The opening instruction of the storage valve 1601a may be output to the device (for example, the accessory control device) that controls the storage valve 1601a. In this case, the main control device 110 outputs the current jackpot type and the opening instruction of the storage valve 1601a to the accessory control device, and stores the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a corresponding to each jackpot type. On the control device side, the storage valve 1601a is opened at the opening timing corresponding to this jackpot. This has the effect of reducing the processing executed by the main control device 110.

Next, the ending process 3 (S1110) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 3 (S1110). The ending process 3 (S1110) is different from the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above in that a storage valve closing command is set, and the other processes are the same. The same processing as the ending processing (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the ending process 3 (S1110) is executed, the processes S1301 and S1302 are executed in the same manner as the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment, and then the storage valve closing command is set (S1351). Next, the processes of S1303 to S1308 are executed in the same manner as the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above, and this process is terminated.

The storage valve closing command set in the ending process 3 (S1110) is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the storage valve opening command set in S1153 of the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111). To. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the current operating state of the storage valve 1601a by inputting the storage valve open command and the storage valve closing command as the storage valve related commands. This makes it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the operating state of the storage valve 1601a. Therefore, an appropriate effect (for example, the third symbol display device) is given to the operating state of the storage valve 1601a, which plays an important role in determining whether or not a gaming state (probability changing state) advantageous to the player is given. By executing the effect displayed in 81), the player pays close attention to the effect of the pachinko machine 10, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets tired of the effect of the game at an early stage. ..

Next, the winning process 3 (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process 3 (S1111). The winning process 3 (S1111) is changed so that the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above is executed only when the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON. The control content has been changed so that the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on by passing (entering) the probability variation switch (specific general winning opening 630a) during the period when the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to on. It differs in that it is the same for other processes. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning process 3 (S1111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (S1451). If it is determined that the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is not on (off) (S1451: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is on (S1451: Yes), then the processing of S1402 to S1406 is executed in the same manner as the winning processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38). .. If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1452).

If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on in the process of S1452 (S1452: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if the probability variation setting flag 203h is not set to on (set to off). (Case) determines whether the ball has passed through the probability change switch (whether the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a) (S1410).

If it is determined in the process of S1410 that the ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the probability change switch (S1410: No), this process ends as it is.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the probability change switch is provided in the specific general prize opening 630a different from the first variable winning device 65 which is opened during the jackpot game, and further, the probability change prize valid flag 203s When the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a while is set to ON, the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, the process of setting the probability variation setting flag 203h to ON can be simplified as compared with the first embodiment.

Also in the third embodiment, the timing at which the probabilistic state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a as in the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above is set. A slight grace period (for example, 4 seconds) may be provided in addition to the period in which the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON. As a result, for example, if the ball has flowed into the second storage device 1600 while the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to on, the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a after the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to off. A probable change state can be given by making a ball.

In this case, as the grace period given to the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s, the time during which the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 can reach the specific general winning opening 630a may be set, and the grace period is longer than this grace period. It is advisable to set the ending period of the jackpot game to be long. With this configuration, the jackpot game is in progress for a period in which a probabilistic state can be granted by a ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a (a period in which the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to ON and a grace period). Since it is possible to set only to, it is possible to unify the control for giving the probability change state after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to be given a probable change state until the end of the jackpot game, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 118, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the content of the command determination process 3 (S1811) of the main process (see FIG. 114) is changed from the first embodiment, and in the main process (see FIG. 114), the storage state determination process (S1851) is performed. The difference is that the time saving and medium display processing (S1852) is added. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, only the points different from the first embodiment described above will be described, and they have not been changed from the first embodiment. Detailed description of other processes will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 114, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, the processes S1801 to S1812 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. Here, the command determination process 3 (S1811) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. A detailed description of the command determination process 3 (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG. 115.

Next, when the processing of S1812 is completed, the storage state determination processing (S1851) is executed, and then the time saving medium display processing (S1852) is executed. Here, the storage state determination process (S1851) is a process for determining the storage state of the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600, and the number of spheres stored in the second storage device 1600 is the upper limit. This is a process for determining that the ball has arrived and that the sphere has passed through the second flow path 1602. Based on the result determined by the storage state determination process (S1851), the above-mentioned probability variation expectation display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) is executed. The storage state determination process (S1851) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 117.

Next, the time saving medium display processing (S1852) is a numerical value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the probability variation expectation degree display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) executed when a big hit is won in the time saving state. It is a process for selecting the probability change expectation degree). A detailed description of this time-saving and medium-time display process (S1852) will be described later with reference to FIG. 118.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 114. When the processing of S1852 is completed, the permissible time counter subtraction processing is executed (S1853). This permissible time counter subtraction process is a process of subtracting the value of the permissible time counter 223i. The permissible time counter 223i is set with a value (1000) corresponding to 1 second in the command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 115) described later, and each time the process of S1853 is executed (every 1 millisecond), 1 It is subtracted. If no value is set in the permissible time counter 223i (when the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0), this process ends without subtracting the counter value.

The value (1000) set in the allowable time counter 223i in the command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 115) remains on the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 at the timing when the ending command is received (the timing when the jackpot ends). It is set as a sufficient time for the ball to flow out of the game board 13.

When the process of 1853 is completed, the processes of S1813 to S1817 are then executed in the same manner as the main process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 42) to end the present process. As described above, in the third embodiment, the information (sphere in the second storage device 1600) necessary for executing the probability variation expectation display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) by the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113. (Retention information, information on the passage of the sphere to the second flow path 1602) is acquired (storage state determination process (S1851)), and the information is used to display the probability variation expectation degree display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)). It is configured so that the numerical value (probability change expectation degree) to be performed can be selected.

As a result, by displaying as a numerical value the degree of expectation that the probability change state will be given after the end of this big hit game when the jackpot is won, for example, when the probability change expectation is high, the player is given a sense of security. On the other hand, when the probability change expectation is low, the game of inflowing the ball into the second storage device 1600 during the big hit game can be positively performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, instead of displaying the probability change expectation to the player in a state where it is decided in advance whether or not the probability change state is given, the specific general winning opening 630a is displayed at the timing when the probability change state can be actually given. Since the possibility that the ball will enter is displayed as the expected degree, it is possible to execute a numerical display with high reliability for the player.

Next, the command determination process 3 (S1811) executed in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1811). This command determination process 3 (S1811) is a process (error notification process 3 (S1912)) executed when a winning information command is received with respect to the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. The contents of the above are changed, the contents of the processing executed when the opening command is received are changed, and the storage valve opening command indicating the opening (release) of the storage valve 1601a and the storage indicating the closing of the storage valve 1601a are performed. The difference is that the processing to be executed when the valve closing command is received is added, and the other processing is the same. The processes S1904 to S1910 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above are also executed in the command determination process 3 (S1811) of the third embodiment. , It is assumed that it is included in the process (S1919) corresponding to other commands, and the illustration of the process is omitted. Further, among the processes shown in FIG. 115, the same processes as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S1811) is executed, first, the processes S1901 to S1903 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received next (S1911). Here, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1911: Yes), the error notification process 3 (S1912) is executed.

This error notification process 3 (S1912) is a prize based on winning (passing) to each device (first entry port 65, through gate 67, second storage device 1600) provided in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. When an information command is received, it is determined whether the game being executed by the player is normal for the gaming state (normal gaming state, right-handed gaming state) of the pachinko machine 10, and based on the determination result. This is a process for notifying the player about the game method (displaying a warning image). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the game method suitable for the current game state. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to intentionally perform an act of playing a game by a game method that is not suitable for the current game state. The error notification process 3 (S1912) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 116.

Returning to FIG. 115, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1911 that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1913). Here, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1913: Yes), the processing of S1914 is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43), and then the storage upper limit flag 223k is executed. Is set to off (S3911), the special ball flow flag 223m is set to off (S3912), the opening command for display is set (S1915), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1913, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1916). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1916: Yes), the processes of S1917 and S1918 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1916, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1916: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage valve opening command has been received (S3913). Here, if it is determined that the storage valve open command has been received (S3913: Yes), the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON (S3914), the display release command is set (S3915), and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S3913, when it is determined that the storage valve opening command has not been received (S3913: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage valve closing command has been received (S3916). Here, when it is determined that the storage valve closing command has been received (S3916: Yes), the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to off (S3917), the display closing command is set (S3918), and this process is performed. finish.

If it is determined in the process of S3916 that the storage valve closing command has not been received (S3916: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1919). As the processing corresponding to the other commands, in addition to the processing described in the above-mentioned command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), the processing of S1904 to 1910 of the command determination processing of the first embodiment is performed. include.

Next, the error notification process 3 (S1912) executed in the command determination process 3 (S1811 of FIG. 115) will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the contents of the error notification process 3 (S1912). In this error notification process 3 (S1912), a game method (right) executed by the player with respect to the current game state (normal state or right-handed state) based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the content is appropriate, and processing that enables notification based on the determination result is executed.

The error notification process 3 (S1912) determines the value of the permissible time counter 223i when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to ON for the error notification process (see FIG. 44) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing to be performed is deleted and the content of the processing executed when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off is changed. The same processing as the error notification processing (see FIG. 44) of the first embodiment is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 116, when the error notification process 3 (S1912) is executed, the processes S1931 to S1933 are executed in the same manner as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) of the first embodiment described above to perform this process. finish. This makes it possible to determine whether the ball has entered the first entrance 65, which is impossible (difficult) to win in the right-handed game during the big hit (during the big hit game) where the right-handed game is supposed to be executed. Will be. As a result, it is possible to detect a state in which the player is not performing the right-handed game even though the player is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game), and informs the player of the appropriate game method.

As a notification of an appropriate game method, for example, a game other than the right-handed game is executed even though the player is not executing the appropriate game (the game state in which the right-handed game is executed). ), The appropriate game content (right-handed game) is notified to the player in a visible manner (for example, displayed on the third symbol display device 81), or the game content is constantly displayed in the game. In the pachinko machine 10 that notifies a person, the notification content is emphasized and notified (for example, the volume of the speaker is increased, the notification mode displayed on the display screen is increased, or the brightness of the display screen is increased. It may be configured to do). As a result, even if the player plays an inappropriate game, the player can be properly notified of the content of the game.

Returning to FIG. 116, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1931 that the jackpot middle flag 223h is not set to on (set to off) (S1931: No), the error notification processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 44). Similarly, it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1936).

Here, the permissible time counter 223i in the third embodiment is a counter for measuring a predetermined period (1 second) after the right-handed gaming state ends, and while this counter is performing measurement, it is a counter. Even if the ball passes through the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67, the right-handed warning image described later is not displayed.

As a result, when the ball launched immediately before the end of the right-handed game state enters (passes) into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 after the end of the right-handed game state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to display a warning image to the player who is performing an appropriate game and suppress the decrease in the motivation for the game. In addition, there is an effect that the accuracy of displaying a warning image for a player who is playing an inappropriate game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 115, the allowable time counter 223i is set with a value (1000) corresponding to 1 second when an ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1917), and the main process (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 114), 1 is subtracted every 1 millisecond (S1853).

Returning to FIG. 116, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1936 that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (greater than 0) (S1936: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 (S1936: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag 223f is set to ON (S1961).

That is, whether or not a predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot is determined using the value of the permissible time counter 223i, and the value of the permissible time counter 223i becomes 0, so that the jackpot ends. It is determined that a predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed since then. As a result, when the ball flowing down the game board 13 immediately after the end of the big hit enters (passes) into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67, the warning image is not displayed.

If it is determined in the process of S1961 that the probability change state flag 223f is set to ON (S1961: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223f is not set to on (set to off) (S1961: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0. (S1962). Here, if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1962: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1962, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is not larger than 0 (0), the ball enters (passes) into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67. It is determined whether or not the indicated winning information command has been received (S1963). Here, if it is determined that the winning information command indicating the entry (passing) of the ball into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 has not been received (S1963: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1963, if it is determined that the winning information command indicating the entry (passing) of the ball into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 has been received (S1963: Yes), then the right-handed warning image is displayed. Set the corresponding error command (S1964) and end this process. Here, when an error command corresponding to the right-handed warning image is set and an error command is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1802) shown in FIG. 114, FIG. 5 is shown in the third symbol display device 81. The warning image shown in (b) is displayed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in order to determine the game state in which the right-handed game is not executed, the jackpot medium flag 223h, the probability change state flag 223f, and the time saving state counter 223g are referred to. There is. Then, when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off, the probability change state flag 223f is set to off, and the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0, the right-handed game is not executed, and the second game state is set. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered (passed) into the storage device 1600 and the through gate 67.

Further, in the third embodiment, the error command corresponding to the warning image is not set by the error notification processing during a predetermined period (1 second) after the jackpot is completed.

In the third embodiment, the value of the permissible time counter 223i is set to 1000 at the timing when the ending command is received (S1916 in FIG. 115) (S1917), and the value is 0 (when the permissible time has elapsed). ) (S1962: No in FIG. 116), the configuration is such that it can be determined that the ball has entered (passed) into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67, but other configurations may be used, for example. In addition to the case where the ending command is received as the timing at which the right-handed game ends, the value of the allowable time counter 223i may be set to 1000 even at the timing when the time saving state counter becomes 0.

By configuring in this way, a warning image is displayed to the player who is performing an appropriate game even when the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered, and the motivation for playing is reduced. Can be suppressed. In addition, there is an effect that the accuracy of displaying a warning image for a player who is playing an inappropriate game can be improved.

Further, the value set in the permissible time counter 223i may be a value corresponding to a period during which it is possible to prevent a player who is playing an appropriate game from erroneously displaying a warning. For example, it may be a value (10000) corresponding to 10 seconds. Further, it may be configured so that a different value is set for each type of jackpot.

Further, the timing for setting the value of the permissible time counter 223i may be changed based on the result of the jackpot game and the jackpot type. For example, if it is confirmed that the probability change state or the time saving state will be given after the big hit ends, the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not set even when the ending command is received, and the probability change state after the big hit ends. In the case of a jackpot to which the time saving state is not given, the value of the permissible time counter 223i may be set after the jackpot ends. This eliminates the need to set an unnecessary value in the allowable time counter 223i, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

Next, the storage state determination process (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage state determination process (S1851). This storage state determination process (S1851) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 114) of the voice lamp control device 113, and flows into the second storage device 1600 in a state where the storage valve 1601a is closed. This is a process for determining the storage status and the flow status of the spheres.

First, when the storage state determination process (S1851) is executed, it is determined whether or not the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON (S4901). Here, when it is determined that the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON, that is, the storage valve 1601a is in the open (released) state (S4901: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the storage valve opening flag 223n is not set to on (set to off) (S4901: No), it is then stored in the second storage device 1600. It is determined whether or not the number of balls being played has reached the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S4902). Specifically, when the upper limit detection sensor 1600b provided in the first flow path 1601 of the second storage device 1600 shown in FIG. 96 detects the stagnation of a sphere, it is determined that the storage sphere is the upper limit.

In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the storage sphere has reached the upper limit (S4902: Yes), then the command corresponding to the storage upper limit is set (S4903), and the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON. (S4904), and this process is terminated. This storage upper limit flag 223k is set to off when the jackpot is started (S3911 in FIG. 115).

On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the stored sphere has not reached the upper limit (S4902: No), then it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the second induction flow path (second flow path 1602). (S4905). Specifically, when the passage sensor 1600d provided in the second flow path 1602 of the second storage device 1600 shown in FIG. 96 detects the passage of a sphere, the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602) is used. Determine that the ball has passed.

Here, an event in which the sphere passes through the second induction flow path (second flow path 1602) even though the stored sphere has not reached the upper limit in the processing of S4902 will be described. In the second storage device 1600 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, a new ball is normally stored in the first flow path 1601 in a state where a new ball is stored in the second storage device. When it flows into 1600, it is configured to flow down to the second flow path 1602.

However, depending on the direction of rebound when the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 collides with the inner wall of the second storage device 1600, the storage amount of the ball in the first flow path 1601 has not reached the upper limit. Also, it may flow down to the second flow path 1602 (about 5% of the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600). When such a sphere flows down, it is determined that the sphere has passed (flowed down) through the second induction flow path (second flow path 1602) in the process of S4905.

Returning to FIG. 117, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4905 that the sphere has not passed through the second induction flow path (second flow path 1602) (S4905: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602) (S4905: Yes), then a command corresponding to the special ball flow is set (S4906), and the special ball flow is set. The flag 223m is set to ON (S4907), and this process ends.

In the third embodiment, when a command corresponding to the special ball flow is set, the voice output device 226 outputs a notification sound notifying that the special ball flow has occurred. Further, when this special ball flow occurs, as described above with reference to FIG. 97, the first distribution member 900 provided in the second storage device 1600 is placed in a position advantageous to the player (specific general prize). It is configured to be able to give a privilege of moving to a position (a position where the number of balls required for inserting a ball into the mouth 630a is reduced), but other benefits may be given to the player.

For example, a general winning opening that can be entered only when a special ball flow occurs is provided, and a large number (15) of prize balls are given to the player when a ball enters the general winning opening. May be good. Further, when a special ball flow occurs, a privilege such as giving points accumulated by the player or displaying a special image on the third symbol display device 81 may be given.

With this configuration, it is possible to discriminate the special ball flow generated by the irregular movement of the ball, and by giving a privilege to the special ball flow, the player can see the ball. Benefits based on movement can be granted. Therefore, there is an effect that the movement of the ball can be made to make the player happy and uneasy, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the third embodiment, when the number of spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 has not reached the upper limit (S4902: No), the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602) is sphered. (S4905: Yes), the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, but for example, the second ball stored in the first flow path 1601 reaches the upper limit. The special ball flow flag 223m may be set to ON when the ball passes (flows down) through the induction flow path (second flow path 1602).

With this configuration, even if the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 has reached the upper limit, it is possible for the player to continuously play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine due to the player stopping the firing of the ball on the way.

Next, the time saving medium display process (S1852) will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving medium display process (S1852). This time saving / middle display processing (S1852) is a processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 114) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed when a big hit is won during the time saving state (FIG. 104). It is a process of selecting the numerical value (probability variation expectation degree) displayed in (b)).

First, when the time saving medium display process (S1852) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S5001). Here, if the value of the time saving state counter 223g is not larger than 0 (0), that is, if it is determined that the time saving state is not present (S5001: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5001, when the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the time saving state is in effect (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won (S5002). ). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning data corresponding to this fluctuation has won the big hit. Here, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a big hit (S5002: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is a big hit (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON (S5003).

If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON (S5003: Yes), a display command corresponding to the expectation degree MAX is set (S5004), and this process is terminated. When the display command corresponding to this expectation degree MAX is set, the probability change expectation displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 in the probability change expectation degree display effect shown in FIG. 104 (b). "MAX" is displayed in the numerical value of the degree.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5003 that the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to on (set to off) (S5003: No), the expectation display selection table 222b (see FIG. 105) is displayed. A display command corresponding to the expected degree (numerical value) selected based on the specified contents is set (S5005), and this process is terminated. When this display command is set, in the probability variation expectation display effect shown in FIG. 104 (b), the numerical value of the probability variation expectation displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is expected. The expected degree (numerical value) "10 to 80" selected based on the degree display selection table 222b is displayed.

As described above, in the time saving medium display processing (S1852), the display content of the probability variation expectation display effect to be executed when a big hit is won during the time saving state is determined. In this way, since the numerical value of the probability change expectation is selected based on the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 at the timing when the jackpot is won, the presence or absence of the special ball flow, and the jackpot type, the value is highly reliable for the player. (Expectation) can be displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ball to the specific general winning opening 630a, which is a specific area, within a predetermined period during the jackpot game (the period from the start of the first round to the end of the final round). Since it is a game property in which a probable change state is given after the end of the big hit, it is not determined whether or not the probable change state is given at the timing when the big hit is won.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the probability change expectation is simply based on how much the jackpot winning this time satisfies the condition that the probability variation state is likely to be given during the jackpot game. The content of the display effect is determined.

Therefore, even though it is internally determined whether or not the probability change state is given, the probability change expectation degree (value) displayed for the effect of notifying the probability change expectation degree performed to incite the player. ) Has the effect of increasing the reliability.

In the third embodiment, when the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON, the expectation level MAX is supported regardless of other conditions (the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m and the type of jackpot type). The display command to be set is configured to be set. This is because if the pachinko machine 10 wins a jackpot with the upper limit (4) balls stored in the second storage device 1600 during the time saving state, at least one of the stored balls will be. This is because the ball can be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing when a probable change state can be given after the jackpot is completed.

That is, by storing the upper limit amount (4 pieces) of balls in the second storage device 1600 by the time the jackpot is won in the time-saving state, it is possible to enter a gaming state in which a probable change state is given after the end of the next jackpot. Become. With this configuration, even if the reserved storage number of the special symbol reaches the upper limit during the time saving state, the game of flowing the ball into the second storage device 1600 can be continued, so that the player can continue the game during the game. Has the effect of stopping the firing of the ball and suppressing the decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened at the timing when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game (when the condition device is operating). During the period (while the accessory continuous operation device is operating), a probabilistic state is given after the jackpot is completed, but specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is open. The first variable in the next round after the period (round period) in which the 1 variable winning device 65 is open and the end condition (10 balls or 30 seconds have passed) for the end of 1 round are satisfied. Both the period until the winning device 65 is opened (interval period) is included.

Therefore, even during the interval period during the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is closed), when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, a probable change state is given after the jackpot game ends. Will be done. That is, in the configuration used in the third embodiment, when the ball passes through the winning opening opened during the jackpot game (for example, the winning opening of the first variable winning device 65), the probability changes after the jackpot ends. It is possible to set a longer period (a period during which a probabilistic state can be given) that is continuously advantageous to the player during the jackpot game, as compared with the case where a specific area to which the state is given is provided.

Further, in the third embodiment, a specific area to which a probabilistic state can be given by passing a ball is provided other than a winning opening (for example, a winning opening of the first variable winning device 65) opened during a big hit game. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic state can be obtained by the ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, that is, the ball (waste ball) that had no merit for the player in the past. It will be. As a result, during the jackpot game, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 65 to acquire a prize ball and a game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a to acquire a probable change state are simultaneously advanced. It becomes possible. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a plurality of playability to the player at the same time, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, like the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the specific general winning opening 630a are located at positions where winning can be achieved in a game aiming at the same area (in this embodiment, a right-handed game). It is good to provide. By doing so, it is possible to easily and simultaneously advance a plurality of games to the player.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the right-handed area, and the specific general winning opening 630a is provided in the normal game area (left-handed area). You may. As a result, during the round period during the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open), the right-handed game is performed, and the interval period (the end condition of one round (10 balls or 30 balls)) is performed. During the period from the establishment of (seconds) to the opening of the first variable winning device 65 in the next round), a normal game (left-handed game) is performed, and the ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be configured to perform a game of making a ball.

This makes it possible to complicate the game during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the monotonous game.

In the third embodiment described above, the second storage device 1600 is arranged in the right side region of the game board 13, but for example, the second storage device 1600 is placed in the lower center (variable display device unit) of the game board 13. A game (left-handed game) that is provided in the left side area of the game board 13 (left side of the variable display device unit 80) and allows the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 that is executed in the normal game state. ) May be configured to flow into the second storage device 1600.

With this configuration, it is possible to store the ball in the second storage device 1600 during the normal gaming state. As a result, if the state in which the jackpot is not won continues in the normal game state, the upper limit amount of balls can be stored in the second storage device 1600, so that the player who has not won the jackpot for a long period of time can be probable. It is possible to provide a jackpot that is easily given a state, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is configured to continue until the next big hit is won, so that the player does not win the big hit at an early stage during the probable change state. Will be done. That is, the second storage device 1600 is in a probabilistic state in which the jackpot probability is set high until the next jackpot is won, and the game can be executed in a state where the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. By storing the upper limit amount of balls and then winning the jackpot, the game aims to continue the probabilistic state even after the next jackpot game ends.

Therefore, in the probable state in which the game is performed while simply waiting to win the next big hit at an early stage, the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the second storage device 1600 as soon as possible without winning the big hit at an early stage. Since it is possible to play the game with motivation to make it, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play in the probable change state can be improved.

In addition, other configurations may be used. For example, when the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the probability change state, the special symbol changes 100 times from the probability change state to the time saving state (for example, after the jackpot ends). It may be configured so that the gaming state shifts to) (which is set in the period until the game is played).

With this configuration, the jackpot probability is high, but the jackpot probability is low when winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a low expectation that a probability variation is given) in a probability variation state where the game period between jackpots is short. In the case of winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a higher expectation that the probability of being given a probability change is higher than winning a jackpot in the probability variation state) in a short-time state where the game period between jackpots is long although it is in a state (normal gaming state). Since it is possible to provide a jackpot with different advantages to the player, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the ball that has not flowed into the second storage device 1600 is configured to enter the first variable winning device 65. For example, the second storage device is located below the first variable winning device 65. 1600 may be provided. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game (while the first variable winning device 65 is open).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128. In the third embodiment described above, the second storage device 1600 is provided, a plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can flow down are provided in the second storage device 1600, and the sphere is specified as a general winning opening (probability variation winning opening) by the flowing flow path. ) 630a and general winning opening (high value winning opening) 630b can be won. Further, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1601a capable of storing a ball flowing down a part of the flow path, and by changing the timing at which the storage valve 1601a opens, the ball can be placed in the specific general winning opening 630a. By making the timing of entering the ball different, a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot that is hard to be given are provided.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution device 2600 is provided in place of the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment. The distribution device 2600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down, and the ball can enter the specific general winning opening (probability variation winning opening) 630a or the second ball entering device 640 by the flowing flow path. It is composed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the area provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). A second variable winning device 650 is provided below the variable winning device 65. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 120, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are alternately opened in the jackpot game. The ball launched in the right-handed game during the jackpot game is configured to enter any of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650).

By alternately opening the two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in this way, for example, the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upper side during the jackpot game. Is closed, and the ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 in the closed state enters the second variable winning device 650 provided below the first variable winning device 65, respectively. By controlling the opening operation of, the ball fired during the jackpot game can be entered into any variable winning device. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball fired during the jackpot game does not enter the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) and gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Then, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a distribution device below the two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) provided above and below. A 2600 is provided, and a ball flowing down one path distributed by the distribution device 2600 is configured to enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

This specific general winning opening 630a is the same as the specific general winning opening 630a used in the third embodiment described above, and is a predetermined period during the jackpot game, which is the probabilistic winning valid period (start to final round of the first round game). By entering the ball during the round game (the period until the end of the round game), in addition to the predetermined number of prize balls (1 piece), the probability change state is given after the jackpot game ends, and the probability change state is given during the jackpot game (the probability change prize is valid). A predetermined number of prize balls (1 piece) are awarded when a ball enters a period other than the period (including a period during which the jackpot is not hit).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the opening operation contents of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game are changed based on the winning jackpot type, thereby shaking during the jackpot game. A jackpot in which a ball flowing down to the dividing device 2600 is likely to occur and a jackpot in which a ball is unlikely to occur can be set.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of variable winning devices, a plurality of balls that do not enter the two variable winning devices (balls that can flow into the distribution device 2600 during the jackpot game) are intentionally generated. It controls the opening operation of the variable winning device, and determines whether or not the ball that has not entered any of the variable winning devices is given a gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends. It is possible to provide a new playability of being played.

Therefore, in addition to the conventional game property of having a player enter a ball into the variable winning device during a big hit game, a privilege that is advantageous to the player by using a ball that has not entered the variable winning device ( It is possible to execute a new game that determines whether or not a probabilistic state is granted, and there is an effect that the interest of the game during the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, a ball that did not enter the variable winning device during the jackpot game was conventionally treated as a useless ball, but in the present embodiment, the ball (the ball did not enter the variable winning device during the jackpot game). To provide a pachinko machine 10 that can effectively use all the balls fired during the jackpot game because it is configured to be able to give a privilege (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player by using the balls). This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 120 is an enlarged view of the region surrounded by the two-dot chain line CXX in the game board 13 in FIG. 119. As shown in FIG. 119, the ball launched by the right-handed game jumps over the variable display device unit 80 and collides with the return rubber 69 to attenuate the momentum and the right region of the game board 13 (variable display device unit 80). (To the right of) flow down.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the right region of the game board 13, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the distribution device are arranged in order from the upstream side of the ball flow path (upper side of the game board 13). A specific general winning opening 630a is provided at a position where a ball distributed to the right side of the front view of the game board 13 (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 120) can be entered by the distribution device 2600.

On the other hand, the second entry port 640 is provided at a position where the ball distributed to the left side of the front view of the game board 13 (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 120) by the distribution device 2600 can enter. Among the various configurations provided in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the specific general winning opening 630a are included. Since the second ball entry port 640 has already been described in detail in each of the above-described embodiments, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the distribution device 2600 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The distribution device 2600 is formed with an opening 2601 into which a ball flowing down the game board 13 flows into the distribution device 2600. The opening 2601 is formed with an opening width of about 15 mm, and regulates the inflow of two balls at the same time. As a result, the ball that has flowed into the sorting device 2600 can be smoothly flowed down. As shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of nails are planted in the game board 13 so that the ball passing through the second variable winning device 650 is guided to the opening 2601 of the distribution device 2600.

The spheres that have flowed into the distribution device 2600 are distributed by two distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902) provided in the distribution device 2600. A first flow path 2602, a second flow path 2603, a third flow path 2604, and a fourth flow path 2605 are formed in the distribution device 2600 by a partition wall. The first flow path 2602 and the second flow path 263 are formed so that the sphere flows directly below, and the third flow path 2604 is in the lower left direction of the front view of the distribution device 2600 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120). The sphere is formed to flow down from upstream to downstream by an inclined member that inclines downward. Further, the fourth flow path 2605 is formed by a member constituting the outer shape of the storage device 2600 so as to be inclined downward in the lower right direction (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120) in the front view of the distribution device 2600.

The sorting device 2600 has a right discharge port 2606 for discharging the ball to the right side of the front view of the sorting device 2600 (right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 120) and a left side of the front view of the sorting device 2600 (in the viewpoint of FIG. 120). A left discharge port 2607 for discharging the ball to the left side) is formed.

The spheres that have flowed into the distribution device 2600 are distributed by two distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902), and are distributed by a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 2602 to fourth flow path 2605). ) Flows down and is discharged from either the right discharge port 2606 or the left discharge port 2607.

Specifically, the ball flowing into the distribution device 2600 passes through the passage sensor 2600a provided in the opening 2061 and falls to the first distribution member 1901. Since the configuration of the first distribution member 1901 is the same as that of the second distribution member 901 used in the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The spheres that have fallen into the first distribution member 1901 are alternately distributed to the first flow path 2602 and the second flow path 2603 by the first distribution member 1901. A partition wall is provided below the first distribution member 1901 to separate the first flow path 2602 and the second flow path 2603.

The sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 2602 falls to the downstream side of the third flow path 2604, flows down in the downstream direction of the third flow path 2604 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120), and flows down from the left discharge port 2607. It is discharged to the outside of the sorting device 2600. On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 2603 falls on the second distribution member 1902. The configuration of the second distribution member 1902 is the same as that of the first distribution member 1901, and is the same configuration as the second distribution member 901 used in the third embodiment described above. Is omitted.

The spheres that have fallen into the second distribution member 1902 are alternately distributed to the third flow path 2604 and the fourth flow path 2605 by the second distribution member 1902. The ball distributed to the third flow path 2604 flows down on the inclined member and is discharged from the left discharge port 2607 to the outside of the distribution device 2600. The number of balls discharged from the left discharge port 2607 is configured to be detectable by the passage sensor 2600b.

On the other hand, the ball distributed to the fourth flow path 2605 is discharged from the right discharge port 2606 to the outside of the distribution device 2600. The number of balls discharged from the right discharge port 2606 is configured to be detectable by the passage sensor 2600c.

As described above, the balls flowing into the distribution device 2600 are configured to be distributed with regularity. Specifically, the number of balls discharged from the right discharge port 2606 and the left discharge port 2607. The ratio to the number of ejected balls is 1: 3. That is, when four balls flow into the distribution device 2600, at least one of the balls is configured to be discharged from the right discharge port 2606.

Further, FIG. 120 shows a state in which the surface cover of the distribution device 2600 is removed in order to explain the internal configuration of the distribution device 2600, but the surface cover is made of a permeable material (ABS, polycarbonate, etc.). It is configured so that the player can grasp the status of the distribution member (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902). With this configuration, the player can play the game while grasping the status of the distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and the second distribution member 1902), so that the ball can be inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a. It is possible to play the game while predicting the timing at which the ball enters.

A part of the surface cover of the distribution device 2600 is colored or the surface cover is used so that the player cannot easily see the status of the distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902). A decorative member may be attached to the surface of the surface. With this configuration, each time a ball flows into the distribution device 2600, the game is played while predicting which discharge port (right discharge port 2606 or left discharge port 2607) the ball will be discharged from. Can be done. In addition, by memorizing the discharge port from which the ball was discharged in the past, it is possible to predict which discharge port (right discharge port 2606 or left discharge port 2607) will be the next discharge port. It is possible to provide a situation advantageous to a player who plays a game for a long time rather than a player who plays a game only for a short time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game for a long period of time, and the situation where the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered can be suppressed.

Further, the surface cover of the distribution device 2600 may be formed by a half mirror whose inside can be visually recognized by irradiating light. In this case, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to the right-handed gaming state. It is preferable that the surface cover is irradiated with light so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the distribution device 2600. By doing so, the inside of the distribution device 2600 (the situation of each distribution member) can be made visible only when the game is actually played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

The distribution device 2600 of the fourth embodiment uses distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902) whose distribution directions are alternately changed when the spheres come into contact with each other. However, the number may be 3 or more. By increasing the number of distribution members and increasing the flow path of the ball in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily grasp the flow destination of the ball.

Further, a configuration may be used in which the number of routes distributed by one distribution member is three or more. By using such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of distribution members required when forming the same number of flow paths in the distribution device 2600, and the distribution device 2600 can be made compact. It is possible to plan.

Further, a configuration may be used in which the distribution member electrically switches the distribution destination of the sphere. In this case, for example, it is preferable to switch the distribution destination of the balls at a constant timing after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, the distribution rate can be statistically constant.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a game state in which a right-handed game is executed other than during a big hit (for example, a time saving state or a probability change state), the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a, so that the time saving state is achieved. In a probable change state, a ball can be inserted into a specific general winning opening 630a, which is one of the general winning openings, and a winning ball (one in the present embodiment) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the number of balls held is reduced in a time-saving state or a probable change state.

In the third embodiment, after the jackpot game is executed, the storage valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 is released (opened) from the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to the end of the final round. However, other conditions may be provided as the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is closed.

For example, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) is the timing at which a predetermined round (2nd round, final round, etc.) of the jackpot game is started or ended, or the predetermined round (2nd round, final round, etc.). It may be the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed from the start.

Further, at the timing when the storage valve 1601a is closed, the upper limit number (for example, 4) of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) can pass through the storage valve 1601a. After the time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, the predetermined round (2 rounds, final round, etc.) has started or ended, or the predetermined round (2 rounds, final round, etc.) has started or ended. It may be the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed.

With this configuration, various periods can be set as the period during which the storage valve 1601a is open and the period during which the storage valve 1601a is closed. Specifically, for example, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) is set 3 seconds after the jackpot is won, and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is closed is released (opened). If it is set to be 4 seconds after that, the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) only for 3 to 7 seconds after winning the jackpot.

As a result, 7 seconds after winning the jackpot, the storage valve 1601a will be closed even during the jackpot game, so this jackpot will end and the storage valve 1601a will be won until the next jackpot is won. In order to keep the closed state, the period for closing the storage valve 1601a as compared with the configuration used in the third embodiment (the configuration in which the storage valve 1601a is closed at the timing when the final round of the jackpot game is completed). Can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to easily start the jackpot game with the balls stored in the storage valve 1601a (with the upper limit number of balls stored).

In addition, while the storage valve 1601a is closed during the jackpot game, a game for winning a prize ball in this jackpot game (a game aiming at the first variable winning device 65) and the next jackpot game. It is possible to simultaneously execute a game (a game aiming at the second storage device 1600 in which the storage valve 1601a is in the closed state) for facilitating the addition of a probabilistic state after the game is completed. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game during the jackpot game. Furthermore, depending on the result of the game during the big hit game, it is possible to make it easy to give a probable change state after the end of the next big hit game, so that the player can continue to play the game even after the big hit game ends. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the gaming machine can be increased.

Further, by providing a plurality of periods for releasing (opening) the storage valve 1601a during the jackpot game and different periods for releasing (opening) the storage valve 1601a based on the winning jackpot, for example, the jackpot game ends. Even if the period from to winning the next jackpot is the same, the length of the closed state period of the storage valve 1601a can be different.

As a result, it is possible to set a jackpot that is likely to be given a probabilistic state and a jackpot that is difficult to be given a probabilistic state after the end of the next big hit game, depending on the operation content of the storage valve 1601a during the big hit game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, by setting the timing of releasing (opening) the storage valve 1601a at the start of a predetermined round (for example, the final round) during the jackpot game, the balls are stored in the second storage device 1600 even after the jackpot game is started. Is possible. Thereby, at the timing when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) during the jackpot game this time, the ball stored in the second storage device 1600 can be easily entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 (the period in which the storage valve 1601a is closed) and the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600. By changing the period (the period in which the storage valve 1601a is in the released (opened) state), the probabilistic state is likely to be given after the end of the jackpot game of 1, and the next jackpot game of the jackpot of 1. Since it is possible to set a state in which a probabilistic state is likely to be given after the end, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine having various playability, and there is an effect that the player's game interest can be enhanced. ..

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment is such that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point that the configuration of is partially changed, the point that the storage device solenoid 610 and the flow path solenoid 611 connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 are deleted, and the point that the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on. The difference is that various sensor groups 229 (passing sensors 2600a to 2600c) are electrically connected to the output port 225. Since other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the fourth embodiment, various sensor groups 229 are electrically connected to the input / output port 225. The various sensor groups 229 include a passage sensor 2600a for detecting the inflow of a ball into the distribution device 2600 described above and a passage sensor 2600b for detecting that the ball has passed through the left discharge port 2607 provided in the distribution device 2600. It is composed of a passage sensor 2600c for detecting that a ball has passed through the right discharge port 2606 provided in the distribution device 2600, and detection signals are output to the voice lamp control device 113 from the various sensors described above. To.

The voice lamp control device 113 makes it possible to determine whether or not the ball flowing into the distribution device 2600 is normally discharged by receiving the detection signals output from the various sensors described above. Specifically, the number of balls flowing into the sorting device 2600 is calculated based on the signal output from the passing sensor 2600a. Then, the number of balls discharged to the outside of the sorting device 2600 is calculated based on the signals output from the passing sensor 2600b and the passing sensor 2600c.

This makes it possible to compare the total number of spheres that have flowed into the distribution device 2600 with the total number of spheres that have been discharged from the distribution device 2600. More specifically, the number of balls flowing into the sorting device 2600 and the number of balls discharged from the sorting device 2600 are calculated in chronological order, and a predetermined time difference (about 3 seconds), that is, sorting is performed. When the increase / decrease in the number of balls in consideration of the time difference for the time required for the game ball to flow normally in the device 2600 is the same, it is determined to be normal.

By monitoring the ball that has flowed into the distribution device 2600 in this way, for example, the ball is retained in the distribution device 2600, and the timing at which the most advantageous privilege for the player is given (for example, a jackpot game). (Middle) has the effect of suppressing fraudulent acts in which a ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a.

Further, the detection result of the passing sensors 2600a to 2600c provided in the distribution device 2600 and the detection result of the sensor (not shown) for detecting the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a are used to obtain the specific general winning opening. It may be configured so that unauthorized entry into the 630a can be monitored. Specifically, it is possible to determine that an illegal ball has been entered when the number of balls that have entered the specific general winning opening 630a is larger than the total number of balls that have passed through the right discharge port 2606 of the distribution device 2600. do it. By using such a configuration, for example, the act of making a hole in the glass unit 16 covering the surface of the game board 13 and allowing the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a without going through the sorting device 2600 is properly performed. Can be grasped.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (a). FIG. 122A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, the contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, and the second open scenario setting table 202e is added. It is different in that it is done.

Here, the first type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (b). FIG. 122B is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment adds a jackpot C as a jackpot type to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) in the first embodiment described above, and each of them. The difference is that the contents specified in the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) have been changed and the hit of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) has been changed. However, the other configurations are the same as those of the type selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Is stipulated. The details of this jackpot A will be described later with reference to FIG. 123, but the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 8 rounds, and during the jackpot game, both the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 It is a big hit in which an advantageous interval is not set for a period of being closed longer than usual (2 seconds). The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". In this jackpot B, the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds, and the period during which both the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed during the jackpot game is longer than usual (2). Seconds) This is a big hit where the advantageous interval is set three times. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99", the jackpot C is associated and defined. In this jackpot C, the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for two rounds, and the period during which both the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed during the jackpot game is longer than usual (2). Seconds) This is a big hit where the advantageous interval is set once. The round game by the jackpot C is different from the jackpot A and the jackpot B, and the end condition of the round game is set to be 1 second elapsed or 10 balls entered. Therefore, the jackpot C is set as a jackpot with few (almost 0) prize balls to be paid out.

In this way, since the number of rounds in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues and the number of advantageous intervals are set according to the jackpot type, the player is assigned to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. It is possible to give different advantageous states.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, the jackpot B is associated and defined in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is associated and defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 99". There is. Since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C specified corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the special symbol 1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 50%, the jackpot B is selected at 20%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 30%. If the player wins, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 20%, the jackpot B is selected at 70%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Here, among the jackpot A to the jackpot C, the jackpot type in which the number of advantageous intervals is set to be large (3 times) during the jackpot game is the jackpot B. That is, the special symbol game using the special symbol 2 is configured to make it easier for the player to select a game that is advantageous to the player (probability change state is easily given) than the special symbol game using the special symbol 1. There is.

Next, the second open scenario setting table 202f in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second open scenario setting table 202f in the fourth embodiment.

The second open scenario setting table 202f is the second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 referred to when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, and the second open scenario reference when the jackpot is won in the probability change state. It has a scenario setting table (probability variation) 202f2, and the setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the first hit type selection table 202b are defined respectively. If the jackpot is won in the time saving state, the second open scenario setting table (probability change) 202f2 is set to be referred to.

Here, the second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 defined in the second open scenario setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1. This second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, and corresponds to the selected jackpot type, the opening period in the jackpot game, and the interval period between rounds. , The ending period, and the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device) that is openly controlled in the round game are defined respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is "5 seconds", and the interval period from the first round to the seventh round is "0.2 seconds" (first interval period). The ending period is set to be "5 seconds".

Further, the variable winning devices that are open-controlled in the round game are odd-numbered rounds (1, 3, 5, 7 rounds), the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a), and even-numbered rounds (2.4.6. In the 8th round), a scenario is set in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened.

When the jackpot type is jackpot B, the opening period is "5 seconds" and the interval period from the first round to the fourth round is "0.2 seconds" (first interval period), the fifth to seventh rounds. The interval period is set to "2 seconds" (second interval period), and the ending period is set to "5 seconds".

Further, the variable winning devices that are open-controlled in the round game are odd-numbered rounds (1, 3, 5, 7 rounds), the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a), and even-numbered rounds (2.4.6. In the 8th round), a scenario is set in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening period is "5 seconds", the interval period of the first round is "2 seconds" (second interval period), and the ending period is "5 seconds". Set.

Further, the variable winning device that is open-controlled in the round game is the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) for odd-numbered rounds (1 round), and the second variable winning device 650 (second round) for even-numbered rounds (2 rounds). A scenario is set in which the two large opening openings 650a) are opened.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in a continuous round game, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) arranged in the vertical direction are alternately open-controlled. Since it is configured so that a short time (0.2 seconds) can be set as the inter-round interval, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 and second) is configured to be possible, especially in the inter-round interval during the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the generation of balls that do not enter the variable winning device 650).

Further, the first round (first round) executed in the jackpot game is set to the round opened by the first variable winning device 65 provided above the two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the generation of balls that do not enter the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in the interval between rounds.

That is, when the control of alternately opening two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction is executed in a continuous round game, the ball is variable upward when one round in which the upper variable winning device is released is completed. You will pass through the winning device. By controlling the lower variable winning device to be opened so that the ball passing through the upper variable winning device enters, the variable winning device becomes a variable winning device in the inter-round interval between one round and the next round. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of balls that do not enter.

However, in the opposite of the pattern described above, that is, in the inter-round interval between the round in which the lower variable winning device is opened and the round in which the upper variable winning device is opened, the lower variable winning device is closed. A sphere will be generated that passes through.

Therefore, the first round (first round) executed in the jackpot game is set to the round opened by the first variable winning device 65 provided above the two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction. By reducing the number of transitions from a round game in which the lower variable winning device is opened to a round game in which the upper variable winning device is opened during the jackpot game, the variable winning device (first variable winning device) is used in the interval between rounds. It is possible to further suppress the generation of balls that do not enter the device 65 and the second variable winning device 650).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, either the first interval (0.2 seconds) or the second interval (2 seconds) is set as the interval between rounds. Of these, in the first interval (0.2 seconds), as described above, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) is closed for the ball fired during the jackpot game. It is set to suppress passing through the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) during the interval period.

On the other hand, the second interval (2 seconds) is set to intentionally generate a ball passing through the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) during the interval period. be.

In this way, by changing the interval period (first interval period and second interval period) according to the jackpot type, the rate at which balls flowing into the distribution device 2600 are generated during the jackpot game is changed. Is possible.

That is, the degree of expectation that the ball will enter the specific winning opening 630a during the probable change winning valid period of the jackpot game can be different depending on the jackpot type. That is, depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to set a jackpot that is likely to be given a probabilistic state and a jackpot that is difficult to be given a probabilistic state.

In the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type in which a plurality of second intervals (2 seconds) advantageous to the player are set, the second interval is the final stage of the jackpot game (5th to 7th rounds). It is stipulated that it should be set to (eyes). This is to give the player the expectation that a second interval advantageous to the player will occur during the jackpot game until the end, but the period for setting the second interval may be another period. For example, the interval period after the round in which the variable winning device (second variable winning device 650) provided below is opened may be set as the second interval period.

Specifically, in the case of jackpot B, the intervals of the second round, the fourth round, and the sixth round (three times in total) may be set as the second interval. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 that executes control to alternately open two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction in a continuous round game, a ball that does not enter any of the variable winning devices The interval between rounds, which is likely to occur, will be set as the second interval.

Therefore, in an inter-round interval other than the inter-round interval in which the second interval for generating a ball that does not intentionally enter any variable winning device is set, the ball may enter the distribution device 2600. It has the effect of suppressing the occurrence.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123 (c), the second open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202f2 is also set in the second open scenario setting table 202f. FIG. 123 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202f2. This second open scenario table (probability change) 202f2 is a table that is referred to when a big hit is won during the probability change (time reduction) state, and is between rounds with respect to the above-mentioned second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1. The difference is that the time set as the second interval of the intervals is changed from "2 seconds" to "4 seconds". Since the other contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With this configuration, if the jackpot is won during the probability change (time reduction) state, the time set as the second interval becomes longer, so the percentage of balls that enter the distribution device 2600 during the jackpot game is set. Can be increased.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the normal gaming state. It is possible to make it easier to continuously provide a game state that is advantageous, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific general winning opening 630a is provided separately from the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) opened during the jackpot game, and the specific general winning opening 630a is provided. By passing the ball within the valid period of the probability change prize (the period from the start of the first round game during the jackpot game to the end of the final round round game), the probability change state is given after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to do. Therefore, like the above-mentioned jackpot C, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) is opened for a short period (1 second), that is, a jackpot in which almost no prize balls are paid out. Even if it is, the probability variation prize validity period can be lengthened by setting a long interval period between rounds.

As a result, even if it is a big hit with almost no payout of prize balls (a big hit in which the variable winning device is opened for a short period of time), the game of deciding whether or not to give a probability change to the end of the big hit game is fully enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the interval period between rounds is longer when the jackpot C is selected in the probabilistic (time saving) state than when the jackpot C is selected in the normal game state. Therefore, in a jackpot with almost no payout of prize balls (a jackpot with a short period in which the variable winning device is opened), the length of the probabilistic prize valid period is changed according to the game state, and it is easy to give a probable change to the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to set a jackpot and a jackpot that is difficult to give, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the types of jackpot types may be further increased. In this case, for example, it is preferable to provide a plurality of jackpot types in which intervals between rounds of different periods are set for the jackpot C. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game of whether or not to acquire a probabilistic state by using a jackpot with almost no payout of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the flow of the jackpot game of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the normal game state (normal state) and the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and FIG. 124 (b) is a probability variation. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the game state (probability change state), and the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type.

First, the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (a). The jackpot B is a jackpot of 8 rounds as shown in FIG. 122 (b). When jackpot B is selected in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), the opening period is 5 seconds, the interval between rounds is 0.2 seconds from the first round to the fourth round, and the fifth round to the seventh. The round is set to 2 seconds and the ending period is set to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), 5 seconds after the jackpot game is started, the opening period ends and the first round game is started. This first round round game is a round game in which the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) provided above the second variable winning device 650 is opened. This round game ends when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 balls enter the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a).

Here, when the first round game is started, the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON. While the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to on, when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, the probabilistic winning valid period is given after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when the first round is completed, the first interval (0.2 seconds) is started as the interval period of the first round, and when the first interval (0.2 seconds) is completed, the lower part of the first variable winning device 65. The second round game in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) provided in the above is opened is started.

With this configuration, the ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) in the closed state after the first round is completed is the second variable winning in the second round game. The ball can be put into the device 650 (second large opening 650a). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ball can be efficiently entered into the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), so that the jackpot game can be smoothly executed for the player. Has the effect of being able to provide.

Then, when the 6th round game in which the 2nd variable winning device 650 (2nd large opening 650a) is opened is completed, the 2nd interval (2 seconds) is started as the 6th round interval period, and the second interval is started. When the interval (2 seconds) ends, the seventh round game in which the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) provided above the second variable winning device 650 is opened is started.

Here, as the interval of the 6th round (corresponding to the intervals of the 5th, 6th, and 7th rounds in the present embodiment), the second interval (2 seconds) longer than the first interval (0.2 seconds) is set. To. By setting this second interval, it is possible to set a period during which the ball is likely to flow into the distribution device 2600 during the jackpot game. Specifically, since the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed for 2 seconds, three balls flow into the sorting device 2600.

Then, although not shown, when the eighth round round game (a round game in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened) is completed, the probability variation winning valid flag is set to off, and then , The jackpot game ends after the ending period (5 seconds).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, as the interval period between rounds, the first interval (0.2 seconds) in which the game ball is less likely to flow into the distribution device 2600 and the interval more than the first interval. By setting a long period, the second interval (2 seconds) that easily flows into the distribution device 2600 can be set, and the interval period between rounds is based on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. The number of times the second interval is set is different.

As a result, if the probability that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a (easiness of entering the ball) is different by making the frequency of the ball flowing into the distribution device 2600 different depending on the jackpot type. It will be possible to make it.

Further, since the spheres flowing into the distribution device 2600 are regularly distributed by the first distribution member 1901 and the second distribution member 1902 (see FIG. 120), a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment) of spheres are used. By flowing into the distribution device 2600, the ball can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

Further, depending on the distribution status of each distribution member (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902) in the distribution device 2600, one sphere is transferred to the distribution device 2600 during the probabilistic winning prize validity period. Since there is a possibility that the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a just by flowing in, the player expects the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a every time the ball flows into the distribution device 2600. While playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game.

Further, even if the jackpot game in which the second interval is not set (the jackpot A in the present embodiment) is executed, it is not confirmed that the probability change state is not given after the end of the jackpot game, for example, the second variable winning. While the round game in which the device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened is completed and the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is closed (first interval (0.2 seconds)). ) Allows the ball to pass through the second variable winning device 650 so that the ball can enter the sorting device 2600.

Therefore, in all jackpot games, there is a possibility that the probability change state will be given when the jackpot game ends, so the player expects that the probability change state will be given to the end no matter which jackpot is won. You can play games.

Next, the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the probability variation game state (probability variation state) will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). When the jackpot B is won in the probabilistic gaming state (probability changing state), the time of the second interval is extended from 2 seconds to 4 seconds as compared with the case where the jackpot B is won in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 124 (a). It differs in that it is.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the interval of the sixth round (in the present embodiment, the intervals of the fifth, sixth, and seventh rounds correspond to each other) is the second interval longer than the first interval (0.2 seconds). The interval (4 seconds) is set. By setting this second interval, it is possible to set a period during which the ball is likely to flow into the distribution device 2600 during the jackpot game. Specifically, since the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed for 4 seconds, six balls flow into the sorting device 2600.

That is, when the jackpot is won in the probability variation state, the jackpot B and the jackpot C for which the second interval is set at least once are selected, so that four or more balls are sent to the distribution device 2600 during the probability variation winning valid period. Since the inflow is possible and the probability change state is given after the jackpot game ends with a high probability, the probability change state is given after the jackpot end with a higher probability than when the jackpot is won in the normal game state.

Therefore, if the player shifts to a probabilistic state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, the probabilistic state is likely to continue. It has the effect of suppressing the situation of giving.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) are arranged above and below, and two variable winning devices are arranged in a continuous round game. By alternately opening the winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), the ball launched during the jackpot game is efficiently entered into the variable winning device. Below the two variable winning devices, a sorting device 2600 for distributing balls to the specific general winning opening 630a is provided.

As a result, the ball that did not enter any of the two variable winning devices during the jackpot game, that is, the ball that was previously wasted, flows into the distribution device 2600, and the specific general winning opening 630a It is possible to enter the ball.

Therefore, since it is possible to provide the player with a game using all the balls fired during the jackpot game, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the interval effect executed in the second interval period as the effect during the jackpot game and whether or not the probability change state is given after the end of the jackpot are 6 rounds with respect to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the round effect to be notified during the round game of the eyes is executed.

First, the interval effect will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (a). First, with reference to FIG. 125 (a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 125A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display area displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment is a schematic view showing a portion aimed at by the player with respect to the display screen (see FIG. 76) of the second embodiment described above. Is different in that it is changed to the distribution device 2600, and is the same except for that. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The display screen shown in FIG. 125 (a) shows an interval effect displayed during the interval period (2 seconds) of the fifth round after the fifth round game is completed, and is the first variable winning device 65. This is a screen for notifying the player that both the second variable winning device 650 is closed and the ball can flow into the sorting device 650. It should be noted that this interval effect is an effect that is displayed every time at the interval between rounds in which the second interval is set.

Then, when the interval period of the fifth round ends and the round game of the sixth round starts, the display screen shown in FIG. 125 (b) is displayed. Here, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the round game of the sixth round will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (b). FIG. 125B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the fourth embodiment, the fact that the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a between the start of the probable change winning valid period (see FIG. 124) and the interval period of the fifth round (probability change state after the end of the big hit). Is confirmed), and a round effect is executed to notify the player during the sixth round game.

Here, if it has already been confirmed that the probabilistic state will be given after the jackpot ends, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), an effect of congratulating the player with "GET congratulations" is displayed. On the other hand, if it has not been confirmed that the probabilistic state will be given at the stage when the round effect is executed, an effect that encourages the player is displayed (not shown).

In the present embodiment, since the probability variation prize validity period continues until the final round of the jackpot game is completed, it is confirmed that the probability variation state is given at the stage when the sixth round game is executed. Even if it does not exist, there is still the possibility that a probabilistic state will be given. As a result, the player who has been notified that the probability change state is given by executing the round effect can execute the remaining jackpot game with peace of mind, while the probability change state is given. The player who has been notified that the fact has not been confirmed can be enthusiastically played between the remaining jackpot gaming machines.

In addition to the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game, an effect of immediately notifying when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation prize valid period and a probability variation state are given until the jackpot game ends. You may perform an effect that does not notify the player whether or not the game is played.

Next, returning to FIG. 121, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment, the winning count counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment has been deleted, and the probability variation passing flag 223p has been added.

The probability variation passage flag 223p is a flag indicating that it is confirmed that the probability variation state is given after the jackpot game is completed by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning valid period during the jackpot game. .. By setting the probability change passage flag 223p to ON, a round effect for notifying that the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed is executed (see FIG. 125 (b)). This probabilistic pass flag 223p is used in the specific general winning opening 630a while the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (within the probabilistic winning valid period) in the winning process 4 (S1111) described later with reference to FIG. 126. The voice lamp control device 113 receives a state command (S1453 in FIG. 126) set based on the passage of the ball through the provided probability change switch, and is set to ON (S4952 in FIG. 127). It is set to off (S5106) in the round effect process (S4953) described later with reference to 128.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, since the storage device 600 (see FIG. 2) is deleted with respect to the first embodiment described above, the control process related to the storage valve 607a (see FIG. 8) provided in the storage device 600 is deleted. In the point that the control process related to the flow path switching valve 650d was deleted because the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15) in the second variable winning device 650 was deleted, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35). The difference is that the content of the winning process (S1111 in FIG. 35) to be executed is changed to the winning process 4 (see FIG. 126).

In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment, only the points changed from the first embodiment described above will be described, and the processes not changed from the first embodiment will be described. , And the point that the process is simply deleted will be omitted in detail.

First, the winning process 4 (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process 4 (S1111). The winning process 4 (S1111) is modified so that the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above is executed only when the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (see FIG. 38). S1451), Control content so that the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on by passing (entering) the probability variation switch (specific general winning opening 630a) during the period when the probability variation winning valid flag 203 is set to on. (S1452), and when the probability change setting flag 203h is set to on, the state command corresponding to the probability change passage state is set (S1453), and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, among the processes executed in the winning process 4 (S1111), the processes of S1451 and S1452 are the same as the winning process 3 (FIG. 113) of the third embodiment described above, and therefore have the same reference numerals. , And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning process 4 (S1111) is executed, the processing of S1451 is executed in the same manner as the winning process 3 (see FIG. 113) of the third embodiment described above, and then the first embodiment described above is executed. The processes of S1402 to S1406 are executed in the same manner as the winning process of the form (see FIG. 38). After that, the processing of S1452 is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned winning process 3 of the third embodiment (see FIG. 113), and the processing of S1410 and S1412 is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned winning processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Will be executed.

When the processing of S1412 is completed, next, a state command corresponding to the probabilistic passing state is set (S1453), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S1453, while the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to on (from the start of the first round to the end of the last round in the jackpot game), the ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a. A probabilistic pass command is set to indicate that the ball has entered (the ball has passed the probabilistic switch), that is, it is a state in which it is confirmed that the probabilistic state will be given after the jackpot ends.

This probability variation passage command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command set in the process of S1453, the round effect (see FIG. 125 (b)) executed during the jackpot game is completed by the time the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to notify whether or not the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment is different in that the content of the command determination process 4 of the main process (see FIG. 42) is changed from the first embodiment. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, only the points different from the first embodiment described above will be described, and they have not been changed from the first embodiment. Detailed description of other processes will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 4 (S1811) executed in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S1811). This command determination process 4 (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. , Is a process executed for various commands output from the main control device 110.

This command determination process 4 (S1811) adds a process to be executed when a probability variation passing command is received to the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above, and a winning information command. The difference is that the content of the process executed when the command is received is changed and the content of the process executed when the round number command is received is specified, and the other processes are the same. The processes S1904 to S1910 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above are the processes executed in the command determination process 3 of the third embodiment, but other processes are also executed. It shall be included in the process corresponding to the command (S1919), and the illustration of the process is omitted. Further, among the processes shown in FIG. 115, the same processes as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 127, when the command determination process 4 (S1811) is executed, the processes S1901 to S1903 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation passage command has been received (S4951). When it is determined that the probability variation passage command has been received (S4951: Yes), the probability variation passage flag 223p is set to ON (S4952), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4951 that the probability variation passing command has not been received (S4951: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S1911). Here, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1911: Yes), the data stored in the winning information storage area is updated based on the received command (S4953), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then the processes of S1913 to S1918 are the same as the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43). To execute. Then, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of 1916 (S1916: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4954).

Here, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4954: Yes), the round effect process is executed (S4955). This round effect is a process of determining the content of the effect performed during the jackpot game. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

When the round effect process (S4955) is completed, next, a display round number command is set (S4956), and this process is terminated. This display round number command is currently executed by being output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1802) executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control process 113. The number of rounds of the round game is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 125 (a)).

If it is determined in the process of S4954 that the round number command has not been received (S4954: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1919). As the processing corresponding to the other commands, in addition to the processing described in the above-mentioned command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), the processing of S1904 to 1910 of the command determination processing of the first embodiment is performed. include.

Next, the round effect process (S4955) executed in the command determination process 4 (S1811 in FIG. 127) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect processing (S4955). This round effect processing (4955) is a process of determining the display content of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, and specifically, a process of determining the display content of the round effect shown in FIG. 125 (b). Is executed.

When the round effect process (S4955) is executed, the current number of rounds is first extracted based on the round number command received this time (S5101). Then, it is determined whether the current number of rounds is 6, that is, whether it is the timing when the sixth round is started (S5104).

Here, if it is determined that the current number of rounds is not 6 (it is not the timing when the 6th round is started) (S5102: No), a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is set. (S5103), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the current number of rounds is 6 (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation pass flag 223p is on (S5104).

If it is determined in the process of S5104 that the probability change passage flag 223p is set to ON (S5104: Yes), a display round command indicating that the probability change route has passed (the probability change passage command has been received) is set (S5104: Yes). S5105). By setting the display round command indicating the passage of this probabilistic route, an image congratulating the player with "GET congratulations" is displayed during the sixth round game (see FIG. 125 (b)).

Then, when the processing of S5105 is completed, the probability variation passing flag 223p is set to off (S5106), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5104 that the probability variation passage flag 223p is not set to on (set to off) (S5104: No), the probability variation route is not passed (probability variation passage command is not received). Set a display round command indicating (S5107), and end this process. By setting the display round command indicating that the probabilistic route has not passed, an image that encourages the player to "do not give up" is displayed during the sixth round game (not shown).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the main control device 110 provides information indicating that the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning validity period (see FIG. 124) during the jackpot game. Since it is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, for example, it is possible to notify whether or not the probability change state is given after the end of the current big hit game by the end of the big hit game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the probabilistic winning prize validity period continues until the final round of the jackpot game is completed, the probabilistic change state is given at the stage (intermediate stage) when the sixth round round game is executed. Even if it is not confirmed, there is still the possibility that a probable change state will be given. As a result, the player who has been notified that the probability change state is given by executing the round effect displayed during the sixth round round game can safely execute the remaining jackpot game. On the other hand, the player who has been notified that the probability change state has not been determined can be enthusiastically played between the remaining jackpot gaming machines.

In addition to the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game, an effect of immediately notifying when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation prize valid period and a probability variation state are given until the jackpot game ends. You may perform an effect that does not notify the player whether or not the game is played.

In the fourth embodiment, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) are provided, but the number of variable winning devices may be one. Further, as a configuration of the variable winning device, one variable winning device has two openings on the upstream side and the downstream side in the flow direction of the ball, and the two openings are opened and closed by one opening / closing member. You may do it. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the generation of balls that do not enter the variable winning device between rounds during the jackpot game.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the specific general winning opening 630a is provided below the two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), but other configurations are used. Alternatively, for example, a variable winning device may be arranged below the specific general winning opening 630a. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probable change winning valid period during the jackpot game.

Further, it is preferable to provide a distribution device 2600 above the specific general winning opening 630a. With this configuration, for example, when a big hit (for example, a two-round big hit) where the big hit game ends in a short period of time is won, the specific general winning opening 630a is within the probable change prize valid period during the big hit game. It is possible to provide the playability that whether or not a ball enters the ball is determined by the distribution situation of the distribution device 2600 balls.

For such playability, a specific area (specific general winning opening 630a) to which a probabilistic state can be given by entering (passing) a ball within the probable change winning valid period as in the present embodiment is separated from the variable winning device. It can be realized because it is provided, and even if you win a big hit with a small number of balls to be paid out (a big hit with a short period when the variable winning device is opened, for example, a big hit for 2 rounds), you can execute a game that gives a probability change state. Can be made to.

Therefore, even if the jackpot has a small number of balls to be paid out (a jackpot for which the variable winning device is opened for a short period of time, for example, a jackpot for two rounds), which has been disadvantageous to the player in the past, the effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased. There is.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 149. In the third embodiment described above, the second storage device 1600 is provided, and a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down are provided in the second storage device 1600. It is configured so that it is possible to win a prize in the probabilistic winning opening) 630a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 630b. Further, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1600a capable of storing a ball flowing down a part of the flow path.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the third storage device 3600, the first distribution member 3901, the second distribution member 3902, and the first gate 670 are provided in place of the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment. ing.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the first variable is made in the right side area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the area provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). A winning device 65 is provided, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided below the first variable winning device 65. Since the configurations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are the same as those of the fourth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the second variable winning device 650 is added, and the third storage device replaces the second storage device 1600. The points where the 3600 is provided, the points where the first distribution member 3901 and the second distribution member 3902 are provided, the points where the first gate 670 is provided, and the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. Point, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. , And a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 3 embodiments. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a front view showing the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the right side area (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the variable display device unit) with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. Various configurations provided in the area provided on the right side of 80) are different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 130, the configuration of the right side region of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is an enlarged view of the region of the two-dot chain line CXXX shown in FIG. 129. As shown in FIG. 130, a first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 are arranged vertically in the right area of the game board 13, for a round game continuously executed during a big hit game. By alternately controlling the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 to be opened, it is possible to suppress the generation of balls that do not enter any of the variable winning devices during the jackpot game. It is configured. Since the configuration and operation control of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 arranged above and below are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A plurality of nails are planted below the second variable winning device 650 (nails K10, K11), and a ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 is formed between the nail K10 and the nail K11. It flows down to the opening 3900 or the flow path 3910. Here, the nail K10 and the nail K11 are each provided with a plurality of nails connected to each other, and the ratio of the balls flowing down the opening 3900 can be changed by changing the planting position and the inclination of the plurality of nails. It is configured in.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, one out of every three balls launched by the right-handed game and passing through the second variable winning device 650 is configured to flow down to the opening 3900 (about 33%). Has been done. In the right region, the ball flowing down the flow path 3910 passes through the through gate 67, flows down to a position where the ball can enter the second entry port 640, and the ball that does not enter the second entry port 640 , Is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66 (see FIG. 129).

Further, the sphere flowing down the opening 3900 is distributed to a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 3900a to fourth flow path 3900d) by the first distribution device 3901 and the second distribution device 3902, and finally the second flow path 3900d. The sphere that has flowed down the flow path 3900b and the fourth flow path 3900d passes through the through gate 67 in the same manner as the sphere that has passed through the flow path 3910, flows down to a position where the ball can enter the second entry port 640, and is the second. A ball that has not entered the ball entry port 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66 (see FIG. 129).

On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the third flow path 3900c passes through the first gate 670 and flows down to the third storage device 3600. The third storage device 3600 has a storage valve 3600a configured in the same manner as the storage valve 1601a provided in the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment described above, and when the storage valve 3600a is in the closed state, the third storage device 3600 has a storage valve 3600a. , Retained (retained) on the storage valve 3600a.

As shown in FIG. 130, the third storage device 3600 is provided with a side wall 3600b so that one ball is stored on the storage valve 3600a, and the ball stored on the storage valve 3600a flows down from the upstream. It is configured to stay on the storage valve 3600a even if it collides with another ball that has been used.

Further, when a new ball flows down toward the third storage device 3600 while the ball is stored on the storage valve 3600a, it collides with the ball stored on the storage valve 3600a and flows through the flow path 3911. Will be guided to. The ball guided to the flow path 3911 flows down a position where the ball can enter the second entry port 640, and the ball that does not enter the second entry port 640 has an out port 66 (see FIG. 129). You will be guided to a ball discharge channel (not shown).

Then, when the storage valve 3600a is opened (released), the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 enters the specific general winning opening 630a provided below the third storage device 3600. Since the specific general winning opening 630a has the same configuration as the above-described third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, a characteristic configuration of the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be briefly described. In the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit in the special symbol lottery (win / fail determination) executed based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Later, when the ball passes through the first gate 670, the jackpot type is determined. Then, the jackpot game is started when the jackpot type is determined (the jackpot type is selected).

Further, the storage valve 3600a of the third storage device 3600 is opened when a predetermined time (for example, 16 seconds) has elapsed from the determination of the hit / miss of the special symbol in the hit / fail determination of the special symbol.

Further, as in the third embodiment described above, the specific general winning opening 630a is provided, and the final round game ends after the round game within a specific period (first (first round)) during the jackpot game is started. By entering the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a), a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player is given after the end of the jackpot game.

That is, when it is determined to be a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol, the game shifts to the game state (big hit standby state) in which the big hit game is started by passing the ball through the first gate 670, and the storage valve 3600a is opened (the storage valve 3600a is opened. The count for releasing) is started (for example, 16 seconds). Then, when a ball is passed through the first gate 670 within a predetermined period (for example, within 9 seconds) after the special symbol is determined to be a big hit, the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 is transferred to the third storage device 3600. The jackpot game is started in the stored state.

A round game (first round game) in which any variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65) is released after a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) of opening when the jackpot game is started. Is started. Then, when a predetermined period elapses (for example, 16 seconds elapses) after the special symbol is determined to be a big hit, the storage valve 3600a changes to the open position, and the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 is specified. Enter the general winning opening 630a.

If the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is within the probability variation winning valid period (the period from the start of the first round round game to the end of the final round round game), the jackpot game A probable change state is given after the end.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed according to the period required from when the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot until the ball is passed through the first gate 670. It is possible to change the degree of expectation (probability) to be made.

Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game from when the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (after shifting to the big hit standby state) until the ball is passed through the first gate 670.

In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) are provided in the right area of the game board 13, and the two variable winning devices are used for each round game. By alternately controlling the opening of the ball, the situation in which the ball fired during the jackpot game does not enter any of the variable winning devices is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the ball passes through the second variable winning device 650 and enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning valid period in the jackpot game.

Next, the ball flow in the right region in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130. First, of the balls launched by the right-handed game, about 33% pass through the opening 3900, and 50% of the balls flowing down the opening 3900 are distributed to the first flow path 3900a, and the first flow path 3900a. 50% of the balls flowing down the ball are distributed to the third flow path 3900c, and the balls flowing down the third flow path 3900c enter the specific general winning opening 630a. That is, the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the specific general winning opening 630a at a rate of about 1 in 12 balls.

Further, the ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650, which is in the closed state, passes through the opening 3900 formed by the nail K10 and the nail K11, and flows down the first distribution portion 3901 and the second distribution portion 3902. Then, it is distributed to each flow path. Here, it is configured so that the time required for the ball passing through the opening 3900 to pass through the first gate 670 is about 1 second.

The ball that has passed through the first gate 670 is stored (held) in the third storage device 3600 when the storage valve 3600a is closed, and is a specific general prize when the storage valve 3600a is open (released). Enter the ball into the mouth 630a. Here, it is configured so that the time required for the ball passing through the first gate 670 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is about 1 second.

Further, when the storage valve 3600a is opened (released), the time required for the ball stored (retained) in the storage valve 3600a to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is set to 0.5 seconds. ing.

With this configuration, when the ball passes through the first gate 670 in the state where the jackpot of the special symbol is won (the jackpot standby state), the jackpot game is executed. Then, the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 is stored (held) in the third storage device 3600, and the storage valve 3600a is opened (released) after a predetermined time (for example, 16 seconds after winning the jackpot). Enter the specific general winning device 630a.

Further, even if the right-handed game is continuously executed even after the ball has passed through the first gate 670, the next ball passes through the first gate 670 in about 7.2 seconds (). 100 shots can be fired in 60 seconds, and the number of balls passing through the first gate 670 is 1 in 12). That is, by setting a period shorter than 7.2 seconds (maximum 6 seconds in this embodiment) as the opening period in the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started, and two variable winning devices (first variable) are started during the opening period. It is possible to prevent a ball that has passed through the winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) from entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the round game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the specific winning opening 630a at an unintended timing and provide a fair game.

Further, the present embodiment is configured to be able to determine whether or not the ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 630a is a ball that has been launched by an appropriate game. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 130, a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the opening 3900 (not shown) and a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the second flow path 3900b (not shown). , A sensor (not shown) for detecting a ball passing through the fourth flow path 3900d is provided, and the number of balls fired by the right-handed game can be measured. Then, a command capable of grasping the number of balls passing through the through gate 67 and the number of balls passing through the first gate 670 is configured to be output from the main control device 110.

Based on the signal output from the sensor provided as described above and the command output from the main control device 110, the number of balls that have passed through the opening 3900, the number of balls that have passed through the second flow path 3900b, and the fourth flow. By determining whether or not the total number of balls that have passed through the road 3900d and the number of balls that have passed through the first gate 670 match, the first ball is illegally repeated (one ball is repeated using a ball with a thread). (Act of passing through the gate 670) It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the ball is passed through the first gate 670.

Further, in the present embodiment, since one out of four balls that have passed through the opening 3900b is configured to pass through the first gate 670, the number of balls that have passed through the second flow path 3900b and the fourth. Whether the distribution member properly distributes the balls by determining whether or not the ratio of the total number of balls passing through the flow path 3900d to the number of balls passing through the first gate 670 is 3: 1. It is configured so that it can be determined.

As a result, the distribution member is damaged and the ball is distributed to only one of the routes, or the distribution member is illegally damaged so that the ball is distributed only to the route that is advantageous to the player. It has the effect of being able to easily determine that fraudulent activity is taking place.

When comparing the number of balls of each sensor or each command described above or the total number of balls of them, a predetermined allowable range may be provided. This takes into account the time lag when the ball flows down. Specifically, the determination may be made in consideration of the time (about 1 second) required for the ball passing through the opening 3900 to pass through the through gate 67 or the first gate 670.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment is such that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the electrical configuration in the third embodiment, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The difference is that the configuration of the above is partially changed, and various sensor groups 229 connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 are deleted. Since the other electrical configurations are the same as those in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (a). FIG. 132 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 132 (a), in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, the contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, and the open scenario setting table 202e is opened to the third. The difference is that the scenario setting table is changed to 202g.

Here, the first type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as a result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail determination), after the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is referred to with reference to the first hit type selection table 202b based on the fact that the ball passes through the first gate 670. Is selected.

The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment is defined in each jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) with respect to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 100 (b)) in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the contents described above are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those of the first type selection table 202b of the third embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Is stipulated. This jackpot A is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 8 rounds. The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". This jackpot B is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 8 rounds. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99", the jackpot C is associated and defined. This jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for two rounds.

Of the above-mentioned jackpot types, jackpot A and jackpot B are both jackpots with the same number of rounds (8 rounds), but the opening set in the third opening scenario setting table described later with reference to FIG. 133. In order to make the scenario (motion control scenario during the jackpot game) different in the jackpot in which the same number of rounds (8 rounds) of the round game is executed, the jackpot type is different.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, the jackpot B is associated and defined in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is associated and defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 99". There is. Since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C specified corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the special symbol 1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 50%, the jackpot B is selected at 20%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 30%. If the player wins, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 20%, the jackpot B is selected at 70%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the third open scenario setting table 202g in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the third open scenario setting table 202 g in the fifth embodiment.

The third open scenario setting table 202 g is the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202 g1 referred to when the ball passes through the first gate 670 in the state where the jackpot is won in the normal game state (big hit standby state). It has a third open scenario setting table (probability change) 202g2, which is referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state where a big hit is won in a probability change state (big hit standby state), and each is the first hit. The setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the type selection table 202b are defined. If the jackpot is won in the time saving state, the third open scenario setting table (probability change) 202g2 is set to be referred to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 133 (b), the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202 g1 defined in the third open scenario setting table 202 g will be described. FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202 g1. This third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1 is a table referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state where a big hit is won in a normal game state (big hit standby state), and is selected. The opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period in the jackpot game are set according to the jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "6 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is set. If is a big hit B, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "16 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds". When the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "6 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds".

Next, with reference to FIG. 133 (c), the third open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202 g2 defined in the third open scenario setting table 202 g will be described. FIG. 133 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the third open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202 g2. This third open scenario setting table (probability change) 202g2 is a table to be referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state where a big hit is won in a probable change (time reduction) state (big hit standby state), and is selected. The opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period in the jackpot game are set according to the jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "1 second", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is set. If is a big hit B, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "11 seconds", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds". When the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "1 second", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds".

As described above, in the present embodiment, among the periods (opening period, interval period, ending period) set during the jackpot, the opening period is set to be different depending on the jackpot type. In addition, the opening period and the interval period are set to be different depending on the gaming state (normal state or probability change (time reduction) state).

In this way, by changing the opening period in the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening period (until the start of the first round game) is changed. ..

Therefore, it is possible to provide a jackpot in which the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 is easy to enter within the valid period of the probability variation prize and a jackpot in which it is difficult to enter. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Further, the interval between rounds is set to 0.2 seconds in the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1 referred to in the case of the normal gaming state (see FIG. 133 (b)), and the probability change (time reduction) state. In the third open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202g2 referred to in the case of, it is set to 0.5 seconds.

By setting the period to be long, this inter-round interval lengthens the state in which none of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) is open during the probabilistic winning valid period. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a provided below the second variable winning device 650 during the probabilistic winning winning period.

On the other hand, by shortening the interval between rounds, it is possible to shorten the state in which none of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) is open during the probabilistic winning valid period. can. Therefore, the ball fired during the jackpot game can be efficiently entered into any of the variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650).

That is, in the jackpot game in which the opening scenario is set with reference to the third opening scenario setting table (normal) 202g1, that is, the jackpot game executed in the normal gaming state, the interval between rounds is set to 0.2 seconds. Therefore, almost no ball passes through the second variable winning device 650 during the inter-round interval.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game in which the opening scenario is set with reference to the third opening scenario setting table (probability variation) 202g2, that is, the jackpot game executed in the probability variation (time reduction) state, the interval between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the second variable winning device 650 during the inter-round interval increases.

As a result, in the jackpot game executed in the probability variation (time reduction) state, even if the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 at the start of the jackpot game does not enter the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning validity period. , A ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 during the interval between rounds of the jackpot game can be a jackpot that is easy to enter the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning valid period.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the normal state. It is possible to make it easier to continuously provide an advantageous game state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the interval between rounds is set to 0.2 seconds in all the jackpot games executed when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, but the interval is not limited to this, and various times can be set. It may be set. For example, the period of the inter-round interval in a specific number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) is set to 1.5 seconds, and a game is executed in which the ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a using the inter-round interval. May be good.

Next, the contents specified in the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 134 (a). As shown in FIG. 134A, the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment has a jackpot flag 203t, a storage valve opening flag 203u, and an opening counter 203v added to the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

The jackpot flag 203t is a flag indicating that the determination result of the special symbol is a jackpot. When the ball passes through the first gate 670 while the jackpot flag 203t is set to on, the jackpot type and the opening scenario are set, and the jackpot game is started. The jackpot flag 203t is set to ON when the special symbol variation process 5 (S104 in FIG. 141) determines that the lottery result is a jackpot (S271), and the jackpot type determination process (S1051 in FIG. 143). (S5201). Then, it is set to off in the jackpot type determination process (S1051 in FIG. 143) (S5203).

The storage valve opening flag 203u is a flag indicating that the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit and the counter for opening the storage valve 3600a (opening counter 203v) is in a counting state. While the storage valve open flag 203u is set to ON, a new value is not set in the open counter 203v.

The storage valve opening flag 203u is set to on (S5210) in the storage valve opening process (S1052 in FIG. 144), and is set to off after the storage solenoid 600 is set to on (S5214).

The opening counter 203v is a counter for counting the timing of opening the storage valve 3600a when the determination result of the special symbol becomes a big hit. The opening counter 203v is set with a counter value (S5211) in the storage valve opening process (S1052 in FIG. 144) and is subtracted in the process of S5215.

Next, returning to FIG. 131, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 in the third embodiment in that the expectation degree display selection table 222b is deleted and the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c is added. Hereinafter, the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 134 (b).

FIG. 134 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c. The pseudo-effect number setting table 222c is a table for setting the number of pseudo-effects executed in the first pseudo-effect (see FIGS. 138 and 139) executed when the determination result of the special symbol becomes a big hit. be. This pseudo-effect number setting table 222c is referred to when setting the pseudo-effect number in the pseudo-effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5404).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the number of pseudo-effects set is set according to the game state (normal game state or probability change (time reduction) state) when the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit. It is set, and if the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the number of simulated effects is set to 4 times, and if the jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state, the number of simulated effects is set to 5 times.

Returning to FIG. 131, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment deletes the storage upper limit flag 223k, the special ball flow flag 223m, and the storage valve opening flag 223n with respect to the RAM 223 in the third embodiment described above, and has a pseudo effect flag 223q and a pseudo effect counter. The difference is that 223r and the opening flag 223s have been added.

The pseudo effect flag 223q is a flag indicating that the pseudo effect is being executed. The pseudo effect flag 223q is set on (S5302) in the jackpot related process (S5912 in FIG. 147) and turned off in the pseudo effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5411).

The pseudo effect counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of times the pseudo effect is executed, and is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the pseudo effect is executed. By discriminating the counter value of the pseudo-effect counter 223r, the final pseudo-effect is determined, and different effects can be executed. The pseudo effect counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S5407) in the pseudo effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149), and is reset to 0 (S5405: Yes) when it is determined that the value of the counter is the upper limit (S5413). ).

The opening flag 223s is a flag indicating that the jackpot game has started. This opening flag 223s is output from the main control device 110 based on the fact that the ball has passed through the first gate 670 in the state of winning the big hit of the special symbol (big hit standby state) in the big hit related process (S5912 in FIG. 147). It is set to be turned on when the opening command is received (S5305), and is referred to when setting a symbol to be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5408), after setting the content of the pseudo-effect. It is set to off (S5411).

Here, the flow of the game when the big hit in the fifth embodiment is won will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG. 135 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, and FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the jackpot is won in the probability variation (time reduction) state.

First, as shown in FIG. 135, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, a counter value (for example, a value corresponding to 16 seconds) for opening the storage device (third storage device 3600) is set. Then, based on the passage of the ball through the first gate 670, the jackpot type is determined (selected) (for example, the jackpot A is determined (selected)), and the opening corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined. The scenario is set and the jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game is started, the first round game is started after the opening period (6 seconds) set in the open scenario has elapsed. Then, the period from the start of the first round game to the end of the final round game is set as the probabilistic winning valid period.

In addition, when 16 seconds have passed since the jackpot of the special symbol was won, the storage device (third storage device 3600) is changed to the open state, and the ball is stored in the storage device (third storage device 3600). The ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

Therefore, if the ball is passed through the first gate 670 within 10 seconds after winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the ball passes through the first gate 670 and is stored in the storage device (third storage device 3600). The ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the valid period of the probable change winning.

If the ball is passed through the first gate 670 within 10 to 16 seconds after winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the ball passes through the first gate 670 and the storage device (third storage device 3600). The balls stored in the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a outside the valid period of the probabilistic winning prize (during the opening period of the big hit game).

Furthermore, if the ball is passed through the first gate 670 16 seconds after the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the third storage device 3600 is already in the open state before the ball is passed through the first gate 670. The ball that has passed through the first gate 670 will enter the specific general winning opening 630a as it is. However, as shown in FIG. 130, since the time required for the ball to flow down from the first gate 670 to the specific general winning opening 630a is designed to be one second, the ball passing through the first gate 670 is designed. , The ball will be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a outside the valid period of the probabilistic winning prize (during the opening period of the big hit game).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball is passed through the specific area (gate 1 670) within a predetermined period (within 10 seconds) after the jackpot of the special symbol is won, which is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be given a probabilistic state, which is a state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game even after winning the big hit of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening period of the jackpot game is set to be different depending on the jackpot type determined by the ball passing through the first gate 670. Specifically, as the jackpot type, when jackpot A is selected, 6 seconds is set as the opening period, and when jackpot B is selected, 16 seconds is set as the opening period.

In this way, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the probabilistic winning prize validity period differs depending on the jackpot type determined by passing the ball through the first gate 670, so the jackpot of the special symbol was won. In this case, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically in order to let the ball pass through the first gate 670 as soon as possible. Further, even if the timing of passing the ball through the first gate 670 is delayed, the ball passing through the first gate 670 has a probable change winning valid period by selecting the jackpot type in which the opening scenario with a short opening period is set. Since the ball is entered into the specific general winning opening 630a, there is an effect that the player can have expectations until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the flow of the game when the jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state will be described. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the probability change (time reduction) state, the timing at which the storage device (third storage device 3600) is released is the same as when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state (special symbol). 16 seconds after winning the jackpot), but the opening period corresponding to each jackpot type selected by the ball passing through the first gate 670 is set to be shortened.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a normal game state, if jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, the opening period is "6 seconds", and if jackpot B is selected, the opening period is "16 seconds", which is a jackpot. When C is selected, "6 seconds" is set as the opening period (see FIG. 133 (b)).

On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state, the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type for "1 second", and if the jackpot B is selected, the opening period is "11 seconds" and the jackpot C is selected. When selected, "1 second" is set as the opening period (see FIG. 133 (c)).

With this configuration, the ball that has passed through Gate 1 670 will win a specific general prize within the valid period of the probability variation prize if the jackpot is won in the probability variation (time saving) state than if the jackpot is won in the normal game state. It is possible to set a long period during which the ball can enter the mouth 630a. Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the normal state. It is possible to make it easier to continuously provide an advantageous game state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the set opening period is different between the case where the jackpot is won in the normal game state and the case where the jackpot is won in the probability change (time reduction) state (the probability change (time reduction) state is the opening period. (Set short) makes it possible to change the probability that the probability change state will be given after the end of the big hit (the probability change (time reduction) state is higher), but other configurations may be used.

For example, the timing at which the storage device (third storage device 3600) is opened may be different depending on whether the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state or the jackpot is won in the probability change (time saving state). Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, the storage device (third storage device 3600) is opened 16 seconds after the jackpot is won, and the jackpot is won in the probabilistic (short time) gaming state. In that case, it is advisable to open the storage device (third storage device 3600) 21 seconds after winning the jackpot.

Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, the probability that the probability change state will be given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state is higher than the probability that the probability change state will be given by the jackpot winning in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to easily continuously provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the simulated effect executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a timing chart showing the flow of the simulated effect when the jackpot A is selected. This pseudo effect is an effect of notifying whether a probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed after winning the jackpot, and after winning the jackpot (a special symbol indicating the jackpot as a judgment result of the special symbol is displayed). It consists of a first simulated effect that is executed based on the game content until the jackpot game is started (after the stop display) and a second simulated effect that is executed based on the game content during the jackpot game. ing.

This pseudo effect is executed using a pseudo symbol (see FIG. 138 (b)) having the same aspect as the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the variation of the special symbol. It is an effect, specifically, it is an effect of changing a pseudo symbol for 2 seconds and then stopping and displaying it in a predetermined symbol sequence (for example, "341" or "666"), and a pseudo effect of varyingly displaying this pseudo symbol. Is executed a plurality of times (4 times or 5 times), and the pseudo symbol finally stopped and displayed indicates that the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed.

First, when the jackpot is won (when the third symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81) (see FIG. 138 (a)), the game of passing the ball through the first gate 670 is started. At the same time, the pseudo-effect of the pseudo-symbol is executed a plurality of times on the third symbol display device 81 (first pseudo-effect). The upper limit of the number of times this pseudo-effect is executed is set by the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c (see FIG. 134 (b)).

When the number of times of the pseudo-effect to be executed does not reach the upper limit number of times set by the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c, the pseudo-design is stopped in the stop mode (for example, "341") indicating that the pseudo-effect continues. Display and execute the next simulated effect.

Then, at the timing at which the upper limit number of pseudo-effects set by the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c is executed (in the case of FIG. 137, the timing at which the fourth pseudo-effect is executed), the pseudo-effect process (FIG. 149) described later is performed. (Refer to), it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition (the ball passes through the first gate 670) is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the first simulated effect is displayed. Decide and stop display.

In this case, if it is determined that the sphere has already passed through the first gate 670 (if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the pseudo symbol is given a probabilistic state as a stop display mode. "666" is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, "222" is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode indicating that it is not confirmed that the pseudo-symbol is given the probabilistic state. To.

In this way, in a gaming machine in which it is not possible to determine whether or not a probabilistic state is given after the end of a big hit based only on the determination result of the special symbol, a pseudo effect using a pseudo symbol having the same display mode as the third symbol. By performing the above, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, in FIG. 137, four pseudo-effects, that is, 8 seconds are set as the first pseudo-effect period, and the predetermined condition is satisfied by the timing when the final pseudo-effect is started (pseudo-effect processing (see FIG. 149)). The timing of determination) is set to be 6 seconds after the jackpot is won. This is because if the predetermined conditions are met within 6 seconds from the jackpot winning (when the ball passes through the first gate 670), the ball will be placed in the specified general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning validity period. This is because it is confirmed that the ball will enter.

Further, in the present embodiment, 8 seconds is set as the first simulated effect period, but for example, if the ball is passed through the first gate 670 immediately after winning the jackpot, the first simulated effect period elapses. The jackpot game is started before the game is started, but even if the jackpot game is started, the first pseudo-effect is continuously executed.

Even in such a case, since the opening period during the jackpot game is set to 6 seconds, in most cases, the first simulated production period ends by the time the round game during the jackpot game starts. Can be done.

Further, the number of times of the simulated effect executed in the first simulated effect is set so that the timing of passing the ball to the first gate 670, which enables the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning valid period, is long. It is set so that the number of times is increased as the number of times is increased, and the player is informed that the larger the number of times of pseudo-effects, the higher the possibility of acquiring the probabilistic state.

In addition, in order to notify the player of the length of the ball passing timing to the first gate 670, which enables the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning valid period, the remaining number of times of the pseudo effect. May be configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player will enthusiastically play the game by assuming the remaining time and enthusiastically passing the ball through the first gate 670, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time for one simulated effect is fixed to 2 seconds, but a simulated effect with different effect times may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified whether or not the probabilistic state is given by the stop mode of the pseudo symbol of the final pseudo-effect, but the probabilistic state is given by using a pseudo-effect other than the final pseudo-effect. You may give a notification suggesting the possibility of this.

For example, when a sphere passes through the first gate 670 during the period in which the pseudo-effect 1 is being executed, the pseudo-design is a mode suggesting the possibility that a probable change state is given in the fluctuations of the pseudo-effect 2 and the pseudo-effect 3. It is advisable to change the color of the screen, the color of the background, and the variation mode. As a result, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic state will be given before the final pseudo-effect is started.

Next, the second simulated effect will be described. This second simulated effect notifies that after the first simulated effect is completed, the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probable variation winning valid period, and it is confirmed that the probabilistic state is given after the jackpot is completed. It is a production that is executed using the final round (8th round) of the jackpot game.

Similar to the first pseudo-effect, this second pseudo-effect also executes an effect using a pseudo-design (see FIG. 140). When the jackpot game enters the final round, the pseudo symbol variation is started on the third symbol display device 81, and the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop mode determined by the round effect processing 5 (see FIG. 148).

As described above, the simulated effect in the present embodiment is a game in which a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a within the valid period of the probability variation prize during the jackpot game, so that the probability variation is given after the jackpot game is completed. Since it is possible to notify whether or not it is confirmed that the probabilistic state is given at multiple timings on the machine, the player will see the effect performed with interest and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, since the variable display using the pseudo symbol configured in the same mode as the third symbol is performed as the pseudo effect executed at a plurality of timings, the player can perform the pseudo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By looking at the effect (variable effect of the pseudo symbol), it can be thought that the jackpot symbol "222" stopped at the time of winning the jackpot has been promoted to the probabilistic symbol "777". Therefore, even with the pachinko machine 10 having complicated game performance, it is possible to notify the player of the transition of the game state in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. be.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the above-mentioned simulated effect is executed will be described. It should be noted that each display area displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIGS. 138 to 140 has the same reference numeral in the same place as the display screen shown in FIG. 5 of the first embodiment described above. Is added and the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 138 (a), the display contents when a big hit is won (determined as a big hit) in a special symbol lottery (win / fail determination) will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the jackpot is won, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode "222" indicating that the jackpot is won in the main display area Dm.

Further, a game description for starting a big hit game is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and a portion (first gate 670) aimed at by the player is displayed in the small area Ds2 in a schematic diagram. Further, in the small area Ds3, a guidance display for instructing the player to perform a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138 (b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the first pseudo effect is executed among the pseudo effects will be described. FIG. 138 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 138 (b), a third symbol display area Dmb in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode "222" indicating a jackpot. Will be done. In the center of the main display area Dm, a pseudo symbol having a mode similar to that of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "341".

This state indicates a state in which the "pseudo-effect 1" shown in FIG. 137 has been completed, and the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode "341" indicating that the pseudo-effect is continuously executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the final simulated effect of the first simulated effect (see FIG. 137) is executed will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the case of notifying that the probability variation state is likely to be given in the final simulated effect of the first simulated effect. Therefore, FIG. 139 (b) is an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the case of notifying that it is highly probable that the probability change state is given in the final pseudo effect of the first pseudo effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows. As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the main display area Dm, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode “666” indicating that it is highly probable that the probability variation state is given. By looking at the display mode of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily grasp that the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 139 (b), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the aspect “222” indicating that it is not certain that the main display area Dm is given the probabilistic state. By seeing the display mode of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player recognizes that the probability change state is not given after the jackpot game ends at this stage, and the probability change state is given during the jackpot game. You will be enthusiastic about playing games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the second simulated effect (see FIG. 137) is executed among the simulated effects will be described. FIG. 140 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content when the second simulated effect is started, and FIG. 140 (b) is an example of the display content when the second simulated effect is completed. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the display area 714 displays the "final round" as the current number of round games, and the display area 717 displays the "last replay" indicating that the second pseudo effect is being executed. The word "lottery chance" is displayed. Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance display for guiding a target location (variable winning device) during the big hit game is displayed. Further, in the main display area Dm, the pseudo symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the pseudo variation by the second pseudo effect ends and the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed, "777" is stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 140 (b).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. The fifth embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the control for executing the jackpot game of the special symbol is changed and the control for opening the storage valve 3600a is changed.

In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, only the points changed from the third embodiment described above will be described, and the processes not changed from the third embodiment will be described. , And the point that the process is simply deleted will be omitted in detail.

First, the special symbol variation processing 5 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 5 (S104). The difference between the special symbol variation process 5 and the special symbol variation process 3 of the third embodiment described above is that the process is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a big hit (S216: Yes). The point is that the contents are different. Since the other processes are the same as the special symbol variation process of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 5 (S104) is executed, the processes S201 to S216 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process 3 of the third embodiment described above. If it is determined in the processing of S216 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processing of S220 to S223 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation processing 3 described above, and the stop command is set (S). S224), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S216: Yes), the big hit flag is set to ON (S271), and then the big hit command is set (S272). Then, a stop command is set (S224), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is not executed after that, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (big hit game standby). In the state), the big hit game is started when the ball enters the first gate 670.

Next, FIG. 142, which describes the main process of the main control device 110 with reference to FIG. 142, is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control device 110. In this main process, various processes executed by the main controller 110 are performed. The processes showing the same contents as those of the above-described third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 142, when the main process is executed, the processes S1001 to S1003 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above. Next, the jackpot type determination process is executed (S1051). From this jackpot type determination process, the jackpot type is set when the ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state where the jackpot of the special symbol is won (with the jackpot flag 203t set to ON). A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 143.

When the jackpot type determination process (S1051) is completed, the storage valve opening process (S1052) is then executed. By this storage valve opening process (S1052), the storage valve 3600a of the third storage device 3600 is controlled to open based on the fact that the jackpot of the special symbol is won. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

When the storage valve opening process (S1052) is completed, the processes S1004 to S1016 are executed in the same manner as the main process of the third embodiment described above, and this process is terminated.

Next, the jackpot type determination process (S1051 in FIG. 142) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot type determination process (S1051). When the jackpot type determination process (S1051) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5201). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203t is not set to on (set to off) (S5201: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5201: Yes), then whether or not the ball has passed through the first gate 670 is grouped (S5202). If it is determined that the ball has not passed through the first gate 670 (S5202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S5202. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the first gate 670 (S5202: Yes), then the jackpot flag 203t is set to off (S5203), and the first hit type is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is selected from the selection table 202b (S5204). Specifically, it has a means for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see S301 in FIG. 27) acquired when the change of the special symbol won in the jackpot is started in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. (Not shown), the jackpot type corresponding to the stored value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected from the first hit type selection table 202b.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type selected when the ball passes through the first gate 670 is selected by using the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol won by the jackpot. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the first gate 670, and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is obtained. You may use to select the jackpot type.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is selected when the ball passes through the first gate 670. For example, in the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 141), the lottery result of this time is a jackpot. After being determined (S216) and the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S271), a process of selecting the jackpot type may be performed.

By doing so, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the type of jackpot executed by passing the ball through the first gate 670 can be grasped in advance. Therefore, for example, the selected jackpot can be grasped. Based on the opening period set according to the type, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player can be given.

Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game from winning the special symbol to the time when the ball passes through the first gate 670, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. ..

In this case, in the jackpot type determination process shown in FIG. 143, only the process of setting the start of the jackpot based on the already selected jackpot type is performed, so that the processing load of the jackpot type determination process can be reduced. ..

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 143. When the processing of S5204 is completed, next, the opening scenario of the jackpot game is set based on the selected jackpot type and the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation (short time) gaming state) when the jackpot is won (the opening scenario of the jackpot game). S5205). Specifically, the opening scenario is set based on the contents specified in the third opening scenario setting table 202g (see FIG. 133).

The process of setting the opening scenario of the jackpot game may also be executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 141) in the same manner as the process of selecting the jackpot type described above.

Then, when the processing of S5205 is completed, the start of the jackpot is set (S5206), and the jackpot game is started. Next, a jackpot start command is set (S5207), and this process ends.

Next, the storage valve opening process (S1052) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage valve opening process (S1052). When the storage valve opening process (S1052) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5208). Here, if the jackpot flag 203t is not set to on (set to off) (S5208: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5208, when the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5208: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage valve opening flag 203u is set to ON (S5209). Here, if the storage valve open flag 203u is not set to on (S5209: No), the storage valve open flag 203u is set to on (S5210), and the open counter value corresponding to the gaming state is set (S5211). ), End this process.

Further, in the process of S5209, when the storage valve opening flag 203u is set to ON (S5209: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the opening counter 203v is 0 (S5212), and here, it is opened. When it is determined that the value of the counter 203v is 0 (S5212: Yes), the solenoid for the storage device 610 (see FIG. 131) is set to ON (S5213), and the storage valve open flag 203u is set to Off (S5213). S5214), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5212 that the value of the open counter 203v is not 0 (S5212: No), the value of the open counter 203v is subtracted by 1 (S5215), and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is not started only by winning the jackpot by the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203t is turned on in the state where the jackpot is won. The jackpot game is executed by the ball passing through the first gate 670, which is a specific area (in the set state).

Then, a storage means (third storage device 3600) that is opened after a predetermined period (for example, 16 seconds) has passed since the jackpot was won is arranged at a position where a ball that has passed through the first gate 670 can enter. The specific general winning opening 630a is arranged at a position where the ball can enter when the storage means (third storage device 3600) is opened.

This specific general winning opening 630a is a privilege that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed by the ball entering the ball within the probability variation winning validity period (from the start of the first round to the end of the final round) in the jackpot game. (Probability change state) is configured to be given.

As a result, whether or not the probability change state is given after the end of the big hit is determined by the time required from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific general winning opening 630a is located at a position where it is difficult to enter a ball when the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) opened by the jackpot game are open. Is arranged so that it is difficult for a ball fired during a jackpot game to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. As a result, there is an effect that the game from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670 can be performed more enthusiastically so that the probability change state is given after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, two variable winning devices that are opened during the jackpot game are provided up and down (upstream and downstream in the flow direction of the ball), and by alternately opening each variable winning device, between rounds. It suppresses the generation of balls that do not win in any variable winning device at intervals. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from frequently entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game (during the probability variation winning valid period).

In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening period of the jackpot game (non-probability change winning valid period), and the round interval period depend on the type of jackpot and the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability change (time reduction) state) when the jackpot is won. The lengths of are different. This makes it possible to set a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot that is unlikely to be given a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of balls that have flowed down between the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) opened during the jackpot game and the specific general winning opening 630a. Distribution members (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902) to be distributed to the flow path are provided. As a result, the ball that has passed through the variable winning device that is closed at the right time during the jackpot game is distributed to various flow paths, so it is difficult to predict whether or not the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It becomes. Therefore, since the player pays close attention to the flow condition of the ball, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game during the big hit game.

Further, the above-mentioned distribution member (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902) is configured to be able to regularly distribute spheres to a plurality of flow paths. Therefore, by allowing a predetermined number (for example, 4) or more of balls to flow down to the distribution member during the jackpot game, it is possible to reliably enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

In addition, as a configuration of this distribution member (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902), by an action other than the operation of distributing the sphere (for example, the contact of the sphere flowing down in the vicinity of the distribution member). The distribution destination of the sphere may be configured to be changeable. This has the effect of preventing the player from grasping the distribution status of the distribution member in advance.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 149, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the content of the command determination process 5 (S1811) of the main process (see FIG. 145) is changed, the pseudo effect process (S1854) is added, and the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 114). ), The time saving medium display process (S1852 in FIG. 114) and the subtraction process of the allowable time counter (S1853 in FIG. 114) are deleted, which is different from the above-described third embodiment. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, only the points different from the third embodiment described above will be described, and they have not been changed from the third embodiment. Detailed description of other processes will be omitted.

First, the main process executed in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process executed in the fifth embodiment. In this main process, the contents of the command determination process 5 (S1811) are changed and the pseudo effect process (S1854) is added to the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 114), the time saving / medium display process (S1852 in FIG. 114), and the subtraction process of the allowable time counter (S1853 in FIG. 114) are deleted. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145, when the main process is executed, the processes S1801 to S1812 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above. The detailed content of the command determination process 5 executed in S1811 is different from the command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above, and the detailed content thereof. Will be described later with reference to FIG. 146.

When the command determination process 5 (S1811) is completed, the process of S1812 is executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above, and then the pseudo effect process (S1854) is executed. To execute. This pseudo effect processing (S1854) is an effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a big hit is won, and is an effect of notifying whether or not a probability change state is given after the big hit game is completed. Is. The detailed contents of this pseudo-effect processing (S1854) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

Then, when the pseudo effect process (S1854) is completed, the processes S1813 to S1817 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above, and the present process is terminated.

Next, the command determination process 5 (S1811) executed in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 5 (S1811). When the command determination process 5 (S1811) is executed, first, the processes of S1901 to S1912 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 115) executed in the third embodiment described above.

In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot has been received (S5911). Here, the commands related to the jackpot include an opening command, a round number command, an ending command, and the like output from the main control device 110.

If it is determined in the process of S5911 that a command related to a jackpot has been received (S5911: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S5912), and this process ends. This jackpot-related process (S5912) is a process executed when a command related to the jackpot is output from the main control device 110, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5911 that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S5911: No), then the other command determination process 3 (see FIG. 115) of the third embodiment described above is performed. The process (S1919) corresponding to the command is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON, as in the winning process 4 (S1111 in FIG. 126) executed by the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above. It is configured to set a probabilistic pass command for output to, and as a process executed in S1919, a process of setting the probabilistic pass flag 223p to on is executed when a probabilistic pass command is received.

Next, the jackpot-related process (S5912) executed in the command determination process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5912). This jackpot-related process (S5912) is a process for executing an effect during the jackpot game.

When the jackpot-related process (S5912) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot command has been received (S5301). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot command has been received (S5301: Yes), the pseudo-effect flag 223q is set to ON (S5302), the jackpot command for display is set (S5303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301 when it is determined that the jackpot command has not been received (S5301: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S5304). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S5304: Yes), the opening flag 223s is set to on (S5305), the jackpot flag 223h is set to on (S5306), and the display opening command is set (S5307). ), End this process.

In the process of S5304, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S5304: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5308). Here, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5308: Yes), the round effect process 5 (S5309) is executed, the display round number command is set (S5310), and this process ends.

This round effect processing 5 (S5309) is a process of determining the content to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during each round of the jackpot game, and is a pseudo stop effect process (second pseudo stop) in the final round. This is a process in which the content of the effect of the effect process) is determined. A detailed description of the contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

On the other hand, in the process of S5308, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5308: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5311). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S5311: Yes), the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off, and the permissible time counter is set to 1 second (S5312). Then, the display ending command is set (S5313), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the ending command has not been received (S5311: No), then the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S5314), and this process is terminated. As a command to be processed in S5314, for example, when a command indicating a currently open variable winning device is received during a jackpot game, the variable currently open to the third symbol display device 81 is received. When a display command is set to display a guide to the winning device, and a command indicating that more balls than a predetermined number (10) have won a prize (so-called over winning) is received in the variable winning device. , A command for causing the voice output device 226 to output a notification sound in which an over prize has occurred is set.

Next, the round effect process 5 (S5309) executed in the jackpot-related process (S5912 in FIG. 147) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect process 5 (S5309). This round effect processing 5 (S5309) is a process of determining the content to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during each round of the jackpot game, and is a pseudo stop effect process (second pseudo stop) in the final round. This is a process in which the content of the effect of the effect process) is determined.

When the round effect process 5 (S5309) is executed, first, the number of rounds is extracted based on the received round number command (S5101). Then, it is determined whether the number of extracted rounds is the final round (S5151). If the number of extracted rounds is not the final round (S5151: No), a display round command corresponding to the number of extracted rounds is set (S5103), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5151 that the number of extracted rounds is the final round (S5151: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation pass flag 223p is set to ON (S5104). The probability variation passage flag 223p receives a command output when the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON from the main control device 110, that is, when it is confirmed that the probability variation state is given after the jackpot game ends. It is set to ON in the process of S1919 of the command determination process 5 (S1811 in FIG. 146).

In the process of S5104, when it is determined that the probability variation pass flag 223p is set to ON (S5104: Yes), it corresponds to the pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "777" as shown in FIG. 140 (b). The display round command is set (S5152), and the probability variation pass flag 223p is set to off (S5106). Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5104, when it is determined that the probability variation pass flag 223p is not set to on (set to off) (S5104: No), the pseudo stop symbol becomes "222". The corresponding display round command is set (S5153), and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, a period during which a probabilistic state can be given between the end of the first simulated effect executed when a jackpot is won and the start of the final round of the jackpot game (valid for probabilistic winning). It is possible to notify the player whether or not the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a during the period) and the probabilistic state is given after the big hit is completed by the effect using the pseudo symbol.

Therefore, it is considered that the player sees the pseudo effect (variation effect of the pseudo symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the jackpot symbol "222" stopped at the time of winning the jackpot is promoted to the probabilistic symbol "777". Can be made. Therefore, even with the pachinko machine 10 having complicated game performance, it is possible to notify the player of the transition of the gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to notify the player that the player is tired of the game. be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, a pseudo effect process (S1854) executed in the main process of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the simulated effect processing (S1854). This pseudo effect processing (S1854) describes the content of the pseudo effect (first pseudo effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81 between the time when the jackpot is won and the time when the ball passes through the first gate 670. It is a process to decide.

When the pseudo-effect processing (S1854) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the pseudo-effect flag 223q is set to ON (S5401). This pseudo effect flag 223q is a flag set to be turned on when a jackpot command is received in the jackpot-related process (S5912 in FIG. 147). Here, if it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223q is not set to on (set to off) (S5401: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the pseudo-effect flag 223q is set to ON (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether the pseudo-effect is being executed (pseudo-variable) (S5402). .. This determination is a process performed to prevent a new pseudo-effect from being started while the pseudo-effect has already been executed. Specifically, an effect indicating that the pseudo-effect is being executed. Determines if the medium flag (not shown) is set to on.

If it is determined that the simulated effect is being executed (S5402: Yes), the process is terminated as it is because a new simulated effect is not started. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo effect is not being executed (S5402: No), it is determined whether the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the process of S5403 that the value of the pseudo-effect counter is 0 (S5403: Yes), the number of pseudo-effects is set based on the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c (S5404), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-effect counter 223r is not 0, that is, when the number of pseudo-effects has already been set (S5403: No), then the value of the pseudo-effect counter 223r reaches the upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is done (S5405).

If it is determined in the process of S5405 that the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is not the upper limit (S5405: No), a display effect command corresponding to the pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "341" is set (S5406). ), The pseudo effect counter 223r is added by 1 (S5407), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo effect counter is the upper limit (S5405: Yes), then it is determined whether the opening flag 223s is set to ON (S5408). The opening flag 223s is a flag set to be turned on when an opening command is received in the jackpot-related process (S5912 in FIG. 147) of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 146).

Here, in the process of S5408, when it is determined that the opening flag 223s is set to ON (S5408: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "777" is set. (S5409), and shift to S5411.

On the other hand, in the process of S5408, when it is determined that the opening flag 223s is not set to on (set to off) (S5408: No), it corresponds to a pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "222". Set the display effect command (S5410), and move to S5411.

After finishing the processing of S5409 or S5410, the pseudo effect flag 223q is set to off (S5411), and the opening flag 223s is set to off (S5412). Then, the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is reset to 0 (S5413), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is not started only by winning the jackpot by the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203t is turned on in the state where the jackpot is won. The jackpot game is executed by the ball passing through the first gate 670, which is a specific area (in the set state).

Then, a storage means (third storage device 3600) that is opened after a predetermined period (for example, 16 seconds) has passed since the jackpot was won is arranged at a position where a ball that has passed through the first gate 670 can enter. The specific general winning opening 630a is arranged at a position where the ball can enter when the storage means (third storage device 3600) is opened.

This specific general winning opening 630a is a privilege that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed by the ball entering the ball within the probability variation winning validity period (from the start of the first round to the end of the final round) in the jackpot game. (Probability change state) is configured to be given.

As a result, whether or not the probability change state is given after the end of the big hit is determined by the time required from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific general winning opening 630a is located at a position where it is difficult to enter a ball when the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) opened by the jackpot game are open. Is arranged so that it is difficult for a ball fired during a jackpot game to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. As a result, there is an effect that the game from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670 can be performed more enthusiastically so that the probability change state is given after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, two variable winning devices are provided up and down (upstream and downstream in the flow direction of the ball) that are opened during the jackpot game, and each variable winning device is alternately opened to make a round. It suppresses the generation of balls that do not win any of the variable winning devices in the interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from frequently entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game (during the probability variation winning valid period).

In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening period of the jackpot game (non-probability change winning valid period), and the round interval period depend on the type of jackpot and the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability change (time reduction) state) when the jackpot is won. The lengths of are different. This makes it possible to set a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot that is unlikely to be given a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of balls that have flowed down between the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) opened during the jackpot game and the specific general winning opening 630a. Distribution members (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902) to be distributed to the flow path are provided. As a result, the ball that has passed through the variable winning device that is closed at the right time during the jackpot game is distributed to various flow paths, so it is difficult to predict whether or not the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It becomes. Therefore, since the player pays close attention to the flow condition of the ball, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game during the big hit game.

Further, the above-mentioned distribution member (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902) is configured to be able to regularly distribute spheres to a plurality of flow paths. Therefore, by allowing a predetermined number (for example, 4) or more of balls to flow down to the distribution member during the jackpot game, it is possible to reliably enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

In addition, as a configuration of this distribution member (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902), by an action other than the operation of distributing the sphere (for example, the contact of the sphere flowing down in the vicinity of the distribution member). The distribution destination of the sphere may be configured to be changeable. This has the effect of preventing the player from grasping the distribution status of the distribution member in advance.

In the present embodiment, one region (first gate 670) through which the ball is passed is provided in order to start the jackpot game in a state where the jackpot is won, but a plurality of regions may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to make the contents of the jackpot game executed when the ball is passed in each of a plurality of provided areas different.

Specifically, a first area and a second area different from the first area are provided as a passing area for executing the jackpot game, and when the ball is passed through the first area, the probability variation prize is valid. A jackpot with a 50% probability that the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a is selected, and if the ball is passed through the second region, the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning period. It is advisable to set so that either a low (20%) jackpot or a high (80%) jackpot with a substantially probability of entering the ball is selected. Further, it may be configured so that the player can select whether to pass the ball through the first region or the second region.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game having different game characteristics, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Further, the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be set to be different between the jackpot when passing through the first area and the jackpot when passing through the second area.

Further, the second distribution member 3902 in the first distribution member 3901 in the present embodiment is located in the right region of the game board 13 through which the fired ball can pass when the right-handed game is executed in the probable change (time reduction) state. Since it is provided, by executing a right-handed game (a game machine that allows a ball to enter the second entrance 640), which is executed to win a jackpot of a special symbol, the first distribution member 3901 and Since the distribution status of the second distribution member 3902 will change, a special symbol is maintained while maintaining a state advantageous to the player (a state in which the next flowing ball is distributed to the path passing through the first gate 670). It is possible to prevent the fluctuation of.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is specified by providing the storage device 3600 for storing (holding) the ball that has passed through the first gate 670. It is not necessary to provide the storage device 3600. In this case, since the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a becomes irregular, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 in which it is difficult for the player to predict the result of the game, so that the game becomes monotonous. It has the effect of suppressing getting bored of the game at an early stage.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. In the third embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 96, a plurality of distribution members 900 to 902 are provided as a configuration for distributing the spheres flowing down in the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths (1603 to 1608). Among the plurality of routes, the balls distributed to the specific route (7th route 1607) are configured to enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the third embodiment, a plurality of distribution members 4900 to 4902 are provided as a configuration for distributing the sphere flowing down in the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths (1603 to 1608). ing. The plurality of distribution members are buried in the game board 13 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 1 second) so that the ball can pass through the evacuation position, and the ball is guided by protruding from the game board 13. It is configured to be variably configured to the guidance position (protruding position) that is in a possible guidance state, and by changing each distribution member to the evacuation position and the guidance position at different timings, the inside of the second storage device 1600 can be changed. It is configured so that the flowing sphere can be distributed to a plurality of routes (1603 to 1608).

Next, the configuration of the distribution devices 4900 to 4902 will be described with reference to FIG. 150. Since the configurations of the sorting devices 4900 to 4902 are the same, only the configuration of the sorting device 4900 will be described here, and the detailed description of the other sorting devices (4901 and 4902) will be omitted.

First, the sorting device 4900 changes to a protruding position protruding from the game board 13 by setting a solenoid (solenoid for sorting device) (not shown) to on, and sets the solenoid for the sorting device to off. Then, the position is changed to the retracted position buried in the game board 13. The operation of this solenoid for the distribution device is controlled by the main control device 110, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the distribution device 4900 changes to the induction position and the retracted position at 1-second intervals. The operation signal is output from the main control device 110 to the solenoid for the distribution device.

As shown in FIG. 150, a rolling plate 4900a having a rolling surface is provided below the distribution member 4900 so that the sphere is inclined downward (inclined to the lower right from the viewpoint of FIG. 150) so as to flow down the fourth path 1604. ing. The upper surface of the distribution member 4900 (the surface on which the sphere can roll at the guidance position) is formed with a rolling surface having a downward inclination (lower left inclination from the viewpoint of FIG. 150) so that the sphere flows down the third path 1603. ..

As a result, the sphere is guided to the third path 1603 when the distribution member 4900 is protruding, and the sphere is guided to the fourth path 1604 when the distribution member 4900 is buried. Therefore, by switching the state of the distribution member 4900, it is possible to distribute the path of the sphere to a plurality of spheres, and there is an effect that the configuration for allocating the sphere can be simplified.

Further, in this modification, three distribution members (4900 to 4902) are provided, and each distribution member is configured to be variable between a guided state and a retracted state at different timings. Specifically, the distribution member 4900 is variable so that the evacuation position (1 second) and the guidance position (1 second) are repeated after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON, and the distribution member 4901 is , The induction position (1.5 seconds) and the regulation position (1 second) are changed to be repeated after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON, and the distribution member 4902 is set to the retracted position (0.5 seconds). , The induction position (0.5 seconds) is variable to repeat.

The variable control for each distribution member described above is configured to always perform a constant operation regardless of the gaming state while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON. Further, the variable timing for each distribution member is a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 based on the distribution member variable scenario (not shown) defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is determined by updating (not shown).

Next, the ball flow in the second storage device 1600 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 150. First, in the first flow path 1601, a path is formed so that the stored balls flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds (passing through the storage valve 1601a in the open state) as in the third embodiment described above. The sphere that has passed through the first flow path 1601 flows down toward the distribution member 4900. In the state where the distribution member 4900 is variable to the retracted position, the sphere falls on the rolling plate 4900a, flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4900a, and flows down to the fourth flow path 1604.

The sphere that has flowed down to the fourth flow path 1604 flows down to the distribution member 4901 via the second flow path 1602. When the distribution member 4901 is variable to the retracted position (1 second in 2.5 seconds), it falls on the rolling plate 4901a and flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4901a to flow down the sixth flow path 1606. Flow down to.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 4901 is variable to the induction position (1.5 seconds in 2.5 seconds), it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4901 and flows down to the fifth flow path 1605. .. Then, the ball flowing down the fifth flow path 1605 enters the general winning opening 630b.

Next, when the ball flows down from the first flow path 1601 when the distribution member 4900 is in the induction position (1 second in 2 seconds), it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4900 and the third flow. It flows down to the distribution member 4902 via the road 1603. When the distribution member 4902 is variable to the retracted position (0.5 seconds in 1 second), the eighth flow path flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4902a provided below the distribution member 4902. Flow down 1608. The ball flowing down the 8th flow path 1608 enters the general winning opening 630b.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 4902 is variable to the induction position (0.5 seconds in 1 second), it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4902 and flows down the 7th flow path 1607, and is specified in general. Enter the winning opening 630a.

As described above, in the second storage device 1600 of the present modification, as a configuration for distributing the sphere to a plurality of routes, the route to which the sphere is distributed is switched by variable control (switched according to a predetermined condition). By providing members (4900 to 4902) and different timings (conditions) for each distribution member to switch the route of the distribution destination, the sphere is distributed to a plurality of routes, so that a predetermined timing (guidance) is given. When the ball flows down at the timing (timing when the distribution member 4900 at the position flows down and the distribution member 4902 at the guidance position flows down), the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

With this configuration, unlike the configuration of the third embodiment (distribution members 900 to 902) described above, the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 (the number of balls passing through the first flow path 1601). ) Is a predetermined number (4 in the third embodiment), but it is not certain that the ball will flow into the specific general winning opening 630a, so that the game of inserting the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a is complicated. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the configuration of the third embodiment described above (distribution members 900 to 902), the sphere passes through the distribution members 900 to 902 to determine to which route the next sphere is distributed. However, in the configuration of this modification (distribution members 4900 to 4902), the distribution route is determined by the timing at which the balls flow down, so that the player is in an advantageous state (the next ball is the specific general winning opening 630a). It is possible to prevent the game from being executed while maintaining the state of the distribution member that enters the ball.

Further, in this modification, the storage valve 1601a is configured to be capable of storing four balls in the second storage device 1600, and the four balls are stored in the second storage device 1600. When the valve 1601a is opened (released), the four balls stored at intervals of 0.5 seconds flow down toward the distribution member 4900. Then, as the four balls flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds, the variable timings of the distribution members 4900 and 4902 are set so that one of the four balls enters the specific general winning opening 630a. It is set.

Specifically, since the distribution member 4900 is configured to alternately change between the retracted position and the regulated position at 1-second intervals, when four balls continuously flow down at 0.5-second intervals, among them. The two balls will be distributed to the third route 1603, which can enter the specific general winning opening 630a. The two spheres distributed to the third path 1603 will flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds (continuous spheres) or 1.5 seconds (first and fourth patterns). Then, the sphere flowing down the third flow path 1603 at a predetermined interval (0.5 second interval or 1.5 second interval) reaches the distribution member 4902. Since the distribution member 4902 is configured to alternate between the retracted position and the restricted position at 0.5 second intervals, at least when the ball flows down at 0.5 second intervals or 1.5 second intervals. One ball flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4902, which is the guidance position, and enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

With this configuration, when a ball enters the second storage device 1600 at an irregular timing, it is difficult for the player to predict which ball will enter the specific general entry port 630a. It becomes a storage device 1600, and by storing balls in the second storage device 1600, a predetermined number (4) of balls flow down at regular timing (at 0.5 second intervals) to ensure the balls. Can be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

Therefore, in the state where the storage valve 1601a is opened (released), a game is enthusiastically executed in order to allow as many balls as possible to flow into the second storage device 1600, and the storage valve 1601a is closed. Then, the player is enthusiastically executed to store the upper limit amount of balls, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play in any gaming state.

Further, in this modification, a plurality of nails (P2, etc.) provided in the right side region of the game board 13 make the inflow timing of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 irregular, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the timing (the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general winning device 630a) from being easily targeted.

Further, in the present modification, among the plurality of paths in the second storage device 1600, the path (seventh path) that is advantageous to the player is a solenoid (solenoid for the distribution member) that changes the plurality of distribution members. Must be set to on. That is, it is configured so that the ball does not enter the specific general winning opening 630a in a state where the solenoid is not set to ON due to a disconnection, that is, in a state where a defect occurs. This has the effect of being able to provide a fair game. In addition to this, when a route to the specific general winning opening 630a is configured by using a plurality of distribution members, one distribution member is flowed down with the solenoid set to ON, and the other distribution is performed. The member may be configured so that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a by flowing down with the solenoid set to off.

Further, the configuration using the distribution members 4900 to 4902 used in this modification may be added to other embodiments (for example, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) and combined, or the existing configuration may be combined. It may be deleted and newly installed.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. In the fourth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 120, the distribution device 2600 is provided below the second variable winning device 650. The distribution device 2600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down, and the ball can enter the specific general winning opening (probability variation winning opening) 630a or the second ball entering device 640 by the flowing flow path. It was composed. On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 151, it is arranged directly below the second variable winning device 650.

With this configuration, the first variable winning device 65 is closed during the opening period (during the period when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is not open) when the jackpot game is executed. And the ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 is in a round game (while the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is being opened), that is, during the probable variable winning valid period. It is possible to suppress the situation where the ball enters the 630a.

Further, in the present modification, unlike the fourth embodiment described above, the second variable winning device 650 provided below in the round game of the odd-numbered round is opened, and the first round game of the even-numbered round is opened. The opening scenario of the variable winning device is set so that the variable winning device 65 is opened. With this configuration, the distance between the variable winning device (second variable winning device 650) that is opened in the first round and the specific general winning opening 630a can be shortened, so that the jackpot game is executed. A ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, which are closed during the opening period (during the period when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is not opened), is rounded. During the game (while the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is open), that is, the situation where the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probabilistic winning valid period is further suppressed. can do.

Further, a nail for distributing the flow path of the ball is planted between the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and by adjusting this nail, the second variable is in a closed state. It is possible to change the ratio of balls passing through the winning device 650 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

In the third to fifth embodiments described above and the modified examples thereof, a plurality of distribution members (900, 1901, 3901) for alternately distributing spheres to a plurality of paths are provided, and various paths are provided. Although it is configured to distribute the spheres to various paths, other configurations may be used as long as the spheres are distributed to various routes.

For example, instead of the distribution member, a guide member that can be buried or protruded may be provided in the game board 13, and the path of the ball may be switched depending on the state of the guide member (buried state or protruding state). In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of guiding members and set the operation timing of each guiding member so as to be different at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, a first guiding member is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the sphere, and a second guiding member is provided on the downstream side thereof. Then, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be on, the first guide member is variably controlled so as to constantly change between the protruding state and the buried state at 1-second intervals, and after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to on. The second guide member is variably controlled so as to be constantly variable between a protruding state and a buried state at 0.5 second intervals, and at a predetermined timing in which both the first guide member and the second guide member are in the buried state. It is preferable to configure the ball so that the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a. With this configuration, the path (guidance mechanism) composed of the first guide member and the second guide member has a ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a for 0.5 seconds out of 2 seconds. It will be a possible period.

By using such a configuration in place of the distribution member (900 to 902) of the third embodiment described above, it is possible to distribute (induce) the ball flowing down in the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths. In addition, unlike the case where the distribution members 900 to 902 are used, it is not possible to maintain the state in which the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a, so that the ball is entered into the specific general winning opening 630a. It is possible to make the playability to be made more complicated.

Further, when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) with the upper limit amount (4 pieces) of balls stored in the second storage device 1600, the stored balls are stored in the second storage at intervals of about 0.5 seconds. Since it flows down in the device, any one of the stored balls can be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a. Therefore, by storing the ball up to the upper limit in the second storage device 1600, the ball can be surely put into the specific general winning opening 630a, which has an effect of giving a sense of security to the player. In other words, in order to play the jackpot game with peace of mind, the player can be made to continue the game until the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the second storage device 1600, and the operation of the game is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

The number of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 is set to the number that the stored balls can surely enter the specific general winning opening 630a in the present embodiment, but the number is not limited to that, and the upper limit amount is set. It may be three. Even with this configuration, three balls can flow down at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals), so the three balls can be placed in the guidance device at irregular timings without having a storage function. It is possible to increase the probability of a ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a rather than letting it flow down.

Further, the number of pieces that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 may be larger than four. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably enter the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a.

In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters each entry opening (winning opening), the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the entry opening (winning opening) is paid out. , Not limited to this. For example, it is applied to a type of pachinko machine such as an enclosed pachinko machine in which a prize ball is not given as a game value. It may be configured to increase the balance.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (A prize ball is given to the ball that entered the holding device at the time of a big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a ball entry means thereof. Based on the fact that the pachinko ball enters the ball entry means, the specific privilege granting means that grants a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path, and the above-mentioned A first distribution state in which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path as compared with the first distribution state. It is provided with a flow path distribution means that can be changed to a distribution state, and a setting means that can set the state of the flow path distribution means to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the gaming state. The gaming machine A1 characterized by.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a gaming ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep launching the game ball in the same direction until it was a hit. Therefore, when the player launches the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out may not change much. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path is branched into a first flow path and a second flow path. When a ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means. The first distribution state in which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game ball is more easily distributed to the second flow path as compared with the first distribution state. The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, it becomes easier for a specific privilege to be given by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it becomes difficult to grant certain benefits. Therefore, even if the player launches the game ball toward a specific flow path, the benefits given can be different depending on the game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.

In the game machine A1, a predetermined ball is provided based on a normal ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a game ball entering the normal ball entry means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a game value-giving means for imparting a game value, wherein the specific privilege-giving means grants a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, a normal ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the game value is given by the game value-giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the normal ball entry means. The game value is given. By the specific privilege granting means, a game value larger than a predetermined game value is given as a specific privilege.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game ball flows into the specific flow path, as compared with the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the second distribution state. It will be easier to acquire value. Therefore, since the game value given can be different depending on the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machines A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and a privileged game in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. The game state setting means for setting the state is provided, and the setting means sets the state of the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The gaming machine A3, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is a privileged game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Is set to. Based on the fact that the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

As a result, when the game state is set to the privilege game state, in addition to being advantageous to the player depending on the privilege game state, more game value is given by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path. It becomes easy to be done. Therefore, the privileged gaming state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be improved.

In the game machine A3, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first ball entry state in which the game ball can be entered and the second ball entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first ball entry state. Based on the specific value-adding means for adding a specific game value based on the ball entering the variable ball-entry means, and the privileged game state set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized by comprising a variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable entry means is changed between the first entry state in which the game ball can be entered and the second entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means, a specific game value is given by the specific value-giving means. Based on the setting of the privileged gaming state by the game state setting means, the variable control means changes the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means in the privileged game state, so that a specific game value can be obtained by launching the ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Therefore, in the privileged gaming state, it is possible to make the player acquire more gaming value, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game value-giving means adds a predetermined amount of game medium as the predetermined game value when the game ball enters the normal ball-entry means. The game machine A5 is characterized in that when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means, the specific privilege granting means is provided with a game medium in an amount larger than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball enters the normal ball entry means by the game value adding means, a predetermined amount of game medium is given as a predetermined game value. When a game ball enters the ball entry means by the specific privilege granting means, a game medium in an amount larger than a predetermined amount is granted as a specific privilege.

As a result, the player can be made to play the game by the given game medium, so that the game can be played for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means changes the variable ball entry means from the second ball entry state to the first ball entry state based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The gaming state setting means sets the gaming state different from the privileged gaming state based on the variable ball entry means being variable by the variable control means a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second ball entry state to the first ball entry state by the variable control means based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. Based on the fact that the variable ball entry means is varied a predetermined number of times by the variable control means, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the privileged game state.

As a result, in the privileged game state of 1, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player can acquire more specific game value. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the game machines A4 to A6, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the specific value-imparting means is to add a specific amount of game medium as the specific game value.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, a specific amount of gaming medium is given as a specific game value by the specific value-adding means, so that the player is given the given gaming medium. Can be made to play a game. Therefore, since the player can be allowed to play the game for a longer period of time, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A7, a guidance flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the specific flow path is provided, and the variable ball entry means is the specific flow of the game balls flowing into the guidance flow path. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that a gaming ball that has not flowed into the road is provided at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the gaming balls are guided to the specific flow path by the guided flow path, and among the gaming balls flowing into the guided flow path, the game balls flow into the specific flow path. Since the variable ball entry means is provided at the position where the game ball that did not flow in can enter, the player can simply launch the game ball into the guidance flow path in the privileged game state, and the specific flow path and the variable entry ball can be entered. The ball can flow into the means. Therefore, since it is possible to acquire a specific privilege and a specific game value in the privilege game state, it is possible to further increase the merit of the player in the privilege game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, a counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means is provided, and the variable control means has at least a predetermined number of numbers counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state based on the above, and the game state setting means is the privilege game when a specific condition is satisfied in the privilege game state. The game state different from the state is set, and the setting means sets the flow path distribution means at least in a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege game state to the establishment of the specific condition. 1 A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is set to a distribution state.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means is counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state by the variable control means based on at least the number counted by the counting means becomes a predetermined number. When a specific condition is satisfied in the privileged game state, a game state different from the privileged game state is set by the game state setting means. The flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means at least in a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege game state to the establishment of the specific condition.

As a result, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific game value can be limited to the time when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game during the privilege game state in the hope that a larger number of game balls will flow into the specific flow path before the number reaches a predetermined number and the specific privilege will be given a larger number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player with respect to the privileged gaming state can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the ball entry detecting means for detecting that the game ball has entered the normal ball entry means and the ball entry detection means to the normal ball entry means during the privilege game state. The gaming machine A10 is provided with a notification means for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that the game ball has entered.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, it is detected by the entering ball detecting means that the gaming ball has entered the normal ball entering means, and the special gaming is performed by the entering ball detecting means. When it is detected that the game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the state, the notification means executes a predetermined notification, so that the flow path distribution means is set even though the privilege game state is set. When a problem that is not set in the first distribution state occurs, the problem can be made known to the player or the clerk in the hall by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the defect can be quickly resolved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to flow than the second flow path. The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is the first flow path. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the gaming machine A11 is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed into the specific channel is easily guided while the channel is closed.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are played. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easier to flow in than the second flow path. The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided while the first flow path is closed.

Thereby, it is possible to change the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path flows down depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be given, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. ..

In the gaming machine A11, the flow path distribution means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls on the upstream side of the closed position when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. In the second flow path, in a state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls and the game balls flowing into the specific flow path come into contact with each other. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in based on a change in the flow direction.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first flow path is closed as the second distribution state, the game balls are held up to a predetermined upper limit number on the upstream side of the closed position by the flow path distribution means. Based on the fact that in a state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with each other and the flow direction changes. A second flow path is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in.

As a result, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be given, so that the effect that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed. be.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, a display means for displaying an image and a display control means for controlling the display means to display an image according to the state of the flow path distribution means are provided. A featured gaming machine A13.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display control means controls the display means so that an image corresponding to the state of the flow path distribution means is displayed. , There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distribution means.

In the gaming machine A13, the display control means is the specific when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the fact that the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means. A gaming machine A14 characterized in that an image suggesting that a privilege is likely to be given is displayed.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13, it is specified when the gaming ball flows into the specific flow path based on the fact that the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means. An image suggesting that the privilege of is likely to be given is displayed by the display control means. As a result, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that the merit when the game ball flows into the specific flow path can be easily understood.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch the flow path of another ball with the ball held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path are provided at positions where the ball can enter. The first ball-entry means, the first granting means for imparting the first game value based on the game ball entering the first ball-entry means, and the game flowing down the second flow path. The first game given by the first granting means based on the second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second granting means for imparting a second gaming value different from the value, a first position capable of holding at least one gaming ball flowing into the first flow path on the first flow path, and a first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path as compared to the position is difficult to be held on the first flow path, and the variable means are based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. The variable means includes a switching means for switching from the first position to the second position, and the variable means easily guides the game ball to the second flow path by holding the game ball. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a gaming ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep launching the game ball in the same direction until it was a hit. Therefore, when the player launches the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out may not change much. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path is branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path. The first ball-entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the first-giving means is used based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball-entry means. The game value of is given. Further, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the first granting means is based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A second game value different from the first game value to be given is given by the second giving means. A first position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path on the first flow path, and a game ball flowing into the first flow path as compared to the first position are on the first flow path. The variable means is variable to the second position, which is difficult to hold. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the held game ball.

As a result, even if the player continues to launch the game ball toward the specific flow path, the ball entry means by which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path enters depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied between the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine B1, the first gaming value given by the first granting means has a higher gaming value than the second gaming value given by the second granting means. Pachinko machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, since the first game value given by the first granting means is configured to have a larger game value than the second game value given by the second granting means, the player is provided with the game value. It is possible to make the player feel that the game ball wants to flow into the specific flow path in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player are set based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Variable entry state that can be changed between the game state setting means, the first entry state in which the game ball can be entered, and the second entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state. Based on the means, the specific value-adding means for adding a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball-entry means, and the privileged game state set by the game state setting means. The variable control means is provided to change the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the switching means is set to the privileged gaming state by the game state setting means. Based on this, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is a privileged game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Is set to. The variable entry means is changed between the first entry state where the game ball can be entered and the second entry state where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state, and the variable entry state is changed. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the means, a specific game value is given by the specific value-giving means. Based on the fact that the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable control means.

As a result, in addition to the player being able to acquire a specific game value by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the privileged game state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The player can acquire the first game value. Therefore, since the merit of the player in the privileged gaming state can be increased, there is an effect that the expectation of the player for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

The gaming machine B3 is provided with a guiding flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the specific flow path, and the variable ball entry means is such that the gaming ball flowing down the guiding flow path without flowing into the specific flow path. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific flow path by the guidance flow path. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the induction flow path without flowing into the specific flow path can enter.

As a result, the player can flow the ball into the specific flow path and the variable ball entry means only by launching the game ball into the guide flow path in the privileged game state. Therefore, in the privileged game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be acquired, so that the player's merit in the privileged game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter a position. A third game value different from the second gaming value given by the second granting means based on the provided third ball entering means and the gaming ball entering the third ball entering means. A third granting means for imparting game value is provided, and the variable means holds a gaming ball so that the holding gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be connected to the second flow path and the third flow path. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being easy to guide.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. A third flow path is provided as one of a plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. A third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the third ball entry means, a third game value different from the second game value given by the second granting means is given by the third granting means. When the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held game ball.

As a result, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can enter both the second entry means and the third entry means. Become. That is, since the player can acquire one of the second game value and the third game value, which have different game values from each other, the game value acquired by the player can be given randomness. .. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path enters the first ball entry means, so that the first game value is given by the first granting means. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third granting means has a higher gaming value than the first gaming value given by the first granting means. Pachinko machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third granting means has more gaming value than the first gaming value given by the first granting means. Therefore, it is possible to expect the gaming ball to flow down the third flow path in a state where the gaming ball is held by the variable means. Therefore, since the traveling direction of the game ball flowing into the specific flow path can be observed more interestingly by the player, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the variable means holds the gaming ball on the first flow path, the gaming ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path is the second arrangement of the held gaming ball. It is characterized in that it can be held by a first arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the flow path and a second arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the third flow path as compared with the first arrangement. Pachinko machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5 or B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided to the second flow path as the arrangement of the held game ball. It is held by the arrangement of 1 and the second arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the third flow path as compared with the first arrangement.

This has the effect that the player can determine the flow path through which the game ball easily flows only by confirming the arrangement of the game ball.

In the gaming machine B7, a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the arrangement of the gaming balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and an effect of executing a specific effect showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by comprising an execution means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement is determined by the determination means, and a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means. , There is an effect that the player can more easily determine the flow path into which the game ball is likely to flow.

One of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is characterized by comprising an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the gaming balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path, respectively. The gaming machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the gaming balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path is adjusted by the adjusting means, respectively. Since the adjustment is made, it is possible to make a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the third privilege is easily given according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, an operating means that can be operated by the player and a detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means are provided, and the switching means can be operated on the operating means by the detecting means. The gaming machine B10, characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the detection.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the following effects are played. That is, the operation for the operating means is detected by the detecting means. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the detection of the operation on the operating means by the detecting means.

As a result, it is possible for the player to switch whether or not to let the game ball that has flowed down into the specific flow path flow down to the first ball entry means, so that each player has his or her own taste. There is an effect that it can be set to the state.

A gaming machine B11, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the variable means can hold only one gaming ball on the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one gaming ball is held by the variable means on the first flow path, so that the variable means is changed to the first position. When the player quits the game, the number of game balls remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost when he / she quits the game.

<Characteristic C group> (The probability variation rate can be changed by adjusting the ratio of balls entering the holding device)
A specific flow path that at least branches into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a first entry ball provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. The means, the first privilege giving means capable of giving the first privilege based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the first entering means, and the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path. Based on the second ball entry means provided at the position where the ball can be entered and the game ball entering the second ball entry means, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given. A second privilege granting means capable of this, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down the specific flow path into the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being provided with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a gaming ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep launching the game ball in the same direction until it was a hit. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the ball is launched in the same direction, the ball will continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out will not change much. There was a case. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path is branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down. The first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first privilege granting means is used. The privilege of 1 is given. The second entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and it is different from the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry means. The second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path to the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is adjusted by the adjusting means, respectively.

As a result, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make a gaming machine to which the first privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given. Therefore, even if the model is the same, different playability can be realized by changing the adjustment degree by the adjustment means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a privileged game for granting a privileged game advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. The granting means, the first lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result is high, and the second lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. The first privilege granting means is provided with a settable lottery state setting means, and is characterized in that the first privilege is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege. The gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the game is played when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. The privileged game that is advantageous to the person is given by the privileged game granting means. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result and the second lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. .. As the first privilege, the first privilege granting means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means.

Thereby, the ease of transition to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, it is easy to set the first lottery state according to the business policy of the hall, and it is easy to be in the privilege game state, or it is difficult to set the first lottery state, and it is easy to give the second privilege. You can adjust what to do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the second privilege granting means grants a predetermined amount of gaming medium as the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined amount of the gaming medium is given as the second privilege by the second privilege giving means, so that the predetermined amount of the gaming medium can be easily given. Can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, depending on the business policy of the hall, it is possible to adjust whether the game is easy to be given a predetermined amount of game medium or the first privilege is easy to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the first position where the gaming ball can enter the first entry means and the second position where the gaming ball is less likely to enter the entry means as compared with the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a position, and a variable control means that changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the privilege game is given by the privilege game granting means. , A gaming machine C4 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is variable by the variable means to the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means compared to the first position. Will be done. Based on the fact that the privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means, the variable control means changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, the first privilege is easily given in the privilege game state, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be increased.

In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position at least based on the elapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, at least the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the player to acquire the first privilege until a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the scarcity value of the first privilege can be increased, the importance of adjustment by the adjustment means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects the gaming machine to play the game, the gaming machine can be selected in consideration of the adjustment condition of the adjusting means, so that there is an effect that the pleasure of selecting the gaming machine can be given. ..

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific entry means to which a specific game value is given based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific game value based on the entry of the game ball. The second flow path includes a specific flow path for flowing the game ball down to the specific ball entry means, and the low value ball entry means, which is provided with a low value ball entry means to which a small game value is given. It is branched into a low-value flow path to be flowed down, and is at a first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path and at the first variable position thereof. A gaming machine C6 comprising: a second variable position in which a gaming ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is difficult to be held on the specific flow path, and a position variable means that can be changed.

According to the game machine C6, in any of the game machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is given based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, and the game machine enters the low value ball entry means. A game value less than a specific game value is given based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path that causes the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means and a low value flow path that causes the game ball to flow down to the low value entry means. A first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a game ball flowing into the specific flow path are held on the specific flow path as compared with the first variable position. The position variable means is variable to the second variable position, which is difficult to do.

As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path according to the variable position of the position variable means enters the ball entry means. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine C6 is provided with a holding control means for controlling the position variable means so as to be variable to the second variable position based on the privilege game being granted by the privilege game granting means, and the specific flow path. Is arranged at a position where the gaming ball that has flowed into the second flow path is easier to flow in as compared with the low-value flow path, and the position-variable means holds the gaming ball by holding it. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it facilitates guiding the gaming ball to the low-value flow path by the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position changing means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means based on the fact that the privilege game is given by the privilege game giving means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is easier to flow in as compared with the low value flow path. When the game ball is held by the position variable means, the game ball is guided to the low value flow path by the held game ball.

Thereby, the variable position of the position variable means and the ball entry means into which the game ball flowing into the second flow path enters can be different depending on whether or not the game ball is held by the position variable means. .. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the variable means and the position variable means are composed of one member.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, since the variable means and the position variable means are composed of one member, the position and position of the variable means can be changed by one control. The position of the means can be switched at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means causes the gaming ball to enter the second entry when the ratio of the gaming ball flowing down into the specific flow path to the first entering means is increased. When the ratio of the game ball flowing into the ball means is reduced and the ratio of the game ball flowing into the first ball entry means is reduced, the ratio of the game ball flowing into the second ball entry means is increased. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the game is played when the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down into the specific flow path into the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means. The rate at which the spheres flow into the second flow path is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down into the specific flow path into the first flow path is lowered by the adjusting means, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the second flow path is increased.

This has the effect that the game ball can be more reliably flowed into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

<Characteristic D group> (Increases the probability change expectation during normal games)
A gaming area where the ball can flow down, a ball-entry means provided in the game area where the ball can enter, and a discrimination means for executing discrimination when the ball enters the ball-entry means, and the discrimination thereof. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the means is a predetermined determination result, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing balls, and a storage means thereof. The variable means for changing the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state for releasing the storage state, and the storage means in the game area are changed to the release state by the variable means. In this case, a privilege is provided when the ball stored in the storage means is provided in a specific gaming area where the ball can flow down, the specific ball entry means in which the ball can enter, and the ball enters the specific entry means. The variable means has a privilege granting means capable of granting the above, and the variable means changes the storage means to the released state when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is the predetermined discriminating result. The gaming machine D1 characterized by this.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) and a gaming state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing a ball. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (probability variation, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874). In this case, the prize ball can be obtained by making the variable winning device win the ball during the privilege game, and further, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Was to improve. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, since only the game executed during the privilege game affects the result of whether or not to acquire the game state advantageous to the player, the game other than the privilege game is performed. There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced during the period.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the ball enters the ball entering means provided in the game area where the ball can flow down, the discrimination means is executed by the discriminating means, and the discriminating result is a predetermined discriminating result. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, in the game area, when the discriminant result of the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminant result, a storage means that can be changed from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released by the variable means is provided. Will be. When the storage means is released, a specific entry means is provided in which the ball stored in the storage means can enter, and when the ball enters the specific entry means, a privilege is given after the end of the privilege game. To. As a result, the possibility that the ball enters the specific ball entry means can be increased by changing the storage means to the release state while the ball is being stored. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play in a game other than during the privileged game.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the storage means is configured to be capable of storing a plurality of balls in the gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the storage means is configured so that a plurality of balls can be stored. Therefore, by storing the plurality of balls in the storage means, the balls can be sent to the specific ball entry means. The possibility of entering the ball can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that an ambitious game can be continued for the player until a predetermined determination result is determined by the determination means.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a plurality of paths through which a ball can flow down are provided in the specific gaming area, and a ball flowing down one of the plurality of paths can enter the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine D3, which is characterized in that it is.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of paths through which the ball can flow down are provided in the specific game area, and the ball that has flowed down one of the paths is entered into the specific ball entry means. This has the effect that the game can be executed while enjoying whether or not the ball flowing down the specific game area enters the specific ball entry means.

In the case of having the configuration of the gaming machine D2, since the storage means is configured to be able to store a plurality of balls, it is possible to increase the possibility that the balls stored in the storage means enter the specific ball entry means. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in the game machine D3, a distribution means for distributing the ball to any one of the plurality of paths is provided in the specific gaming area.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the ball is distributed to any of a plurality of routes provided in the specific gaming area by the distribution means, so that the ball is reliably distributed to the plurality of routes. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D4, the distribution means distributes balls to the plurality of paths in a predetermined order, and the storage means is necessary for the distribution means to distribute balls to the first path. A gaming machine D5 characterized in that it can store more balls than the number of balls.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are played. That is, the spheres are distributed in a predetermined order to the plurality of paths by the distribution means. Then, a number of balls larger than the number required for the distribution means to distribute the balls to the first path is configured to be able to be stored in the storage means. This makes it possible to allow the specific ball entry means to enter the ball by storing a plurality of balls in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to store the ball in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, when the end condition setting means for setting the end condition and the end condition set by the end condition setting means are satisfied, the storage means is changed from the release state to the storage state. The gaming machine D6, characterized in that it has a second variable means for varying to.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are played. That is, when the end condition set by the end condition setting means is satisfied, the storage means is changed from the release state to the storage state by the second variable means. With this, by setting the end condition, it is possible to set the period during which the ball can enter the specific entry means and the period during which the ball that can enter the specific entry means is stored. Become. Therefore, since the player executes the game according to the state of the storage means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The end condition set by the end condition setting means is, for example, a predetermined time (a sufficient time for all the balls stored in the storage means to flow down) after the storage means is released by the variable means. When the elapse of seconds) is set as the end condition, or when the privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the allowable state and the restricted state multiple times is executed, the variable ball entry means is set to the allowable state a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). The timing changed to "" may be set as the end condition, or the timing when the privilege game is completed may be set as the end condition. Further, it is preferable to configure the end condition setting means so that a plurality of end conditions can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of periods during which the ball can be entered into the specific entry means and a period during which the balls can be stored in the specific entry means, and the game can be played. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In the gaming machine D6, the ending condition setting means sets the timing at which the privileged game ends as the ending condition.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D6, the timing at which the privilege game ends is set as the end condition by the end condition setting means, so that the game aiming at the specific ball entry means is executed during the privilege game. It is possible to play pachinko, which has the effect of enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, for example, when a variable ball-entry means that changes the ball to a permissible state in which the ball can enter when the privilege game is executed is provided, a specific ball-entry means is provided in the vicinity of the variable ball-entry means. By doing so, it is possible to have the player simultaneously perform a game aiming at the variable ball entry means and a game aiming at the specific ball entry means during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Here, the timing at which the privilege game ends is the timing at which the variable ball-entry means variable to the permissible state by the privilege game changes to the restricted state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the permissible state, and the privilege. It is conceivable that the ending period to be executed after the variable ball entry means changed to the allowable state by the game is changed to the regulated state ends.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the ending condition setting means sets a predetermined timing at which the privileged game is executed as the ending condition.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D6 or D7, the end condition setting means sets a predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed as the end condition, so that while the privilege game is being executed. In addition, it becomes possible to store the ball in the storage means. As a result, the period in which the storage means is in the storage state can be lengthened, so that the storage means can easily store the spheres. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

Here, as a predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed, it is conceivable to set a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 10 seconds have elapsed) after the privilege game has been executed. In this case, it is advisable to set a sufficient time for all the balls stored in the storage means to flow down the game area. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the period during which the storage means is released, and it is possible to facilitate the storage of the spheres in the storage means.

Further, as a predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed, for example, when the privilege game (for example, 8 round jackpot) in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the allowable state a plurality of times (for example, 8 times) is executed, the privilege game is executed. It is advisable to set the stage in the middle of the privilege game (for example, the fourth round) as a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to execute a game in which the ball is entered into a specific ball entry means during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D6 to D8, the end condition setting means can set a plurality of the end conditions, and has a selection means for selecting one of the plurality of end conditions. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the second variable means changes the storage means to the storage state based on the termination condition selected by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D6 to D8, the following effects are played. That is, one of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means is selected by the selection means, and the storage means is put into the storage state by the second variable means based on the selected end condition. It is variable. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the storage means changes to the storage state. Therefore, the period during which the ball can be entered into the specific entry means and the period during which the ball can be stored in the specific entry means should be set at a plurality of timings. Therefore, it is possible to provide a complicated game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, a variable ball-entry means that is provided separately from the specific ball-entry means and can be changed into a permissible state that allows the ball to enter and a regulated state that restricts the ball's entry. The privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means changes the variable ball-entry means to the allowable state, and the privilege granting means is used while the privilege game is being executed. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that when a ball enters the specific ball-entry means, a second privilege different from the privilege can be given.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) and a gaming state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing a ball. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (probability variation, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874). In this case, the prize ball can be obtained by making the variable winning device win the ball during the privilege game, and further, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was something to improve. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls, so that balls that do not win the variable winning device frequently occur during the bonus game. There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the following effects are played. That is, by executing the privilege game, a variable ball entry means that is variable from a regulated state that regulates the ball entry to a permissible state that allows the ball to enter is provided separately from the specific ball entry means. When the ball enters the specific ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed, the second privilege is granted. As a result, when the ball enters the specific ball entry means during the privilege game, the second privilege can be given. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game in which the ball is inserted into the specific ball entry means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be improved.

<Characteristic E group> (A ball that has flowed down a specific route wins a prize at the V probability winning opening)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a permissible state that allows ball entry and a regulated state that regulates ball entry, and the variable ball-entry means to the permissible state based on the establishment of specific conditions. Based on the privileged game execution means for executing the privileged game and the variable ball-entry means, which are provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and the ball can enter the ball, and the ball enters the ball-entry means. A privilege granting means for granting the first privilege is provided, and the privilege granting means includes the first privilege when a ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed. Is a gaming machine E1 characterized in that a different second privilege can be given.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) and a gaming state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing a ball. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (probability variation, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874). In this case, the prize ball can be obtained by making the variable winning device win the ball during the privilege game, and further, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was something to improve. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls, so that balls that do not win the variable winning device frequently occur during the bonus game. There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced.

According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege of changing the variable ball-entry means, which can be changed between the permissible state of allowing the ball to enter and the regulated state of restricting the ball's entry, to the permissible state by the privilege game execution means. The game is played. A ball-entry means that is provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and can be given the first privilege by the ball entering the ball is provided. Then, when the ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege giving means. As a result, when the ball enters a ball entry means other than the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game using a ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be improved.

The gaming machine E1 has a setting means capable of setting a first state in which a ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. The gaming machine E2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed by the setting means, and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than in the first state. The state is set. As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball while the privilege game is being executed. The game will be played with the expectation that the second privilege will be given to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the setting means has a plurality of paths through which the ball can pass and a sorting means for distributing the ball to the plurality of paths, and the sorting means is at least the first by the setting means. The sphere is placed on either the first path through which the sphere can pass when the state of is set or the second path through which the sphere can pass when the second state is set. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being sorted.

According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2. That is, the first path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set by the distribution means, and the second path through which the sphere can pass when the second state is set. The sphere is distributed to the route. As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball depending on the path through which the ball passes. As a result, the player pays close attention to the flow of the ball, which has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine E3, the plurality of paths have a third path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set, in addition to the first path. The path 1 is for allowing the ball to enter the ball entry means in a shorter period of time than the third path, and the distribution means is the first when the first state is set. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that a ball can be distributed to a path 1 and a path 3 described above.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a plurality of paths, apart from the first path, there is a third path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set, and the first state is set. The sphere is distributed to the first path or the third path by the distribution means. As a result, when the first state is set, the timing at which the ball enters the ball entry means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E3 or E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the distribution means distributes balls in a predetermined order to the plurality of paths.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3 or E4, the balls are distributed in a predetermined order to a plurality of routes by the distribution means, so that a plurality of privilege games are executed while the privileged game is being executed. By letting the ball flow down to the distribution means, it is possible to reliably enter the ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game while the privilege game is being executed.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, a launching means capable of launching the ball toward the gaming area, and a launching intensity adjusting means capable of adjusting the firing intensity of the launching means. , The variable ball-entry means and the ball-entry means are provided in a predetermined game area where a ball launched with a predetermined launch intensity by the launch intensity adjusting means can flow down. Machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are played. That is, when the firing intensity of the launching means capable of launching the ball toward the game area is adjusted to a predetermined firing intensity by the launching intensity adjusting means, the variable ball entering means into the predetermined gaming area where the ball can flow down. A ball entry means is provided. As a result, while the privilege game is being executed, a game in which the ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means and a game in which the ball is inserted into the ball entry means are performed by simply launching the ball with a predetermined firing intensity. Can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to have the player play a plurality of games at the same time, there is an effect that the interest of the games can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a gaming area where the game ball can flow down, a launching means capable of launching the ball toward the gaming area, and a launching intensity adjusting means capable of adjusting the firing intensity of the launching means. The variable ball entry means is provided in a predetermined gaming area where a ball launched with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing intensity adjusting means can flow down, and the ball is launched with a predetermined firing strength by the firing intensity adjusting means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the ball entry means is provided in a gaming area where it is difficult for the ball to flow down.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are played. That is, when the firing intensity of the launching means capable of launching the ball toward the game area is adjusted to a predetermined firing intensity by the launching intensity adjusting means, the variable ball entering means is provided in the predetermined gaming area where the ball can flow down. A ball entry means is provided in a game area where it is difficult for a ball launched with a predetermined firing strength to enter the ball. As a result, while the privilege game is being executed, the game is executed in which the ball is launched at a predetermined firing intensity to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, or the ball is launched at a firing intensity other than the predetermined firing intensity. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not to execute the game of firing and letting the ball enter the ball entering means by operating the firing intensity adjusting means. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game positively while the privilege game is being executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic F group> (Change the winning rate to the V confirmed winning opening with the attacker opening / closing pattern)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between an allowable state that allows the ball to enter and a restricted state that regulates the ball entry and allows the ball to pass downstream, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable ball entry means. A privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game in which the variable ball-entry means is alternately changed between the allowable state and the regulated state by the variable control means based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the variable ball-entry means. Separately provided, the ball-entry means capable of entering the ball and the privilege-giving means capable of granting the first privilege based on the ball entering the ball-entry means are provided, and the privilege granting is provided. The means is capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege when the ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, and the variable control. As the variable control pattern of the means, either a first variable pattern in which a ball can enter the ball entry means or a second variable pattern in which the ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a variable pattern setting means for setting.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) and a gaming state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing a ball. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (probability variation, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874). In this case, the prize ball can be obtained by making the variable winning device win the ball during the privilege game, and further, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was something to improve. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls, so that balls that do not win the variable winning device frequently occur during the bonus game. There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced.

According to the gaming machine F1, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the variable ball entry means is allowed to enter the ball by the variable control means, and the restricted state restricts the entry of the ball. It is variable alternately with. Then, apart from the variable ball entry means, a ball entry means is provided in which the first privilege can be granted by the privilege granting means when the ball enters the ball. If the ball enters the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege granting means. Further, as the variable control pattern of the variable control means, either the first variable pattern that can enter the ball entry means or the second variable pattern that is more difficult to enter than the first variable pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. Will be done. As a result, if the ball enters the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game using a ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be improved. Further, as the variable control pattern of the variable control means by the variable pattern setting means, either a first variable pattern in which the ball easily enters the ball entry means or a second variable pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying whether or not to enter the ball into the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a ball that has passed through the variable entering means, which is in the restricted state, can enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the ball entering means is provided so that the ball that has passed through the variable ball entering means in the regulated state can enter the ball, so that the variable control means can be used for variable control. The ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be reliably set based on the variable control pattern to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entry means at an unintended timing, and it is possible to provide an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the variable pattern setting means sets the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern by changing the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the restricted state. A gaming machine F3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are set by different periods during which the variable ball entry means is in the restricted state. There is an effect that the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be easily changed.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable pattern setting means has different timings at which the variable control of the variable ball entry means is started by the variable control means, so that the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern means are started. A gaming machine F4 characterized by setting a variable pattern.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are produced by different timings at which the variable control of the variable ball entry means is started. Since it is set, there is an effect that the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be easily changed.

In the case of having the configuration of the gaming machine F3, the period in which the variable ball entry means is restricted and the timing at which the variable control of the variable ball entry means is started are different from each other to enter the ball into the ball entry means. There is an effect that the ease of playing can be made more complicated and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, apart from the variable ball entry means, a variable state can be set between a permissible state in which the ball is allowed to enter and a restricted state in which the ball is restricted to enter and passed to the downstream side. The variable ball entry means has two variable ball entry means, and the variable control means is such that a ball that has passed through the variable ball entry means in the regulated state enters the second variable ball entry means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the above-mentioned second variable ball-entry means is variably controlled.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, apart from the variable ball entry means, it has a second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a permissible state that allows the ball to enter and a regulated state that regulates the ball entry and allows the ball to pass downstream. The variable entry means and the second entry means are variably controlled by the variable control means so that the ball that has passed through the variable entry means in the regulated state enters the second variable entry means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entry means at an unintended timing while the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

The configuration of the gaming machine F5 is more effective when the privileged gaming shown below is executed. For example, as a privilege game, the period during which the variable ball entry means is opened is one game, and when a predetermined number of games are continuously performed, one game is completed and the next game is performed. By the time the game is started, the variable ball entry means will be changed to the regulated state. In this case, if a ball that has passed through the variable ball entry means enters the ball entry means, there is a problem that a plurality of balls enter the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed. .. According to the gaming machine F5, the game in which the variable ball entry means is released is completed, and the ball that has passed through the regulated variable ball entry means is variably controlled to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entry means at an unintended timing.

<Characteristic G group> (Provides advantages and disadvantages in V gate passage timing)
Based on the variable ball entry means that can be changed to the allowable state that allows the ball to enter and the regulated state that regulates the ball entry, and the establishment of specific conditions, the variable ball entry means is moved to the allowable state. When the grant condition establishment means for satisfying the grant condition for granting the privileged game to be changed, the specific area through which the ball can pass, and the grant condition are satisfied by the grant condition establishment means, the ball passes through the specific area. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game based on the passage, a ball-entry means provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and capable of entering a ball, and the privileged ball-entry means. When the ball enters the ball entry means while the game execution means is executing the privilege game, the privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player and the period for passing the ball through the specific area. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the privilege is easily granted and a disadvantageous period in which the privilege is less likely to be granted than the advantageous period.

Here, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a pachinko machine that starts a big hit game by passing a ball through a specific area after winning a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013). -233181 (Japanese Patent Publication No. 233181). In this case, after winning a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, the big hit game is started by executing a game of passing a ball through a specific area, so that a pachinko machine rich in interest is provided. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, the game of passing the ball through a specific area executed after winning the big hit is a game only for starting the big hit game, so that further improvement of the interest is required.

According to the gaming machine G1, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the grant condition for granting the privilege game is established by the grant condition establishment means. When this grant condition is satisfied, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means when the ball passes through the specific area. Further, a ball entry means is provided in which the player is given a privilege advantageous to the player by the privilege granting means by entering the ball while the privilege game is being executed. Then, as a period for passing the ball through a specific area, an advantageous period in which the ball easily enters the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed and a disadvantageous period in which the ball is harder to enter than the advantageous period are set. It is set by means. As a result, it is possible to set an advantageous period and a disadvantageous period in the period for passing the ball to the specific area, so that the player can enthusiastically perform the game of passing the ball to the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the period setting means sets a predetermined period as the advantageous period after the granting condition is satisfied by the granting condition satisfying means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the period setting means is set so that the predetermined period is an advantageous period after the granting condition is satisfied by the granting condition satisfying means. When the grant condition is satisfied, the player will enthusiastically play a game in order to pass the ball to a specific area as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 is provided with an advantageous period changing means capable of changing the length of the advantageous period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the length of the advantageous period is changed by the advantageous period changing means, so that the game and the privilege that the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means are hard to be given. It is possible to set a game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

If the gaming machine G2 is configured, the timing at which the advantageous period ends after the granting condition is satisfied is changed. Therefore, whether or not the timing at which the ball is passed through the specific area is during the advantageous period. It has the effect of making it difficult for the player to grasp.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a distribution means for distributing the ball to a plurality of paths is provided, and the ball distributed to one of the plurality of paths passes through the specific area by the distribution means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by being possible.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the ball is distributed to a plurality of paths by the distribution means, and the ball distributed to one of the paths passes through the specific area. Therefore, the timing at which the sphere passes through the specific region differs depending on the distribution result of the distribution means. Therefore, since the ball passes through the specific area at various timings, there is an effect that the fun of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the privilege granting means grants a high probability state in which the probability that the specific condition is satisfied after the privilege game is completed is set higher than usual as the privilege. The gaming machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, there is a high probability state in which the probability that a specific condition is satisfied after the privileged game is completed is set higher than usual by the privilege granting means. Since it is given, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the discriminating means for determining whether the timing at which the ball passes through the specific region is the advantageous period, and the notification based on the determination that the discriminating means is the advantageous period. The gaming machine G6 is characterized by comprising a notification means for performing.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the determination means determines that the timing at which the ball has passed the specific region is an advantageous period, the determination result is determined by the notification means. Is notified based on. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the timing at which the ball has passed the specific area was an advantageous period.

In addition, in the case of having the configuration of the gaming machine G5, since the period from the passage of the ball through the specific area to the granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means is long, the player can be relieved by notifying by the notification means. It is possible to execute a privilege game.

<Characteristic H group> (During the big hit, you can win the V winning prize)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a permissible state that allows ball entry and a regulated state that regulates ball entry, and the variable ball-entry means to the permissible state based on the establishment of specific conditions. Based on the privileged game execution means for executing the privileged game and the variable ball-entry means, which are provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and the ball can enter the ball, and the ball enters the ball-entry means. A ball has entered the ball-entry means while the privilege-giving means for granting the first privilege or the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and the privilege game is being executed. The discriminating means is provided with a discriminating means for determining that, and the privilege granting means is said to be the first when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed by the discriminating means. The above-mentioned specific means, which grants the privilege of 2, and is variable to a permissible position that allows the ball to flow into the ball entry means and a regulated position that restricts the flow of the ball from the permissible position. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a variable control means that changes the variable means to the allowable position based on the condition that the conditions are satisfied.

<Characteristic I group> (V probability expectation is set by the jackpot type determined when passing through the V gate)
Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the grant condition is satisfied by the grant condition establishment means for establishing the grant condition for granting the privilege game to the player, the specific area through which the ball can pass, and the grant condition establishment means. In this case, the privilege game type setting means for setting the type of the privilege game to be given to the player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area, and the privilege game set by the privilege game type setting means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game based on the type, a ball-entry means provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and capable of entering a ball, and the privileged game executing means. When a ball enters the ball-entry means while the privilege game is being executed, the privilege-giving means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player is provided, and the privilege game type setting means is at least. The first privilege game type in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed, and the entry while the privilege game is being executed rather than the first privilege game type. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that any one of the second privileged gaming types in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball means is set.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10, D1 to D11, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 and I1, the gaming machine is characterized by being a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10, D1 to D11, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1, and I1, the gaming machine is characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10, D1 to D11, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1, I1, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
65 First variable winning device (part of variable ball entry means)
630a Specified general winning opening (ball entry means)
650 Second variable winning device (part of variable ball entry means)
900 First distribution member (part of setting means, part of distribution means)
901 Second distribution member (part of setting means, part of distribution means)
902 Third distribution member (part of setting means, part of distribution means)
S1004 Bonus game execution means S1110 Bonus granting means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (winning game, etc.) and a gaming state (probability change) that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player when the ball passes through. Etc.) can be given.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-174874

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in a player's willingness to play.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided in a gaming area where a ball can flow down, an entry means in which the ball can enter, and a ball in the entry means. A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the fact that the ball has entered, a privilege game execution means that can execute a privilege game based on that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and Among the game areas, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing balls, a variable means for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, and a game area. When the storage means is changed to the released state by the variable means, the specific ball entry means provided in the specific gaming area where the ball stored in the storage means can flow down and the ball can enter. And, when a ball enters the specific ball entry means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege and the ball flowing down from the storage means can be distributed to the specific ball entry means in the specific area. It has a possible sorting means, and the sorting means is configured to be able to sort the ball flowing down from the storage means to the specific ball-entry means when the sorting condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the distribution condition can be easily satisfied by the spheres that are not stored by the storage means .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , a gaming area where a ball can flow down, a ball-entry means provided in the gaming area where the ball can enter, and a ball entering the ball-entry means. The discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the discrimination means, the privileged game executing means capable of executing the privileged game based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a predetermined discrimination result, and the gaming area are provided. The storage means capable of storing the ball, the variable means for changing the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state for releasing the storage state, and the variable means in the gaming area. When the storage means is changed to the release state, the specific ball-entry means in which the ball stored in the storage means can flow down is provided in the specific gaming area where the ball can enter, and the specific entry means thereof. A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege when a ball enters the ball means , and a sorting means capable of distributing the ball flowing down from the storage means to the specific ball entering means in the specific area. , And the sorting means is configured to be able to sort the balls flowing down from the storage means to the specific ball-entry means when the sorting conditions are satisfied, and the balls are stored by the storage means. It is configured so that the distribution condition can be easily satisfied by the spheres that have not been made .

Therefore , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player 's willingness to play.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed navigation is displayed, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed warning image is displayed. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen when a ball enters a high value winning opening during a jackpot. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating a display screen on which a warning image is displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (A) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the sphere that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the sphere that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is open. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of a sphere. It is a figure which shows the upstream side of the path provided on the right side of a game board. It is a figure which shows the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of a game board. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the first specific winning opening is opened, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the second specific winning opening is opened. (A) is a diagram showing the path of the ball in a state where the first specific winning opening is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball in a state where the first specific winning opening is open. (A) is a diagram showing the path of the ball in a state where the second specific winning opening is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball in a state where the second specific winning opening is open. (A) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of a ball that has entered the second variable winning device with the probability-changing ball opening closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the ball that has entered the second variable winning device, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable winning apparatus in the state of being. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change between the state of the second specific winning opening and the state of the flow path in the second variable winning device in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the timekeeping change between the state of the 2nd specific winning opening and the state of the flow path in the 2nd variable winning device in the round | round. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of RAM in a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the error notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-time notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the normal time notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is closed, and (b) is a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is open. It is an exemplary figure. It is a front view of the storage device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating a case where a ball flowing into a storage device is guided to a high-value winning opening when the storage valve in the second embodiment is closed, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the case where the ball has flowed into the storage device. 2 is a diagram illustrating a case where a ball flowing into a storage device is guided to a small value winning opening when the storage valve in the second embodiment is closed. It is a figure which illustrates the traveling direction of the sphere which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is open. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second embodiment. be. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage time notification processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the release notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the display screen during the jackpot in the modification of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a plan view of the storage device and the second variable winning device in a state where the slide member of the modified example of the first embodiment is projected toward the front side of the front view, and (b) is a modified view of the first embodiment. It is a top view of the storage device and the 2nd variable winning device in a state where the slide member of an example is buried in the back side of the front view. It is a figure which shows the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening closing process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-time notification processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device in the state that the ball stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment is arranged in a disadvantageous arrangement for a player. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device with the ball stored in the storage device in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment in a state which is advantageous arrangement for a player. It is a figure which shows the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the release suggestion display process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the storage state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the third embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving (probability variation) medium-big hit table in the third embodiment. c) is a figure which shows the rule content of the time saving (probability change) middle-out table in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the open scenario setting table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the open scenario setting table (normal) in the third embodiment. c) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the open scenario setting table (probability change) in the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rule content of the expectation degree display selection table in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the opening operation of the jackpot A in the normal gaming state in the third embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the opening operation of the jackpot A in the probabilistic gaming state in the third embodiment. be. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opening scenario setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing 3 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage state determination process which is executed by MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving medium display processing executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the fourth embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the second open scenario setting table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the second open scenario setting table (normal) in the fourth embodiment. (C) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the second open scenario setting table (probability change) in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the opening operation of the jackpot B in the normal gaming state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the opening operation of the jackpot B in the probabilistic gaming state in the fourth embodiment. be. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect processing executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the fifth embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the third open scenario setting table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the third open scenario setting table (normal) in the fifth embodiment. (C) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the third open scenario setting table (probability change) in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the rule contents of the pseudo-effect number setting table in the fifth embodiment. .. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game when the big hit in 5th Embodiment is won. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game when the big hit in 5th Embodiment is won. It is a figure which shows the flow of the simulated production in 5th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot type determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage valve opening process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related processing which is executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect processing 5 executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-effect process executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example of 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a wind turbine (movable member 310 are shown, and others are shown). (Not shown), rail 61, 62, general winning slot 63, first ball slot 64, second ball slot 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal ball slot (not shown). The through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, the storage device 600, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 600 are formed by router processing to form a base plate 60. It is arranged in the through hole formed in the above, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally opens the entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the ball is performed for the ball entering the second ball opening 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, waits for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Or, the operation of opening (until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probability variable ball opening 654 and normal ball entry) for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special gaming state. A mouth 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although the details will be described later, when the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 in the special game state, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probability change entrance 654 during the special game state, the "normal symbol time saving state" is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. There are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B" (see FIG. 18 (b)). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the ease of entering the ball into the probabilistic entry opening 654 is different.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, the hit / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. It is also displayed and is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 15 rounds in a special gaming state (15R big hit). Further, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability change entrance 654, the pachinko machine 10 has a high special symbol from the end of the big hit to the next big hit as an added value after the end of the big hit. It shifts to the probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probability change entrance 654 in the special game state, as an added value after the jackpot ends, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. For a while, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol. In addition, when shifting to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. The low probability state of this special symbol continues until the next big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the "big hit B", the ball is more likely to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the big hit state) than in the "big hit A". That is, since the "big hit B" is more likely to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, it is more likely to be the big hit again at short intervals after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than the "big hit A".

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent big hit increases as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high-probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol. Further, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) means a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game in which neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the time reduction of the normal symbol is increased (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is reached. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased from the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 10 times, and after the lottery of the special symbol is completed 10 times. May be configured to be set to the normal state. Further, the number of times that the special symbol is in the probable change state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 in the special game state, the normal symbol time is shortened until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. However, the time saving period of a normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily set.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entry port 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is reserved up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17), for example, the upper, middle, and lower parts are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) in the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is displayed. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the liquid crystal display, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. Yes, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., which is almost full on the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers is added. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined motion, and sometimes a special motion different from the predetermined motion is performed, or another character performs a predetermined motion. A notice production will be performed by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). The number of times the ball is entered is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, the reserved ball does not exist. Note that FIG. 4B is an example in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the first entry port 64 is four. When a reserved ball corresponding to the entry into the second entry port 640 is generated, a reserved ball number symbol having a mode different from the reserved ball number symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed. Will be done. As a result, the player can easily determine how many reserved balls correspond to the entry into the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the second entry opening 640. You can check.

In the present embodiment, the balls entered into the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5A, a display (right-handed navigation) prompting the third symbol display device 81 to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is displayed. The display contents when it occurs will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily released when the special symbol is probablely changed or the normal symbol is shortened, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, although the details will be described later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a "big hit B" than when a big hit is made by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball. Therefore, in the probable change state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit or the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right-handed strike. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probable change state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right, which is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probable change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player displays the probabilistic state of the special symbol by displaying the image (right-handed navigation) illustrated in FIG. 5A. It is structured so that the benefits of being in a time-saving state of ordinary symbols can be surely obtained.

As illustrated in FIG. 5A, in the right-handed navigation, the characters "Aim to the right !!" are displayed for the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and the characters are oriented to the right above and below. Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to surely make the player obtain the benefit of being in the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed to the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). The warning image illustrated in FIG. 5B shows a right-handed hit even though it is not a period in which the player should hit the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed to the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the image is being executed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640). For this reason, if a right-handed strike is performed in a normal state, the chances of receiving a special symbol lottery are reduced as compared with the case where the ball is launched aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed strike. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money.

As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, a "warning" is given to the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). And the characters "Play left-handed !!" are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that a right-handed strike should not be made (a left-handed strike should be made). In addition, the hall clerk also confirms the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen (see FIG. 5 (b)) to determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of right-handed in a normal state. It can be easily identified.

As a method of determining whether or not the ball is hit right, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) where the ball can flow in when the ball is hit right. .. More specifically, when a ball enters any of the general winning openings 601 and 602 provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) or the out openings 603a to 603c (in each entry opening). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the provided ball entry switch), it is determined that the player is hitting right.

Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) has a state in which it is easy for the ball to flow down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and a state in which the ball flows down to the general winning opening 602 according to the gaming state. It is set to two types of states, one is an easy state (see FIG. 9B). Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (probability change state of the special symbol, time saving state of the normal symbol, normal state), the ball is set to a state in which the ball can easily flow down to the general winning opening 601. The general winning opening 601 is a winning opening in which the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters is smaller than that of the general winning opening 602 (for example, three). Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is performed in a normal state, there is little merit of allowing the ball to enter the storage device 600 (the number of balls held cannot be increased). That is, if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the lottery of the special symbol is reduced and the number of balls held is also reduced, so that the player is configured to be disadvantaged. For this reason, a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed in order to prevent the player from continuing to perform a game method that is disadvantageous to him (a game method in which he strikes right in a normal state). It is configured as follows.

As a factor for determining whether or not to display the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)), not only the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 that is easy to win in the normal state, but also the winning. It is also determined whether or not the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which is difficult to do, because the possibility of illegal game is taken into consideration. That is, under normal conditions, by continuously illegally injecting balls into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 15 payouts), without going through a big hit. There is a possibility that an illegal game method to obtain a large number of prize balls will be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has won (winned) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player is hit to the left (right). A right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) urging the player not to hit is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal games.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the entry ports (general winning openings 601 and 602, out openings 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. Was configured to display a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with many winning balls to be paid out, an illegal game is performed. It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that it has been performed. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the hall computer is fraudulent. It may be configured to output a signal indicating. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraudulent activity is being performed.

In the present embodiment, the player makes a right-handed hit based on detecting the entry of a ball into each entry opening (general winning openings 601, 602, out openings 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the player is doing the right-handed hit, the method of determining whether or not the player is hitting right is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine that the ball is hitting right when it passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A known sensor capable of detecting the passage of the ball may be arranged on the top, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the player is hitting right.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state) will be described. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when it becomes a big hit, for example, an image in which a boy character 710 discovers a treasure box 715 filled with treasure is displayed. This treasure suggests a large amount of prize balls that the player obtains in the special gaming state (big hit state). This display can amplify the joy of winning the prize ball, and thus give a feeling of satisfaction to the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, a display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the example of FIG. 6A, the characters "ROUND3" are displayed on the display area 714. By checking this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot.

Further, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed in the same manner as in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed for the small area Ds3, and right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the jackpot state). be able to. If a left-handed hit is made despite the special game state (big hit state), it is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and is released in the special game state (big hit state). It becomes impossible to put the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it becomes impossible to win a large amount of prize balls, and the player loses. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) is displayed even in the special gaming state (big hit state) to encourage the player to perform right-handed hitting. As a result, the player is configured to be able to win a prize ball at the jackpot.

In addition, a winning number display area MA for displaying the number of winnings (balls) to the general winning opening 602 is formed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in 6 (a), for example, the characters "EXTRA BONUS x 10" are displayed in the winning number display area MA. The characters "EXTRA BONUS" mean that the prize ball is obtained by a method different from the prize ball obtained by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a prize ball is obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602. Further, the character "x10" indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 in the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball is entered into the general winning opening 602 10 times in the 1st to 3rd rounds.

Further, a schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the characters "EXTRA BONUS x 10", and the characters "EXTRA BONUS gate is open" are displayed above the schematic diagram. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). Further, in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon with the characters "Aim!" Is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. .. With this balloon, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is advantageous when the ball is inserted into the general prize opening 602 (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained).

Further, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the display contents when the ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6B, when a ball entering the general winning opening 602 is detected during the jackpot, the characters "GET" are displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which the ball enters the portion corresponding to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. Further, in the winning number display area MA, the display content is changed from "EXTRA BONUS x 10" to "EXTRA BONUS x 11". As a result, the player can easily recognize that the prize ball has been obtained by the ball entering the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 602.

In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 during the jackpot, the winning ball is different from the entry into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot. It is possible to make the player recognize the number of times the player has won. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the number of times of "EXTRA BONUS" (the number of times of entering the general winning opening 602) will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. 7. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a left-handed warning image displayed to the third symbol display device 81 when left-handed in a special gaming state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that the player is left-handed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the characters "warning" are displayed in large size in the large display area, and the characters "Aim for the attacker by hitting right!" Are displayed below the characters "warning". By displaying these characters in the large display area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current game method (left-handed) is an erroneous game method. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can surely acquire a large amount of prize balls.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the player is hitting left is determined by whether or not the ball has entered the first entry port 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state), it is determined that the player is hitting the left side, and the left-handed warning image ( Control is performed so as to display (see FIG. 7A).

In the present embodiment, a left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. .. For example, a passage sensor for detecting the passage of a ball is provided on a path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and a left-handed warning image (left-handed warning image) when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor during a big hit. It may be configured to display FIG. 7 (a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, the case where a ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is detected in spite of the special gaming state (big hit state), or the special gaming state (big hit state). When it is detected that the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 even though it is not in the state), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the text "Call the gate error staff" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

In addition, if the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of winning balls that are always paid out, due to illegally changing the wiring, etc., the hole The clerk can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity only by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and the ball is launched aiming at the storage device 600 to suppress fraudulent acts that increase the number of balls without going through a big hit. be able to.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game. As a result, during the probable change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the open state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can be easily won in the second entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. ing. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a winning lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. It may be performed by using a part of the device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball of the normal entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of assembly of the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made at 110 (see FIG. 17), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 (below the normal ball entry port 67), a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

Further, the first entry slot 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the second entrance 640 may be different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 is set to 5. May be good.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. It becomes easier to display the symbol of "○" on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the prize in the second entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state depending on whether the ball wins in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. be. However, as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit B) that makes it easy for the ball to enter the probability variation entry slot 654 during the special game state is the second entry slot 640. The case where the ball wins the ball is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first ball opening 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Therefore, the first entry ball without the electric accessory is provided. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and a lot of chances for a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port 67, and the second entry is made. Since it is easy to win a prize in the ball opening 640, a ball is launched toward the second entry port 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and a normal entry is made. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit B by passing the ball opening 67 to open the electric accessory and winning a prize in the second entry port 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a game depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is in the probable change, the normal symbol is in the time saving, or the normal state is in the normal state). It is possible to make a person change the way of firing a ball between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (lower left side of the second ball opening 640), and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery caused by winning a prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 14 times (14 rounds), for example. More specifically, the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds in the special gaming state. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (opening / closing solenoid) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided above the second variable winning device 650. .. The opening / closing plate covering the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by projecting toward the front side of the front view (see FIG. 14A). ). On the other hand, it became a big hit by lottery of special symbols, and in the 12th round, the opening and closing plate covering the second specific winning opening 650a slides to the back side of the front view and is buried in the back side of the game board 13, and the ball is the first. 2 An open state in which a ball can be entered into the variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14 (b)).

As described above, based on the fact that the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in the special gaming state (during the jackpot) enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650. , After the end of the big hit, it shifts to the probable state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special gaming state, or even if the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal entry opening 655. If you do, the game will shift to the normal symbol time saving state after the jackpot ends.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as the winning openings opened in the special gaming state. On the contrary, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. The storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of entry openings (general winning openings 601 and 602 and out openings 603a to 603c) inside the storage device 600, and allows the entered balls to flow down to any of the entry openings. be able to. Further, the storage device 600 can store (stop the flow) only one ball that has entered the inside of the storage device 600. Further, the storage device 600 is covered on the front side of the front view with a transparent cover body, and which entry port the ball that the player has flowed into (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. Is configured so that it can be easily confirmed. The details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured so that a ball can enter the inside of the storage device 600 via the guide flow path 605. The storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits the right side, one ball enters into approximately three of the launched balls. The ball that did not enter the induction flow path 605 flows down the upper left side of the storage device 600 in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, in the special gaming state, a part of the ball launched by the player toward the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600 via the guide flow path 605. It is configured in.

As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branch member 604 are provided downstream of the guide flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 606 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front. Most of the balls flowing down the induction flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 601a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, the number of three prize balls is paid out. In addition, on the left and right of this general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, balls that did not enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though they flowed down the induction flow path 606 are discharged. Out ports 603a and 603b for this purpose are provided. With these out ports, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the spheres from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and to reliably discharge the spheres that have flowed down the induction flow path 606. Further, these out ports 603a and 603b are provided with detection switches 603a and 603b1 (not shown), respectively, as in the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. With these detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, the number of ejected balls can be accurately determined.

Inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 607 through which a ball can flow down is provided on the right side of the front view. Most of the game balls flowing down the guidance flow path 607 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 602a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, more prize balls can be obtained when the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. can. Out ports 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right sides of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, respectively. These out ports prevent (suppress) the balls that did not enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and allow the balls flowing down the induction flow path 607. It can be reliably discharged. Further, the out port 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown), similarly to the out ports 603a and 603b. The detection switch 603c1 can accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ball is set to be in a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 when the special gaming state (big hit state) is reached. , In a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is set to a state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special gaming state, in addition to obtaining a large amount of prize balls by opening the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, the general winning opening (high value winning) in the storage device 600 is obtained. Mouth) It is configured so that a prize ball can be obtained by winning a prize in 602. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is relatively large. The ball is set in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few numbers. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, there is little merit of letting the ball enter the storage device 600, so even in a state other than the special gaming state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, a large amount of payout is to be received. It is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method. As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one ball enters the storage device 600 out of approximately three balls hit to the right. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be performed, and the number of balls cannot be increased by paying out the ball to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to hit left.

The induction flow path 607 is provided with a storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a can block the guide flow path 607 by projecting toward the front side of the front view, and can prevent the sphere from flowing down to the guide flow path 607. That is, the ball can be stopped (stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a solenoid 610 for a storage device (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the solenoid 610 for the storage device, the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the front side of the front view (the state where the induction flow path 607 is blocked) and the storage valve 607a moves toward the back side of the front view. It is configured to be switchable to a buried state (a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 607). The ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the induction flow path 606 side by being surrounded by the inner wall of the induction flow path 607 and the branch member 604. .. That is, the protruding portion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set sufficiently high so that the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a does not flow out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing the operation of a ball that has entered the storage device 600 in a state where the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the front side, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation of the ball which entered the storage device 600 in the state of being buried in.

As shown in FIG. 9A, more than half of the lower end of the guide flow path 605 overlaps with the upper end of the guide flow path 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide flow path 606 is located on the left side of the central axis 605a of the guide flow path 605 and hardly overlaps with the lower end portion of the guide flow path 605. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the induction flow path 605 can easily proceed to the induction flow path 607.

The sphere that has advanced to the induction flow path 607 is blocked from flowing down by the storage valve 607a and stops at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). Then, when the ball is stopped (the ball is stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a and another ball newly flows down the induction flow path 605, the ball newly flows down the induction flow path 605. The ball that has come in contact (interference) with the ball stored on the storage valve 607a. Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (flowing direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the induction flow path 605 changes.

Since the induction flow path 607 is provided slightly to the right of the induction flow path 605 (see FIG. 9A), the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a is newly provided in the induction flow path 605. In most cases, it is stopped on the right side of the ball flowing down. Therefore, the ball newly flowing down the induction flow path 605 collides with the left side of the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and thus repels the left side in the front view. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guidance flow path 605 advances to the guidance flow path 606 provided on the left side of the front view. As described above, most of the balls flowing down the induction flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of winning balls (three prize balls). That is, in a state where the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side of the front view and the ball cannot flow down the induction flow path 607 (a state in which the induction flow path 607 is closed), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 are general. Enter the winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.

On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried in the back side of the front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the ball from flowing into the induction flow path 607, so that the induction flow path 607 The ball that has progressed to the point flows down the induction flow path 607 as it is, and enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. As described above, the general winning slot (high value winning slot) 602 is a winning slot with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out (15), so there are many merits for the player to win a prize.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 607 when a big hit occurs (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, in the special game state, by hitting right to win a ball to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained and the ball is ejected by hitting right. A prize ball can be obtained by a part of the ball being awarded to the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 in the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as described above, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a and relatively paid out. It is set in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, there is little merit of letting the ball enter the storage device 600, so even in a state other than the special gaming state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, a large amount of payout is to be received. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the game method.

In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction flow path 607 enters the general winning opening 602. It is configured to do, but is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each induction flow path, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. May be good. As a result, even if the guide flow path 606 is flown down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize balls into the winning openings having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestedly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning openings. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the induction flow path 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the induction flow path 607. For example, the induction flow path is configured by using an electromagnet or the like. It may be configured to store the sphere in the middle of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and the electromagnet is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the induction flow path 607 can be attracted to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be configured to be stored side by side.

In the present embodiment, the out opening is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out opening, a winning opening for paying out the prize balls may be provided. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters each winning opening may be different. More specifically, for example, 6 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603c. May be provided with 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to more interestingly observe the case where the ball flows down the guide flow path 606 and the guide flow path 607 to which winning opening the ball enters. Further, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning openings for any ball to enter are more random. .. As a result, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be observed more interestingly until the ball enters one of the winning openings. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set an entrance where the ball can easily enter by the clerk in the hall. Therefore, the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, a route when the player ejects the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when hitting to the right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 10, the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 is provided with a normal ball entry port 67 above the flow path (path). As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, when the normal symbol is hit, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “◯” symbol indicating the hit of the normal symbol after the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed. Then, based on the fact that the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 provided downstream of the normal entry opening 67 is provided. It is released for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds x 1 time or 1 second x 2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, the ball hit to the right can easily enter the second entrance 640. As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter, and the opening period of the electric accessory becomes longer. 2 It becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entry port 640. Therefore, by performing a right-handed hit, it is possible to receive a special symbol lottery without reducing the number of balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Further, a first variable winning device 65 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 65. (See Fig. 11). That is, among the balls that have flowed down to the downstream of the path (flow path) on the right side due to the player's right-handed strike, the balls that have flowed down to the downstream without flowing into (entering) the storage device 600 are the first. 1 Flows down in the direction of the variable winning device 65. Further, the ball that flows down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65 and does not enter the first specific winning opening 65a flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650.

In this way, the ball can be made to flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 simply by the player hitting the right side. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a simply by hitting the right, and a large amount of balls can be entered. You can win a prize ball. Further, a part of the ball launched aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600. Then, as described above, in the special gaming state (big hit state), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), The player can win more prize balls during the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be openable toward the front of the front view. By opening the first specific winning opening 65a, the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the first specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a has 10 balls or until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds elapses) in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). It will be released (until you win a prize). Then, when a ball enters the first specific prize opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the second specific winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 can be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding toward the back side of the front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) in 12 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). Then, when a ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and has reached the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. First, FIG. 13A is a diagram when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 13A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it falls into the space on the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13A). Then, the ball that has fallen toward the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down the flow path provided below the first specific winning opening 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning opening 65a is inclined in the direction of the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball flows down in the direction of the second specific winning opening 650a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a open, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 1 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 13B, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball ejection port 65c, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning opening 65a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball ejection port 65c, all the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a enter the ball ejection port 65c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and reached the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. First, FIG. 14A is a diagram when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it flows down the upper part of the second specific winning opening 650a and falls to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). Then, the ball that has fallen to the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down to the out opening 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a open, as shown in FIG. 14B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 2 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball ejection port 650c, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning opening 650a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface portion 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined toward the ball ejection port 650c, all the balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a enter the ball ejection port 650c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the structure downstream of the ball discharge port 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball enters the ball. It is configured to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The probabilistic entry ball port 654 is provided in one of the two flow paths (induction flow path 652 and guidance flow path 653) provided downstream of the ball discharge port 650c (induction flow path 652). Has been done. Further, at the upper ends of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650d for setting a flow path through which the ball flows down is provided. This flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the sphere cannot proceed, and open the other flow path so that the sphere can proceed. Has been done. The flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated around the switching shaft 650e as a rotation shaft by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17), and in the 12th round of the jackpot, depending on the elapsed time. The arrangement can be switched.

15 (a) and 15 (b) are views showing the operation of the sphere for each arrangement of the flow path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the induction flow path 652 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c cannot proceed to the induction flow path 652 because it is blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the induction flow path 653 (see FIG. 15 (a)). A ball entry port 655 is usually provided downstream of the induction flow path 653. That is, during the arrangement shown in FIG. 15 (a), the ball cannot enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. In this embodiment, the flow path switching valve 650d is configured to have the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A by turning off the flow path solenoid 611.

On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611. In the case of the arrangement in which the induction flow path 653 is closed, the ball entering the ball discharge port 650c can proceed to the induction flow path 652 without being blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the ball advances to the induction flow path 653 and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided downstream thereof.

When the ball enters the probability change entrance 654, it is set to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the twelfth round in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is completed, a suggestion effect for suggesting the gaming state after the end of the big hit to the player is executed in the subsequent rounds. That is, if the ball enters the probabilistic ball opening 654 in the 12th round, the display effect suggesting that the special symbol shifts to the probabilistic state in the 13th to 15th rounds is the third symbol display device 81. Is executed in. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the probabilistic entry slot 654 in the 12th round, the display effect suggesting that the normal symbol shifts to the time saving state in the 13th to 15th rounds is the third symbol display device 81. Is executed in. In this way, by setting the round in which the large 2 specific winning opening 650a is opened as the 12th round, a sufficient period for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the gaming state after the end of the big hit is secured in the remaining rounds of the big hit. be able to.

As described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream from the entrance of the storage device 600, so that the ball is connected to the storage device 600. The easier it is for the ball to flow in, the harder it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B. On the contrary, the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the easier it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which the ball can flow into the storage device 600, the rate of ball entry into the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 can be changed. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of inflow to the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, the more the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to be closer to each other, the more difficult it is for the ball to pass between these two nails, and the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. .. Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the probability change ball opening 654, so that it is possible to easily shift to the probability change state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the more the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to be separated from each other, the easier it is for the ball to pass between these two nails, and the easier it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. .. Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B, the ball easily flows into the probabilistic entry ball opening 654, so that it is difficult to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance of the storage device 600, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 (ratio of the probable change state of the special symbol) can be changed, so that the pachinko machine can be changed according to the business policy of each hall. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is different between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. As a result, the jackpot B is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the probability variation entry slot 654 in the special gaming state (big hit state) than the jackpot A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change between the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the twelfth round of the jackpot A. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 16A shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 16A. The lower figure is a diagram showing the timing change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction flow path 652 on the downstream left side of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the guidance flow path 653 on the right side is open). be.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time is set. After (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the open state is set based on the elapse of 7 seconds. This open state continues until the end of the 12th round. Specifically, 10 balls enter the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening opening) 650a, or the open state is set until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round. Will be done. Then, when the 12th round is completed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side thereof is closed and the ball can flow down the guidance flow path 652 on the left side (FIG. 15). See (b)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round, and the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the reverse direction based on the elapse of 6.5 seconds. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the flow path can be switched before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 becomes a big hit next, and continues until the end of the 11th round. Then, based on the end of the 11th round and the interval period of 3 seconds, the induction flow path 652 is set to a state in which the ball can flow down (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, during most of the period during which the player is playing the game, the ball can pass through the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The sphere can pass through the induction flow path 652 only for a limited period from the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of the 12th round to 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Only the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of causing the ball to enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a other than the 12th round in the special gaming state is performed, the ball enters the probabilistic entry opening 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal acquisition of the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

The timing for switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to switch to the open state of the induction flow path 652 at the start of the 12th round, or in the middle of the interval period set after the end of the 11th round (for example, after the interval starts). It may be configured to switch (after 0.5 seconds have passed). As a result, the period during which the induction flow path 652 is opened can be limited to a shorter period, so that the ball is illegally entered into the second variable winning device 650 while the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Even if it is allowed to do so, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. That is, fraudulent activity can be prevented.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the period during which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open and the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a are open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set so that the period is almost non-overlapping (overlapping only for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12 rounds). Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

The reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that it is a big hit A immediately after the start of the 12th round. Is. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b), but in the jackpot B where it is easy to enter the ball into the probability variation entry opening 654, the second specific winning opening (the second large opening opening) immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is released. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round between the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the jackpot B this time will be the jackpot B. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, the time change between the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the twelfth round of the jackpot B will be described. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 16 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 16 (b). The lower figure is a diagram showing the timing change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction flow path 652 on the downstream left side of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the guidance flow path 653 on the right side is open). be.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set to the open state. Then, the open state is maintained until 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the 2nd specific winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a before 5 seconds have elapsed, the 2nd specific winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a will still be used. It will be closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, as described above, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow path switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as the jackpot A. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the 11th round, the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d is closed so that the ball can flow down the guidance flow path 652 on the left side. (See FIG. 15 (b)). Then, when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the 12th round, the flow path switching valve 650d is switched in the opposite direction. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the period during which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open and the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a are open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set so that the period overlaps with the period for a maximum of 5 seconds. Therefore, in many cases where the jackpot B is reached, the ball can be entered into the probability change ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that the ball is set to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It will be easier.

The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this, and the pattern is such that the ball can easily enter the probability changing ball opening 654 and the probability changing ball opening 654. If it is possible to set a pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, it may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 at the start of the 12th round (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6. After 5 seconds) has elapsed, the flow path switching valve 650d may be set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds, for example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 654, so that it is possible to make it easier for the special symbol to be in the probability-changing state after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the motivation of the player for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the out openings 603a to 603c are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out openings 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. Run.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, but the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is any determination value specified in the first random number table 202a. If it matches with, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot A, most of the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured so that the flow path 653 is open (see FIG. 16A). Therefore, it becomes difficult to allow the ball to flow down to the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d, so that the ball is moved to the probabilistic entry ball port 654 provided downstream of the guidance flow path 652. It becomes difficult to enter the ball. That is, when the jackpot A is reached, it becomes difficult to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot B, the induction provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d for the entire period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round. It is configured so as to overlap with the period during which the flow path 652 is open (see FIG. 16 (b)). Therefore, the flow path switching valve 650d can be obtained simply by allowing the ball to enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open. The ball can flow down to the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the. Then, as described above, a probabilistic entry ball port 654 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 652. Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached, it becomes easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 99", the jackpot B is associated and defined. That is, the number of determination values that become the jackpot B is larger when the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 than in the case where the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1. Therefore, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is more likely to be a big hit B.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, the probable change state of the special symbol that is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be the big hit B when the big hit is made, and the probable change of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in a state, is likely to be repeated, it becomes easy for the player to obtain a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, "5 to 28" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and a second ball entry corresponding to a prize in the first ball opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four hold areas (holds 1st to 4th areas). A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a prize in the mouth 640 is provided, and each of these areas has a timing for entering the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. In addition, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation state of the special symbol, which of "0 to 9" is the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is discriminated and any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", the judgment value of the big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". The probability of becoming 1/40 (10/400). Further, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200", and if it is "200", it is determined to be a big hit. Of the 400 possible values of the random number counter C1 per first, there is only one judgment value of "200" that is a big hit, so the special symbol is placed in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In the present embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that is the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, and when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is "big hit A". Further, the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a big hit, and when the random number value is any of "50 to 99", the big hit type is "big hit B". Further, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and when the random number value is any of "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is "big hit A". Further, the lottery of the special symbol 2 results in a big hit, and when the random number value is any of "20 to 99", the big hit type is "big hit B".

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the number of jackpots is not limited to one, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Further, it is configured so that the same jackpot type is selected with the same value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case where the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the case where the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2. You may. With such a configuration, the amount of data in the first type selection table 202b can be reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time loss, long-time loss, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d storing the random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. ing.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. , Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for big hits. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. , Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for the low probability time of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C), and the hit of the normal symbol from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high-probability times (the period in which the normal symbol is in the time-shortened state and the period in which the special symbol is in the probable change state) (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)), and each of them is included in each of them. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of winning between the low probability of the normal symbol (normal state of the normal symbol) and the high probability of the normal symbol (time saving state of the normal symbol). Is changed.

As shown in FIG. 18 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (202c1 in FIG. 18 (c). reference). As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol (during the time reduction of a normal symbol and during the probability change of a special symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". .. These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Here, the details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability change valid flag 203o It has a probability variation effective timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time reduction / medium counter 203r, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on the winning of 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second ball opening 640 are stored for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , Other configurations are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 202b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift processing is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). 3 It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held by the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls is stored by winning a prize in the second entrance 640. Since it is only different, the detailed explanation will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

If the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S703: No).

The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability change state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the probability variation flag 203g becomes a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set. In the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power failure occurs. If so, it is configured to back up the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has entered the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 during the special gaming state (big hit state). .. When the game ball enters the probability variation entry port 654, the entry is detected by a probability variation switch (not shown), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 202h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power is turned off, and when it is determined that the probability change switch has been passed, the probability change setting flag 203h is determined. May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power supply is cut off by whether or not the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to be turned on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch in one round (in the present embodiment, the twelfth round of the jackpot) during the jackpot state. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability change pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability change switch (S1411 in FIG. 38). Further, after executing the process of whether or not the number of game balls flowing into the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). The value of the probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second specific winning opening) of the second variable winning device 650 in each round in the jackpot game. Large opening) A counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the 650a. Specifically, based on the detection of ball entry by the winning sensors (not shown) provided in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, the balls are added and updated one by one. (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (value of the winning number counter 203j). ) And the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the discharged number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are determined, and then the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to 0.

As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is opened, so that the winning number counter 203j is substantially in each of the above rounds. Therefore, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the 12th round, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened, so that in the 12th round, the winning number counter 203j is substantially the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening). The number of balls that have entered the large opening) 650a will be counted.

In the present embodiment, a prize is won when it is detected that a ball has entered either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. Although it is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j, it is entered at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, respectively. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of balls that have been hit.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the elapsed time since the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). .. That is, the elapsed time from the time when the flow path solenoid 611 is set to ON and the ball is set to the state where the ball can enter the probability variation entry port 654 is timed (counted) by the operation counter 203k. In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path switching valve 650d rotates clockwise with the switching shaft 650e as the rotation axis by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611 based on the completion of 11 rounds of the jackpot. The induction flow path 652 is opened.

In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period during which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, the counter value corresponding to the interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round for a total of 9.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The value of this operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power supply is cut off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to the initial value of 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open in one round. Indicates that it has been set to a closed state. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for ejecting the game ball flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203n is set when the preset 1 round is completed and the 1st specific winning opening (1st large opening) 65a is closed (1st to 11th rounds, 13th to 15th rounds), or the second. When the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds), it is necessary for the game ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged. It is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, since the time required for the game ball winning in the first variable winning device 81 to be ejected is 2 seconds, it corresponds to 3 seconds (2 seconds + 1 second) including a 1 second margin. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated and the value reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds) or the second variable winning device 650 It is determined whether or not the number of winnings in (12 rounds) and the number of dischargings match (S1507 in FIG. 39). Then, if it is determined that the number of winnings and the number of dischargings do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that ball clogging has occurred inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of the jackpot to allow the ball to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. Cheating can be suppressed.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if the flag is on, the probability change setting even if the ball enters the probability change entry ball opening 654. The configuration may be such that the flag 203h is not set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

Further, in the present embodiment, either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. When it was detected, the counter value was started to be updated by the remaining ball timer 203n, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

The probabilistic valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the probabilistic entry is valid when the game ball enters the probabilistic entry port 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. Is. When the probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON, the ball flowing into the induction flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B) based on the flow path solenoid 611 being ON is a probability change entry ball. It shows that it is less than the time required to enter the mouth 654. That is, it is shown that the ball entering the probable change ball opening 654 is a normal operation.

The probabilistic valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203o is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for the ball to normally enter the probability change entry port 654. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball flowing into the induction flow path 652 to enter the probability variation entry port 654 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds including a margin of 0.2 seconds. If the ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 after this 1.2 seconds have elapsed, there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, so the probability variation setting flag 203h is controlled so as not to be updated. ..

As a result, in a state where the flow path switching valve 650d closes the induction flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the probability change entry port 654), the ball can be entered into the probability change entry port 654 or the probability change entry ball can be entered. Damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from the downstream of the mouth 654 to pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 654, or misleading the ball to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 by radio waves or the like. Can be suppressed.

The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball ejection port switch (not shown) for detecting the ejection of a ball. The discharge number counter 203q is incremented by 1 each time a ball discharge is detected by the ball discharge port switch (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the value of the ejected number counter 203q is the initial value. Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. At this time reduction / medium counter 203r, 100 is set when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of the normal symbol 100 times is given.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete deviation, reach deviation, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

Further, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , A probability change state flag 223f, a time saving state counter 223g, a jackpot medium flag 223h, and an allowable time counter 223i are provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is displayed. Is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 hold ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it is different only in that it is done, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The probability change state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223f is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). According to the state of the probability change state flag 223f, it is determined whether or not the present is the probability change state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the probable change state of the special symbol, and the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)). Is determined whether or not to display.

The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the normal symbol. When the time saving state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. The time saving state counter 223g is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current time saving state is the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)). Is determined whether or not to display.

The jackpot middle flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state). If this jackpot middle flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special gaming state (big hit state), and if it is off, it indicates a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (probability change state of special symbol, normal). Indicates that the symbol is in either the time-saving state or the normal state). This jackpot middle flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off when an ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to off when the special game state (big hit state) ends. Corresponding effects are set according to the state of the jackpot middle flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6 (a)) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7 (a)). Refer to) to determine whether to display.

In the permissible time counter 223i, the ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 606 or the induction flow path 607 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 607a goes to either entry port (general winning opening 601 or general winning opening 602). It is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters (ball throwing time). By counting the ball brushing period, when a ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is more accurately determined whether or not the entry is a normal operation. be able to. The permissible time counter 233i is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Further, each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

As described above, with the storage valve 607a closed, a ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or with the storage valve 607a open, the ball enters the general winning opening 601. When the ball enters, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the induction flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. May be done. Similarly, if a ball flows into the induction flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. It may be a ball. In order to treat these as normal ball entry (not to display the warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, the allowable time counter 233i is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed). It is configured as follows.

The winning number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a big hit. The value of the winning count counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is 1 each time a winning information command corresponding to a ball entering the general winning slot (high value winning slot) 602 is received at the jackpot. They are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See Fig. 6 (a)). The winning number counter 223j is referred to in order to accurately update the number of winnings displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the variable image when the power of the "○" symbol is turned on at the lower right position facing the screen and the variable image when the power is turned on of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, the player started the game while the main image at the time of turning on the power was displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 or the second entry port 640 was detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 as displayed in. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. It has at least 223i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be opened. It is a production, and the round production is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as values, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 23).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, in the example of FIG. 23). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 48) (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 50B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50 (b) see S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 24) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 50 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 24) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 50 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 39. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through due to the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is executed. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. The jackpot game is included in the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process is shifted to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A or a big hit B.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. If it is a big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set (S217) based on the jackpot type, and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening (first opening opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). In the 12th round, it is shown that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the jackpot type. When the processing of S218 is completed, the notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out of order (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0). If it is determined (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S221), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol change start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302), and if it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the value for high probability time are used. Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. It may be a different random value. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values to be big hits, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are big hits may be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "200" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit). It is determined what kind of jackpot is among A and jackpot B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

The fluctuation patterns specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement normal reach" as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. Various types of "outside super reach" and various types of "outside special reach" are stipulated. In addition, various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and various "special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot B. It is stipulated, and various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 34). Will be sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. , It is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process of the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set. , RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The only difference between the processes S407 to S412 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball opening 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when each process of S407 to S412 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S413), and this process is terminated.

Next, the look-ahead process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

In this look-ahead process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 (S501), and any of the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. If there is no new prize (S501: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the probabilistic state of the special symbol. If the determination is made (S502) and the special symbol is in a probabilistic state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process is shifted to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for the low probability time (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Move to. In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the determination results of the jackpot, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, if it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the current time is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is inside (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. The jackpot game is included in the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state). That is, if it is easy to hit a normal symbol, it becomes easy for a ball hit to the right to enter the second special winning opening 640, so that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is reached. It becomes difficult for the ball to reach. Therefore, during the special game state (during the big hit state), the hit probability of the normal symbol is prevented from increasing, and the ball is easily reached to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. There is.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the second random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for the probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S614: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is currently underway. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, when the ball hits the normal symbol, as in the low probability state of the normal symbol, The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is used in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S911) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process is shifted to S914.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S914, a command (status command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, the number of times of the normal symbol time reduction, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the time reduction counter 203r and the state of the probability change flag 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the recognition of the gaming state can be matched between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed even though the special symbol is in the low probability state, or conversely, the player is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) from being displayed when the player strikes right-handed. That is, it is possible to match the gaming state with the effect to be executed.

When the processing of S914 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S915). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first Jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The process is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened according to the opening scenario set by the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state. And set the closure. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, the first symbol display device 37 The executed variation display is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27). Display (light up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 30), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 30). Lit display).

Next, based on the stored prize detection information, the prize information command setting process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the prize information is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set by the winning information command setting process (S1008), the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 607a. It is also determined whether or not the player is playing an irregular game (left-handed during the jackpot state, left-handed in the probable change state of the special symbol, etc.).

When the processing of S1008 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102).

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

When the processing of S1102 is completed, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and this processing is completed. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the balls that have entered the storage device 600 can flow down the induction flow path 607, so that the general entry port with a large number of prize balls to be paid out (15). It becomes possible to put a ball into 602 (see FIG. 9 (b)).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600, a first variable winning device 65, and a second variable winning device 650 in a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, during the special game state, in order to win the prize ball, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is launched. A part of the ball enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special gaming state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific prize opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, the general prize provided in the storage device 600 is provided. It is possible to have the player acquire a prize ball based on the entry into the mouth (high value prize opening) 602. Therefore, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the start to the end of the big hit can be increased, the player can be made to play the game more looking forward to becoming a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probabilistic state of a special symbol or a time-saving state of a normal symbol is given after the end of the jackpot. As described above, in these states, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, so that the player tries to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by hitting right. (Trying to receive a lottery for special symbol 2). This allows the ball to flow into the storage device 600 in many cases before the next jackpot begins. Then, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state, so that the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, when the next big hit is made and the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. That is, the player can acquire a large amount (15) of prize balls immediately after the big hit is started. Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot is won but the ball possession is exhausted, it is possible to secure the possession ball for the jackpot game without newly requesting the rental of the ball.

In the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the big hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. The jackpot game is included in the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1104 that the special symbol is being hit (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation for setting the operation of the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, etc. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the 12th round of the jackpot is newly started (S1201), and it is not the 12th round (that is, the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds). If it is determined (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process is shifted to S1206.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). As a result, in the case of the jackpot A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16A is executed, and in the case of the jackpot B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16B is controlled to be executed. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, the induction flow path 652 is set to be closed 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a read by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205), and the processing is shifted to S1206.

In the process of S1206 executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 is completed, a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1206), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such troubles can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611? Discrimination (S1107). When it is determined that the operation timing is in the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the end of the final round of the big hit, the 15th round, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the inside of the is elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined by the process of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1109), and this process is terminated.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1301 is completed, the storage valve 607a, which was set to the open state at the start of the jackpot, is then set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. As a result, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), even if the ball flows into the storage device 600, it is blocked by the storage valve 607a and becomes a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. You will not be able to let the ball flow down. That is, since the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls, the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), by always aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls to be thrown only by paying out the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is fundamental. It is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a big hit by drawing a lottery of a special symbol in a state other than the special game state (big hit state).

As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one ball enters the storage device 600 out of approximately three balls hit to the right. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be performed, and the number of balls cannot be increased by paying out based on the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play the game with the aim of winning a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a part of the ball hit to the right enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. In the time saving state of (that is, in the state where the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 provided in the path on the right side of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further improved by hitting right. Can be made to. Therefore, even though the special symbol is in a probable state and the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, and the player is in an advantageous state, the number of balls held is steadily decreasing, which is an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming unable to feel it. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls held in the probable change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The number of prize balls for entering the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be reduced (for example, one prize ball may be used). As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress that the number of payouts becomes too large and the number of balls held increases too much in the probable change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640), the merit of right-handed hitting can be further reduced.

When the processing of S1302 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1303), and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, the ball goes to the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. Since it means that the ball has entered, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). As a result, after the end of the big hit, it shifts to the probable change state of the special symbol. After the processing of S1304, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to off (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probability change state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off in the processing of S1303 (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. In order to set the time saving period of 100 ordinary symbols after the end of the big hit, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203r (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and this process is terminated. The state command set in the process of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By receiving the state command by the voice lamp control device 113, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on at the end of the jackpot game, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. That is, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is turned on can be matched regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the probability variation entry port 654. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the ball can be entered into the probability change ball opening 654 during the special game state (big hit state), the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the big hit, so that during the special game state (big hit state). It is possible to be interested in whether or not the ball enters the probabilistic entry port 654 (during the state).

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the ball is entered (winning) in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, or the probability change. A winning process for monitoring the entry (winning) of a ball into the entry port 654 is executed (S1111). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1111).

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the round game is set for a set period (round valid period) (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not the period is from the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball is within the valid period of the round (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1401: Yes). S1402). In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). , The process shifts to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined that no ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 is skipped and the processing is performed to S1404. And migrate.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the winning opening set to the open state of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process shifts to S1408. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it is determined that the ball brushing time for discharging the ball remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in progress. can.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1404 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time which is the period until each round of the jackpot ends (30 in the present embodiment). Seconds) have elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the processing of S1405 (S1405: Yes), the processing is shifted to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process is shifted to S1408.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408), and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the probability change entry port 654 (whether or not the ball has passed a probability change switch (not shown)) (S1410). ). When it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203i to update (S1411), and the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). The process shifts to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the probability change switch (S1410: No), each process of S1411, and S1412 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1413.

In the process of S1413 executed after the process of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413), and if it is determined not to be 0 (S1413: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the induction flow path 652 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid 611 to off (S1414), and the probability change is effective. The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and this process ends. By setting the probability change effective flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow path switching valve 650d is switched and the induction flow path 652 is closed, the sphere remaining in the induction flow path 652 is the probability change switch. When passing through, the probability variation setting flag 203h can be controlled to be set on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 in the process of S1408 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the probability change valid flag 203o is not on (that is, it is off) (S1416: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probabilistic valid flag 203o is on (S1416: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2s in this embodiment) (S1418), and if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation is valid. The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). As a result, even if the passage of the probability change switch is detected, the value of the probability change setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. As described above, when the passage of the probability change switch is detected after the value of the probability change effective timer 203p becomes the upper limit value, it is highly possible that the detection is due to some kind of fraudulent activity. Therefore, by turning off the probability change valid flag 203o, the update of the probability change setting flag 203h is prohibited, and fraudulent acts are suppressed.

When the process of S1419 is completed, the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is reset to 0 (S1420), which is the initial value, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1418 that the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value (less than the upper limit value) (S1418: No), the processing is shifted to the above-mentioned S1410.

As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch, so that the probability change state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the sphere brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time during which the passage of the probability change switch is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the probability change switch and being given a probability change state of a special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1111) is executed, an abnormality process for detecting an abnormality generated during the special gaming state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1501), and if it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1501: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. Determined (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball ejection number counter 203s is updated by 1 (S1503), and the process shifts to S1504. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process shifts to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball brushing period is in progress, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that measures the ball brushing period. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, whether 3 seconds have passed since the closure of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a was set). If it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1505 that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of balls discharged (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharged counters 203q) is determined. , It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

If it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of ejected balls and the number of winnings match (S1507: Yes), the process is shifted to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls ejected and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process shifts to S1509. The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an error signal output is set for the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the ball through the probability change switch.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to the initial value 0 (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1511), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. As described above, the winning information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the passing status of the ball to various winning openings (entry openings).

In this prize information command setting process, first, the prize detection information saved in the switch read process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether or not new winning detection information exists (whether there is a new winning ball for any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603), it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1602 that new prize detection information exists (S1602: Yes), the winning slot (winning slot) that detects the winning ball (winning) according to the new winning detection information. A winning information command including the information of (S1603) is set. The winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each winning opening, an out opening, or the like is associated with each bit of the 2 bytes. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (entry opening) that detects the entry (winning) of the ball is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning opening (entry opening) in which the ball has not entered is set to 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the process of S1603 is completed, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and the present process is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a problem in the intellectual storage device 600, whether or not the player is playing an irregular game, and the like, in response to the winning information command. Then, when a defect or the like has occurred, a display error command according to the type of the defect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display error command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 notifies the error.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1816 (see FIG. 42) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1816. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1816 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1702: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1816 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the data shifts to S1708.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1816. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is executed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1816 is executed, the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S1711) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1708 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1708 via the processing of S1704 to S1706 is started. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Next, the probability change state flag 223f and the probability change state counter 223g are updated (S1711) according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110, interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the process proceeds to the main process. Transition. By updating the probability change state flag 223f and the probability change state counter 223g based on the state command, it is possible to match the game state recognized by the main control device 110 with the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that when the processing of S1708 is reached via the processing of S1704 to S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1801 this time was executed (S1801), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1802 to S1810, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1811 and the variable display setting process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1809, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal display effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1811). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, the variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off process is executed (S1816). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1817), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to the process of S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1814: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control unit 110 (S1904). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times of the variation display in the special symbol N1), or the special symbol 2 hold ball of the main control device 110. The value of the number counter 203e (the number of holdings N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the process of S1908, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1908 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning prize is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start prize or drawing a special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S1908 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1909). Then, when the state command is received (S1909: Yes), the probability change state flag 203f and the time saving state counter 203g are updated according to the game state notified by the state command (S1910), and this processing is terminated. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1911). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball was a normal ball based on the winning information command, and if there is a possibility of a defect or fraud, an error is notified. The error notification process for this is executed (S1912), and this process is terminated.

on the other hand. In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1913), and if the opening command has been received (S1913). S1913: Yes), the jackpot medium flag 223h is set to ON, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, the display opening command is set (S1915), and this process is terminated. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot.

In the process of S1913, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1916). When it is determined that the ending command has been received by the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second corresponds to the value of the allowable time counter 223i. Is set (S1917), the display ending command is set (S1918), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1916, if the ending command is not received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1919). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, the details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of a defect or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this error notification process (S1912).

In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is on (S1931), and if it is on (S1931: Yes), among the winning information notified by the received winning information command. It is determined whether or not the winning information for the first ball opening 64 is included in (S1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information for the first entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player makes a left-handed strike despite the big hit, and as a result, the first entrance 64 It means that the ball has entered the ball. That is, the player is performing a game method (striking method) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a in spite of the special gaming state (big hit state). It means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order for the player to acquire the prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state), a display error command corresponding to the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933) and processed. To S1934.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. By receiving this display rear image change command, the display control device 114 displays a left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) on the third symbol display device 81. The left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) can be used to encourage a player who is left-handed in a special gaming state (big hit state) to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money and to obtain the prize ball more reliably.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1932, if it is determined that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the entry to the first entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is performed. To S1934.

In the processing of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934), and if the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot. If there is, a hit notification process for notifying is executed (S1935), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1934: No), the ball bonito period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is set. Since it means that the process has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, when a ball that has flowed (advanced) into the induction flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the ball bleeding period, a problem occurs. It is prevented that it is judged.

On the other hand, in the process of S1931, when it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 223h is not on (off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the permissible time counter 233i is 0 (S1936). If it is determined to be 0 (S1936: Yes), it is notified when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during normal time (either the probability variation state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol, or the normal state). The normal time notification process for performing the above is executed (S1937), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is thrown after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the jackpot. Since it means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the process of S1937 is skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, when a ball that has flowed (advanced) into the induction flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 during the ball bleeding period, a problem occurs. It is prevented that it is judged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit-time notification process (S1935) for notifying when a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this hit-time notification process (S1935).

In the hit notification process (S1935), first, the winning information command determined to have been received in the processing of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) is used to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the jackpot where the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the induction flow path 606. That is, it is possible that the storage valve 607a cannot be opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a or the like, and the ball is continuously stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and as a result, the ball is guided to the induction flow path 606. There is sex. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

The ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 606 may also enter the out port 603a arranged on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, but the ball may enter the out port 603a. The corresponding winning information is not a target for determining whether or not a defect has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because, of the balls that have flowed into the induction flow path 606, the proportion of the balls that flow down to the out port 603a is small, and most of them enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and are a big hit. Since a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred by monitoring the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Further, by discriminating only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out opening 603a. , The processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

If it is determined in the processing of S1941 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command is general. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is performed. If the information is included (S1943: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning count counter 223j (S1944). Then, in order to update the image in the jackpot according to the value of the winning number counter 233j after the update, a display rear image change command is set (S1945).

The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. By receiving this display rear image change command, the display control device 114 updates the display content of the winning number display area MA in the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, it is updated after the image in which the number of balls entered (the number of EXTRA BONUS) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 shown in FIG. 6B is additionally displayed for a certain period of time is displayed. The image shown in FIG. 6A corresponding to the number of subsequent ball entries is displayed. By displaying the number of winnings for the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot to the winning number display area MA, the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot can be achieved. Separately, the player can be made to recognize the number of times the prize ball has been won. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the number of times the ball will be entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included. However, even when the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out port 603a, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a defect has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, for notifying when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during the normal time (either the probable change state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol, or the normal state). The normal time notification process will be described. In this normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined that it is not on (S1951), the present is not the probability change state of the special symbol (S1951). Since it means that it is in a low probability state of a special symbol), it is nextly determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it is determined that the present is neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol (normal state). means.

In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player is hitting right and whether or not there is a problem in the operation of the storage valve 607a, first, the received prize information command is added to the general prize opening (high value). (Winning opening) It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Means that it is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the reservoir valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or the player illegally causes the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

The balls flowing into the induction flow path 607 with the storage valve 607a left open due to a malfunction are the out ports 603b arranged on the left and right of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. , 603c may also be entered, but the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out ports 603b and 603c is not a target for determining whether or not a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because a small proportion of the balls that have flowed into the induction flow path 607 flow down to the out ports 603b and 603c, and most of them enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. This is because if the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is monitored, it can be sufficiently determined whether or not a problem has occurred. Further, by discriminating only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out openings 603b and 603c. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in the processing of S1953, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning opening is performed. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the mouth (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955), and if it is determined that the winning information is not included, this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955: Yes), the normal time (probability change state of the special symbol, It means that the player is hitting right in spite of either the time saving state of the normal symbol or the normal state). That is, it means that the player is playing the game by a game method in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and there is little chance of receiving a lottery for a special symbol. Therefore, in this case, the game is played by displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) that urges the player to play the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by left-handed. It is possible to prevent a person from losing money and receive a lottery for the special symbol 1.

When it is determined in the processing of S1951 that the probability change state flag 223f is on (S1951: Yes), or when it is determined in the processing of S1952 that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952: Yes). It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1957). If it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1957 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Nevertheless, it means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream side of the storage valve 607a. That is, it is possible that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or the player illegally enters the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 while the storage valve 607a is closed. expensive. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included. However, even when the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out ports 603b and 603c, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a defect has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variation display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1812). This variation display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2006 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the variation pattern is processed in S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2006). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2006: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, and therefore S2007 to S2013. Each process up to is skipped, and the process is transferred to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a stop type (S2008). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

When the processing of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S2010: No), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2010: No). No), the process shifts to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time saving state counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after subtraction is 0 (S2012), and if it is determined to be 0 (S2012), the time saving state of the normal symbol is changed to the normal state (low) of the normal symbol. Since it means that the state has been switched to the stochastic state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process is shifted to S2014.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, so that the back surface corresponding to the time saving state of the normal symbol No need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped and the process is transferred to S2014.

The rear image displayed in the time saving state is specifically a rear image in which a right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big hit is completed, the right-handed navigation is displayed regardless of the big hit type. Then, when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends, it is switched to the rear image for the normal state in which the right-handed navigation is not displayed. If the special symbol becomes a probable change state after the end of the big hit, the probable change state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit, so there is no change from the back type where the right-handed navigation is displayed.

In the processing of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the permissible time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2014), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the permissible time counter 223i is set to 1. Subtract and update (S2015), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and the present process is terminated. By the processing of S2014 and S2015, the value of the permissible time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

In the present embodiment, the back type set for the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol is common, but different back types may be displayed. This makes it possible to realize a wide variety of productions. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the remaining time saving period according to the value of the time saving state counter 203g. As a result, the player can easily recognize the remaining time saving period.

In the present embodiment, the permissible time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be updated in a process (sound editing / output process, liquid crystal display effect execution management process, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 42). As a result, the allowable time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 48, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2201.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2202, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2202, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2101 in FIG. 48) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2201. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S2202, the process of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S2201 to S2205 may be executed without performing the process of S2201 and S2202. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 48. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2103, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2104). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2104, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 59 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process (FIG. 50) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)). 50 (b) S2408) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2105, the interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing this V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S2402) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55.

In the display setting process (S2403), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), which are determined in the task process (S2404), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the missed, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed to shift to the process of S2404.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2503).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505), the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2601).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2601 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2603, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2606), the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2605, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2602e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2604, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2701), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S2702).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2703), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2703, and the identification thereof is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2701, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S2702.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2506, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S2508: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2803). S2804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2805), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2802. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the reading speed is slow, so that the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel anxious and uncomfortable as to whether or not the movement had stopped.

Further, the display ending command instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 15 rounds). If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , The transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and the round effect is all (15 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81. ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2508, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2510: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2510, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2512: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3003). S3004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3006), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2512, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S3101). .. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the rear image corresponding to other rear image types is turned on. The determination flag is set to off (S3102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3102 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2514, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2516), and there is an error command. If (S2516: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3202). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S2902. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 51. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2516 (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2518), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), The processing of S2502 to S2518 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2518 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 52 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 52 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2601. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2403), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3302), S3303 to S3304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 56. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3305.

In S3305, the pointer update process is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3503), and if it is a demo display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer is used. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), this process is completed, and the display is performed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3506). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 56 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is on (S3309: Yes), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315. , The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3316, if the demo display flag is on (S3316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the details of the transfer setting process (S2405) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 59 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3702). In the process of S3702, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S3702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3703. Further, as a result of the processing of S3701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3703.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Further, in the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

In the process of S3806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3807. Further, as a result of the processing of S3805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3807.

In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3810), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image indicated by the rear image discrimination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). The start address is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The discrimination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S3813, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3813 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2404) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3901). That is, in the processing of S3901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S3902 (S3903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) as winning openings opened in the special gaming state (big hit state). ) Is provided so that either winning opening is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Both of these two types of winning openings are configured as winning openings in which a large amount (15 pieces) of winning balls are paid out when the balls enter. Further, the two types of winning openings (the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a) are both provided in the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. As a result, the ball can be entered even if any of the winning openings is opened by simply launching the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (striking to the right) during the special gaming state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls paid out in the special game state (big hit state) can be made less likely to be affected by the skill of the player, so that even a beginner can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the routes (flow paths) provided on the right side of the game board 13, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) are used. A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning openings is arranged on the upstream side. The storage device 600 is configured so that when a player makes a right-handed hit, a part of the launched ball can flow into the inside of the storage device 600, and the inflowing ball is moved to a different winning opening. A plurality of flow paths are provided for flowing down. Specifically, the number of prize balls is compared with the guide flow path 606 for flowing the balls down to the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of prize balls (three prize balls). A guide flow path 607 for allowing the ball to flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of prize balls (15 prize balls), is provided. Since the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be different depending on the type of the guiding flow path to flow down, the flow path in which the ball flows down to the player when the ball flows into the storage device 600. The type can be observed with interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, a storage capable of closing the guide flow path 607 for flowing the balls down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls (15 prize balls). A valve 607a is provided in the induction flow path 607. The storage valve 607a is set to the open state during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state), and is set to the closed state during the other gaming states. Further, the game balls that have flowed into the storage device 600 are basically arranged so that the game balls flow into the guide flow path 607 more easily than the guide flow path 606 (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9). b) See). Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, the prize ball is provided downstream of the induction flow path 607. A prize ball can be obtained by inserting a ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. A storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the player simply hits right to make the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the second specific winning opening 650a. This is because the ball can be inserted into any of the storage devices 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the prize is won, and if the lottery result is a winning lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened and the specific winning opening is reached. Some give a large amount of prize balls based on the entry of balls (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177). In this conventional gaming machine, a plurality of winning openings are provided in addition to the specific winning openings, and by adjoining the specific winning openings and other winning openings, a specific winning opening can be created. Some of the balls that are aimed and launched are configured so that they can enter both a specific winning opening and other winning openings. Here, since it is common to control to close a specific winning opening with a specific number of balls entering a specific winning opening as an opportunity, the number of winning balls for a specific winning opening. The more the ball enters another winning opening before the number reaches a specific number, the more prize balls the player can obtain. Therefore, by adjoining a specific winning opening and another winning opening, the number of prize balls in a hit can be increased, so that the player's expectation for a hit can be further improved.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there are cases where an irregular gaming method is used in which a winning ball is obtained by launching a ball at another winning opening adjacent to a specific winning opening even in a state other than a hit. rice field.

On the other hand, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the induction flow path 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, one ball can be stored in the space formed by the upper part of the storage valve 607a and the upstream part of the induction flow path 607. Therefore, the storage device 600 is the first to be stored after the storage valve 607a is closed. The ball that has flowed into the inside of the storage valve 607a is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the ball flows into the storage device 600 with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, the ball collides with the stored ball and the flow direction changes, and as a result, the ball enters the induction flow path 602. (See Fig. 9 (b)). Therefore, even if the ball is put into the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few prize balls. Therefore, the merit of putting the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls to be played only by paying out the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is fundamentally not established, and the special game method is not established. In a state other than the game state (big hit state), it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured so that one ball enters into approximately three balls hit to the right. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. In other words, even if a right-handed hit is executed in a game state other than the special game state (big hit state), it is difficult for the special symbol to be drawn, and the payout is based on the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is also not possible to increase the number of balls. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play the game with the aim of winning a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction flow path 607 enters the general winning opening 602. It is configured to do, but is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each induction flow path, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. May be good. As a result, even if the guide flow path 606 is flown down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize balls into the winning openings having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestedly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning openings. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the induction flow path 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the induction flow path 607. For example, the induction flow path is configured by using an electromagnet or the like. It may be configured to store the sphere in the middle of 607. That is, an electric magnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and the electric magnet is magnetized by energizing the electric magnet in a state other than the special gaming state (during the big hit state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the induction flow path 607 can be attracted to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With such a configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. Further, in this case, the width of the induction flow path 607 is widened (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the storage valve 607a are deleted), and the induction flow path 605 of the induction flow path 607 is used. The electromagnet may be embedded only in the portion directly below, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be provided directly below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Further, when there is a sphere attracted by the electromagnet and stopped flowing, the stopped sphere and another sphere come into contact with the electromagnet portion to change the flow direction, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. The portion may be flowed down and may be configured to flow down in a direction different from that of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Then, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be arranged below the portion of the induction flow path 607 in which the electromagnet is not embedded. As a result, the branch member 604 can be abolished, so that the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be configured to be stored side by side.

In the present embodiment, the ball is configured to be able to be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the induction flow path 607 so that the ball cannot flow into the induction flow path 607 when the storage valve 607a is closed. By making the configuration in which the balls are not stored, even if the ball is hit to the right in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the balls can be discharged without remaining inside the storage device 600.

In particular, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 is likely to be opened in the high probability state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit or the time saving state of the normal symbol. Further, in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the start winning prize to the second entry slot 640), the game is compared with the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the start winning prize to the first entry slot 64). It is easy to become a jackpot B that is advantageous to the person. Therefore, when the jackpot is completed, the player launches the ball in an attempt to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. Therefore, for example, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends, the ball is stored in the storage device 600 with high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been damaged. On the other hand, by providing the storage valve 607a at the upper end of the induction flow path 607 so that the storage device 600 does not store the ball, the player can feel that the ball has been used up without waste. .. Therefore, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player.

In the present embodiment, the general winning openings (small value winning openings) 601 and 602 and the out openings 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the second ball-entry opening 640 may be arranged at a position where the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, of the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13, the second entry port 640 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is moved to the inside of the storage device 600. You may. Further, in this case, as an opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is configured to be opened when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 1000 times without becoming a big hit after the big hit is completed. You may.

As a result, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 1000 times after the big hit is completed, the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 by right-handing, so that the special symbol 2 can be entered. Lottery can be executed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640 is five, but in the case of this modification, three are paid out. It should be configured so as to be. That is, since the number of balls that can be entered into the storage device 600 when hitting right is 1 in 3 balls, by hitting right after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball can be hit. It is possible to enter the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of 1 ball out of 3 balls. That is, it is possible to receive a lottery for the special symbol 2 while maintaining the holding ball. With this configuration, even if the lottery of special symbols is repeated without becoming a big hit (even if a so-called big hit occurs), the game is expected to open the storage valve 607a. Can be done. Therefore, even if the period during which the jackpot is not a big hit becomes long, the motivation of the player for the game can be maintained. By increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640 (for example, 10), after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball can be hit just by hitting right. It may be configured to increase. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the merit when the special symbol lottery is missed 1000 times or more in a row. Therefore, after the big hit is over, we hope that the lottery of special symbols will be a big hit again, and if we continue to lose the lottery of special symbols, we will continue to lose the lottery of special symbols 1000 times or more in a row. I can make you wish. Furthermore, after the storage valve 607a is opened, the number of balls will increase just by hitting the ball to the right. It can be hoped that the state of continuous increase will continue for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of lottery of the special symbol, it is possible to make the player wish to be a big hit of the special symbol or to continue to be out of the lottery of the special symbol. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the storage device 600 is configured to provide only one storage valve 604a, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the induction flow path 606 may be configured to branch in two directions, and one flow path may be provided with a storage valve that is open only during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). That is, the same configuration as the guide flow path 606, 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 606. A general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, and the flow path without the storage valve has a small number of prize balls (for example). 3, 3) General prize openings may be provided. With this configuration, a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, so that a special gaming state (big hit state) is started and each storage valve is opened to store the balls. The balls that have been played can be flowed all at once to a general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15). Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. Even in this configuration, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased as in the case where a plurality of storage valves are provided.

In the present embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640, and the first variable winning device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. 65 is provided, and the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and any arrangement may be used. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged on the upstream side of the second ball opening 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball launched to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650 is the second entry opening first. It may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a due to the ball entering the 640, but the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be used. By arranging it on the upstream side, the prize ball can be obtained more smoothly during the special game state (during the big hit state).

Further, by arranging the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side and arranging them on the upstream side of the storage device 600, the storage device is placed during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the ball at about 600 and making it difficult for the ball to reach the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, each round during the special game state (during the big hit state) can proceed more smoothly.

In the present embodiment, the first entry slot 64 and the second specific entry slot 640 are provided as the entry openings that trigger the lottery of the special symbol, but either one may be abolished. For example, the second ball entry port 640 may be abolished and an electric accessory 640 may be provided for the first ball entry port 64. As a result, there is less merit in launching the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), so that the anomaly in which the ball is launched aiming at the storage device 600. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) a typical game method.

In the present embodiment, when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 600 in a special game state (big hit state), the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has many prize balls to be paid out. In addition to this, the number of balls that have entered the general entry port 602 in one special game state (big hit state) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to do so. As a result, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to acquiring a prize ball by winning a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, how much extra prize ball is obtained. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the prize has been created. Therefore, since it is possible to make the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 think that more balls are to be entered, it is possible to have a target for the number of balls to be entered. The number of winnings in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily have to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be provided separately. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the jackpot state can be executed in a wider display area.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the ball entering (winning) the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls paid out based on the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are all the same number (15). , Not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is transferred to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. May be configured to be less than the number of prize balls paid out based on winning (winning) (for example, 10). As a result, even if the ball flows into the storage device 600 as a result of the direction of travel of the ball being biased in the special gaming state (big hit state), the disadvantage to the hole can be reduced.

Further, contrary to the above, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 65a. It may be configured to be larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) into the winning opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out by entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is set to 10, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening). The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) to 602 may be 15. As a result, the profit that the player can enjoy by flowing the ball into the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's interest in the big hit game can be further improved. can.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. However, the trigger for opening and closing the storage valve 607a is Is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened only for a shorter period than the present embodiment, or it may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times in the jackpot. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to open based on the interval period set between the jackpot rounds and close the storage valve 607a based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period in which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot from becoming too large. That is, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in one big hit to vary, so that it is possible to easily predict the sales of the pachinko machine 10. Further, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, the storage valve 607a is provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the interval period (that is, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are closed). A part of the sphere that has reached the downstream of the path (flow path) can flow into the storage device 600. That is, even during the interval period, the prize ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general prize opening 602. Therefore, the ball can be less likely to be wasted even during the interval period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the ending effect of the jackpot, but it may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. As a result, a part of the spheres remaining on the board surface at the start of the ending effect can flow into the storage device 600. That is, the prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602 during the ending production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending effect. Further, the storage valve 607a is left in the open state until a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect is completed, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. It may be configured to switch to a state. As a result, a part of the spheres remaining on the board surface at the end of the ending effect can flow into the storage device 600. That is, the prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted after the ending effect is completed.

In addition, the storage valve 607a is opened when a game state different from the special game state (big hit state) is set, and the storage valve 607a is changed from the set game state to another game state. May be closed. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during the period in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. As a result, in the probable change state of the special symbol, while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to be a big hit B by hitting right, the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Can be entered. Therefore, the probabilistic state of the special symbol can be made more advantageous to the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time saving state of the normal symbol is a state in which the player has less merit than the probabilistic state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a should be configured to be opened during the time saving state of the normal symbol. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time is shortened for a normal symbol.

In addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, the storage valve 607a of the storage valve 607a can be switched at any timing of the player. It may be configured so that the state can be switched. As a result, each player can be made to play the game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his / her taste.

In the present embodiment, the out opening is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out opening, a winning opening for paying out the prize balls may be provided. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters each winning opening may be different. More specifically, for example, 6 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603c. May be provided with 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to more interestingly observe the case where the ball flows down the guide flow path 606 and the guide flow path 607 to which winning opening the ball enters. Further, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning openings for any ball to enter are more random. .. As a result, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be observed more interestingly until the ball enters one of the winning openings. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set an entrance where the ball can easily enter by the clerk in the hall. Therefore, the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid for the storage device 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 607a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the opening command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the ending command is received. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) in the special gaming state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state). It was configured to do, but it is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. Further, it may be configured to switch based on the result of a lottery held regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. May be good. Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the lottery is won and the ball can flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set to the open state (released state), the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Since it is possible to enter the ball, it is possible to have the player play the game in the expectation that more lottery will be won. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In the present embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the jackpot (big hit B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at the timing when it is easy to enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot, and the probability variation entry ball. There is a big hit (big hit A) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the mouth 654. It may be configured to suggest whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each round of the jackpot 1 to 11 rounds, the ally of justice and the monster may fight each other. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, it may be notified that it is a jackpot B, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that it is a jackpot A. That is, if the ally of justice wins, the player can be made to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the probable state of the special symbol. This makes it possible for the player to observe the result of the production performed at the jackpot more interestingly.

In addition, there is a high possibility that the ally of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot A) and the content of the production in which the ally of justice is highly expected to win (easily selected in the case of jackpot B) by providing variations in the content of the production. (Easy to be selected) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning is high, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed. It may be configured to increase the possibility of defeat if the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result can be predicted by the flow of the production leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the content of the production performed by the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight, and it can be suggested that the jackpot B is advantageous and the jackpot A is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B. Any aspect may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 is directed to search for the treasure and the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that it is a jackpot B, or the boy character 710 may be configured to search for the treasure. It may be configured to display the effect of eating big eaters and to notify that it is a big hit B when all the provided foods are eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, the condition that the image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image and the storage valve 607a is opened, the merit when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the demerit when the ball is hit right in the closed state. It may be configured to display an image (explanatory image) for explaining. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, when a right-handed hit is performed in a normal state (a low-probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) and it is detected that a ball has entered the storage device 600, a right-handed warning image is obtained. Although it was configured to display (see FIG. 5B), it may be configured not to display the right-handed warning image under predetermined conditions. For example, when the player is hitting right in a state where the ball is not stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, a right-handed warning image (FIG. 5B) until the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. (See) may be configured not to be displayed. By keeping the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, it becomes a big hit of the special symbol after that, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The balls stored in the can be immediately entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used for the big hit game. Therefore, even if the ball is exhausted even though the ball is a big hit, the big hit game can be performed without borrowing a new ball.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is arranged inside the storage device 600 in the special gaming state (big hit state). It was configured so that a prize ball could be obtained by inserting a ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the prize ball is paid out by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ball is sent to the storage device 600. It was configured so that the prize ball would be paid out by letting the ball enter. As a result, more prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is further improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (normal gaming state), the ball is closed by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a. Was configured to make it difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and to be able to store the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. Then, when a ball stored inside the storage device 600 exists in the normal gaming state, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact). It was configured as follows. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored balls occurs, the flow direction of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls. It was configured to change in the direction of (direction of the induction flow path 606). As a result, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal game state, it is anomalous to try to increase the number of balls held without going through the jackpot. It was configured so that the game method would not be fundamentally established.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, whether or not to store the ball in the storage device 700 is configured to be switched by the operation of the player. Further, when the ball is stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the ball can flow are provided, depending on the flow speed and approach angle of the ball flowing into the storage device 700, the adjustment condition of the nail, and the like. , It is configured so that the sphere can flow into either flow path.

Further, in the second embodiment, there are two flow paths, one is a winning opening that is easy to enter when the ball is not stored (the state where the storage valve 704a is open), and the other is a flow path that is easy to flow in when the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a. The two types of winning openings provided downstream of each are configured so that the number of prize balls to be paid out is different. That is, the two types of winning openings that can be won when the balls are stored in the storage valve 704a are the winning openings with a large number of winning balls to be paid out and the winning openings with a small number of winning balls to be paid out. It is configured as follows. Further, the winning opening where the ball can win in the state where the storage valve 704a is open is configured to be in the middle of the above two types of payout numbers. That is, it is possible to switch between a state in which balls can be entered in both a winning opening with a large number of winning balls and a winning opening with a small number of winning balls, and a state in which balls can be stably received by flowing the balls into the storage device 700. Can be done. Therefore, the playability when the ball is flowed into the storage device 700 can be switched according to the player's preference, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first ball entry port 64. 2 The variable winning device 650 is abolished, the storage device 700 is provided in place of the storage device 600, and the release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. The point is that the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the execution is performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entry port 64. The second variable winning device 650 provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 in the first embodiment has been abolished. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball can be made to enter the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a by hitting left.

Further, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. In this storage device 700, the number of nails around the entrance is smaller than that in the vicinity of the entrance of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment, and the ratio of balls flowing in when hitting right is the storage device of the first embodiment. It is configured to be less than 600 (eg, 1 in 10 balls). Details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a probable change state of a special symbol or a time saving state of a normal symbol (a period in which the player does not lose even if a right-handed stroke is performed). It is a figure. FIG. 63A shows the display content in a state where the release button 800 is not pressed (a state in which the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63B shows the release button 800 being pressed. The display content in the state (the state in which the storage valve 704a is open) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 in the first embodiment is set in the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds (FIG. 5 (FIG. 5). Instead of a) Ds2), the text "Press the button to open the gate!" Is displayed. By displaying this character, the player can press the release button 800 (button) to set the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 to the open state. It can be easily recognized. Since the display contents in the display area other than the small area Ds2 are the same as the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment, the detailed name description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the characters "Gate is open" are displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

Next, the details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide flow path 707 for flowing down a ball flowing in from the upper portion thereof, and three flow paths are provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 707. (The downstream of the induction flow path 707 branches in three directions). Specifically, the guide flow path 706 for flowing the inflowing sphere in the lower left direction of the front view, the guide flow path 704 for flowing down the inflow direction in the front view, and the guide flow path 704 for flowing down in the lower right direction of the front view. A guide flow path 708 for the purpose is provided. As shown in FIG. 64, since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided downstream of the guide flow path 705, the ball is to the right or to the left while flowing down the guide flow path 705. Even so, the flow direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow path 705 tends to flow into the guide flow path 704 provided on the central side downstream of the guide flow path 705.

Downstream of the induction flow path 706, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 6) is provided. Further, downstream of the induction flow path 704, there is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 with a smaller number of prize balls (for example, three) paid out as compared with the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is provided. Further, as entry openings other than the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out openings 703a to 703e in which the prize ball is not paid out even if the ball enters are It is provided. Then, the game ball flowing down the induction flow path 708 enters the out port (small value winning opening) 703d or the out port (small value winning opening) 703e, so that when the ball flows down the induction flow path 708. In addition, there is no merit for the player. A ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 706 but has not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. Will be done. Further, a ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 704 but has not entered the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703b or the out opening 703c. Will be done. These out ports 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the ball from accumulating under the storage device 700 even if the ball moves irregularly due to vibration or the like, and ensure that the ball is discharged. Can be done.

The induction flow path 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a. Similar to the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a closes the induction flow path 704 to store one ball flowing into the storage device 700 after the closure in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. be able to. Unlike the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured so that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the operation of the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) by the player. Has been done. In the state where the spheres are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the flow direction is changed by the impact caused by the spheres flowing into the storage device 700 interfering with (contacting) the stored spheres. This change (switching) in the flow direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the trajectory (flowing direction) of a ball when the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 flows down in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65 (a), a case where a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels the left side of the front view due to the impact of the interference will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and repels to the left in the front view. The sphere flows into the induction channel 706 and flows down the induction channel 706. Here, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 706, a relatively large amount of balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. (For example, 6 prize balls) will be paid out. Therefore, if the ball repels to the right, it is advantageous for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), a case where the sphere that interferes (contacts) with the stored sphere repels to the right side of the front view due to the impact of the interference will be described. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the ball that has flowed into (entered) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and repels to the right in the front view. The sphere flows into the induction channel 708 and flows down the induction channel 708. Here, since the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the ball enters either of the out openings. That is, when the ball repels to the right side of the front view, the prize ball is not paid out, so that there is no merit for the player.

As described above, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the balls flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 repel. Therefore, when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 700, it is expected that the ball will repel to the left in the front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. You can play games. That is, since the flow direction (repulsion direction) of the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 can be confirmed more interestingly, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, the direction in which the ball is likely to repel changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of entry into the storage device 700, and the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, so that the ball easily repels the guide flow path 706 for the player. It is possible to devise a way of hitting so that it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing the game, the pachinko machine 10 in which the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is selected in consideration of the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b. Can be done. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the pleasure of searching for the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to be advantageous to oneself.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is set to the open state will be described. When the sphere flows into the storage device 700, the sphere first flows down the induction flow path 705. Since the nails 709a and the nails 709b are provided on the left and right downstream of the guide flow path 705 (see FIG. 66), the ball is to the right or to the left while flowing down the guide flow path 705. Even so, the flow direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the induction flow path 705 flows into the induction flow path 704 provided on the central side downstream of the induction flow path 705.

When the storage valve 704a is open, the sphere can flow down the induction flow path 704. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed into the induction flow path 704 flows down the induction flow path 704 downstream, and the general winning opening (middle). Value winning opening) Enter 701. As a result, a smaller number (for example, 3) of prize balls than the prize balls for entering the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 702 is paid out.

In this way, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, the flow direction does not change due to repulsion and does not flow into the induction flow path 706 or the induction flow path 708. That is, instead of being unable to enter the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, which has a large number of winning balls, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It will not be impossible to get a prize ball. Therefore, when the ball is put into the storage device 700, the prize ball can be stably obtained, so that the player can feel a sense of security.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player can operate the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by leaving the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e. It can be in a state (a state with high gambling ability in which a large number of prize balls may be obtained, but a prize ball may not be obtained). Further, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stable). It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, and each player selects the playability that suits his / her taste. You can play a game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the RAM 203 in that the provisions of the random number table 202b per first of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment. The part has been changed, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. It differs in that. Since other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205. The release button 800 is arranged at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) where the player can arbitrarily press (operate). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (pressing detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that the pressing has been detected is output to the input / output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the solenoid 610 for the storage device so as to open the storage valve 704a based on this pressing detection signal. That is, the solenoid 610 for the storage device is set to ON.

Next, the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a). The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, as in the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

In the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each jackpot type. That is, unlike the first embodiment, the value of the same first hit type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit. The jackpot type is associated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (FIG. 68 (a). ) 202b1). The jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the end of the jackpot C, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given as an added value (the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot C continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

On the other hand, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot D is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 68 (a)). The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the end of the jackpot D, the probabilistic state of the special symbol of the special symbol is given as an added value (shifts to the probabilistic state of the special symbol). In addition, the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot D continues until the next jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined depending on the winning jackpot type. That is, a configuration more general than that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is adopted. Along with this, in the second embodiment, the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed.

Next, the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment has a probability variation setting flag 203h, a probability variation passage counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability change effective flag 203o, the probability change effective timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q have been deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in relation to determining whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit in the second specific winning device 650. That is, in the present embodiment, the game state to be set at the end of the big hit is determined in advance according to the big hit type, and whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol during the special game state (during the big hit state). Since no determination is made, it is not necessary to use each of the above configurations in this embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with the release flag 203s. The release flag 203s indicates whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (whether or not the state in which the ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is released). It is a flag indicating). The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

Next, returning to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 of the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment is abolished, and a storage state flag 223k and a flow time counter 223k are added. There is.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state. When this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed and the ball can be stored in the upper part thereof. On the other hand, when the storage state flag 223k is off, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state and the ball can flow down the induction flow path 704. Each time the storage state flag 223k is received from the main controller 110, the storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

In the flow time counter 223k, the ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 704, the induction flow path 706, or the induction flow path 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a is one of the entry ports (general winning opening 701, general winning opening 701). It is a counter for counting the time (ball ejection time) until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out mouth 703d, or the out mouth 703e). By counting the ball brushing period, the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) When a ball enters the winning opening) 703e, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the entry is a normal operation. The flow-down time counter 233k is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time a storage state command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Further, each time the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 42) is executed, the value is subtracted by 1.

In the present embodiment, with the storage valve 704a closed, a ball enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704a, or the storage valve 704a is opened. If the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e in the state, a warning image (Fig. 7 (Fig. 7) b) See) is configured to be displayed. However, if the ball flows into the induction flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball becomes a general winning opening (medium value) after the storage valve 704a switches to the closed state. Winning opening) There is a case where the ball enters 701. Similarly, if a ball flows into the induction flow path 706 or the guidance flow path 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball is generally used after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. There are cases where the ball enters the winning slot (high value winning slot) 702, the out slot (small value winning slot) 703d, and the out slot (small value winning slot) 703e. In order to treat these as normal incoming balls (the warning image is not displayed), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the flow time counter 233k is set for a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, the ball is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or When the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e, it is configured to determine that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 69) is changed from the first embodiment. In the following, only the various processes executed in this main process (see FIG. 69) will be described, and the detailed description of the other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 69, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main process. Similar to the first embodiment, in this main process, the main process of the game is executed.

In the main process (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) is replaced with the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Is different in that it is executed. It is also different in that after the second symbol display update process (S1007) is completed, the storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is executed. It is also different in that the error command process 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state (big hit state), various effects according to the jackpot are executed, and the first 1 This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

In each of the jackpot control processes 2 (S1021), S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, the jackpot control processes (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109. The same process as each process of is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, the process of S1103 (process for setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is abolished. In the second embodiment, since the storage valve 704a is set to the open state based on the player operating the release button 800, the state of the storage valve 704a regardless of whether or not it is in the special gaming state (big hit state). This is because is switched.

Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a Opening is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1122), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or when the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a has passed. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won after opening, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S1123 that the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. It is closed (S1124), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the 15 rounds of the special game state (big hit state) are completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), first, the ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1125 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probability variation jackpot) (S1126), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot D (that is, a jackpot C) (S1126: No), 100 is set in the value of the time saving medium counter 203r (S1127), and this processing is terminated. By setting 100 to the time reduction counter 203r, it is possible to set the time reduction period of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times after the end of the big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S1126, when it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot D (probability variation jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in order to give the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (probability variation jackpot). S1128), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1109, if it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), the present process is terminated. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment.

By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening is provided during the jackpot. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine (that is, a more general pachinko machine) in which the state after the end of the big hit is predetermined according to the type of big hit.

Next, the storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1022). As described above, this storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001), and if it is determined that the release flag 203s is on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is opened (storage device 700). Since the state in which the ball can be stored is released), it is next determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the press detection signal is detected) (S4002: Yes), in order to keep the storage valve 704a in the open state, This process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the press (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (that is, the press detection signal has not been detected) (S4002: No), the storage valve 704a is closed for the storage device. Set the solenoid 610 to off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is closed, the release flag 203s is set to off (S4004), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this process is terminated.

The storage state mand set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear side type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the character "When the button is pressed, the gate is opened!" Is displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800.

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state in which the ball can be stored in the storage device 700 is set). Then, it is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

If it is determined in the process of S4006 that the press (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (that is, the press detection signal has not been detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept in the closed state. In order to keep it, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the press detection signal is detected) (S4006: Yes), the solenoid 610 for the storage device is turned on in order to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be open, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the open state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear side type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the character "gate is open" is displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

By executing this storage control process, opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set according to the operation status of the release button 800. As a result, by storing the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 704a at any timing of the player, either the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d or 703e It is possible to switch between a state in which the crab ball enters and a state in which the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 flows down toward the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and detailed description of other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (1811) in the present embodiment. In this command determination process, in each of the processes S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same processes as the processes S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are performed. Each is executed.

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a defect such as a failure in the storage valve 704a. Then, a warning process for giving a warning when a problem has occurred is executed (S1921), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), then whether or not the storage state command has been received is determined. Determined (S1922). Then, when it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (release state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. If so, set the storage status flag 223k to off. When the storage status flag 223k is updated, the rear image (see FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)) corresponding to the updated storage status is also set to display the third symbol display device 81. Update the content.

When the processing of S1923 is completed, a counter value corresponding to one second is set for the flow time counter 223l (S1924), and this processing is terminated. By using the ball splashing time set for the flow-down time counter 223l, it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of a defect in the storage valve 704a. If it is determined in the process of S1922 that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process shifts to S1919.

As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the release state command and the closed state command from the main control device 110. A command for causing the display control device 114 can be set. As a result, the player can easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. As described above, this warning process (S1921) is a process for determining the presence or absence of a defect such as a failure in the storage valve 704a and giving a warning when a defect occurs.

In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101), if it is on (S4101: Yes), and then whether the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0. Whether or not it is determined (S4102). When it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state) and the ball-draining period has elapsed. Therefore, in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a, a storage time notification process for notifying a defect is executed (S4103), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 in the processing of S4102 (S4102: No), it means that the ball shaving period associated with setting the storage valve 704a to the closed state is currently in progress. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the above-mentioned storage notification process (S4103) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (S4201). If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down to the downstream of the storage valve 704a and enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, it means that the storage valve 704a is not normally closed even though the storage valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202). , End this process.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7 (b)) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the clerk in the hall can easily be made aware of the occurrence of the defect, so that the defect can be quickly resolved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4104: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) and the ball-draining period has elapsed. Therefore, in the open state (release state) of the storage valve 704a, a release notification process for notifying a defect is executed (S4105), and this process ends. The release notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the release notification process (S4105). In this release notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received prize information command includes the prize information corresponding to the ball entering the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process is shifted to S4303.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command is sent out. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302), and the entry to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is supported. If the winning information is not included (S4302: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S4302 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the processing is shifted to S4303. When the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. In the processing of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the winning ball of the ball is included (S4302: Yes), a display error command corresponding to the defect of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this processing is performed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the induction flow path 704, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or out The reason why the ball enters the mouth (small value winning mouth) 703d, 703e is that there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7 (b)) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a problem in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the clerk in the hall can easily be made aware of the occurrence of the defect, so that the defect can be quickly resolved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 700 capable of storing balls inside the pachinko machine 10. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 704, 706, 708) inside the storage device 700, and is configured to allow balls to flow down to different entry ports. Further, the induction flow path 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a capable of closing the flow path. When the induction flow path 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one ball can be stored (retained) in the upper part thereof.

Further, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the induction flow path 704 (compared to the induction flow path 706 and the induction flow path 708, to the induction flow path 704). Since it is configured so that the ball can easily flow in), the ball can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the induction flow path 704. Therefore, by inflowing the ball into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably receive the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the spheres are stored in the upper portion thereof, the spheres that have flowed into the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with the stored spheres, so that the induction flow path 706, Alternatively, it repels in either direction of the induction flow path 708. That is, either the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, which has a large number of winning balls to be paid out due to the change in the flow direction due to repulsion, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e, in which the winning balls are not paid out. Enter the crab. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball launched onto a gaming board. In this conventional gaming machine, the held ball can be discharged to the gaming board by the operation of the player and can be entered into a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction (the ball can be entered into a predetermined winning opening provided in the direction of travel). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190443).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player because the ball released by using the holding device is only put into a predetermined winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can operate the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by leaving the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e. It can be in a state (a state with high gambling ability in which a large number of prize balls may be obtained, but a prize ball may not be obtained). Further, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stable). It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, and each player selects the playability that suits his / her taste. You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a can be switched by the release button 800 at any timing of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. As a result, each player can start the game during the period when the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his / her taste. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be basically in the closed state (storage state), and a lottery is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. You may.

Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the ball is easily entered into the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed due to the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball is stored by lottery. The game can be played with the expectation that the valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, if the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easier for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the ball continues to be out of the lottery. The game can be performed with the expectation that the storage valve 704a will continue to be closed. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In the present embodiment, there are two types of flow paths through which the ball can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed, the induction flow path 706 and the guidance flow path 708, but the present invention is not limited to this. More channels and winning openings may be provided. In addition, more variations may be given to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters each winning opening. As a result, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be increased, so that the player can observe the flow direction of the balls that have entered the storage device 700 more interestingly. Can be made to.

Further, a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down when the storage valve 704a is open may be provided. Then, when each flow path flows down, a different number of prize balls may be provided to be paid out. As a result, even when the storage valve 704a is open, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be given randomness, so that the player can see the flow direction of the balls entering the storage device 700. Can be observed more interestingly.

In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second ball entry port 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 upstream, it is possible to facilitate the flow of balls into the storage device 700.

In the present embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as the winning opening opened in the special gaming state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during the period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period when the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (reservoir state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. With this configuration, the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, so that the number of operations by the player can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the button 800 may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a playability that suits his or her own taste.

In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed by characters for the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, depending on the state of the storage valve 704a, either a live-action image in a state where the storage valve 704a is open or a live-action image in a closed state may be displayed. Further, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Further, in the present embodiment, the display showing the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the front side of the third symbol. Further, the mode of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the mode of the third symbol.

In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be controlled by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid for the storage device 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 700 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the front view of the first entry opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting right in the special gaming state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state) can be played. Can be more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for a big hit.

In the present embodiment, when the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact), the flow path through which the newly flowing ball flows down is It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the spheres are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the spheres newly flowing into the storage device 700 to be distributed to the induction flow path 706 and the induction flow path 708 is substantially the same. It was configured, but not limited to this. For example, widen the width of the storage valve 704a (for example, 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere) so that the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a takes a position to the right of the front view or to the left of the front view. It may be configured to obtain. When the ball is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a on the left side of the front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 tends to collide with the right side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the right side in the front view, so that the ball is likely to flow down the induction flow path 708. As described above, since the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the player cannot win the prize ball (it is disadvantageous to the player). .. On the other hand, when the ball is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a on the right side of the front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 tends to collide with the left side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the left side in the front view, so that the sphere is likely to flow down the induction flow path 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the player can acquire a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player). Will be). In this way, the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a can form an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, the storage valve 704a is in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. It is possible to make people aware of the arrangement of the spheres stored in the upper part of the. Therefore, if the arrangement of the spheres is unfavorable (that is, if the spheres are stored on the left side of the front view), the storage valve 704a can be released (released) by pressing (operating) the release button 800. can. In addition, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, if the balls are stored on the right side of the front view), the player can be made to want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. .. Therefore, since it is possible to give the enjoyment of determining whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. In the first embodiment described above, the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (open state or closed state) and the state of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 (open state or closed state) are independent of each other. The storage valve 607a is controlled to be always open in the privilege game state (big hit state), while the second specific winning opening 650a is set for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (FIG. 16). It was configured to be set to the open state only during the open period specified for each jackpot type shown in. Further, two types of flow paths (induction flow path 652 and guidance flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the guidance thereof is performed only when the sphere flows down the guidance flow path 652. It was configured to be able to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652. That is, even if a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot, it is configured so that the ball does not shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends unless the ball flows down the induction flow path 652. rice field.

On the other hand, in this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage are obtained by using the slide member 900 instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the first embodiment and the storage valve 607a. The state of the device 600 can be switched. That is, it is configured so that the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a and the opening / closing control of the induction flow path 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed by one member, and the states are switched in conjunction with each other. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state, the induction flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also in the open state, and when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the closed state, the guidance flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also in the open state. ) Is also configured to be closed. When configured in this way, both the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 (that is, the winning opening opened during the jackpot by the slide member 900) are both winning openings for obtaining a winning ball during the jackpot. Can be treated as.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 650, only the guide flow path 652 leading to the probabilistic entry ball port 654 is provided, and the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide flow path 653, and the normal ball entry port 655 are provided. Is obsolete. That is, if the ball can be put into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is configured to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. In addition, it is configured to change the winning opening opened in the 12th round according to the jackpot type. That is, in the 12th round, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are set to be open (V route open jackpot), and the first specific in all rounds of the jackpot. The winning opening 65a is set to the open state (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are not opened during the jackpot). The jackpot (V route closed jackpot) is provided. Has been done.

With these changes from the first embodiment, the end conditions for each round of jackpots have also changed. Specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the jackpot, a ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Is changed so that the round game ends (the first specific winning opening 65a is closed) when the total number of cards is 10 or 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round. Further, in the 12 rounds, the total number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will be 10 or the round. It is changed so that the round game ends (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment with a member for switching the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (closed portion 910). , The point that the member (ball storage portion 920) for switching the state of the guide flow path 607 is composed of one member (slide member 900), and is paid out when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the contents of the ROM 202 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is performed. Is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of the V route open jackpot (big hit F). explain. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 12 rounds of the V route open jackpot (big hit F), the characters "ROUND 12" are displayed on the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. Further, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning opening 650a has been opened is formed in the upper center of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANGE !!" and the characters "Probability change route is being opened !!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the ball is inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Since other display contents such as the boy character 710 are the same as the display contents displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the configuration on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second are the same as in the first embodiment. A variable winning device 650 is provided. Further, a member for opening or closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 (closed portion 910) and a member for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600 (ball storage portion 920). Are arranged so as to line up in a straight line. The details will be described later, because the closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are both part of the slide member.

Further, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600. The hall clerk can adjust the rate at which the balls flow into the storage device 600, for example, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before the hall opens. By changing the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the number of balls entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 in the 12th round of the jackpot. can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball launched by right-handed striking can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the prize balls that the player can obtain in the big hit. Therefore, since the player's expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

On the contrary, when the nails 921a and 921b are adjusted to make it difficult for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second designated winning opening 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600 are provided. It is possible to increase the number of balls that reach the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. In addition, since it is easy to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round, it is possible to easily shift to the probable change state of the special symbol when the jackpot F is reached. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the jackpots will be continuous in a short period of time, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The configuration for adjusting the ease with which the ball flows into the storage device 600 (the ease with which the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a) is not limited to the nail. For example, a wind turbine may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 so that the ease of rotation can be adjusted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the slide member 900 including the above-mentioned closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are cross-sectional views when the game board 13 is cut along the line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77, respectively. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidably displaced toward the back side or the front side of the front view with respect to the game board 13, and is second specified by sliding displacement toward the front side of the front view. The winning opening 650a and the induction flow path 607 can be closed, respectively. On the other hand, by sliding the slide member 900 toward the back side of the front view with respect to the game board 13, the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 can be opened, respectively.

FIG. 78 (a) is a view when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 are each closed by the slide member 900 and viewed from above of the game board 13. On the other hand, FIG. 78 (b) is a view when the second specific winning opening 650a and the induction flow path 607 are opened, respectively, when viewed from above of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closing portion 910 and a ball storage portion 920 protrude from the right end portion and the left end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 930, respectively (substantially "". It has a "U-shaped" shape). The closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 may be projected toward the front side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 via the opening portions 940a and 940b made in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

In a state where the slide member 900 is slid and displaced toward the front side of the front view, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the upper portion of the second specific winning opening 650a is closed by the closing portion 910, so that the ball is secondly variable. It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the inside of the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guide flow path 607 is closed by the ball storage unit 920, the ball can be entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guidance flow path 607. become unable.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the slide member 900 is slid and displaced toward the back side of the game board 13, the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 is opened and the guide flow path 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the induction flow path 607 and the second specific winning opening 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

As described above, in this modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow path 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specific winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as drawing a special symbol and determining the fluctuation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The effect on the game will be large. On the other hand, in this modification, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the first type selection table 202b in this modification will be described. As described above, in the present modification, when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the probabilistic entry opening 654. As the jackpot type, a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650 is opened in the 12th round and a jackpot in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the 12th round are provided.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed, or the ball is hit). It is a big hit that is opened (until 10 balls enter). That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball cannot be entered into the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 arranged inside the second variable winning device 650, so that the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100 after the big hit is completed. Granted times.

On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). This jackpot F is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 elapse for a predetermined time (30 seconds). Until, or until 10 balls enter), and in the 1st to 11th rounds and 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls enter). It is a big hit that is opened (until it hits the ball). In the jackpot F, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so if the ball can be entered into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round, the special symbol is in a probable change state after the jackpot ends. Is given. On the other hand, in the 12th round, the ball did not hit right, or even though it hit right, the ball entered only the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and as a result, the ball went to the second specific winning opening 650a. If the 12th round is completed without entering the ball, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the jackpot F.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 34) is changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the difference is that the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. ing. In the following, only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described, and detailed description of other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031). The jackpot control process 3 is a process of opening and closing the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of the jackpot state.

Among the jackpot control processes 3, in each of the processes S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, S1101, S1102, and S1104 executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, and the same processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), the processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108, which were executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, are abolished.

Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). Instead of, the jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) described above. The jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the states (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

Of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), the processes S1201 to S1203 and S1206 are the same as the processes S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in this modification, when it is determined that the 12th round is in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), then the jackpot type this time is jackpot F (V route open). It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1211).

If it is determined that the jackpot is not F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: No), it means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is the jackpot E that is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. , The opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process shifts to S1206.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot F is in the processing of S1211 (S1211: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round, so that the second specific is specified. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closed portion 910 that closed the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage portion 920 that closed the induction flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. It is a part of (a part of the slide member 900), and the closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 slide and displace in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a by the processing of S1203, the induction flow path 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened. Ru).

After setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a , And in order to notify the voice lamp control device 114 that the induction flow path 607 is set to the open state (release state), a storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) is set (S1212). , The process shifts to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage status command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANGE !!" and "Probability change route is being opened !!" are displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that it is an opportunity to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol.

If the special symbol shifts to the probabilistic state, it becomes easy for the player to win the jackpot again in a short period of time after the jackpot ends, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the player can be made to launch the ball more seriously aiming at the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere task for obtaining a prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state).

As described above, the ratio of the balls that reach the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a among the balls hit to the right is the nails 921a, 921b provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600 ( It can be changed by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right side of the front view or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left side of the front view (opening the nail), the ball hit to the right flows into the storage device 600 more. It will be easier to do. Therefore, the proportion of balls that reach the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. In addition, if 10 balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 without being able to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol. When the ball easily flows into the storage device 600, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a larger number of prize balls to be paid out than the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9 (b)). As a result, the player can win a large amount of prize balls, so that the player's interest in the jackpot can be improved.

Here, in many cases, the player makes a right-handed hit aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a in the first to eleventh rounds, so that the player is placed downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Balls also flow into the installed storage device 600. Therefore, by the time the 12th round starts, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. Therefore, when the 12 rounds are started and the slide member 900 is displaced by sliding and the upper part of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is opened, the ball stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 is opened as the general winning opening. (High value winning opening) Flow down to 602. As a result, out of the balls that hit right in the 12th round, 9 balls hit the 2nd specific winning opening 650a by the time they entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. If the ball cannot be entered, the 12th round will end.

On the other hand, by adjusting the nails 921a and the nails 921b so as to be close to each other (closing the nails), it becomes difficult for the right-handed ball to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, since the proportion of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650 is relatively high, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. As a result, it becomes easy to win the jackpot again in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot F, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this way, by changing the ease with which the ball can enter the storage device 600 when hitting to the right, the second ball entry port 650a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be reached. You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is obtained only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 12 It is easy to win many prize balls in the round, but it is possible to switch between playability that makes it difficult to shift to the probable state of special symbols. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), The winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process shifts to S1112. The details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 82.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in this modification. Of the winning processes 2 (S1122), the processes S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the processes S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

Further, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in this modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the processing of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a, the second specifying. When it is determined that the total number of balls entered into the winning opening (second large opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or more) (S1404: Yes), or the round time. When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has elapsed (S1405: Yes), one of the open winning openings (1st specified winning opening (1st large opening opening) 65a or 2nd specified) The winning opening closing process (S1431) for setting the closure of the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process is shifted to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). This winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process for setting the closing of the winning opening when the conditions for closing the winning opening are satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

In this winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the 12th round (S4401). If it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the currently open winning opening is the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a, so that the first specific winning opening (first) is used. 1 Large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4401, if it is determined that the current round is the 12th round (S4401), the winning openings are different depending on the jackpot type, so this jackpot is the jackpot F (V route). It is determined whether or not it is an open jackpot) (S4403). If it is determined that the jackpot is not F (V route open jackpot) (that is, the jackpot E (V route closed jackpot)) (S4403: No), the currently open winning slot is the first specific winning slot (S4403: No). Since it means that it is the first large opening port) 650a, the closing of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set by shifting the processing to S4402 (S4402), and this processing is performed. finish.

In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. It means that the second specified winning opening (second big opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently open. Therefore, in this case, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are set to be closed (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is set. In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the mouth) 650a and the general winning mouth (high value winning mouth) 602 are closed, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state (storage state) is set (the storage state command). S4405), this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage status command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the chance of shifting to the probable change state of the special symbol has ended.

By executing this winning opening closing process (S1431), the open winning opening can be accurately closed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the processing content of the command determination processing is partially changed from the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from the main control device 110 in the jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment. Execute the process. Since the processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the command determination process in this modification, the error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. This error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the error notification process 2 (S1971) described above. In each of the error notification processes 2 (S1971), S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same processes as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in the present modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. (See), the hit notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process is terminated. Similar to the hit notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, the hit notification process 2 (S1981) is a process for notifying when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot. Is.

Next, the above-mentioned hit-time notification process 2 (S1981) will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the hit notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). In the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0. If not (S1992), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 in the processing of S1992 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball bleeding period has elapsed. Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1993).

Then, when it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state). It means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (off) (S1991: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). If it is determined that the value of the flow time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the processing of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then the received winning information command is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S1996, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). It means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the ball brushing period has passed. That is, since it is highly possible that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process is shifted to S1994 in order to notify the malfunction of the storage valve 607a.

When a defect occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a by the hit notification process 2 (S1981), the defect can be promptly notified, so that the defect can be quickly resolved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open and close the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the induction flow path in the storage device 600. It is configured so that the opening / closing operation of 607 can be performed at the same time. That is, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit.

Since the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow path 607 can be realized only by sliding the slide member 900, the second specification can be performed as in the first embodiment. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as drawing a special symbol and determining the fluctuation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The effect on the game will be large. On the other hand, in this modification, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

Further, in this modification, only the probability-changing ball opening 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball flowing into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 always enters the probability-changing ball opening 654. It is configured to be a sphere. As a result, if the ball can be put into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple playability of shifting to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to provide a playability that even a beginner can enjoy. Further, since the flow path switching valve 650d, the induction flow path 653, and the normal ball entry port 655 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment are abolished, the second variable winning device 650 The structure of can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Further, in this modification, the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 among the right-handed balls is adjusted by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

Here, for gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is drawn based on whether or not a game ball wins at the starting winning opening, and whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state is separately determined. There is something to draw. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hit from becoming a mere task for obtaining a large number of balls, to allow the player to play the hit game with the expectation of shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. I am trying.

Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area in which the gaming ball can enter only during the hit, and the probability fluctuates after the hit by allowing the gaming ball to enter the predetermined area. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-180999).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the ratio of the gaming ball entering the predetermined area during hitting is preset for each model, so in order to make the ratio of shifting to the probability fluctuation state different, the hole is used. There was no choice but to introduce a different model on the side. In other words, with conventional gaming machines, there is no degree of freedom in the rate of transition to a probability fluctuation state, and it has been difficult to flexibly respond to different sales policies for each hall. Therefore, there has been a demand for a more versatile gaming machine.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600 when hitting right can be easily changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. It is configured in. This makes it possible to change the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 650a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is obtained only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which is special. It is possible to switch between playability that makes it difficult to shift to a probable change state of the symbol. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that the versatility can be improved.

In this modification, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is configured to be opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in the 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be arbitrarily set. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, the opening time may be set to, for example, 2 seconds. By shortening the opening time, various striking methods are performed in order to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in a limited time, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the nails 921a and 921b are closed more. Can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to be absorbed in the game by the pachinko machine 10.

In this modification, an entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for varying the proportion of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, an out opening or a winning opening in which the prize ball is paid out when the ball enters may be provided. Then, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured so that the open / closed state can be switched by a single member. Even with this configuration, the proportion of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to change the ease of entering the out opening or the winning opening. Can be made to. Further, by replacing the storage device 600 with an out opening or a winning opening, the structure can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, the ease of inflow into the storage device 600 does not necessarily have to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, a columnar member fixed to the board surface may be provided. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible for the hole side to adjust whether or not the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so that the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Even if you don't hit the ball, you can prevent the point of disappointment from heading toward the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling distrust of the hall.

In this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are configured to be opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be open in the first round. As a result, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that the game can be played with peace of mind in the subsequent special game state (big hit state). Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in the 15th round. As a result, it is not determined until the final round, the 15th round, whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's expectation for the probabilistic state of the special symbol can be maintained for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot game. Further, for example, when the jackpot F is obtained, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened in the 12th round and the 13th round. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12th round, and the ball storage unit in the 13th round. It is possible to make the state where the sphere does not exist on the upper part of the 920. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a.

In this modification, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of spheres can be stored. For example, it may be configured so that four balls can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. In this case, the end condition of the 12 rounds is changed, and the 12 rounds are ended when, for example, a total of 5 balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602. It may be configured to do so. In the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, the game is played in an attempt to make the ball enter the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting right, so in many cases, the ball is placed on the upper part of the reservoir 920 before the start of the 12th round. The maximum number (4) is stored. That is, when the 12 rounds are started and the ball storage unit 920 is opened, the four stored balls flow into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 all at once, so that immediately after the start of the 12 rounds. In the specific winning opening (1st specific winning opening 65a, 2nd specific winning opening 650a, and general winning opening 602), 4 balls are entered. Therefore, 12 rounds are completed when one more ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (a total of five balls are the second specific winning opening). Since the situation is such that the ball enters the 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602), the opportunity to enter the second specific winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more nervous and play the game for 12 rounds. Also, in the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, while hoping that the balls do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 does not reach the upper limit of 4, but 12 You can have them play a jackpot game (hoping for a round). Therefore, since the game can be played with a feeling of tension even during the jackpot, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming merely a task for obtaining a prize ball, and the player's jackpot game. It is possible to improve the interest in.

The number of balls that can be stored in the specific winning opening, which is the end condition of the 12 rounds, and the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the end condition of the 12 rounds may be set to be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. This makes it possible to play the game with a stronger desire that the ball will not be stored inside the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round. On the contrary, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stored in the ball storage unit 920 may be reduced. As a result, even if the upper limit number of balls is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the start of the 12th round, the opportunity to enter the balls into the second specific winning opening 650a multiple times in the 12th round is given. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this modification, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage portion 920 is opened, but the effect during the jackpot is limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to notify whether it is a jackpot E or a jackpot F based on the result of the effect executed by the 11th round of the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in each round of the 1st to 11th rounds, a production in which a ally of justice and a monster fight may be performed. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, it may be notified that it is a jackpot F, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that it is a jackpot E. That is, if the ally of justice wins, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can recognize that it is a chance to shift to the probable state of the special symbol. This makes it possible for the player to observe the result of the production performed at the jackpot more interestingly.

In addition, there is a high possibility that the ally of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot E) and the content of the production in which the ally of justice is highly expected to win (easily selected in the case of jackpot F) by providing variations in the content of the production. (Easy to be selected) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning is high, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed. It may be configured to increase the possibility of defeat if the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result can be predicted by the flow of the production leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the content of the production performed by the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight, and it can be suggested that the jackpot F is advantageous and the jackpot E is more disadvantageous than the jackpot F. Any aspect may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 is directed to search for the treasure and the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that it is a jackpot F, or the boy character 710 may be configured to search for the treasure. It may be configured to display the effect of eating big and to be notified that it is a big hit F when all the provided food is eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, the condition that the image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image and the storage valve 607a is opened, the merit when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the demerit when the ball is hit right in the closed state. It may be configured to display an image (explanatory image) for explaining. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are both treated as winning openings for obtaining a big hit prize ball, but the general winning opening (high value winning opening) is treated. The winning opening) 602 may be treated as a normal winning opening. That is, as a condition for ending each round of the jackpot, each round of the jackpot ends when 10 or more balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (generally at the end of the round). It may be configured so that the number of balls entered into the winning opening 602 is not involved). As a result, the more the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the more profitable the player is, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ball is made into the storage device 600. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball does not easily flow in, the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the ratio of shifting to the probable state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be changed, but the ratio of shifting to the probable state of the special symbol is changed. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600 constant, a probability variable entry ball opening 654 and a normal entry slot 655 are provided inside the second variable winning device 650 as in the first embodiment. It may be configured. Then, the clerk in the hall may be configured to adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 to the probabilistic entry slot 654 and the normal entry slot 655. More specifically, for example, the second variable winning device 650 in this modification is replaced with the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, and then switched to the flow path switching valve 650d. Abolish the shaft 650e. Then, for example, a nail may be struck at the branch position between the guide flow path 652 and the guide flow path 653 (that is, above the portion where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment). Further, the position for hitting the nail may be, for example, upward by a distance of about the radius of the sphere from the place where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15). That is, it may be a position where the sphere flowing down the guide flow path 651 can come into contact (collision), and the sphere can flow down with respect to the guide flow path 652 and the guide flow path 653. With this configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the game ball flowing down the induction flow path 651 easily comes into contact (collision) with the left side surface of the nail. Therefore, the ball is likely to be repelled to the left in the front view. Therefore, since the ball easily flows into the guidance flow path 652 provided on the left side of the front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, it becomes easy to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to easily change the special symbol after the end of the big hit. On the contrary, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the left side, the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 651 easily comes into contact (collision) with the right side surface of the nail, so that the ball faces the front. It becomes easy to be repelled to the right of the view. Therefore, since the ball easily flows into the guidance flow path 653 provided on the left side of the front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, it becomes easy to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be in a probable change state after the end of the big hit. In this way, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall by setting the configuration so that the ease of entering the ball into the probabilistic entry port 654 can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

Further, as another specific example in which the ratio of transition to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be changed, the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is opened in place of the nails 921a and 921b in this modified example. A variable member may be provided to switch between the closed state and the closed state. Then, the variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is turned on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set to the open state and the period set to the closed state are The ratio may be configured so that the hall can be adjusted. More specifically, for example, an operating means that can be set to a plurality of states such as a DIP switch is provided. Then, for example, if the state of the switch indicates (0000000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be set to the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, the game ball is set to be in a state where it is most likely to flow into the storage device 600. Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the entrance of the storage device 600 is always set to the closed state. That is, the ball that flows into the storage device 600 at the jackpot disappears, and the state is set so that it is most likely to flow into the second specific winning opening 650a. When the DIP switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which the DIP switch is closed may be longer from (0000000000B) to (11111111B). That is, the ball may easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a toward (11111111B), and the probability variation state of the special symbol may be easily set after the end of the big hit. With this configuration, in a hole where you want to use the pachinko machine 10 as a game machine with playability that is unlikely to be in a probable change state of a special symbol, for example, the variable member is closed for 0.5 seconds and 2.5 seconds. The DIP switch settings may be adjusted so that the open state is repeated. On the contrary, in a hole where the pachinko machine 10 is to be used as a game machine having a game property that tends to be in a probable change state of a special symbol, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state for 2.5 seconds and an open state for 0.5 seconds. Just adjust the DIP switch settings. As a result, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that it is possible to provide highly versatile playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94. The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is configured such that the induction flow path 704 provided inside the storage device 700 can be closed by the storage valve 704a so that one ball can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a in the closed state. It was composed of. Then, in the state where the balls are stored, the balls can be easily entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e, which have many prize balls to be paid out. In the state where the storage valve 704a is open, the ball is easily inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 in which the number of winning balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to the closed state, and is configured to be in the open state when the player operates the release button 800. That is, if the storage valve 704a is closed, there is a possibility that a ball may enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e (prize). There is a possibility that you can get a lot of balls, but there is a possibility that you will not get a prize ball. It is in a state where the ball can be entered into the mouth (medium value prize opening) 701 (a state in which a small amount of the prize ball can be stably obtained). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, and each player selects the playability that suits his / her taste. It was configured so that the game could be played.

On the other hand, in this modification, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, it becomes easier for the balls to enter the entry port (it becomes easier to enter the general winning opening 702, or it enters the out opening). Is it easier to ball?) Is configured to change. That is, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, it is easy to recognize whether or not it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is configured to be able to.

The only difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. The second execution is for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in this modification, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward in the lower right direction in the front view. Therefore, most of the spheres that first flowed into the induction flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stationary in a state of being biased to the right side of the induction flow path 704 due to the inclination of the storage valve 704a. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, in the induction flow path 704, the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is longer than that of the second embodiment. Further, the guide flow path 704 does not have a width sufficient for two spheres to be lined up side by side. For this reason, when one sphere is stored to the right inside the guide flow path 704 and another sphere flows into the guide flow path 704, in many cases, it is newly stored on the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. (A new ball is stored between the previously stored ball and the inner wall portion on the left side of the induction flow path 704).

In the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (the first stored ball is stored to the right and the second stored ball is stored to the left), the balls that have subsequently flowed into the storage device 700 are stored. It becomes easy to collide with the right side surface of the second stored ball. Therefore, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to the impact due to the collision (contact) with the stored ball. That is, the ball flows into the induction flow path 708 and enters either the out port (small value winning port) 703d or 703e.

In this way, in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can flow into the storage device 700, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. The player cannot get the prize ball because the ball is thrown. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player.

In the guide flow path 704, on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a, a ball entry sensor 704b for detecting the ball when the ball is present on the front side of the front view is provided. The placement of the ball can be determined by the ball entry sensor 704b. More specifically, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 87. An image (see FIG. 89) that prompts the player to press the release button 800 when a certain period of time has elapsed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 by determining whether or not the arrangement is shown in FIG. 87. ) Can be displayed. As a result, the disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the ball flowing into the storage device 700 easily enters the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e continues for a long time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Next, another example in the case where two spheres are stored will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the game ball that first flowed into the induction flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed is stored to the left with respect to the induction flow path 704, and is stored in the second induction flow path. The sphere that has flowed into the 704 is stored to the right of the induction flow path 704. When the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is reached, the spheres that have subsequently flowed into the storage device 700 are likely to collide (contact) with the left side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, since the flow direction of the ball that collides (contacts) with the stored ball tends to change to the left, the number of prize balls that flow down the induction flow path 706 and are paid out is large (6 payouts) in general. It becomes easier to enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

In this way, in the storage state shown in FIG. 88, by flowing the ball into the storage device 700, the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. , It is an advantageous state for the player who can expect to win the prize ball every time the ball flows in.

Since the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right, the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is more difficult to realize than the storage state shown in FIG. 87. For example, when two balls flow into the induction flow path 704 almost at the same time after the storage valve 704a is closed, or the ball that first reaches the storage valve 704a is the storage valve 704a or the induction flow path 704. This can be realized when a second ball flows into the induction flow path 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repelling in the upper left direction.

Most of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but in this modification as well, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. .. That is, the spheres can be stored in the storage device 700 in the expectation that the storage state will be reset and the storage state will be restored as shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with the goal of achieving the storage state shown in FIG. 88, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player, and the prize is awarded by continuing to enter the ball into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. You can have a feeling of expectation that you can get a lot of balls.

Further, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is deviated from the ball entry sensor 704b (the ball does not shield the front side of the ball entry sensor 704b), so that even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 continues for a long time. , It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of an image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, it is possible to continue the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, an image (suggestion display image) for prompting the pressing of the release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (suggestion display image) for prompting the pressing of the release button 800. This suggestion display image is an image shown in FIG. 87, which is displayed when it is determined that the arrangement disadvantageous to the player is continuous for a certain period of time (1 minute). More specifically, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for 1 minute, it is determined that the ball is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, and the suggestion display image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, the characters “Unfavorable placement” are displayed for the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 for the player is disadvantageous to the player (the arrangement in which the ball flowing into the storage device 700 is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). You can make them recognize that. In addition, below the characters "Unfavorable placement", the characters "Press the button to reset the placement !!" are displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player recognize that the disadvantageous state is eliminated by pressing (operating) the release button 800.

As described above, in this modification, the disadvantageous arrangement is notified to the player by the suggestion display image, and the disadvantageous arrangement is promoted by pressing (operating) the release button 800, and the advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88). The game can be played with the aim of (arrangement in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702). Therefore, it is possible to make the player more actively participate in the game.

In the present embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed when a long time (1 minute) elapses in a state disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched to the open state (released state). That is, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the ball is stable in a disadvantageous state, and the arrangement of the ball stored in the storage device 700 is reset. In order to do so, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be open. This makes it possible to prevent even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 from playing a game for a long time without noticing a disadvantageous state.

In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened when the ball is continuously detected for 1 minute by the ball entry sensor 704b, but the arrangement of FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). ) Is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to shorten the period in which the player is in a disadvantageous state. Further, by increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency of displaying the suggestion display image can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. The electrical configuration in the modified example of the second embodiment is that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed from the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, and the voice lamp control device 113 The difference is that the ball entry sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225. Since the other electrical configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the disadvantage time counter 223m and the suggestion display flag 223n are added to the RAM 223 in the modified example of the second embodiment at least.

The disadvantageous time counter 223m is a counter used for determining the elapsed time after the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87. The value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 228 (S4503 in FIG. 92). Further, in the state where the counter value is added (the state of the value larger than 0), if the ball is not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, when it is determined based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m that the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87 (the state in which the ball is guided to the out openings 703d and 703e). The above-mentioned suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is controlled to be displayed.

The suggestion display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If the suggestion display flag 223n is on, it means that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed, and if it is off, it means that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. Shows. The suggestion display flag 223n is set to on when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, the storage valve 704a is set to off when a storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (release state) is received (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described.

In each of the main processes (see FIG. 92) in this modification, the same processes as those in S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment are executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in this modification, when the liquid crystal display execution management process (S1810) is completed, the release suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed (see FIG. 89). S1821), the process shifts to S1811. The details of this release suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG. 93.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the release suggestion display process (S1821). In this release suggestion display process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is on (S4501), if it is determined to be on (S4501: Yes), then the suggestion display flag 223n is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S4502). If the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to display the suggestion display image. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m (S4503), and the disadvantage time after the update. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60,000 (S4504). Here, since the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by 1 (every 1 ms) every time the main process (see FIG. 91) is performed, the counter value 60000 corresponds to 1 minute.

If it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 60,000 or less (S4504: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504: Yes), a suggestion for notifying the player that a long time (1 minute) has passed since the disadvantageous arrangement was made. The display rear image change command for displaying the display is set (S4505), the suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the ball entry sensor 228 does not detect the ball (the ball entry sensor is off) (S4501: No), the arrangement is not disadvantageous (see FIG. 87). Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). If it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 as a result of the determination by the processing of S4507 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the disadvantage time counter 223m has been initialized and does not need to be initialized again, so the processing of S4508 is skipped. This process ends.

By executing this release suggestion display process (S1821), the player plays a game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the command determination process executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. In each of the command determination processes S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processes as those of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment are executed, respectively. .. Further, in the command determination process in this modification, when it is determined that the storage state command has been received from the main control device 110 in the processing of S1921 (S1921: Yes), the image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. (S1929), the storage state command process of the above is executed, and this process is terminated.

The details of this storage state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command processing (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage valve 704a is notified that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) by the storage state command (S4601). Then, when it is determined that the switch to the closed state (reservoir state) has been notified (S4601: Yes), then the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63 (a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, by setting the display rear image change command to display (S4602) and setting the storage state flag 223k to ON, it is shown that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state (S4603), and the process is sent to S4604. And migrate.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the notification by the storage state command is not the closed state (storage state) (notified that the switch to the open state (release state) has been performed), (S4601: No). Next, a display rear image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63 (b)) corresponding to the open state (release state) to the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and a storage valve is set. The storage state flag 223k is set to off to indicate that the current state of the 704a is the open state (released state) (S4606). Then, in order to show that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to off (S4607), and the process shifts to S4604.

In the processing of S4604 executed after the processing of S4603 or S4607, the flow time counter 223l is used to determine whether or not the ball has been removed during the period from when the storage valve 704a is switched until the ball is released. A counter value corresponding to 1 second is set (S4604), and this process ends. By executing this storage state command processing (S1931), the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be appropriately updated in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, as the storage state when the sphere is stored inside, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken. These storage states have different entry ports where balls that have flowed into the storage device 700 can easily enter. Further, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily visually determined. Therefore, the player can be made to select whether or not it is better to reset the storage state by temporarily setting the storage valve 704a to the open state.

Further, an advantageous storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and an unfavorable storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the out opening shown in FIG. 87). By providing and, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88) will be obtained. Then, even if the storage state becomes unfavorable (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a, and the game aims at the advantageous storage state again (see FIG. 88). Can be done. In addition, by being in an advantageous storage state, it is possible to give a sense of accomplishment to the player, and by continuing to put the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, a large number of prize balls are obtained. You can have a sense of expectation for what you can do.

The pachinko machine 10 of this modification is configured to store two balls inside the storage device 700, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal structure capable of storing three or more balls may be used. .. In this case, if the ball entry sensor 228 is provided on the left side near the upper end of the guidance flow path 704, it can be easily determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is in a disadvantageous arrangement to be guided to the out port.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, by providing the ball entry sensor 228 on the left side near the upper end of the induction flow path 704, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 disadvantageous to the player? Although it was configured so that it could be determined whether or not it was, the mounting position of the ball entry sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged to the right near the upper end of the induction flow path 704. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 are arranged as shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, but when the arrangement is shown in FIG. 88, the stored balls are not detected. The ball entry sensor 228 may be arranged so that the upper ball among the stored balls is detected by the ball entry sensor 228. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is arranged so as to easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entry sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 228 for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. .. Therefore, it is notified that the ball is in an advantageous arrangement for the player as shown in FIG. 88 and that the stored ball is in an advantageous arrangement. Can be done. As a method of notification, for example, the characters "advantageously arranged" and the characters "right-handed big chance!" Are displayed on the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. You may. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous, so that the release button 800 is erroneously pressed (operated) to cause the ball stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. It is possible to prevent the problem (reset the advantageous arrangement).

Further, the number of ball entry sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of ball entry sensors 228 may be provided. More specifically, for example, the ball entry sensor 228 may be provided near the upper end of the induction flow path 704 to the right and to the left, respectively. As a result, when the sensor provided on the left side continues to detect the sphere for, for example, 5 seconds, it can be determined that the sensor is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87. Further, when the sensor provided on the right side continuously detects the sphere for, for example, 5 seconds, it can be determined that the sensor is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (arrangement disadvantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the out openings 703d and 703e), the above-mentioned suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed for the game. It is possible to urge a person to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. Further, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (arrangement advantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image notifying the player that the arrangement is advantageous to the player (for example, "advantageous"). By displaying the character "arranging" and the character "right-handed big chance!" Displayed in the small area Ds2), it is recognized that the current state is advantageous, and the game is played. You can improve your motivation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be tilted downward to the lower right, but the tilt may be reversed. As a result, it becomes easy to realize a storage state (see FIG. 88) that is advantageous for the player, so that the player can more actively aim at the storage device 700 and launch the ball. Further, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. This makes it possible to completely randomize whether the storage state is favorable or unfavorable.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but another trigger may be provided. For example, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be set to the open state during the jackpot, or may be configured to reset the storage state periodically. If the opportunity to reset the storage state is completely entrusted to the player, once the storage state becomes advantageous (see FIG. 88), the game will be continued while maintaining the storage state, and the hall will not be able to do so. It may be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is configured to be reset periodically, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the advantageous storage state from continuing for a long time, and thus it is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the hall.

In this modification, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. As a result, each player can start the game during the period when the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his / her taste.

Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be basically in the closed state (storage state), and a lottery is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. You may. Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an unfavorable arrangement in which the balls are easily guided to the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d, 703e (see FIG. 87), the lottery is won. As a result, the game can be performed in the hope that the storage valve 704a is opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the storage valve 704a is opened. You can let them play the game in the hope that they will continue to be out of the lottery so that they will not be lost. Therefore, it is possible to expect different lottery results depending on the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that it is possible to provide a novel playability. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In this modification, since the storage device 700 having a peculiar configuration that is not mounted on a general gaming machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a, the advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. It may be configured to do so. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during the period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period when the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (reservoir state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. With this configuration, the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, so that the number of operations by the player can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the button 800 may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a playability that suits his or her own taste.

In this modification, when a certain period of time (1 minute) has elapsed since the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to release the player. Although it was configured to prompt the pressing (operation) of the button 800, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be integrally configured (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are collectively used as one operation button, and the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 may be used. On the other hand, they may be electrically connected to each other). Then, when it is determined that the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 704b for a certain period (1 minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be configured so that the variable type in which the effect is developed can be easily selected. As a result, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) in order to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state (release state) at the same time. In general, the player observes the result of the variable effect that informs whether or not the jackpot is the most interesting, so that when the variable effect that develops the effect by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the frame button 22 is surely pressed. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is being prompted. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

In this modification, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the front view of the first entry opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting right in the special gaming state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state) can be played. Can be more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for a big hit.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided with each storage valve by sliding to the front side of the front view and the back side of the front view. The flow path was closed and the ball could be stored in the upper part of the flow path, but the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to stand vertically with respect to the inner wall portion of the flow path to close the flow path, and in the open state, the storage valve collapses in the downstream direction of the flow path. The flow path may be configured to allow the sphere to pass. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not need to completely close the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a is shortened and the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a protrude toward the front side of the front view, the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704 are partially opened. It may be configured to be. Further, the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the price of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. Further, when the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704 is set to the open state (released state) by the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a, the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704 does not have to be completely opened. .. That is, a part of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be in a state of protruding into the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704. Further, the width of the open portion in the guide flow path 607 or the guide flow path 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the operating range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed, so that the power consumed for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. can. Further, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the inflowing sphere may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a to reduce the momentum of the flow, but the sphere will eventually flow down. (It can be made difficult to be stored (retained) at the positions of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even in this configuration, the same operation as in each of the above embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which a sphere can be stored on the guide flow path 607 and the guide flow path 704, and a state in which the sphere that has flowed into the guide flow path 607 and the guide flow path 704 flows down downstream. ..

In each of the above embodiments, both ends of the ball inlets provided in each storage device are out ports, but the out ports at both ends may be abolished. Even if the out port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can enter another entry port. Further, by eliminating the outlets at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of out ports are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the out ports provided inside the storage device, the out ports 66 provided below the front view of the game board 13. It may be a flow path for the ball to flow down to (see FIG. 2). As a result, it is possible to make one out port, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls that have entered the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of ejected balls. Therefore, since the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, one ball (a first embodiment, a modified example of the first embodiment, and a second embodiment) or two balls (a modified example of the second embodiment) is stored in the upper part of the storage valve. ), But the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured so that three or more balls can be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be configured to be stored side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve may be countable. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls may be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. .. As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 all at once, so that a large amount (5 x 15) of winning balls is paid out in a short time. Can receive. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that he / she wants to store the ball inside the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be configured to be closed while the power supply is shut off. That is, when the power cutoff is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of power cutoff is restored. You may. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud in which a ball is made to enter the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power supply is cut off, and the prize ball is immediately obtained at the time of power recovery.

In each of the above embodiments, the entry port (winning opening) into which the ball flowing into the storage device enters is fixed by the induction flow path through which the ball flows down (that is, the arrangement of each entry port). Was fixed), but it is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a known crune or the like may be arranged on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning opening (ball entry opening) may be provided in a ring shape on the crune. Then, by rotating the crune, the winning opening (entry opening) into which the ball flowing down each induction flow path flows may be given randomness. As a result, the player can be made to watch the entrance of the ball that has flowed into the storage device with interest. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In each of the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is made visible, but the inside of the storage device may be made difficult to see from the front.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening and closing of the storage valve are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid for the storage device 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 118. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 (upstream side in the direction in which the ball flows down the game board 13), and the special game is provided. In the state (big hit state), the prize ball is configured to be obtained by inserting the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 arranged inside the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the prize ball is paid out by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ball is sent to the storage device 600. It was configured so that the prize ball would be paid out by letting the ball enter. As a result, more prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is further improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (normal gaming state), the ball is closed by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a. Was configured to make it difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and to be able to store the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. Then, when a ball stored inside the storage device 600 exists in the normal gaming state, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact). It was configured as follows. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored balls occurs, the flow direction of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls. It was configured to change in the direction of (direction of the induction flow path 606). As a result, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal game state, it is anomalous to try to increase the number of balls held without going through the jackpot. It was configured so that the game method would not be fundamentally established.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the second storage device 1600 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. The detailed configuration of the second storage device 1600 will be described later with reference to FIG. 96, but the second storage device 1600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can flow, and the sphere is caused by the flow path flowing down. It is configured so that it is possible to win a prize in a specific general winning opening (probability changing winning opening) 630a or a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 630b. Further, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1601a capable of storing a ball flowing down a part of the flow path. The storage valve 1601a is opened (released) when a specific condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed) since the jackpot started), and the storage valve 1601a is opened in the second storage device 1600. The ball stored by the storage valve 1601a is configured to flow down in the second storage device.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the second variable winning device 650 is deleted, and the second storage device 1600 is used instead of the storage device 600. The points provided, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the configuration executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed. The partial processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. .. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. As shown in FIG. 95, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the area on the right side of the game board 13 with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, that is, the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The various configurations provided in the area provided in (hereinafter referred to as the right side area) are different. Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 provided in the right area of the game board 13 in the first embodiment has been deleted. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right side area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed to reach the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a. It is configured to allow the ball to enter.

Further, in the third embodiment, the second storage device 1600 is provided in the right side region of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 96, the second storage device 1600 has an opening (flow) formed by a frame body 1612 forming the outer shape of the second storage device 1600 and an outer peripheral wall of the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 95). It has an entrance) 1610a. The opening width of the opening (inflow port) 1610a is formed to be about 15 mm, and it is restricted that a plurality of balls flow into the second storage device 1600 at the same time.

A plurality of nails are planted in the vicinity of the opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600 so that the ball launched by the right-handed game collides with the multiple nails and bounces off the right side region. It is configured. By making the flow direction of the ball irregular by the plurality of nails in this way, the ball flowing down in the right side region is distributed in the direction of flowing into the second storage device 1600 or the direction of passing through the first variable winning device 65. ..

Specifically, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13 so that one of the 20 balls fired in the right-handed game flows into the second storage device 1600. In addition, by changing the planting position of a plurality of nails or changing the inclination of the nails, the flow direction of the balls flowing down the right side region is changed, and the ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 is changed. Can be adjusted.

In the third embodiment, a plurality of nails provided in the vicinity of the opening (inlet) 1610a of the second storage device 1600 flow into the second storage device 1600 among the balls launched by the right-handed game. Although the ratio of the spheres to be struck can be set, other configurations may be used, and for example, a member capable of alternately switching the flow direction of the spheres may be provided. By using such a configuration in which the balls are regularly distributed, the ratio of the balls actually flowing into the second storage device 1600 can be easily compared with the preset ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600. Can be approximated.

Further, in the third embodiment, the nail P2 provided in the vicinity of the opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600 is adjusted to the upper left direction (upper left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) to perform a right-handed game. The ball fired by can be easily flowed toward the first variable winning device 65, while the nail P2 is adjusted to the upper right direction (upper right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) by the right-handed game. The fired ball can be easily flowed toward the second storage device 1600.

Specifically, by adjusting (moving) the nail P2 in the upper left direction (upper left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), one out of every 40 balls launched by the right-handed game becomes the second storage device 1600. By adjusting (moving) the nail P2 in the upper right direction (upper right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), which is set to flow in, one out of every 15 balls launched by the right-handed game is the second storage device 1600. Is set to flow into.

With this configuration, for example, when the nail P2 is adjusted to reduce the proportion of balls entering the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 As a result, the probability change state is likely to be given after the jackpot game is completed, while the ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game is reduced. The ratio of balls entering the winning device 65 increases, and the speed at which the jackpot game is digested can be increased. Therefore, no matter how the nail P2 is adjusted, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player.

In the third embodiment, by adjusting the nail P2, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the first variable winning device 65 and a state in which it is easy to enter the second storage device 1600. However, for example, there are a state in which it is easy to enter the first variable winning device 65 and a state in which it is easy to enter the second storage device 1600 by a member that is constantly variably controlled after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be on. It may be set to switch periodically, or a switching member is provided to switch between a state in which it is easy to enter the first variable winning device 65 and a state in which it is easy to enter the second storage device 1600 according to the gaming state. Alternatively, a selection member may be provided which can arbitrarily select either a state in which the player can easily enter the first variable winning device 65 or a state in which the player can easily enter the second storage device 1600.

Next, the internal configuration of the second storage device 1600 in the third embodiment will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 95. The second storage device 1600 has a plurality of flow paths through which the spheres can flow down, and is provided with a distribution device (distribution members 900 to 902 (see FIG. 96)) for distributing the flowing spheres to the plurality of flow paths. ing. Further, among the plurality of flow paths, a storage valve 1601a for limiting the flow of the sphere (storing the sphere) is provided in a part of the flow paths (first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96)). ..

The second storage device 1600 is provided with a specific general winning opening (probability variation winning opening) 630a and a general winning opening 630b in which a ball flowing down the second storage device 1600 can enter. (Probability change winning opening) When a ball enters the 630a, one prize ball is paid out, and when a ball enters the general winning opening 630b, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Furthermore, during the jackpot game, during the period from the execution of the first round game to the end of the final round game (hereinafter referred to as the probabilistic prize valid period), the specific general prize opening (probability change prize opening) ) When the ball enters the 630a (the ball passes through the probability change switch provided in the specific general winning opening 630a), a probability change game state which is an advantageous game state for the player is given after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to be possible. Details of the internal configuration of the second storage device 1600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98.

Further, in the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where a ball that has not flowed into the second storage device 1600 can pass, and a through gate 67 is provided below the first variable winning device 65. It is provided. The through gate 67 is arranged at a position where a part of the ball flowing down the second storage device 1600, which will be described later, can also pass (enter). A second entry port 640 is provided at a position where a ball that has passed (entered) the through gate 67 can enter.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows into either the second storage device 1600 or the first variable winning device 65 by a plurality of nails. The balls that are distributed so as to pass through and flow into the second storage device 1600 flow down in the second storage device 1600, and can enter the specific general winning opening 630a and the general winning opening 630b.

On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 is guided to the through gate 67 by a nail planted in the game board 13, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second entry port 640. It is configured.

Therefore, during the jackpot game, a ball is entered into the first variable winning device 65 by performing a right-handed game, and a part of the ball fired by the right-handed game (5% in this embodiment) is the second. It flows into the storage device 1600.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a provided in the second storage device 1600 during the probable change winning valid period, and the probable change is made after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to be able to give a game state.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is a game in which a player is allowed to enter a ball into the first variable winning device 65 to obtain a prize ball only by performing a right-handed game during a big hit game. By inserting a ball into the specific general winning opening 630a in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to simultaneously execute a game in which a probabilistic state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is given after the jackpot game is completed. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved during the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second storage device 1600, which are opened during the jackpot game, are arranged in the right side area of the game board 13, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, the second storage device 1600 may be provided in the left side region of the game board 13 (the left side of the variable display device unit 80), and the first variable winning device 65 may be provided in the right side area of the game board 13. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to select the target area during the jackpot game, and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, the configuration of the right side region of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is an enlarged view of the region of the two-dot chain line XCVI of FIG. 95.

As shown in FIG. 96, a second storage device 1600 is provided in the right region of the game board 13. The second storage device 1600 includes a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 1601 to 8th flow path 1608) through which balls can flow down, a storage valve 1601a capable of storing balls flowing down the first flow path 1601, and a seventh. The specific general winning opening 630a where the ball flowing down the flow path 1607 can enter, the general winning opening 630b where the ball flowing down the fifth flow path 1605 or the eighth flow path 1608 can enter, and the flow path of the ball. A plurality of distribution members for distribution (first distribution member 900 to third distribution member 902) and a plurality of sensors for detecting the passage or storage state of a sphere (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, It has a passage sensor 1600c to 1600e).

Here, with reference to FIG. 96, various configurations of the second storage device 1600 will be described in detail. First, each flow path formed in the second storage device 1600 will be described. The second storage device 1600 is provided with a partition wall 1611 for partitioning the area in the second storage device 1600, and the left side of the partition wall 1611 in the second storage device 1600 (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 96). The first flow path 1601 is formed in the region of No. 1, and the second flow path 1602 is formed in the region on the right side of the front view (right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 96) of the partition wall 1611 in the second storage device 1600.

The first flow path 1601 is formed with a passage width (about 15 mm) through which one ball can pass, and the storage valve 1601a described above is provided in a downstream portion thereof.

As shown in FIG. 96, the first flow path 1601 is formed by a partition wall 1611 so as to have a length (about 40 mm) capable of storing four balls when the storage valve 1601a is closed. The surface of the partition wall 1611 forming the first flow path 1601 is formed in a substantially arc shape in order to guide the sphere flowing down the first flow path 1601 to the storage valve 1601a.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the first flow path 1601 from colliding with the storage valve 1601a while falling (naturally falling), and it is possible to prevent the storage valve 1601a from being damaged. It has the effect of being able to. Further, when the storage valve 1601a is changed to the open (release) position, there is an effect that the ball stored in the first flow path 1601 can be smoothly flowed down.

Then, the sphere flowing down the first flow path 1601 falls on the first distribution member 900. The first distribution member 900 has a third flow path 1603 formed on the left side of the front view of the first distribution member 900 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) and the right side of the front view of the first distribution member 900 (FIG. 96). The spheres can be alternately distributed to the 4th flow path 1604 formed on the right side from the viewpoint of. The detailed configuration of the first distribution member 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

The third flow path 1603 is formed by the second partition wall 1613 provided in the second storage device 1600 so that the flow direction on the downstream side is the direct downward direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). A third distribution member 902 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the three flow paths 1603 falls. The third distribution member 902 has a seventh flow path 1607 formed on the left side of the front view of the third distribution member 902 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) and the right side of the front view of the third distribution member 902 (FIG. 96). The spheres can be alternately distributed to the 8th flow path 1608 formed on the right side from the viewpoint of. Since the detailed distribution configuration of the third distribution member 902 is the same as that of the first distribution member 900 described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96, the second flow path 1602 formed in the region on the right side of the front view of the partition wall 1611 is restricted from the direct flow of the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 by the guide nail P1. In the state where the upper limit number (4) of spheres is stored in the first flow path 1601, when a new sphere flows into the second storage device 1600, it newly flows into the second storage device 1600. The formed sphere is formed so as to be guided by colliding with the sphere stored in the first flow path 1601.

Further, even when the upper limit number (4) of spheres is not stored in the first flow path 1601, the guide nail P1 and the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 95) collide with each other to prevent the spheres from colliding with each other. A ball that bounces off the rules is configured to allow it to flow down the second flow path 1602. Specifically, about 5% of the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 are configured to flow into the second flow path 1602. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, about 5% of the balls launched in the right-handed game flow into the second storage device 1600, and about 5% of the balls that flow into the second storage device 1600. 5% is configured to flow into the second flow path 1602.

Regarding the inflow ratio of the above-mentioned balls, the planting positions and inclinations of the plurality of nails (guide nails P1) planted on the game board 13 may be changed, or the partition wall 1611 may have a different shape (for example, the partition wall 1611). It can be adjusted by changing the shape (shape to widen the distance between the top of the guide nail P1).

The second flow path 1602 formed in this way is configured such that the spheres distributed to the fourth flow path 1604 by the first distribution member 900 join on the downstream side thereof. The second flow path 1602 and the fourth flow path 1604 are partitioned by the first partition wall 1611, and a sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 may join the fourth flow path 1604 or be the first. The lower end of the first partition wall 1611 is extended in order to prevent a situation in which the distribution member 900 comes into contact with the distribution member 900.

Further, as will be described in detail later, a working piece 900 g attached to the first distribution member 900 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 can come into contact with the second flow path 1602. The distribution order of the first distribution member 900 can be changed by contacting the ball flowing down with the working piece 900 g.

The sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 abuts on the second partition wall 1613 and flows down in the direct downward direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). It falls to the second distribution member 901. The second distribution member 901 has a fifth flow path 1605 formed on the left side of the front view of the second distribution member 901 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) and the right side of the front view of the second distribution member 901 (FIG. 96). The spheres can be alternately distributed to the sixth flow path 1606 formed on the right side from the viewpoint of. Since the detailed distribution configuration of the second distribution member 901 is the same as that of the first distribution member 900 described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The spheres distributed to the 5th flow path 1605 are guided so as to be able to enter the general winning opening 630b in the same manner as the spheres distributed to the 8th flow path. On the other hand, the spheres distributed to the sixth flow path 1606 pass through the opening (discharge port) 1610b and are discharged to the outside of the second storage device 1600.

Next, the configuration of the storage valve 1601a will be described with reference to FIG. 96. The storage valve 1601a has a closed position in which the ball cannot flow down (difficult) in the first flow path 1601 of the second storage device 1600 and a state in which the ball can flow down (easily) in the first flow path 1601. It is configured to be variable to the open position.

Specifically, the storage valve 1601a is positioned in the closed position by projecting toward the front view of the second storage device 1600 (front direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), and is located in the back direction of the front view of the second storage device 1600. It is composed of a shutter member located in the open position by being buried (in the back direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), and can be changed to the open position by setting the solenoid for the storage device 610 (see FIG. 99) to ON. It is configured to do.

The control for setting the solenoid 610 for the storage device to ON will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 111, but in the third embodiment, it is predetermined based on the execution of the jackpot game. The storage device solenoid 610 is set to be turned on at the same timing (for example, in the case of the jackpot A, 3 seconds after the jackpot game is executed).

Next, the configuration of the distribution device (first distribution member 900 to third distribution member 902) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. The second storage device 1600 has a first distribution member 900, a second distribution member 901, and a third distribution member 902 as distribution members capable of distributing balls in the left-right direction. The first distribution member 900 receives the ball flowing down from the first flow path 1601 at the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When the ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the first distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 96) due to the weight of the ball, and distributes the ball to the third flow path 1603. Here, the first distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees around each of the left and right sides, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c.

On the base body provided on the back side of the second storage device 1600, the base side magnet 900e is arranged at a position where the magnet 900b of the first distribution member 900 comes directly above (directly above from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). There is. The magnet 900b of the first distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 900e are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 900e is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip portion. The base side magnet 900e is arranged and fixed so that the tip portion thereof faces the first distribution member 900 side.

Like the base side magnet 900e, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the first distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 900e side. The base side magnet 900e and the first distribution unit 900 are at a position where the first distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodation unit 900a and the accommodation unit 900c is directly above (directly above from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). The magnet 900b is closest to the magnet 900b (the tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other, and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c faces directly upward. It will not stop at, and will be maintained at the position rotated to the left or right.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 900e repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates to the left to guide the ball to the third flow path 1603, and then the first distribution member 900. Can be prevented from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the sphere to the third flow path 1603, the accommodating portion 900c is in a state of facing upward, and then the sphere flowing down from the first flow path 1601 enters the accommodating portion 900c and becomes a sphere. Due to the weight, the first distribution member 900 rotates to the right and guides the sphere to the fourth flow path 1604. In this way, the first distribution member 900 can alternately guide the spheres flowing down from the first flow path 1601 to the third flow path 1603 and the fourth flow path 1604.

Here, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a case where the first distribution member 900 is stopped in a state where the accommodating portion 900c is rotated to a position facing upward. In this case, when the ball flows down from the first flow path 1601, the ball is housed in the accommodating portion 900c, the first distribution member 900 rotates clockwise due to the weight of the ball, and the ball is distributed to the fourth flow path 1604. Be done. After the sphere is distributed to the fourth flow path 1604 by the first distribution unit 900, the first distribution member 900 stops at a position where the accommodating unit 900a faces upward as shown in FIG. 97. After that, when the sphere flows down from the first flow path 1601, it is accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a, and the sphere is distributed to the third flow path 1603. Therefore, the spheres can be alternately distributed to the third flow path 1603 and the fourth flow path 1604. A third distribution member 902 is provided on the downstream side of the third flow path 1603, and a second distribution member 901 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 1602. Since the second distribution member 901 and the third distribution member 902 have the same distribution structure as the first distribution member 900 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, a working piece 900 g is provided in the lower part of the first distribution member 900 (on the side of the second flow path 1602), and the first distribution member 900 is rotated to a position where the accommodating portion 900c is directed upward. When stopped in the state (see FIG. 96), the sphere is configured to come into contact with the actuating piece 900g as it passes through the second flow path 1602. Therefore, when the sphere passes through the second flow path 1602, the sphere comes into contact with the working piece 900g, so that the first distribution member 900 rotates clockwise and the accommodating portion 900a faces upward (see FIG. 97). ) Will stop.

With this configuration, the first distribution member 900 can change its rotation position without performing an operation of distributing the balls flowing down from the first flow path 1601. Therefore, the direction in which the balls of the first distribution member 900, which is configured to distribute the balls alternately and regularly, can be randomized, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the distribution destination of the balls. It has the effect of being able to.

Next, a plurality of winning openings (specific general winning opening 630a and general winning opening 630b) provided in the second storage device 1600 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a specific general winning opening (probability changing winning opening) 630a. The specific general winning opening (probability changing winning opening) 630a is configured so that the privilege given depends on the timing at which the ball enters. Specifically, during the jackpot game, if a ball enters while the first variable winning device 65 is open (during the probability variation winning valid period), a predetermined number of prize balls (one in the present embodiment). Is given, and after the jackpot game is completed, a probability fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variation state) in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set high is given.

On the other hand, if the ball enters at any other timing (during the normal game state or the big hit game, while the first variable winning device 65 is not open (during the probability variation winning invalid period)), a predetermined number of balls are entered. Only a prize ball (one in this embodiment) is awarded.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released differs depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 100b, but when a specific jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) is selected, the opening period from the start of the jackpot game to the opening of the first variable winning device 65. The storage valve 1601a is released at the timing (3 seconds after the start of the big hit) when the ball stored by the storage valve 1601a during the (probability change winning invalid period) enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

On the other hand, when a jackpot type other than a specific jackpot type (for example, jackpot B) is selected, the jackpot game is started and stored during the period when the first variable winning device 65 is open (probability variable winning valid period). The storage valve 1601a is released at the timing (10 seconds after the start of the big hit) when the ball stored by the valve 1601a enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

As a result, it is possible to make the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a different depending on the jackpot type selected when the ball is won in the state where the ball is stored in the storage valve 1601a. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the timing at which the storage valve is released after winning the jackpot, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the third embodiment, the release timing of the storage valve 1601a is set differently according to the jackpot type, but the timing at which the ball stored by the storage valve 1601a enters the specific general winning opening 630a. Can be set as a period during which the first variable winning device 65 has not started to be opened (probability variation winning invalid period) and a period during which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (probability variation winning valid period). Often, for example, the release timing of the storage valve 1601a may be fixed, and the length of the opening period of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game may be set to be different for each jackpot type. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a depending on the jackpot type, as in the third embodiment.

Further, depending on the jackpot type, both the release timing and the opening period of the storage valve 1601a may be set differently, and conditions other than the jackpot type (for example, the gaming state when the jackpot is won (normal game)) may be set. The release timing of the above-mentioned storage valve 1601a and the opening period in the jackpot game may be set differently depending on the state, the probabilistic game state, etc.)). As a result, it is possible to complicate the timing of entering the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a when the jackpot is won, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing of entering the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, if the timing of the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a is during the probabilistic winning prize valid period, the probabilistic state is given after the jackpot ends. The probabilistic winning valid period is specifically the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open (round game period) and the end condition of one round (10 balls are entered or 30 seconds have elapsed. ) Is established and the period (interval period) from the establishment of the first variable winning device 65 to the opening of the first variable winning device 65 in the next round is included.

Therefore, even during the interval period during the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is closed), when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, a probable change state is given after the jackpot game ends. Will be done. That is, in the configuration used in the third embodiment, the big hit is caused by the ball passing through the specific winning opening (for example, the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65) opened during the big hit game. It is possible to set a period (a period during which the probability change state can be given) that is continuously advantageous to the player during the jackpot game, as compared with the case where the specific area to which the probability change state is given is provided after the end.

Further, in the third embodiment, the specific winning opening (for example, the first variable winning device 65) is opened during the jackpot game in a specific area (specific general winning opening 630a) to which a probabilistic state can be given by passing the ball. Since it is provided in a place other than the specific winning opening 65a), it is in a probable change state due to a ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, that is, a ball (waste ball) that had no merit for the player in the past. A game will be played to determine whether or not the player can win. As a result, during the jackpot game, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 65 to acquire a prize ball and a game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a to acquire a probable change state are simultaneously advanced. Is possible. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a plurality of playability to the player at the same time, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, like the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the specific general winning opening 630a are located at positions where winning can be achieved in a game aiming at the same area (in this embodiment, a right-handed game). It is good to provide. By doing so, it is possible to easily and simultaneously advance a plurality of games to the player.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, even if the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the right side region and the specific general winning opening 630a is provided in the normal game area (left side region). good. As a result, during the round period during the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open), the right-handed game is performed, and the interval period (the end condition of one round (10 balls or 30 balls)) is performed. During the period from the establishment of the second) to the opening of the first variable winning device 65 in the next round), a normal game (left-handed game) is performed, and the ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be configured to execute a game of making a ball.

This makes it possible to complicate the game during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the monotonous game.

Further, the general prize opening 630b provided in the second storage device 1600 is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out when the balls enter.

Next, the flow of the sphere that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG. 96 is an enlarged view of the region surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI of FIG. 95, and is a diagram showing an example of a case where the storage valve 1601a is in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 96, the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 flows down the first flow path 1601 and stays (stores) on the storage valve 1601a located in the closed state. The first flow path 1601 is configured so that four spheres can be stored, and the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 with the four spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 are the first flow. It comes into contact with the sphere stored in the road 1601 and flows down to the second flow path 1602 (see the arrow in the figure).

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 96, the first distribution member 900 is in a state of rotating to the left side, and the actuating piece 900 g is located at a position where the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 abuts. The sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 pushes 900 g of the working piece up in the traveling direction of the sphere (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 96).

Here, the state after the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 pushes up the actuated piece 900 g will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is an enlarged view of the region surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI of FIG. 95, and is a diagram showing an example in which the state of FIG. 96 is advanced. As shown in FIG. 97, in the state shown in FIG. 96, the actuating piece 900 g attached to the first distribution member 900 is pushed up by the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602, and the first distribution member 900 is rotated to the right. It changes to a moving state. In the state where the first distribution member 900 is rotated to the right, the actuated piece 900 g moves to a position where the sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 does not abut (slightly abuts), so that the second flow. The first distribution member 900 does not rotate to the left due to the ball flowing down the path 1602.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the direction in which the first distribution member 900 distributes the sphere can be changed by the sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602. Further, when the first distribution member 900 is varied by the sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602, the first distribution member 900 is in a state of rotating to the right. The state in which the first distribution member 900 is rotated to the right is a state in which the ball dropped on the first distribution member 900 is distributed to the left side, which is advantageous to the player in the third embodiment. It is possible to reduce the number of balls required to put a ball into the specific general winning opening 630a.

More specifically, the spheres that enter the specific general winning opening 630a are the spheres that have flowed down into the first flow path 1601, the third flow path 1603, and the seventh flow path 1607. First, the sphere flowing down the first flow path 1601 is distributed to the third flow path 1603 by the first distribution member 900 with a probability of 1/2, and the sphere flowing down the third flow path 1603 is distributed to the third flow path 1603. By the member 902, it is distributed to the 7th flow path 1607 with a probability of 1/2.

That is, in order to ensure that the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 1601 enter the specific general winning opening 630a, it is necessary to allow a maximum of four balls to flow down. However, by keeping the first distribution member 900 in a state of rotating to the right, the ball that first fell into the first distribution member 900 is distributed to the third flow path 1603, so that the specific general prize is surely won. The number of balls required to enter the mouth 630a can be set to 3, and the number of balls required to enter the specific general winning opening 630a can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 97, the explanation will be continued. The sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 1602 falls on the second distribution member 901. In the state shown in FIG. 97, since the second distribution member 901 is rotating to the right, the ball that has fallen into the second distribution member 901 is distributed to the fifth flow path 1605, and the general winning opening 630b Enter the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a state in which the storage valve 1601a is changed to an open (released) state and a ball stored in the first flow path 1601 flows down will be described. FIG. 98 is an enlarged view of the region surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI of FIG. 95, and is a diagram showing an example of a case where the storage valve 1601a is opened (released) in the state of FIG. 97.

As shown in FIG. 98, when the storage valve 1601a is opened, the balls (4 pieces) stored in the first flow path 1601 flow down to the first distribution member 900. In the third embodiment, the first flow path 1601 is formed so that the interval at which the spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 reach the first distribution member 900 is 0.5 seconds apart. Has been done.

In the state shown in FIG. 98, among the balls stored in the first flow path 1601, the ball stored first (the ball stored on the most downstream side) wins a prize in the specific general winning opening 630a. As described above, the first distribution member 900 and the third distribution member 902 are located.

The time required for the ball stored on the most downstream side of the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is 1.5 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is opened (released). be. Further, as described above, since the interval at which the spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 reach the first distribution member 900 is 0.5 seconds, they are stored in the first flow path 1601. The time required for the second ball (the second ball from the downstream side) to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is 2 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is opened (released). Similarly, the storage valve 1601a opens (releases) the time required for the third ball (third ball from the downstream side) stored in the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. ), And the time required for the fourth ball (top ball) stored in the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is the storage valve 1601a. It has been 3 seconds since was opened (released).

As described above, in the present embodiment, four balls can be stored in the first flow path 1601 in the second storage device 1600, and the balls are surely stored in the specific general winning opening 630a. It is configured so that a maximum of four first flow paths 1601 must flow down in order to allow the ball to enter the ball. Therefore, by storing the balls up to the upper limit (4 pieces) in the second storage device 1600, the balls can be surely put into the specific general winning opening 630a when the storage valve 1601a is opened (released).

As a result, for example, even if the reserved storage number of the special symbol reaches the upper limit, the player can be made to continuously play the game in order to store the ball in the second storage device 1600, and the operation of the game can be performed. It has the effect of being able to increase.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls that can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a is configured to be able to be stored, but for example, the upper limit number that can be stored may be three. In this case, when the storage valve 1601a is opened (released) due to the rotational state of each distribution member (first distribution member 900 and third distribution member 902), a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. Since whether or not to play the ball changes, the player can watch the flow of the ball and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

Further, in this case, by letting the ball flow down to the second flow path 1602, the rotation position of the first distribution member 900 is set to a rotation position advantageous to the player (a position rotating to the right side). , The number of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 are first guided to the first flow path 1601 and stored in the first flow path 1601, but the second storage device 1600 A plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can flow down are provided between the opening 1610a and the region where the sphere can be stored (first flow path 1601), and a part of the sphere that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 is stored. It may be configured as such, or a distribution means (means for randomly distributing balls) other than the configuration in which the balls are regularly distributed between the area where the balls can be stored and the specific general winning opening 630a like a distribution member. ) May be provided.

By using such a configuration, the flow of balls in the second storage device 1600 can be complicated, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting tired of the monotonous game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 900 is provided with a working piece 900g, and the ball flows down the second flow path 1602 to move the first distribution member 900 to a rotation position advantageous to the player ( Although the configuration of rotating) is used, a similar working piece may be provided on other distribution members. Further, the distribution member may be rotated to a rotation position which is disadvantageous to the player by operating the working piece.

As a result, even when a distribution member capable of regularly distributing spheres is used, the flow of spheres can be complicated. Further, since the balls flow down through the plurality of flow paths in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to change the number required for the balls to enter the specific general winning opening 630a, so that the number is as small as possible. It is possible to continuously play the game so that the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a by the number of balls, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Next, various sensors (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, passage sensor 1600c to 1600e) provided in the second storage device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. The signals output from various sensors (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, passage sensor 1600c to 1600e) provided in the second storage device 1600 are output to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, and are output thereof. The number of balls that flowed into the second storage device 1600 based on the signal, the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600, the number of balls that passed through the flow path in the second storage device 1600, and the second storage device. It is configured so that the number of balls stored in 1600 can be managed.

The inflow detection sensor 1600a is a sensor that detects a ball passing through the opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600. Based on the signal output from the inflow detection sensor 1600a, the number of balls that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 can be grasped.

Next, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b is a sensor that detects that the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 of the second storage device 1600 has reached the upper limit amount (4 pieces). This upper limit detection sensor is configured to output a detection signal when a sphere to be detected is continuously detected for a predetermined time (2 seconds). This prevents the detection signal from being erroneously output when the sphere passes through the first flow path 1601, and reliably detects the state in which the sphere is accumulated (retained) in the first flow path 1601. Can be done.

The pass sensor 1600c is a sensor that detects that a sphere has passed through the first flow path 1601, the pass sensor 1600d is a sensor that detects that a sphere has passed through the second flow path 1602, and the pass sensor 1600e is an opening. It is a sensor that detects that a sphere has passed through the portion 1610b.

In this way, by providing a sensor for grasping the passage or storage status of the ball with respect to the second storage device 1600, for example, each winning opening (specific general winning opening 630a and general) provided in the second storage device 1600. By combining with the information indicating the number of balls entered into the winning opening 630b), it becomes possible to easily grasp that a problem such as ball clogging has occurred in the second storage device 1600.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b can detect that the sphere stored in the first flow path 1601 has reached the upper limit. For example, the sphere stored in the first flow path 1601 can be detected. The detection sensor may be arranged so that the number of the sensors can be grasped. This makes it possible to grasp the storage status of the spheres in the second storage device 1600 in more detail.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the third embodiment is such that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The configuration of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the flow path solenoid 611 connected to the input / output port of the main control device 110 has been deleted, and the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 has various types. The difference is that the sensor group (inflow detection sensor 1600a to passage sensor 1600e) is electrically connected. Since other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the third embodiment, various sensor groups 229 are electrically connected to the input / output port 225. In the various sensor group 229, the upper limit is the number of balls stored by the inflow detection sensor 1600a for detecting the inflow of balls into the second storage device 1600 and the storage valve 1601a provided in the second storage device 1600. An upper limit detection sensor 1600b for detecting that the sensor has reached, a passage sensor 1600c for detecting a sphere passing through the first flow path 1601 in the second storage device 1600, and a second flow path 1602 in the second storage device 1600. It is composed of a passing sensor 1600d that detects a passing ball and a passing sensor 1600e that detects a ball passing through the sixth flow path 1606 in the second storage device 1600, and the detection signals from the various sensors described above are voice lamps. It is output to the control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 makes it possible to determine whether or not the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 is normally discharged by receiving the detection signals output from the various sensors described above. Specifically, the number of balls that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 is calculated based on the signal output from the inflow detection sensor 1600a. Then, based on the signal output from the passage sensor 1600e, the number of balls passing through the sixth flow path 1606, that is, the number of balls discharged to the outside of the second storage device 1600 is calculated.

Further, the number of balls entered into the specific general winning opening 630a and the general winning opening 630b is calculated based on the winning information command output from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to compare the total number of spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 with the total number of spheres that have been discharged from the second storage device 1600. More specifically, the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 are calculated in chronological order, and a predetermined time difference (about 5 seconds), that is, If the increase / decrease in the number of balls matches with the time difference of the time spent for the game balls to flow normally in the second storage device 1600, it is determined to be normal.

Further, since a maximum of four balls can be stored in the second storage device 1600, the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 in a normal gaming state (a state in which the storage valve 1601a is closed). When comparing the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 with the number of balls discharged, an error of four balls is allowed, and in the jackpot game state (state in which the storage valve 1601a is open), the first 2 Since there are no balls stored in the storage device 1600, it is advisable to perform a comparison without considering the above-mentioned tolerance (4 balls).

Further, by providing a sensor capable of detecting the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to easily grasp the existence of balls illegally staying in the second storage device 1600.

For example, it is specified when the ball is intentionally retained in the second storage device 1600 and a state advantageous for the player (a state in which a probability change is given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a). One ball in the general winning opening 630b, which is set to pay out more prize balls than other general winning openings (general winning opening 63) by inserting a ball into the general winning opening 630a. It is possible to discover the act of repeatedly entering the ball.

The method of monitoring the ball flow in the second storage device 1600 based on the above-mentioned various signals is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. In the present embodiment, the total number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the total number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 are calculated to determine the presence or absence of balls staying in the second storage device 1600. Although it is possible, for example, the number of balls flowing down the first flow path 1601, the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 1603, the number of balls flowing down the fourth flow path 1604, and the specific general winning opening 630a are entered. Even if the number of balls is calculated and it is determined whether or not a ball that can enter the specific general winning opening 630a (a ball that has flowed down the first flow path 1601a) is retained in the second storage device 1600. good. When the configuration is used in this way, the open / closed state of the storage valve 1601a and, when the storage valve 1601a is closed, the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 can be calculated by the storage valve 1601a. It is good to set it to. As a result, it is necessary to properly grasp the situation in which the ball is illegally entered into the winning opening (specific general winning opening 630a) which is most advantageous to the player among the winning openings provided in the second storage device 1600. Is possible.

In the above-mentioned example, the illegal entry into the specific general winning opening 630a is targeted, but the illegal entry into the general winning opening 630b may be targeted.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (a). FIG. 100A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, the contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed and the open scenario setting table 202e is added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. It differs in that it is.

Here, the first type selection table 202b in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (b). FIG. 100B is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection table 202b in the third embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment adds a jackpot C as a jackpot type to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) in the first embodiment described above, and each of them. The difference is that the contents specified in the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) have been changed and the hit of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) has been changed. However, the other configurations are the same as those of the type selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Is stipulated. This jackpot A is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 8 rounds and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened is set 3 seconds after the start of the jackpot. The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". This jackpot B is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened is set 10 seconds after the start of the jackpot. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99", the jackpot C is associated and defined. This jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for two rounds and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened is set one second after the start of the jackpot.

In this way, since the number of rounds in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened are set according to the jackpot type, the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is set. It is possible to give different advantageous states to the player.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, the jackpot B is associated and defined in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is associated and defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 99". There is. Since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C specified corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the special symbol 1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 50%, the jackpot B is selected at 20%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 30%. If the player wins, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 20%, the jackpot B is selected at 70%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 (b), but among the jackpot A to the jackpot C, the ball stored in the storage valve 1601a during the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. The jackpots B and C are the jackpots for which the storage valve 1601a is released at the timing when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

The total ratio of the jackpot B and the jackpot C is set to be 50% when the jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 and 80% when the jackpot is won in the special symbol 2. That is, the special symbol game using the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player (the probability variation state is likely to be given) than the special symbol game using the special symbol 1.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned content is only the ratio of the balls stored by the storage valve 1601a entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 during the big hit game. That is, as in the third embodiment, when the specific general winning opening 630a is provided at a position where the ball launched in the right-handed game executed during the big hit game can enter, the big hit game is in progress. There is a possibility that a ball fired at the ball (a ball that is not stored in the storage valve 1601a) enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

As a result, when the ball stored in the storage valve 1601a enters the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing other than the timing when the probability change state can be given, or when the big hit is won in the state where the ball is not stored in the storage valve 1601a. Even if there is, it is possible to enter the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game. In this case, since the number of balls fired during the jackpot game increases as the jackpot game period is longer, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101A is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third embodiment. The variation pattern selection table 202d includes the normal medium jackpot table 202d1 in which the variation pattern when the special symbol jackpot is won among the variation patterns of the special symbol in the normal gaming state, and the special symbol in the normal gaming state. Of the fluctuation patterns, the normal center-out table 202d2, which defines the fluctuation pattern when the special symbol jackpot is not won, and the special symbol jackpot among the fluctuation patterns of the special symbol in the time-saving (probability change) gaming state. Of the time-saving (probability variation) medium jackpot table 202d3 in which the variation pattern when winning is specified, and the variation pattern of the special symbol in the time-saving (probability variation) gaming state, the variation pattern when the special symbol jackpot is not won is The specified time saving (probability variation) middle / out table 202d4 is set.

In each table 202d1 to 202d4, for example, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. As a variation pattern for big hits, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 101 (b) and 101 (c), the fluctuation pattern referred to in the time-saving (probability variation) gaming state will be described in detail. FIG. 101 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving (probability-changing) medium-big hit table 202d3, and FIG. 101 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving (probability-changing) middle-out table 202d4.

First, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), as the variation type corresponding to the case where the jackpot is won during the time saving (probability variation) game, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the hit is normal. 5 seconds) is specified in association with each other, and as a variation type corresponding to the case where a big hit is won during a time saving (probability variation) game, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is a hit in the range of "100 to 198". Long (60 seconds) is associated and specified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 150" as the variation type corresponding to the case where the jackpot is not won during the time saving (probability variation) game. Normal (3 seconds) is associated and specified, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "151 to 198" as the variation type corresponding to the case where the jackpot is not won during the time saving (probability variation) game. Is specified in association with the off-long (60 seconds).

In this way, during the time-saving (probability change) game, the fluctuation pattern in which the relatively short fluctuation time is defined is set so that it is easy to select, and the number of fluctuations per unit time is larger than that in the normal gaming state. It is set. Although not shown, the normal medium-sized jackpot table 202d1 and the normal medium-sized hit table 202d2 define a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a normal fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, as described above, the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be selected even during the time reduction (probability change). This is a time provided for the player to perform an effect of inciting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the right-handed game is executed during the time reduction (probability change), it is a game state in which a plurality of balls can be stored by the storage valve 1601a which is in the closed state. In this storable game state, if the next big hit is won in a short period of time, the big hit game may be started without the balls being stored in the storage valve 1601a.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be executed while the time is shortened (probability change). As a result, the jackpot is won in a short period of time during the game state in which the ball can be stored in the storage valve 1601a (probability change), and the jackpot game is started without the ball being stored in the storage valve 1601a. It has the effect of suppressing the storage.

The configuration used in the third embodiment may be used as long as it is configured to prevent the gaming state in which the ball can be stored in the storage valve 1601a from ending in a short period of time. For example, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time may be set from the start of the time saving (probability variation) state until the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), or the special symbol may be set. A fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time may be set only when the winning result of is a big hit. Further, it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time until the number of balls stored by the storage valve 1601a reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), and when the fluctuation time reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the fluctuation time is reached. May be configured to facilitate the selection of short variation patterns.

Next, the open scenario setting table 202e in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario setting table 202e in the third embodiment. The open scenario setting table 202e defines the setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the first hit type selection table 202b and the gaming state (usually, probability variation) when the jackpot is won.

Here, the open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1 defined in the open scenario setting table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1. This open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the normal game state, and corresponds to the selected jackpot type, the opening period, the inter-round interval period, and the ending in the jackpot game. Each period is set.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is set to "10 seconds", the interval period is set to "4 seconds", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is jackpot B. In this case, the opening period is set to "1 second", the interval period is set to "5 seconds", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds". If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening period is "1 second". The interval period is set to "2 seconds" and the ending period is set to "1 second".

In this way, by changing the opening period, interval period, and ending period according to the jackpot type, it is possible to set the timing of entering the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game in a complicated manner. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), the open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202e2 is also set in the open scenario setting table 202e. FIG. 102 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202e2. This open scenario table (probability change) 202e2 is a table that is referred to when a big hit is won during the probability change (time reduction) state, and the set time is different from the above-mentioned open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1. The tables differ in that they are the same, otherwise they are the same table.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is set to "1 second", the interval period is set to "1 second", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is jackpot B. In this case, the opening period is set to "4 seconds", the interval period is set to "1 second", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds". If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening period is "1 second". The interval period is set to "20 seconds" and the ending period is set to "1 second".

With this configuration, if a jackpot is won during the probability change (time reduction), the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released is specified during the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is being opened during the jackpot game. It is the timing when the ball can enter the general winning opening 630a. Further, in the jackpot C, since the interval time between rounds is set to 20 seconds, the jackpot period is longer than the jackpot game when the jackpot C is selected in the jackpot won in the normal state, and the probability changes. It is possible to increase the probability that the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the period when the state can be granted.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the normal state. It is possible to make it easier to continuously provide an advantageous game state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment has an operation counter 203k, a remaining ball timer flag 203m, a remaining ball timer 203n, a probability change effective flag 203o, and a probability change effective timer provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. 203p has been deleted, and the timer 203r and the probability variation winning valid flag 203s have been added.

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving / medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag 203h is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 112). That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of the normal symbol 100 times is given.

The probability variation winning valid flag 203s is a flag for setting a period for granting a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game. If a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a while the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to ON, in addition to the payout of the prize ball (one in the present embodiment) preset as the general winning opening. , A probable change state is given after the jackpot game is over.

The probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to on when the first round is started in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) (S1156 in FIG. 111), and it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If (S1109: Yes in FIG. 111), it is set to off (S1157 in FIG. 111). If a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a when the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is not set to on (set to off), the winning ball preset as the general winning opening ( In this embodiment, one) is paid out.

Next, returning to FIG. 99, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. The ROM 222 in the third embodiment has an expectation display selection table 222b added to the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. The expected degree display selection table 222b will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 105.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, when the player wins the jackpot in the probability variation (time saving) state in which the right-handed game is executed with respect to the first embodiment described above, the probability variation state is given after the end of the current jackpot. An effect of displaying the degree of expectation (probability change degree of expectation display effect) has been added.

This probability variation expectation display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 104. First, with reference to FIG. 104 (a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the probable change (time reduction) state will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts as in the first embodiment described above, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640 is the holding ball. The number is displayed, and further, a "right-handed display (game guidance display)" indicating that the current game state is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed is displayed in the small area Ds3, and the small area Ds2 is displayed. Guidance (game guidance display) to the effect that it is advantageous for the player when the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 is a letter (“Chance when the ball enters the right warp”) and a figure (upper right area of the game board 13). It is magnified and displayed as a right warp (the figure showing the path through which the ball flows into the second storage device 1600) with an arrow).

By displaying the game guidance in this way, the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 (closed state) in addition to the game in which the player wins a big hit with a normal special symbol during the probability change (time reduction) state. It is possible to easily grasp that the game of storing the ball by the storage valve 1601a), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the game.

As the game guidance display in the probabilistic (time reduction) state, any configuration other than the configuration used in this embodiment may be used as long as the configuration guides the game in which the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 during the probabilistic (time reduction) state. good. For example, a display device (sub-display device) different from the display device that displays the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to display an effect according to the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the effect performed on the second display device may be lively. As a result, when the special symbol is out of order, the player pays attention to the sub-display device, so that it becomes difficult to recognize that the special symbol is out of the lottery.

Further, the content of the effect displayed on the sub-display device may be determined based on the result of pre-reading of the special symbol. Further, even if the display device (third symbol display device 81) on which the third symbol is displayed and the sub display device are configured to be movable, control to move each display device according to the game situation is executed. good.

This is advantageous for the player in the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of simultaneously executing a plurality of games (a game in which a big hit lottery is performed with a special symbol and a game in which a ball flows into the second storage device 1600). There is an effect that the player can be surely notified of the game result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104 (b), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state will be described. FIG. 104B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the special symbol jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state, the same numbers of the third symbols are displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, the degree of expectation that the probability change state is given after the end of this big hit game is displayed in the small area DS2 (“80%” in this figure).

Here, the probability variation expectation display displayed in the small area Ds2 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a predetermined period during the jackpot game (during the jackpot game (condition device is operating), while the first variable winning device 65 is being opened (operation of the accessory continuous operating device). When a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a in (middle))), a probable change state is given after the jackpot game is completed.

A storage valve 1601a is provided in the flow path (first flow path 1601) capable of entering the specific general winning opening 630a in the second storage device 1600, and the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 is provided. It is configured to be storable. This storage valve 1601a wins a jackpot with a special symbol, is released (opened) after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the case of jackpot A) has elapsed since the jackpot game was started, and a ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It becomes a state.

This second storage device 1600 is configured to be able to store up to four balls, and when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) and the first ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, the storage valve A flow path is formed so that the ball enters 1.5 seconds after the 1601a is released (opened). Next, when the second ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, two seconds after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened), the third ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. In this case, 2.5 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened), if the fourth ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) and then 3 A flow path is formed so as to enter the specific general winning opening 630a after a second.

That is, in the third embodiment, it is specified by the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 before the jackpot is won, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened), and the length of the jackpot game period. The degree of expectation that a ball enters the general winning opening 630a and a probable change state is given changes.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 104 (b). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the selected jackpot type and the ball storage information in the second storage device 1600 are based on the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m. Then, a numerical value specified in the expectation degree display selection table 222b, which will be described later, is selected, and the numerical value is displayed as a probability variation expectation degree in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, by displaying as a numerical value the degree of expectation that the probability change state will be given after the end of this big hit game when the jackpot is won, for example, when the probability change expectation is high, the player feels reassured. On the other hand, when the probability change expectation is low, the game of inflowing the ball into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game can be positively performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, instead of displaying the probability change expectation to the player in a state where it is decided in advance whether or not the probability change state is given, the specific general winning opening 630a is displayed at the timing when the probability change state can be actually given. Since the possibility that the ball will enter is displayed as the expected degree, it is possible to execute a numerical display with high reliability for the player.

In the third embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the winning jackpot and the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m are used as information when selecting the numerical value of the probability change expectation, but other information is used. It may be used to calculate the probability variation expectation. For example, the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 can be detected, and the number of balls information indicating the number of balls stored when the jackpot is won or the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 is provided. It is configured so that the distribution status of a plurality of distribution units can be detected, and the numerical value of the probability variation expectation degree is calculated using the ball number information indicating the number of balls required for the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be configured to be selected. In this way, by selecting the numerical value based on a plurality of information, the reliability of the numerical value of the probability variation expectation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is increased, and the player is notified of the highly reliable numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that a numerical value having a low reliability is displayed and the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Here, the expectation degree display selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the expectation degree display selection table 222b. The expectation degree display selection table 222b is a table referred to when the numerical value of the above-mentioned probability variation expectation degree display effect is selected with reference to FIG. 104 (b), and is a winning jackpot type and a special ball. Each numerical value is configured to be selected according to the setting status of the flow flag 223m and the value of the effect counter.

When the expectation degree display selection table 222b is won by a big hit (S5002: Yes) in the time saving medium display processing (S1852 in FIG. 118) described later, and it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to ON (S5002: Yes). S5003: No), referred to (S5005).

Specifically, when the winning jackpot type is jackpot A and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the production counter is set to "50" corresponding to the range of "0 to 159". , "40" is set corresponding to the range of "160 to 198". In addition, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to off in the jackpot A, the value of the effect counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "40" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". Then, "50" is set respectively.

If the winning jackpot type is jackpot B and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the production counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "80" is set to "160". "60" is set corresponding to the range of "to 198". Further, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to off in the jackpot B, the value of the effect counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "60" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". Then, "80" is set respectively.

Furthermore, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the production counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "20" is set to "160". "10" is set corresponding to the range of "to 198". Further, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to off in the jackpot C, the value of the effect counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159" and "10" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". Then, "20" is set respectively.

As described above, the expectation degree display selection table 222b is configured so that various numerical values are selected based on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won and the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m. .. Next, the numerical value indicating the probability variation expectation degree selected in the expectation degree display selection table 222b will be described.

If the jackpot is won in the probability change (time reduction) state, each period (opening period, inter-round interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game is set by the open scenario setting table (probability change) 202e2 (FIG. 102 (c)). reference). As described above, in the jackpot types from jackpot A to jackpot C, jackpot B is the jackpot type in which the probability change state is most likely to be given after the jackpot game ends, and then jackpot A and jackpot C are set in this order. ing.

Further, the special ball flow flag 223m, which will be described in detail later, indicates that the balls have flowed down the second flow path in a state where the maximum number of balls are not stored in the first flow path of the second storage device 1600. It is a flag, and when this special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, it indicates that the first distribution unit 900 in the second storage device 1600 is in a position to guide the ball to the left side. be. Therefore, it indicates that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a by passing at most three balls through the first distribution unit 900.

In this way, since the numerical value indicating the probabilistic change expectation degree is selected based on the determination result of how much the condition that makes it easy to give the probabilistic change state to the player is satisfied, the numerical value having high reliability should be displayed to the player. Can be done.

Further, depending on the value of the effect counter, it is possible to select any numerical value when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to on or off. This is to prevent the player from surely grasping the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m. This has the effect of allowing the player to entertain whether or not the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a when the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

Even if the jackpot C, which has the lowest probability variation expectation value in the probability variation expectation display selection table 222b, is won in the probability variation (time reduction) state, the interval period between rounds is set to 20. (See FIG. 102 (c)). This is 10 times longer than the case where the jackpot C is won in the normal game state. As a result, the period of the jackpot game becomes longer, which increases the possibility that the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

In this way, even if the numerical value selected in the probability variation expectation display selection table 222b is low, by allowing the ball to flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game, it is possible to reach the specific general winning opening 630a by itself. Since it is possible to insert the ball, the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the entrance of the second storage device 1600 is provided in the same area as the first variable winning device 65 (the area aimed at in the right-handed game) opened during the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can simultaneously perform a game aiming at both the first variable winning device 65 and the second storage device 1600 by performing a right-handed game during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved during the big hit game.

Further, a right-handed game is performed during the jackpot game, and each device (first variable winning device 65 and second storage) so that most of the balls that did not flow into the second storage device 1600 enter the first variable winning device 65. Since the device 1600) is arranged, it is possible to suppress the game aiming at only the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

Further, since it is possible to allow the ball to flow into the second storage device 1600 even during the inter-round interval in which the first variable winning device 65 is closed during the jackpot game, the player fires the ball during the inter-round interval. It is possible to prevent the act from being stopped.

Returning to FIG. 99, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the RAM 223 in the third embodiment, the winning count counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment has been deleted, and a storage upper limit flag 223k, a special ball flow flag 223m, and a storage valve opening flag 223n have been added. ing.

The storage upper limit flag 223k is a flag indicating that the number of spheres stored in the second storage device 1600 has reached the upper limit. Specifically, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b (see FIG. 96) provided on the upstream side of the first flow path shown in FIG. 96 detects that the upper limit has been reached by detecting the retention of the sphere. This storage condition flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined in the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 117) that the storage sphere is the upper limit (S4904 in FIG. 117), and the command determination process 3 (S145 in FIG. 115). In S1811), it is set to off when an opening command is received (S3911 in FIG. 115).

The special ball flow flag 223m is a flag indicating that the ball has passed through the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) in a state where the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to ON. Specifically, the sensor 1600d (see FIG. 96) passes through the sphere flowing down the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) due to the bounce of the sphere even though the first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96) has a space for storing the sphere. This is a flag that is set to ON when (see 96) is detected. The special ball flow flag 223m is determined in the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 117) that the storage ball is not the upper limit (S4902: No in FIG. 117), and the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) is sphered. Is set to on (S4907 in FIG. 117) when it is determined that has passed (flowed down) (S4905: Yes in FIG. 117), and turned off when an opening command is received in the command determination process (S1811 in FIG. 115). It is set (S3912 in FIG. 115). Then, it is referred to when the numerical value displayed in the probability variation expectation display effect is selected based on the expectation display selection table 222b by the time saving medium display process (S1852 in FIG. 118) (S5005 in FIG. 118).

In the third embodiment, even if the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96) has not reached the upper limit (4), the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 are still present. Since the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) is configured to flow down (about 5%), the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223 m is used for the production. For example, the first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96) When the flow path is formed so that the balls do not flow down the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) when the number of balls stored in (see FIG. 96) has not reached the upper limit. When this special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the abnormality notification may be performed.

The storage valve opening flag 223n is a flag indicating that the storage valve is open, and is specifically set to ON when a storage valve opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S3914 in FIG. 115). , Set to off when a storage valve closing command is received from the main controller 110 (S3915 in FIG. 115). While the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON, the storage state determination process (S1851) shown in FIG. 117 is skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the load of control processing.

In the third embodiment, the storage state determination process (S1851) is skipped while the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON. For example, the storage valve opening flag 223n is configured to be skipped. The first flow is when the storage upper limit sensor 1600b (see FIG. 96) detects the stagnation of a sphere even though is set to on, or when the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to off. When it is detected that a sphere passes through the road, a process for determining an abnormality may be executed. By executing such a process, it is possible to easily grasp the operation abnormality of the storage valve 1601a or the fraudulent activity in the second storage device 1600.

Further, by providing a sensor (state detection sensor) capable of actually detecting the operating state (whether or not the storage valve 1601a is in the open (released) state), the main control device 110 executed the storage valve 1601a. It is possible to compare and grasp the operation instruction and the actual operating state of the storage valve 1601a, and it is possible to separately grasp the operation abnormality of the storage valve 1601a and the fraudulent activity in the second storage device 1600. It will be possible.

In the third embodiment, the process of intensively monitoring the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a is used, but the ball entering another winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 630b) is used. You may provide a process to monitor.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the flow of operation of each device in the jackpot game of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 (a) is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state (normal state) and the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, and FIG. 106 (b) is a probability variation. It is a timing chart which shows the operation of each apparatus when a jackpot is won in a game state (probability change state), and jackpot A is selected as a jackpot type.

First, the operation of each device when the jackpot is won in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (a). The jackpot A is a jackpot of 8 rounds as shown in FIG. 100 (b), and the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) 3 seconds after the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot A is selected in the normal state, the opening period is set to 10 seconds, the inter-round interval period is set to 4 seconds, and the ending period is set to 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 102 (b).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the storage device (storage valve 1601a) is opened at the timing when the jackpot game is started and 3 seconds have passed. Since this timing is still in the opening period of the big hit, the probability change state is not given even if the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. Even if the upper limit of four balls is stored in the second storage device 1600, the storage device (storage valve 1601a) is in the open state for the time when the fourth ball reaches the specific general winning opening 630a. Since it is configured to be 3 seconds after the start of the game, even if the player performs an act of storing the ball in the second storage device 1600 to the upper limit in the normal state, the stored ball causes a probable change state. Is not given.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being performed in the normal state, and the time saving state ends in the state where the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 during the time saving state, which is normal. When the state is changed, the game can be ended without worrying about the balls stored in the second storage device 1600.

Then, 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started, the large opening (first variable winning device 65) is opened and the first round (round game) is started. From the start of the opening operation of the large opening (first variable winning device 65) during the jackpot game to the end of the final round (8th round) (from the start of the first round), the specific general winning opening When the ball enters the 630a, the probability change state is given after the end of the jackpot game (probability change prize valid period), and the probability change prize valid flag 203s is set to on during that period (see FIG. 111). ).

The round game ends when a predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined number (10) of balls have entered the large opening (first variable winning device 65), and the inter-round interval (4) Seconds) and then move on to the next round game. During this inter-round interval period, the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and it is impossible (difficult) to allow the ball to enter the first variable winning device 65, but the ball is moved to the second storage device 1600. The right-handed game will continue to be executed in order to make it flow.

As described above, when the jackpot A is selected in the normal state, even if the balls are stored in the second storage device 1600, the stored balls will be the specified general winning opening during the probable change prize validity period. Since it is configured so that it does not enter the 630a, if the ball is not allowed to flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game and the ball is not entered into the specific general winning opening 630a, it is in a probable change state after the jackpot game is completed. Is a jackpot that is not given (a jackpot that is not advantageous to the player).

On the other hand, when the jackpot B is selected in the normal state, the ball stored in the second storage device 1600 is configured to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning validity period, and further, the jackpot is configured. Since 16 rounds, which are longer than the jackpot A (8 rounds), are set as the period of the game, the jackpot is a jackpot (a jackpot advantageous to the player) that is more likely to be given a probable change state after the jackpot game is completed than the jackpot A.

Next, the operation of each device when a big hit is won in the probabilistic gaming state (probability change state) will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (b). When the jackpot A is selected in the probabilistic state, the opening period is set to 1 second, the inter-round interval period is set to 1 second, and the ending period is set to 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 102 (c).

By setting in this way, the ball stored in the second storage device 1600 will enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning valid period. Therefore, when the jackpot is selected in the probabilistic state, the jackpot is likely to be given the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends (a jackpot advantageous to the player).

Further, since the interval period between rounds is set to 1 second and is set shorter than when the jackpot A is selected in the normal state (4 seconds), the period of the jackpot game, especially the first variable winning device 65. It is set so that the period during which the ball does not enter is shortened and the jackpot game can be executed in a short period of time.

That is, in the jackpot game in the probabilistic state, the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 while the right-handed game is being executed in the probabilistic state, and when the jackpot game is started, the stored ball wins the probabilistic change. The main game is to keep the probabilistic state by entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the valid period.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, in order to prevent the jackpot from being won in a short period of time during the probabilistic state, the variation having a long variation time (60 seconds) as the variation time of the special symbol during the probabilistic state. The pattern is set to be selected (see FIG. 101).

In addition to the fluctuation time of the special symbol, for example, the ending period of the jackpot may be set to be long in order to prevent the jackpot from being won in a short period of time during the probability change state. In this case, even if the ending period is set long if the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning valid period, and the ending period is set short if the ball does not enter. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the variation time is selected based on the game state and the value of the variation type counter CS1, but as another configuration, for example, a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state) is selected. ), The fluctuation time may be selected by referring to a special table (special selection table) until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times).

In this case, the fluctuation time specified in the special selection table may be longer than the fluctuation time specified in the table for selecting other fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds on average). As a result, since a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected for several rotations after shifting to a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state), it becomes easy to store the ball in the second storage device 1600.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the immediate transition to the normal gaming state even though the gaming state is favorable to the player (time saving state or probable change state). It has the effect of being able to.

Further, even if the jackpot is won without storing the balls in the second storage device 1600 during the probability change state, the balls flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game and enter the specific general winning opening 630a. Since it is possible to continue the probabilistic state by making the ball ball, it is not determined whether or not the probabilistic state is given after the big hit is completed until the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically perform the jackpot game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 113, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the contents of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) and the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (FIG. 111) are changed from the first embodiment. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment described above will be described, and other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be described. The detailed description of the process of is omitted.

First, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. Similar to the first embodiment, this timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example.

When the timer interrupt process is executed, the processes S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above. Next, the special symbol variation process 3 (S104) is executed. This special symbol variation processing 3 (S104) is different from the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above in that the detailed contents are partially changed, and the details are detailed. The description will be described later with reference to FIG. 108.

When the special symbol variation process 3 (S104) is completed, the processes S105 to S108 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and then the abnormal winning process (S151) is executed. This abnormal winning process (S151) is a process for determining whether or not the winning of the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a is normal, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 110. When the abnormal winning process is completed, the process of S109 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and then the process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 3 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 3 (S104). The difference between this special symbol variation processing 3 and the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above is that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S214: Yes), and the lottery result this time is a big hit. (S216: Yes) The point is that the content of the processing executed when it is determined to be is different. Since the other processes are the same as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 3 (S104) is executed, the processes from S201 to S216 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above. If it is determined in the process of S216 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 to S223 are executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), and this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), the open scenario setting process (S251) is executed. This opening scenario setting process (S251) is a process for setting each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game based on the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state when the jackpot is won. .. The detailed contents of this open scenario setting process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

When the open scenario setting process (S251) is completed, the process of S218 and S219 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, and then this process is terminated. Although not shown in this flowchart, a stop command indicating that the change of the special symbol is stopped is set after the processing of S219 and S223 is completed. This stop command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the command output process executed in the main process of the main control device 110. Upon receiving the stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 stops the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to match the stop timings of the special symbol and the third symbol.

Next, the opening scenario setting process (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the open scenario setting process (S251). In this open scenario setting process (S251), as described above, a process for setting each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game is executed.

When the open scenario setting process (S251) is executed, the type of the current jackpot is first acquired (S4701). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S103 (see FIG. 107) is selected from the first hit type selection table 202b.

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state in which the lottery for the special symbol is executed is normal (S4702). This means that the gaming state is the normal gaming state when the probability variation flag 203g is set to off at the timing when the processing of S216 (see FIG. 108) is performed and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0. When the probabilistic flag 203g is set to ON at the timing when the determination (S4702: Yes) and the processing of S216 (see FIG. 108) is performed, or when the value of the time saving counter 203r is larger than 0, the gaming state is changed. It is determined that the game is not in the normal gaming state (S4702: No).

If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the gaming state is not normal (S4702: No), the content of the opening scenario corresponding to the acquired jackpot type is set based on the opening scenario setting table (probability variation) 202e2 (S4702: No). S4703), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4702 that the gaming state is normal (S4702: Yes), the content of the opening scenario corresponding to the acquired jackpot type is input based on the opening scenario setting table (normal) 202e1. Set (S4704) and end this process. In this way, for each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game, different periods are set according to the game state (normal state or probable change (time reduction) state). Therefore, even if the same jackpot type is selected, different jackpot games will be executed according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to provide various jackpot games to the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, even during the big hit game, the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is during the opening period (the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is started). If it is not during the period), the probability change state is not given after the jackpot game, and the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game is during the round period (opening of the first variable winning device 65). Since the probability change state is given after the big hit game during the period during which the operation is executed), even if the same big hit type is selected, for example, depending on the game state. By setting different periods as the opening period, it is possible to change the probability that the probability change state will be given after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the abnormal winning process (S151) executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 107) of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal winning process (S151). This abnormal winning process (S151) is a process for determining whether the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a is normal or abnormal.

First, when the abnormal winning process (S151) is executed, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is being hit (S4801). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S4801: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage valve 1601a is open (S4802). Here, if it is determined that the storage valve 1601a is open (S4802: Yes), this process ends. That is, while the storage valve is open, the abnormal winning of the specific general winning opening 630a is not determined in this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4801 that the current is not a big hit (S4801: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the storage valve 1601a is not open (closed) ( S4802: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (winned) in the specific general winning opening 630a (S4803).

If it is determined in the process of S4803 that a ball has entered (winned) in the specific general winning opening (S4803: Yes), an error command is set (S4804), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4803 that the ball has not entered the specific general winning opening 630a (S4804: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, in the abnormal winning process (S151), it is always determined whether or not the ball has entered (winning) the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing other than during the big hit or at the timing when the storage valve 1601a is closed. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely grasp that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a at the timing when the ball does not enter (win) in a normal game.

Although not shown in detail, this abnormal winning process (S151) has a predetermined grace period from the execution of the determination of S4801 and S4802 to the determination of the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a. (4 seconds) is set. This is sufficient time for the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 to be discharged to the outside of the second storage device 1600.

By providing this predetermined grace period (4 seconds), even if the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 during the big hit enters (wins) the specific general winning opening 630a after the big hit, the winning is abnormal. There is no need to distinguish. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring abnormal winnings can be improved. In other words, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which an abnormal prize is mistakenly determined.

Further, the above-mentioned grace period may be controlled so that the determination of abnormal winning is not performed until the grace period elapses under any circumstances, and the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the second storage The remaining number of balls discharged to the outside of the device 1600 is compared, and even if a grace period remains at the time when it is determined that no balls remain in the second storage device 1600, the determination of abnormal winning is performed. Controls that reset the grace period may be used. As a result, since the grace period can be set as short as possible, it is possible to execute the determination of the abnormal winning for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring the abnormal winning.

The error command set in S4804 of this abnormal winning process (S151) is the voice lamp control device 113 or the external in the external output process (S1001 in FIG. 34) executed in the main process of the main control device 110. It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via an output device (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 inputs an error command, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies that an abnormality has occurred by using the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, or the lamp display device 227.

Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1004) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1004). The jackpot control process 4 has the content of control for opening the storage valve 1601a, the content of the ending process 3 (S1110), and the winning process 3 (S1111) with respect to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment described above. ) Is changed and the error handling (S1112 in FIG. 34) is deleted. Other processes are the same as the jackpot control process in the first embodiment. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the jackpot type is selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202b, and then each period (opening period, between rounds) in the jackpot game is referred to with reference to the open scenario setting table 202e. Interval period, ending period) is set. As a result, the operation timing of each device (the storage valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 and the first variable winning device 65) in this jackpot game is determined. Then, the jackpot game is executed by reading the operation scenario corresponding to this operation timing from the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and updating the operation scenario using a counter (not shown).

In this way, by setting the operation timing of each device (reservoir valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 and the first variable winning device 65) in one operation scenario in the jackpot game, the operation timing of each device, particularly each device. It has the effect of suppressing the deviation of the operating interval and appropriately executing the jackpot game.

Other control methods may be used as the control process during the jackpot game. For example, the operation control between the first variable winning device 65 and the storage valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 is controlled by using different counters. You may control it. This makes it possible to execute complicated operation patterns of each device executed during a jackpot by combining the operation control of each device, and reduce the amount of information (number of operation patterns) stored in advance. It has the effect of being able to.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 111. First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1004) is executed, it is determined whether the jackpot has started (S1101). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot has started (S1101: Yes), then the opening command is set (S1102), and this process ends. In the first embodiment described above, when it is determined that the jackpot has started, the storage valve is set to open (S1103 in FIG. 34), but in the third embodiment, the jackpot start timing and storage are set. It is determined that the jackpot has started because the storage valve 1601a is configured to be opened after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the case of jackpot A) has elapsed since the jackpot started, not at the same time as the opening timing of the valve 1601a. The storage valve 1601a is not opened in the processing executed when this is done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is not the timing at which the jackpot has started (S1101: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is currently in progress (S1104). Here, if it is determined that the current is not a big hit (S1104: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a (S1153).

The opening timing of the storage valve 1601a is specified according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 100 (b)), and the operation scenario updated by the counter (not shown) provided in the main controller 110 is the current operation scenario. When the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the jackpot is reached, it is determined that the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a is reached.

Here, if it is determined by the processing of S1151 that it is the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a (S1151: Yes), the solenoid for the storage device 610 (see FIG. 99) is set to be turned on in order to open the storage valve 1601a. (S1152). As a result, the storage valve 1601a is opened. Next, the storage valve open command is set (S1153), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1151 that the timing is not the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a (S1151: No), then a new jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above is performed. Determine if it is the start timing of the round. If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), a round number command indicating the newly started round is set (S1154), and then the number of newly started rounds is the first round. (S1155).

Here, if it is determined that the number of rounds newly started this time is the first round (S1155: Yes), the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (S1156), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1155, if it is determined that the number of rounds newly started this time is not the first round (S1155: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the third embodiment, a specific period (start of the first round) during the jackpot game (during the operation of the condition device) is set as a period in which a probabilistic state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a. The period from to the end of the final round (the period during which the continuous accessory actuator is operating) is set. Therefore, it is controlled to set the probability variation prize valid flag 203s, which is a flag indicating the period during which the probability variation state can be given (the probability variation prize validity period (see FIG. 106)), at the timing when the first round is started.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then, as in the above-mentioned jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 35), S1107 to The process of S1109 is executed. With reference to the opening scenario set in the processing of S1107, the variable operation (opening operation, closing operation) of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 is executed in the processing of S1108. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the winning process 3 is executed (S1111), and this process is terminated. The winning process 3 (S1111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 113.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (the start timing of the ending period) (S1109: Yes), then the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to off (S1157). The ending process 3 is executed (S1110). Then, this process is terminated. The ending process 3 (S1110) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 112.

As described above, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004) in the third embodiment, a process for determining the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a is provided separately from the jackpot start timing, and different timings are set for each jackpot type. The opening operation of the valve 1601a is configured to be appropriately feasible. In addition, the ending effect is started from the start timing of the first round by the probability variation prize valid flag 203s indicating the period during which the probability variation state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a (the final round ends). Until then, it is configured to be set to on.

Therefore, there is an effect that the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment can be properly executed and the interest of the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, the timing for setting the probability variation winning valid flag 203s to off is set as the start timing of the ending effect (start timing of the ending period), but the timing at which the final round ends can be determined so that the final round can be determined. When it is determined that the game has ended, the probability variation winning valid flag 203s may be set to off.

Further, when it is determined that the jackpot start timing is as in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above, the storage valve 1601a is set to be open and the storage device solenoid 610 is opened. The opening instruction of the storage valve 1601a may be output to the device (for example, the accessory control device) that controls the storage valve 1601a. In this case, the main control device 110 outputs the current jackpot type and the opening instruction of the storage valve 1601a to the accessory control device, and stores the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a corresponding to each jackpot type. On the control device side, the storage valve 1601a is opened at the opening timing corresponding to this jackpot. This has the effect of reducing the processing executed by the main control device 110.

Next, the ending process 3 (S1110) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 3 (S1110). The ending process 3 (S1110) is different from the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above in that a storage valve closing command is set, and the other processes are the same. The same processing as the ending processing (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the ending process 3 (S1110) is executed, the processes S1301 and S1302 are executed in the same manner as the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment, and then the storage valve closing command is set (S1351). Next, the processes of S1303 to S1308 are executed in the same manner as the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above, and this process is terminated.

The storage valve closing command set in the ending process 3 (S1110) is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the storage valve opening command set in S1153 of the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111). To. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the current operating state of the storage valve 1601a by inputting the storage valve open command and the storage valve closing command as the storage valve related commands. This makes it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the operating state of the storage valve 1601a. Therefore, an appropriate effect (for example, the third symbol display device) is given to the operating state of the storage valve 1601a, which plays an important role in determining whether or not a gaming state (probability changing state) advantageous to the player is given. By executing the effect displayed in 81), the player pays close attention to the effect of the pachinko machine 10, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets tired of the effect of the game at an early stage. ..

Next, the winning process 3 (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process 3 (S1111). The winning process 3 (S1111) is changed so that the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above is executed only when the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON. The control content has been changed so that the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on by passing (entering) the probability variation switch (specific general winning opening 630a) during the period when the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to on. It differs in that it is the same for other processes. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning process 3 (S1111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (S1451). If it is determined that the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is not on (off) (S1451: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is on (S1451: Yes), then the processing of S1402 to S1406 is executed in the same manner as the winning processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38). .. If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1452).

If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on in the process of S1452 (S1452: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if the probability variation setting flag 203h is not set to on (set to off). (Case) determines whether the ball has passed through the probability change switch (whether the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a) (S1410).

If it is determined in the process of S1410 that the ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the probability change switch (S1410: No), this process ends as it is.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the probability change switch is provided in the specific general prize opening 630a different from the first variable winning device 65 which is opened during the jackpot game, and further, the probability change prize valid flag 203s When the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a while is set to ON, the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, the process of setting the probability variation setting flag 203h to ON can be simplified as compared with the first embodiment.

Also in the third embodiment, the timing at which the probabilistic state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a as in the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above is set. A slight grace period (for example, 4 seconds) may be provided in addition to the period in which the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON. As a result, for example, if the ball has flowed into the second storage device 1600 while the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to on, it enters the specific general winning opening 630a after the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to off. A probabilistic state can be given by making a ball.

In this case, as the grace period given to the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s, the time during which the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 can reach the specific general winning opening 630a may be set, and the grace period is longer than this grace period. It is advisable to set the ending period of the jackpot game to be long. With this configuration, the jackpot game is in progress for a period in which a probabilistic state can be granted by a ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a (a period in which the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to ON and a grace period). Since it is possible to set only to, it is possible to unify the control for giving the probability change state after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to be given a probable change state until the end of the jackpot game, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 118, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the content of the command determination process 3 (S1811) of the main process (see FIG. 114) is changed from the first embodiment, and in the main process (see FIG. 114), the storage state determination process (S1851) is performed. The difference is that the time saving and medium display processing (S1852) is added. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, only the points different from the first embodiment described above will be described, and they have not been changed from the first embodiment. Detailed description of other processes will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 114, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, the processes S1801 to S1812 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. Here, the command determination process 3 (S1811) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. A detailed description of the command determination process 3 (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG. 115.

Next, when the processing of S1812 is completed, the storage state determination processing (S1851) is executed, and then the time saving medium display processing (S1852) is executed. Here, the storage state determination process (S1851) is a process for determining the storage state of the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600, and the number of spheres stored in the second storage device 1600 is the upper limit. This is a process for determining that the ball has arrived and that the sphere has passed through the second flow path 1602. Based on the result determined by the storage state determination process (S1851), the above-mentioned probability variation expectation display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) is executed. The storage state determination process (S1851) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 117.

Next, the time saving medium display processing (S1852) is a numerical value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the probability variation expectation degree display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) executed when a big hit is won in the time saving state. It is a process for selecting the probability change expectation degree). A detailed description of this time-saving and medium-time display process (S1852) will be described later with reference to FIG. 118.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 114. When the processing of S1852 is completed, the permissible time counter subtraction processing is executed (S1853). This permissible time counter subtraction process is a process of subtracting the value of the permissible time counter 223i. The permissible time counter 223i is set with a value (1000) corresponding to 1 second in the command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 115) described later, and each time the process of S1853 is executed (every 1 millisecond), 1 It is subtracted. If no value is set in the permissible time counter 223i (when the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0), this process ends without subtracting the counter value.

The value (1000) set in the allowable time counter 223i in the command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 115) remains on the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 at the timing when the ending command is received (the timing when the jackpot ends). It is set as a sufficient time for the ball to flow out of the game board 13.

When the process of 1853 is completed, the processes of S1813 to S1817 are then executed in the same manner as the main process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 42) to end the present process. As described above, in the third embodiment, the information (sphere in the second storage device 1600) necessary for executing the probability variation expectation display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)) by the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113. (Retention information, information on the passage of the sphere to the second flow path 1602) is acquired (storage state determination process (S1851)), and the information is used to display the probability variation expectation degree display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)). It is configured so that the numerical value (probability change expectation degree) to be performed can be selected.

As a result, by displaying as a numerical value the degree of expectation that the probability change state will be given after the end of this big hit game when the jackpot is won, for example, when the probability change expectation is high, the player is given a sense of security. On the other hand, when the probability change expectation is low, the game of inflowing the ball into the second storage device 1600 during the big hit game can be positively performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, instead of displaying the probability change expectation to the player in a state where it is decided in advance whether or not the probability change state is given, the specific general winning opening 630a is displayed at the timing when the probability change state can be actually given. Since the possibility that the ball will enter is displayed as the expected degree, it is possible to execute a numerical display with high reliability for the player.

Next, the command determination process 3 (S1811) executed in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1811). This command determination process 3 (S1811) is a process (error notification process 3 (S1912)) executed when a winning information command is received with respect to the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. The contents of the above are changed, the contents of the processing executed when the opening command is received are changed, and the storage valve opening command indicating the opening (release) of the storage valve 1601a and the storage indicating the closing of the storage valve 1601a are indicated. The difference is that the processing to be executed when the valve closing command is received is added, and the other processing is the same. The processes S1904 to S1910 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above are also executed in the command determination process 3 (S1811) of the third embodiment. , It is assumed that it is included in the process (S1919) corresponding to other commands, and the illustration of the process is omitted. Further, among the processes shown in FIG. 115, the same processes as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S1811) is executed, first, the processes S1901 to S1903 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received next (S1911). Here, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1911: Yes), the error notification process 3 (S1912) is executed.

This error notification process 3 (S1912) is a prize based on winning (passing) to each device (first entry port 65, through gate 67, second storage device 1600) provided in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. When an information command is received, it is determined whether the game being executed by the player is normal for the gaming state (normal gaming state, right-handed gaming state) of the pachinko machine 10, and based on the determination result. This is a process for notifying the player about the game method (displaying a warning image). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the game method suitable for the current game state. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to intentionally perform an act of playing a game by a game method that is not suitable for the current game state. The error notification process 3 (S1912) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 116.

Returning to FIG. 115, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1911 that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1913). Here, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1913: Yes), the processing of S1914 is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43), and then the storage upper limit flag 223k is executed. Is set to off (S3911), the special ball flow flag 223m is set to off (S3912), the opening command for display is set (S1915), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1913, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1916). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1916: Yes), the processes of S1917 and S1918 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1916, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1916: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage valve opening command has been received (S3913). Here, if it is determined that the storage valve open command has been received (S3913: Yes), the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON (S3914), the display release command is set (S3915), and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S3913, when it is determined that the storage valve opening command has not been received (S3913: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage valve closing command has been received (S3916). Here, when it is determined that the storage valve closing command has been received (S3916: Yes), the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to off (S3917), the display closing command is set (S3918), and this process is performed. finish.

If it is determined in the process of S3916 that the storage valve closing command has not been received (S3916: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1919). As the processing corresponding to the other commands, in addition to the processing described in the above-mentioned command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), the processing of S1904 to 1910 of the command determination processing of the first embodiment is performed. include.

Next, the error notification process 3 (S1912) executed in the command determination process 3 (S1811 of FIG. 115) will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the contents of the error notification process 3 (S1912). In this error notification process 3 (S1912), a game method (right) executed by the player with respect to the current game state (normal state or right-handed state) based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the content is appropriate, and processing that enables notification based on the determination result is executed.

The error notification process 3 (S1912) determines the value of the permissible time counter 223i when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to ON for the error notification process (see FIG. 44) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing to be performed is deleted and the content of the processing executed when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off is changed. The same processing as the error notification processing (see FIG. 44) of the first embodiment is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 116, when the error notification process 3 (S1912) is executed, the processes S1931 to S1933 are executed in the same manner as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) of the first embodiment described above to perform this process. finish. This makes it possible to determine whether the ball has entered the first entrance 65, which is impossible (difficult) to win in the right-handed game during the big hit (during the big hit game) where the right-handed game is supposed to be executed. Will be. As a result, it is possible to detect a state in which the player is not performing the right-handed game even though the player is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game), and informs the player of the appropriate game method.

As a notification of an appropriate game method, for example, a game other than the right-handed game is executed even though the player is not executing the appropriate game (the game state in which the right-handed game is executed). ), The appropriate game content (right-handed game) is notified to the player in a visible manner (for example, displayed on the third symbol display device 81), or the game content is constantly displayed in the game. In the pachinko machine 10 that notifies a person, the notification content is emphasized and notified (for example, the volume of the speaker is increased, the notification mode displayed on the display screen is increased, or the brightness of the display screen is increased. It may be configured to do). As a result, even if the player plays an inappropriate game, the player can be properly notified of the content of the game.

Returning to FIG. 116, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1931 that the jackpot middle flag 223h is not set to on (set to off) (S1931: No), the error notification processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 44). Similarly, it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1936).

Here, the permissible time counter 223i in the third embodiment is a counter for measuring a predetermined period (1 second) after the right-handed gaming state ends, and while this counter is performing measurement, it is a counter. Even if the ball passes through the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67, the right-handed warning image described later is not displayed.

As a result, when the ball launched immediately before the end of the right-handed game state enters (passes) into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 after the end of the right-handed game state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to display a warning image to the player who is performing an appropriate game and suppress the decrease in the motivation for the game. In addition, there is an effect that the accuracy of displaying a warning image for a player who is playing an inappropriate game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 115, the allowable time counter 223i is set with a value (1000) corresponding to 1 second when an ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1917), and the main process (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 114), 1 is subtracted every 1 millisecond (S1853).

Returning to FIG. 116, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1936 that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (greater than 0) (S1936: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 (S1936: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag 223f is set to ON (S1961).

That is, whether or not a predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot is determined using the value of the permissible time counter 223i, and the value of the permissible time counter 223i becomes 0, so that the jackpot ends. It is determined that a predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed since then. As a result, when the ball flowing down the game board 13 immediately after the end of the big hit enters (passes) into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67, the warning image is not displayed.

If it is determined in the process of S1961 that the probability change state flag 223f is set to ON (S1961: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223f is not set to on (set to off) (S1961: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0. (S1962). Here, if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1962: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1962, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is not larger than 0 (0), the ball enters (passes) into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67. It is determined whether or not the indicated winning information command has been received (S1963). Here, if it is determined that the winning information command indicating the entry (passing) of the ball into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 has not been received (S1963: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1963, if it is determined that the winning information command indicating the entry (passing) of the ball into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 has been received (S1963: Yes), then the right-handed warning image is displayed. Set the corresponding error command (S1964) and end this process. Here, when an error command corresponding to the right-handed warning image is set and an error command is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1802) shown in FIG. 114, FIG. 5 is shown in the third symbol display device 81. The warning image shown in (b) is displayed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in order to determine the game state in which the right-handed game is not executed, the jackpot medium flag 223h, the probability change state flag 223f, and the time saving state counter 223g are referred to. There is. Then, when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off, the probability change state flag 223f is set to off, and the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0, the right-handed game is not executed, and the second game state is set. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered (passed) into the storage device 1600 and the through gate 67.

Further, in the third embodiment, the error command corresponding to the warning image is not set by the error notification processing during a predetermined period (1 second) after the jackpot is completed.

In the third embodiment, the value of the permissible time counter 223i is set to 1000 at the timing when the ending command is received (S1916 in FIG. 115) (S1917), and the value is 0 (when the permissible time has elapsed). ) (S1962: No in FIG. 116), the configuration is such that it can be determined that the ball has entered (passed) into the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67, but other configurations may be used, for example. In addition to the case where the ending command is received as the timing at which the right-handed game ends, the value of the allowable time counter 223i may be set to 1000 even at the timing when the time saving state counter becomes 0.

By configuring in this way, a warning image is displayed to the player who is performing an appropriate game even when the time saving state ends and the normal game state is entered, and the motivation for playing is reduced. Can be suppressed. In addition, there is an effect that the accuracy of displaying a warning image for a player who is playing an inappropriate game can be improved.

Further, the value set in the permissible time counter 223i may be a value corresponding to a period during which it is possible to prevent a player who is playing an appropriate game from erroneously displaying a warning. For example, it may be a value (10000) corresponding to 10 seconds. Further, it may be configured so that a different value is set for each type of jackpot.

Further, the timing for setting the value of the permissible time counter 223i may be changed based on the result of the jackpot game and the jackpot type. For example, if it is confirmed that the probability change state or the time saving state will be given after the big hit ends, the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not set even when the ending command is received, and the probability change state after the big hit ends. In the case of a jackpot to which the time saving state is not given, the value of the permissible time counter 223i may be set after the jackpot ends. This eliminates the need to set an unnecessary value in the allowable time counter 223i, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

Next, the storage state determination process (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage state determination process (S1851). This storage state determination process (S1851) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 114) of the voice lamp control device 113, and flows into the second storage device 1600 in a state where the storage valve 1601a is closed. This is a process for determining the storage status and the flow status of the spheres.

First, when the storage state determination process (S1851) is executed, it is determined whether or not the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON (S4901). Here, when it is determined that the storage valve opening flag 223n is set to ON, that is, the storage valve 1601a is in the open (released) state (S4901: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the storage valve opening flag 223n is not set to on (set to off) (S4901: No), it is then stored in the second storage device 1600. It is determined whether or not the number of balls being played has reached the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S4902). Specifically, when the upper limit detection sensor 1600b provided in the first flow path 1601 of the second storage device 1600 shown in FIG. 96 detects the stagnation of a sphere, it is determined that the storage sphere is the upper limit.

In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the storage sphere has reached the upper limit (S4902: Yes), then the command corresponding to the storage upper limit is set (S4903), and the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON. (S4904), and this process is terminated. This storage upper limit flag 223k is set to off when the jackpot is started (S3911 in FIG. 115).

On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the stored sphere has not reached the upper limit (S4902: No), then it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the second induction flow path (second flow path 1602). (S4905). Specifically, when the passage sensor 1600d provided in the second flow path 1602 of the second storage device 1600 shown in FIG. 96 detects the passage of a sphere, the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602) is used. Determine that the ball has passed.

Here, an event in which the sphere passes through the second induction flow path (second flow path 1602) even though the stored sphere has not reached the upper limit in the processing of S4902 will be described. In the second storage device 1600 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, a new ball is normally stored in the first flow path 1601 in a state where a new ball is stored in the second storage device. When it flows into 1600, it is configured to flow down to the second flow path 1602.

However, depending on the direction of rebound when the ball flowing into the second storage device 1600 collides with the inner wall of the second storage device 1600, the storage amount of the ball in the first flow path 1601 has not reached the upper limit. Also, it may flow down to the second flow path 1602 (about 5% of the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600). When such a sphere flows down, it is determined that the sphere has passed (flowed down) through the second induction flow path (second flow path 1602) in the process of S4905.

Returning to FIG. 117, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4905 that the sphere has not passed through the second induction flow path (second flow path 1602) (S4905: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602) (S4905: Yes), then a command corresponding to the special ball flow is set (S4906), and the special ball flow is set. The flag 223m is set to ON (S4907), and this process ends.

In the third embodiment, when a command corresponding to the special ball flow is set, the voice output device 226 outputs a notification sound notifying that the special ball flow has occurred. Further, when this special ball flow occurs, as described above with reference to FIG. 97, the first distribution member 900 provided in the second storage device 1600 is placed in a position advantageous to the player (specific general prize). It is configured to be able to give a privilege of moving to a position (a position where the number of balls required for inserting a ball into the mouth 630a is reduced), but other benefits may be given to the player.

For example, a general winning opening that can be entered only when a special ball flow occurs is provided, and a large number (15) of prize balls are given to the player when a ball enters the general winning opening. May be good. Further, when a special ball flow occurs, a privilege such as giving points accumulated by the player or displaying a special image on the third symbol display device 81 may be given.

With this configuration, it is possible to discriminate the special ball flow generated by the irregular movement of the ball, and by giving a privilege to the special ball flow, the player can see the ball. Benefits based on movement can be granted. Therefore, there is an effect that the movement of the ball can be made to make the player happy and uneasy, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the third embodiment, when the number of spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 has not reached the upper limit (S4902: No), the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602) is sphered. (S4905: Yes), the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, but for example, the second ball stored in the first flow path 1601 reaches the upper limit. The special ball flow flag 223m may be set to ON when the ball passes (flows down) through the induction flow path (second flow path 1602).

With this configuration, even if the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 has reached the upper limit, it is possible for the player to continuously play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine due to the player stopping the firing of the ball on the way.

Next, the time saving medium display process (S1852) will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving medium display process (S1852). This time saving / middle display processing (S1852) is a processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 114) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed when a big hit is won during the time saving state (FIG. 104). It is a process of selecting the numerical value (probability variation expectation degree) displayed in (b)).

First, when the time saving medium display process (S1852) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S5001). Here, if the value of the time saving state counter 223g is not larger than 0 (0), that is, if it is determined that the time saving state is not present (S5001: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5001, when the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the time saving state is in effect (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won (S5002). ). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning data corresponding to this fluctuation has won the big hit. Here, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a big hit (S5002: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is a big hit (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON (S5003).

If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON (S5003: Yes), a display command corresponding to the expectation degree MAX is set (S5004), and this process is terminated. When the display command corresponding to this expectation degree MAX is set, the probability change expectation displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 in the probability change expectation degree display effect shown in FIG. 104 (b). "MAX" is displayed in the numerical value of the degree.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5003 that the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to on (set to off) (S5003: No), the expectation display selection table 222b (see FIG. 105) is displayed. A display command corresponding to the expected degree (numerical value) selected based on the specified contents is set (S5005), and this process is terminated. When this display command is set, in the probability variation expectation display effect shown in FIG. 104 (b), the numerical value of the probability variation expectation displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is expected. The expected degree (numerical value) "10 to 80" selected based on the degree display selection table 222b is displayed.

As described above, in the time saving medium display processing (S1852), the display content of the probability variation expectation display effect to be executed when a big hit is won during the time saving state is determined. In this way, since the numerical value of the probability change expectation is selected based on the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 at the timing when the jackpot is won, the presence or absence of the special ball flow, and the jackpot type, the value is highly reliable for the player. (Expectation) can be displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ball to the specific general winning opening 630a, which is a specific area, within a predetermined period during the jackpot game (the period from the start of the first round to the end of the final round). Since it is a game property in which a probable change state is given after the end of the big hit, it is not determined whether or not the probable change state is given at the timing when the big hit is won.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the probability change expectation is simply based on how much the jackpot winning this time satisfies the condition that the probability variation state is likely to be given during the jackpot game. The content of the display effect is determined.

Therefore, even though it is internally determined whether or not the probability change state is given, the probability change expectation degree (value) displayed for the effect of notifying the probability change expectation degree performed to incite the player. ) Has the effect of increasing the reliability.

In the third embodiment, when the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON, the expectation level MAX is supported regardless of other conditions (the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m and the type of jackpot type). The display command to be set is configured to be set. This is because if the pachinko machine 10 wins a jackpot with the upper limit (4) balls stored in the second storage device 1600 during the time saving state, at least one of the stored balls will be. This is because the ball can be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing when a probable change state can be given after the jackpot is completed.

That is, by storing the upper limit amount (4 pieces) of balls in the second storage device 1600 by the time the jackpot is won in the time-saving state, it is possible to enter a gaming state in which a probable change state is given after the end of the next jackpot. Become. With this configuration, even if the reserved storage number of the special symbol reaches the upper limit during the time saving state, the game of flowing the ball into the second storage device 1600 can be continued, so that the player can continue the game during the game. Has the effect of stopping the firing of the ball and suppressing the decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened at the timing when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game (when the condition device is operating). During the period (while the accessory continuous operation device is operating), a probabilistic state is given after the jackpot is completed, but specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is open. The first variable in the next round after the period (round period) in which the 1 variable winning device 65 is open and the end condition (10 balls or 30 seconds have passed) for the end of 1 round are satisfied. Both the period until the winning device 65 is opened (interval period) is included.

Therefore, even during the interval period during the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is closed), when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, a probable change state is given after the jackpot game ends. Will be done. That is, in the configuration used in the third embodiment, when the ball passes through the winning opening opened during the jackpot game (for example, the winning opening of the first variable winning device 65), the probability changes after the jackpot ends. It is possible to set a longer period (a period during which a probabilistic state can be given) that is continuously advantageous to the player during the jackpot game, as compared with the case where a specific area to which the state is given is provided.

Further, in the third embodiment, a specific area to which a probabilistic state can be given by passing a ball is provided other than a winning opening (for example, a winning opening of the first variable winning device 65) opened during a big hit game. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic state can be obtained by the ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, that is, the ball (waste ball) that had no merit for the player in the past. It will be. As a result, during the jackpot game, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first variable winning device 65 to acquire a prize ball and a game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a to acquire a probable change state are simultaneously advanced. It becomes possible. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a plurality of playability to the player at the same time, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, like the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the specific general winning opening 630a are located at positions where winning can be achieved in a game aiming at the same area (in this embodiment, a right-handed game). It is good to provide. By doing so, it is possible to easily and simultaneously advance a plurality of games to the player.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the right-handed area, and the specific general winning opening 630a is provided in the normal game area (left-handed area). You may. As a result, during the round period during the jackpot game (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open), the right-handed game is performed, and the interval period (the end condition of one round (10 balls or 30 balls)) is performed. During the period from the establishment of (seconds) to the opening of the first variable winning device 65 in the next round), a normal game (left-handed game) is performed, and the ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be configured to perform a game of making a ball.

This makes it possible to complicate the game during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the monotonous game.

In the third embodiment described above, the second storage device 1600 is arranged in the right side region of the game board 13, but for example, the second storage device 1600 is placed in the lower center (variable display device unit) of the game board 13. A game (left-handed game) that is provided in the left side area of the game board 13 (left side of the variable display device unit 80) and allows the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 that is executed in the normal game state. ) May be configured to flow into the second storage device 1600.

With this configuration, it is possible to store the ball in the second storage device 1600 during the normal gaming state. As a result, if the state in which the jackpot is not won continues in the normal game state, the upper limit amount of balls can be stored in the second storage device 1600, so that the player who has not won the jackpot for a long period of time can be probable. It is possible to provide a jackpot that is easily given a state, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is configured to continue until the next big hit is won, so that the player does not win the big hit at an early stage during the probable change state. Will be done. That is, the second storage device 1600 is in a probabilistic state in which the jackpot probability is set high until the next jackpot is won, and the game can be executed in a state where the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. By storing the upper limit amount of balls and then winning the jackpot, the game aims to continue the probabilistic state even after the next jackpot game ends.

Therefore, in the probable state in which the game is performed while simply waiting to win the next big hit at an early stage, the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the second storage device 1600 as soon as possible without winning the big hit at an early stage. Since it is possible to play the game with motivation to make it, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play in the probable change state can be improved.

In addition, other configurations may be used. For example, when the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the probability change state, the special symbol changes 100 times from the probability change state to the time saving state (for example, after the jackpot ends). It may be configured so that the gaming state shifts to) (which is set in the period until the game is played).

With this configuration, the jackpot probability is high, but the jackpot probability is low when winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a low expectation that a probability variation is given) in a probability variation state where the game period between jackpots is short. In the case of winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a higher expectation that the probability of being given a probability change is higher than winning a jackpot in the probability variation state) in a short-time state where the game period between jackpots is long although it is in a state (normal gaming state). Since it is possible to provide a jackpot with different advantages to the player, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the ball that has not flowed into the second storage device 1600 is configured to enter the first variable winning device 65. For example, the second storage device is located below the first variable winning device 65. 1600 may be provided. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game (while the first variable winning device 65 is open).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128. In the third embodiment described above, the second storage device 1600 is provided, a plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can flow down are provided in the second storage device 1600, and the sphere is specified as a general winning opening (probability variation winning opening) by the flowing flow path. ) 630a and general winning opening (high value winning opening) 630b can be won. Further, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1601a capable of storing a ball flowing down a part of the flow path, and by changing the timing at which the storage valve 1601a opens, the ball can be placed in the specific general winning opening 630a. By making the timing of entering the ball different, a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot that is hard to be given are provided.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution device 2600 is provided in place of the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment. The distribution device 2600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down, and the ball can enter the specific general winning opening (probability variation winning opening) 630a or the second ball entering device 640 by the flowing flow path. It is composed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the area provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). A second variable winning device 650 is provided below the variable winning device 65. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 120, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are alternately opened in the jackpot game. The ball launched in the right-handed game during the jackpot game is configured to enter any of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650).

By alternately opening the two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in this way, for example, the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upper side during the jackpot game. Is closed, and the ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 in the closed state enters the second variable winning device 650 provided below the first variable winning device 65, respectively. By controlling the opening operation of, the ball fired during the jackpot game can be entered into any variable winning device. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball fired during the jackpot game does not enter the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) and gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Then, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a distribution device below the two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) provided above and below. A 2600 is provided, and a ball flowing down one path distributed by the distribution device 2600 is configured to enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

This specific general winning opening 630a is the same as the specific general winning opening 630a used in the third embodiment described above, and is a predetermined period during the jackpot game, which is the probabilistic winning valid period (start to final round of the first round game). By entering the ball during the round game (the period until the end of the round game), in addition to the predetermined number of prize balls (1 piece), the probability change state is given after the jackpot game ends, and the probability change state is given during the jackpot game (the probability change prize is valid). A predetermined number of prize balls (1 piece) are awarded when a ball enters a period other than the period (including a period during which the jackpot is not hit).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the opening operation contents of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game are changed based on the winning jackpot type, thereby shaking during the jackpot game. A jackpot in which a ball flowing down to the dividing device 2600 is likely to occur and a jackpot in which a ball is unlikely to occur can be set.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of variable winning devices, a plurality of balls that do not enter the two variable winning devices (balls that can flow into the distribution device 2600 during the jackpot game) are intentionally generated. It controls the opening operation of the variable winning device, and determines whether or not the ball that has not entered any of the variable winning devices is given a gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends. It is possible to provide a new playability of being played.

Therefore, in addition to the conventional game property of having a player enter a ball into the variable winning device during a big hit game, a privilege that is advantageous to the player by using a ball that has not entered the variable winning device ( It is possible to execute a new game that determines whether or not a probabilistic state is granted, and there is an effect that the interest of the game during the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, a ball that did not enter the variable winning device during the jackpot game was conventionally treated as a useless ball, but in the present embodiment, the ball (the ball did not enter the variable winning device during the jackpot game). To provide a pachinko machine 10 that can effectively use all the balls fired during the jackpot game because it is configured to be able to give a privilege (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player by using the balls). This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 120 is an enlarged view of the region surrounded by the two-dot chain line CXX in the game board 13 in FIG. 119. As shown in FIG. 119, the ball launched by the right-handed game jumps over the variable display device unit 80 and collides with the return rubber 69 to attenuate the momentum and the right region of the game board 13 (variable display device unit 80). (To the right of) flow down.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the right region of the game board 13, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the distribution device are arranged in order from the upstream side of the ball flow path (upper side of the game board 13). A specific general winning opening 630a is provided at a position where a ball distributed to the right side of the front view of the game board 13 (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 120) can be entered by the distribution device 2600.

On the other hand, the second entry port 640 is provided at a position where the ball distributed to the left side of the front view of the game board 13 (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 120) by the distribution device 2600 can enter. Among the various configurations provided in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the specific general winning opening 630a are included. Since the second ball entry port 640 has already been described in detail in each of the above-described embodiments, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the distribution device 2600 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The distribution device 2600 is formed with an opening 2601 into which a ball flowing down the game board 13 flows into the distribution device 2600. The opening 2601 is formed with an opening width of about 15 mm, and regulates the inflow of two balls at the same time. As a result, the ball that has flowed into the sorting device 2600 can be smoothly flowed down. As shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of nails are planted in the game board 13 so that the ball passing through the second variable winning device 650 is guided to the opening 2601 of the distribution device 2600.

The spheres that have flowed into the distribution device 2600 are distributed by two distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902) provided in the distribution device 2600. A first flow path 2602, a second flow path 2603, a third flow path 2604, and a fourth flow path 2605 are formed in the distribution device 2600 by a partition wall. The first flow path 2602 and the second flow path 263 are formed so that the sphere flows directly below, and the third flow path 2604 is in the lower left direction of the front view of the distribution device 2600 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120). The sphere is formed to flow down from upstream to downstream by an inclined member that inclines downward. Further, the fourth flow path 2605 is formed by a member constituting the outer shape of the storage device 2600 so as to be inclined downward in the lower right direction (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120) in the front view of the distribution device 2600.

The sorting device 2600 has a right discharge port 2606 for discharging the ball to the right side of the front view of the sorting device 2600 (right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 120) and a left side of the front view of the sorting device 2600 (in the viewpoint of FIG. 120). A left discharge port 2607 for discharging the ball to the left side) is formed.

The spheres that have flowed into the distribution device 2600 are distributed by two distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902), and are distributed by a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 2602 to fourth flow path 2605). ) Flows down and is discharged from either the right discharge port 2606 or the left discharge port 2607.

Specifically, the ball flowing into the distribution device 2600 passes through the passage sensor 2600a provided in the opening 2061 and falls to the first distribution member 1901. Since the configuration of the first distribution member 1901 is the same as that of the second distribution member 901 used in the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The spheres that have fallen into the first distribution member 1901 are alternately distributed to the first flow path 2602 and the second flow path 2603 by the first distribution member 1901. A partition wall is provided below the first distribution member 1901 to separate the first flow path 2602 and the second flow path 2603.

The sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 2602 falls to the downstream side of the third flow path 2604, flows down in the downstream direction of the third flow path 2604 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120), and flows down from the left discharge port 2607. It is discharged to the outside of the sorting device 2600. On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 2603 falls on the second distribution member 1902. The configuration of the second distribution member 1902 is the same as that of the first distribution member 1901, and is the same configuration as the second distribution member 901 used in the third embodiment described above. Is omitted.

The spheres that have fallen into the second distribution member 1902 are alternately distributed to the third flow path 2604 and the fourth flow path 2605 by the second distribution member 1902. The ball distributed to the third flow path 2604 flows down on the inclined member and is discharged from the left discharge port 2607 to the outside of the distribution device 2600. The number of balls discharged from the left discharge port 2607 is configured to be detectable by the passage sensor 2600b.

On the other hand, the ball distributed to the fourth flow path 2605 is discharged from the right discharge port 2606 to the outside of the distribution device 2600. The number of balls discharged from the right discharge port 2606 is configured to be detectable by the passage sensor 2600c.

As described above, the balls flowing into the distribution device 2600 are configured to be distributed with regularity. Specifically, the number of balls discharged from the right discharge port 2606 and the left discharge port 2607. The ratio to the number of ejected balls is 1: 3. That is, when four balls flow into the distribution device 2600, at least one of the balls is configured to be discharged from the right discharge port 2606.

Further, FIG. 120 shows a state in which the surface cover of the distribution device 2600 is removed in order to explain the internal configuration of the distribution device 2600, but the surface cover is made of a permeable material (ABS, polycarbonate, etc.). It is configured so that the player can grasp the status of the distribution member (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902). With this configuration, the player can play the game while grasping the status of the distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and the second distribution member 1902), so that the ball can be inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a. It is possible to play the game while predicting the timing at which the ball enters.

A part of the surface cover of the distribution device 2600 is colored or the surface cover is used so that the player cannot easily see the status of the distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902). A decorative member may be attached to the surface of the surface. With this configuration, each time a ball flows into the distribution device 2600, the game is played while predicting which discharge port (right discharge port 2606 or left discharge port 2607) the ball will be discharged from. Can be done. In addition, by memorizing the discharge port from which the ball was discharged in the past, it is possible to predict which discharge port (right discharge port 2606 or left discharge port 2607) will be the next discharge port. It is possible to provide a situation advantageous to a player who plays a game for a long time rather than a player who plays a game only for a short time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game for a long period of time, and the situation where the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered can be suppressed.

Further, the surface cover of the distribution device 2600 may be formed by a half mirror whose inside can be visually recognized by irradiating light. In this case, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to the right-handed gaming state. It is preferable that the surface cover is irradiated with light so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the distribution device 2600. By doing so, the inside of the distribution device 2600 (the situation of each distribution member) can be made visible only when the game is actually played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

The distribution device 2600 of the fourth embodiment uses distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902) whose distribution directions are alternately changed when the spheres come into contact with each other. However, the number may be 3 or more. By increasing the number of distribution members and increasing the flow path of the ball in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily grasp the flow destination of the ball.

Further, a configuration may be used in which the number of routes distributed by one distribution member is three or more. By using such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of distribution members required when forming the same number of flow paths in the distribution device 2600, and the distribution device 2600 can be made compact. It is possible to plan.

Further, a configuration may be used in which the distribution member electrically switches the distribution destination of the sphere. In this case, for example, it is preferable to switch the distribution destination of the balls at a constant timing after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, the distribution rate can be statistically constant.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a game state in which a right-handed game is executed other than during a big hit (for example, a time saving state or a probability change state), the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a, so that the time saving state is achieved. In a probable change state, a ball can be inserted into a specific general winning opening 630a, which is one of the general winning openings, and a winning ball (one in the present embodiment) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the number of balls held is reduced in a time-saving state or a probable change state.

In the third embodiment, after the jackpot game is executed, the storage valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 is released (opened) from the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to the end of the final round. However, other conditions may be provided as the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is closed.

For example, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) is the timing at which a predetermined round (2nd round, final round, etc.) of the jackpot game is started or ended, or the predetermined round (2nd round, final round, etc.). It may be the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed from the start.

Further, at the timing when the storage valve 1601a is closed, the upper limit number (for example, 4) of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) can pass through the storage valve 1601a. After the time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, the predetermined round (2 rounds, final round, etc.) has started or ended, or the predetermined round (2 rounds, final round, etc.) has started or ended. It may be the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed.

With this configuration, various periods can be set as the period during which the storage valve 1601a is open and the period during which the storage valve 1601a is closed. Specifically, for example, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) is set 3 seconds after the jackpot is won, and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is closed is released (opened). If it is set to be 4 seconds after that, the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) only for 3 to 7 seconds after winning the jackpot.

As a result, 7 seconds after winning the jackpot, the storage valve 1601a will be closed even during the jackpot game, so this jackpot will end and the storage valve 1601a will be won until the next jackpot is won. In order to keep the closed state, the period for closing the storage valve 1601a as compared with the configuration used in the third embodiment (the configuration in which the storage valve 1601a is closed at the timing when the final round of the jackpot game is completed). Can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to easily start the jackpot game with the balls stored in the storage valve 1601a (with the upper limit number of balls stored).

In addition, while the storage valve 1601a is closed during the jackpot game, a game for winning a prize ball in this jackpot game (a game aiming at the first variable winning device 65) and the next jackpot game. It is possible to simultaneously execute a game (a game aiming at the second storage device 1600 in which the storage valve 1601a is in the closed state) for facilitating the addition of a probabilistic state after the game is completed. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game during the jackpot game. Furthermore, depending on the result of the game during the big hit game, it is possible to make it easy to give a probable change state after the end of the next big hit game, so that the player can continue to play the game even after the big hit game ends. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the gaming machine can be increased.

Further, by providing a plurality of periods for releasing (opening) the storage valve 1601a during the jackpot game and different periods for releasing (opening) the storage valve 1601a based on the winning jackpot, for example, the jackpot game ends. Even if the period from to winning the next jackpot is the same, the length of the closed state period of the storage valve 1601a can be different.

As a result, it is possible to set a jackpot that is likely to be given a probabilistic state and a jackpot that is difficult to be given a probabilistic state after the end of the next big hit game, depending on the operation content of the storage valve 1601a during the big hit game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, by setting the timing of releasing (opening) the storage valve 1601a at the start of a predetermined round (for example, the final round) during the jackpot game, the balls are stored in the second storage device 1600 even after the jackpot game is started. Is possible. Thereby, at the timing when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) during the jackpot game this time, the ball stored in the second storage device 1600 can be easily entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 (the period in which the storage valve 1601a is closed) and the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600. By changing the period (the period in which the storage valve 1601a is in the released (opened) state), the probabilistic state is likely to be given after the end of the jackpot game of 1, and the next jackpot game of the jackpot of 1. Since it is possible to set a state in which a probabilistic state is likely to be given after the end, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine having various playability, and there is an effect that the player's game interest can be enhanced. ..

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment is such that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point that the configuration of is partially changed, the point that the storage device solenoid 610 and the flow path solenoid 611 connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 are deleted, and the point that the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on. The difference is that various sensor groups 229 (passing sensors 2600a to 2600c) are electrically connected to the output port 225. Since other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the fourth embodiment, various sensor groups 229 are electrically connected to the input / output port 225. The various sensor groups 229 include a passage sensor 2600a for detecting the inflow of a ball into the distribution device 2600 described above and a passage sensor 2600b for detecting that the ball has passed through the left discharge port 2607 provided in the distribution device 2600. It is composed of a passage sensor 2600c for detecting that a ball has passed through the right discharge port 2606 provided in the distribution device 2600, and detection signals are output to the voice lamp control device 113 from the various sensors described above. To.

The voice lamp control device 113 makes it possible to determine whether or not the ball flowing into the distribution device 2600 is normally discharged by receiving the detection signals output from the various sensors described above. Specifically, the number of balls flowing into the sorting device 2600 is calculated based on the signal output from the passing sensor 2600a. Then, the number of balls discharged to the outside of the sorting device 2600 is calculated based on the signals output from the passing sensor 2600b and the passing sensor 2600c.

This makes it possible to compare the total number of spheres that have flowed into the distribution device 2600 with the total number of spheres that have been discharged from the distribution device 2600. More specifically, the number of balls flowing into the sorting device 2600 and the number of balls discharged from the sorting device 2600 are calculated in chronological order, and a predetermined time difference (about 3 seconds), that is, sorting is performed. When the increase / decrease in the number of balls in consideration of the time difference for the time required for the game ball to flow normally in the device 2600 is the same, it is determined to be normal.

By monitoring the ball that has flowed into the distribution device 2600 in this way, for example, the ball is retained in the distribution device 2600, and the timing at which the most advantageous privilege for the player is given (for example, a jackpot game). (Middle) has the effect of suppressing fraudulent acts in which a ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a.

Further, the detection result of the passing sensors 2600a to 2600c provided in the distribution device 2600 and the detection result of the sensor (not shown) for detecting the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a are used to obtain the specific general winning opening. It may be configured so that unauthorized entry into the 630a can be monitored. Specifically, it is possible to determine that an illegal ball has been entered when the number of balls that have entered the specific general winning opening 630a is larger than the total number of balls that have passed through the right discharge port 2606 of the distribution device 2600. do it. By using such a configuration, for example, the act of making a hole in the glass unit 16 covering the surface of the game board 13 and allowing the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a without going through the sorting device 2600 is properly performed. Can be grasped.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (a). FIG. 122A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, the contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, and the second open scenario setting table 202e is added. It is different in that it is done.

Here, the first type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (b). FIG. 122B is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment adds a jackpot C as a jackpot type to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) in the first embodiment described above, and each of them. The difference is that the contents specified in the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) have been changed and the hit of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) has been changed. However, the other configurations are the same as those of the type selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Is stipulated. The details of this jackpot A will be described later with reference to FIG. 123, but the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 8 rounds, and during the jackpot game, both the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 It is a big hit in which an advantageous interval is not set for a period of being closed longer than usual (2 seconds). The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". In this jackpot B, the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds, and the period during which both the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed during the jackpot game is longer than usual (2). Seconds) This is a big hit where the advantageous interval is set three times. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99", the jackpot C is associated and defined. In this jackpot C, the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for two rounds, and the period during which both the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed during the jackpot game is longer than usual (2). Seconds) This is a big hit where the advantageous interval is set once. The round game by the jackpot C is different from the jackpot A and the jackpot B, and the end condition of the round game is set to be 1 second elapsed or 10 balls entered. Therefore, the jackpot C is set as a jackpot with few (almost 0) prize balls to be paid out.

In this way, since the number of rounds in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues and the number of advantageous intervals are set according to the jackpot type, the player is assigned to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. It is possible to give different advantageous states.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, the jackpot B is associated and defined in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is associated and defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 99". There is. Since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C specified corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the special symbol 1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 50%, the jackpot B is selected at 20%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 30%. If the player wins, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 20%, the jackpot B is selected at 70%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Here, among the jackpot A to the jackpot C, the jackpot type in which the number of advantageous intervals is set to be large (3 times) during the jackpot game is the jackpot B. That is, the special symbol game using the special symbol 2 is configured to make it easier for the player to select a game that is advantageous to the player (probability change state is easily given) than the special symbol game using the special symbol 1. There is.

Next, the second open scenario setting table 202f in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second open scenario setting table 202f in the fourth embodiment.

The second open scenario setting table 202f is the second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 referred to when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, and the second open scenario reference when the jackpot is won in the probability change state. It has a scenario setting table (probability variation) 202f2, and the setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the first hit type selection table 202b are defined respectively. If the jackpot is won in the time saving state, the second open scenario setting table (probability change) 202f2 is set to be referred to.

Here, the second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 defined in the second open scenario setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1. This second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, and corresponds to the selected jackpot type, the opening period in the jackpot game, and the interval period between rounds. , The ending period, and the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device) that is openly controlled in the round game are defined respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is "5 seconds", and the interval period from the first round to the seventh round is "0.2 seconds" (first interval period). The ending period is set to be "5 seconds".

Further, the variable winning devices that are open-controlled in the round game are odd-numbered rounds (1, 3, 5, 7 rounds), the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a), and even-numbered rounds (2.4.6. In the 8th round), a scenario is set in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened.

When the jackpot type is jackpot B, the opening period is "5 seconds" and the interval period from the first round to the fourth round is "0.2 seconds" (first interval period), the fifth to seventh rounds. The interval period is set to "2 seconds" (second interval period), and the ending period is set to "5 seconds".

Further, the variable winning devices that are open-controlled in the round game are odd-numbered rounds (1, 3, 5, 7 rounds), the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a), and even-numbered rounds (2.4.6. In the 8th round), a scenario is set in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening period is "5 seconds", the interval period of the first round is "2 seconds" (second interval period), and the ending period is "5 seconds". Set.

Further, the variable winning device that is open-controlled in the round game is the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) for odd-numbered rounds (1 round), and the second variable winning device 650 (second round) for even-numbered rounds (2 rounds). A scenario is set in which the two large opening openings 650a) are opened.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in a continuous round game, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) arranged in the vertical direction are alternately open-controlled. Since it is configured so that a short time (0.2 seconds) can be set as the inter-round interval, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 and second) is configured to be possible, especially in the inter-round interval during the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the generation of balls that do not enter the variable winning device 650).

Further, the first round (first round) executed in the jackpot game is set to the round opened by the first variable winning device 65 provided above the two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the generation of balls that do not enter the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in the interval between rounds.

That is, when the control of alternately opening two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction is executed in a continuous round game, the ball is variable upward when one round in which the upper variable winning device is released is completed. You will pass through the winning device. By controlling the lower variable winning device to be opened so that the ball passing through the upper variable winning device enters, the variable winning device becomes a variable winning device in the inter-round interval between one round and the next round. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of balls that do not enter.

However, in the opposite of the pattern described above, that is, in the inter-round interval between the round in which the lower variable winning device is opened and the round in which the upper variable winning device is opened, the lower variable winning device is closed. A sphere will be generated that passes through.

Therefore, the first round (first round) executed in the jackpot game is set to the round opened by the first variable winning device 65 provided above the two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction. By reducing the number of transitions from a round game in which the lower variable winning device is opened to a round game in which the upper variable winning device is opened during the jackpot game, the variable winning device (first variable winning device) is used in the interval between rounds. It is possible to further suppress the generation of balls that do not enter the device 65 and the second variable winning device 650).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, either the first interval (0.2 seconds) or the second interval (2 seconds) is set as the interval between rounds. Of these, in the first interval (0.2 seconds), as described above, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) is closed for the ball fired during the jackpot game. It is set to suppress passing through the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) during the interval period.

On the other hand, the second interval (2 seconds) is set to intentionally generate a ball passing through the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) during the interval period. be.

In this way, by changing the interval period (first interval period and second interval period) according to the jackpot type, the rate at which balls flowing into the distribution device 2600 are generated during the jackpot game is changed. Is possible.

That is, the degree of expectation that the ball will enter the specific winning opening 630a during the probable change winning valid period of the jackpot game can be different depending on the jackpot type. That is, depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to set a jackpot that is likely to be given a probabilistic state and a jackpot that is difficult to be given a probabilistic state.

In the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type in which a plurality of second intervals (2 seconds) advantageous to the player are set, the second interval is the final stage of the jackpot game (5th to 7th rounds). It is stipulated that it should be set to (eyes). This is to give the player the expectation that a second interval advantageous to the player will occur during the jackpot game until the end, but the period for setting the second interval may be another period. For example, the interval period after the round in which the variable winning device (second variable winning device 650) provided below is opened may be set as the second interval period.

Specifically, in the case of jackpot B, the intervals of the second round, the fourth round, and the sixth round (three times in total) may be set as the second interval. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 that executes control to alternately open two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction in a continuous round game, a ball that does not enter any of the variable winning devices The interval between rounds, which is likely to occur, will be set as the second interval.

Therefore, in an inter-round interval other than the inter-round interval in which the second interval for generating a ball that does not intentionally enter any variable winning device is set, the ball may enter the distribution device 2600. It has the effect of suppressing the occurrence.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123 (c), the second open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202f2 is also set in the second open scenario setting table 202f. FIG. 123 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202f2. This second open scenario table (probability change) 202f2 is a table that is referred to when a big hit is won during the probability change (time reduction) state, and is between rounds with respect to the above-mentioned second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1. The difference is that the time set as the second interval of the intervals is changed from "2 seconds" to "4 seconds". Since the other contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With this configuration, if the jackpot is won during the probability change (time reduction) state, the time set as the second interval becomes longer, so the percentage of balls that enter the distribution device 2600 during the jackpot game is set. Can be increased.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the normal gaming state. It is possible to make it easier to continuously provide a game state that is advantageous, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific general winning opening 630a is provided separately from the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) opened during the jackpot game, and the specific general winning opening 630a is provided. By passing the ball within the valid period of the probability change prize (the period from the start of the first round game during the jackpot game to the end of the final round round game), the probability change state is given after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to do. Therefore, like the above-mentioned jackpot C, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) is opened for a short period (1 second), that is, a jackpot in which almost no prize balls are paid out. Even if it is, the probability variation prize validity period can be lengthened by setting a long interval period between rounds.

As a result, even if it is a big hit with almost no payout of prize balls (a big hit in which the variable winning device is opened for a short period of time), the game of deciding whether or not to give a probability change to the end of the big hit game is fully enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the interval period between rounds is longer when the jackpot C is selected in the probabilistic (time saving) state than when the jackpot C is selected in the normal game state. Therefore, in a jackpot with almost no payout of prize balls (a jackpot with a short period in which the variable winning device is opened), the length of the probabilistic prize valid period is changed according to the game state, and it is easy to give a probable change to the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to set a jackpot and a jackpot that is difficult to give, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the types of jackpot types may be further increased. In this case, for example, it is preferable to provide a plurality of jackpot types in which intervals between rounds of different periods are set for the jackpot C. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game of whether or not to acquire a probabilistic state by using a jackpot with almost no payout of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the flow of the jackpot game of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the normal game state (normal state) and the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and FIG. 124 (b) is a probability variation. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the game state (probability change state), and the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type.

First, the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (a). The jackpot B is a jackpot of 8 rounds as shown in FIG. 122 (b). When jackpot B is selected in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), the opening period is 5 seconds, the interval between rounds is 0.2 seconds from the first round to the fourth round, and the fifth round to the seventh. The round is set to 2 seconds and the ending period is set to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), 5 seconds after the jackpot game is started, the opening period ends and the first round game is started. This first round round game is a round game in which the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) provided above the second variable winning device 650 is opened. This round game ends when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 balls enter the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a).

Here, when the first round game is started, the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON. While the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to on, when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, the probabilistic winning valid period is given after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when the first round is completed, the first interval (0.2 seconds) is started as the interval period of the first round, and when the first interval (0.2 seconds) is completed, the lower part of the first variable winning device 65. The second round game in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) provided in the above is opened is started.

With this configuration, the ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) in the closed state after the first round is completed is the second variable winning in the second round game. The ball can be put into the device 650 (second large opening 650a). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ball can be efficiently entered into the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), so that the jackpot game can be smoothly executed for the player. Has the effect of being able to provide.

Then, when the 6th round game in which the 2nd variable winning device 650 (2nd large opening 650a) is opened is completed, the 2nd interval (2 seconds) is started as the 6th round interval period, and the second interval is started. When the interval (2 seconds) ends, the seventh round game in which the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) provided above the second variable winning device 650 is opened is started.

Here, as the interval of the 6th round (corresponding to the intervals of the 5th, 6th, and 7th rounds in the present embodiment), the second interval (2 seconds) longer than the first interval (0.2 seconds) is set. To. By setting this second interval, it is possible to set a period during which the ball is likely to flow into the distribution device 2600 during the jackpot game. Specifically, since the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed for 2 seconds, three balls flow into the distribution device 2600.

Then, although not shown, when the eighth round round game (a round game in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened) is completed, the probability variation winning valid flag is set to off, and then , The jackpot game ends after the ending period (5 seconds).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, as the interval period between rounds, the first interval (0.2 seconds) in which the game ball is less likely to flow into the distribution device 2600 and the interval more than the first interval. By setting a long period, the second interval (2 seconds) that easily flows into the distribution device 2600 can be set, and the interval period between rounds is based on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. The number of times the second interval is set is different.

As a result, if the probability that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a (easiness of entering the ball) is different by making the frequency of the ball flowing into the distribution device 2600 different depending on the jackpot type. It will be possible to make it.

Further, since the spheres flowing into the distribution device 2600 are regularly distributed by the first distribution member 1901 and the second distribution member 1902 (see FIG. 120), a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment) of spheres are used. By flowing into the distribution device 2600, the ball can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

Further, depending on the distribution status of each distribution member (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902) in the distribution device 2600, one sphere is transferred to the distribution device 2600 during the probabilistic winning prize validity period. Since there is a possibility that the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a just by flowing in, the player expects the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a every time the ball flows into the distribution device 2600. While playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game.

Further, even if the jackpot game in which the second interval is not set (the jackpot A in the present embodiment) is executed, it is not confirmed that the probability change state is not given after the end of the jackpot game, for example, the second variable winning. While the round game in which the device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened is completed and the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is closed (first interval (0.2 seconds)). ) Allows the ball to pass through the second variable winning device 650 so that the ball can enter the sorting device 2600.

Therefore, in all jackpot games, there is a possibility that the probability change state will be given when the jackpot game ends, so the player expects that the probability change state will be given to the end no matter which jackpot is won. You can play games.

Next, the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the probability variation game state (probability variation state) will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). When the jackpot B is won in the probabilistic gaming state (probability changing state), the time of the second interval is extended from 2 seconds to 4 seconds as compared with the case where the jackpot B is won in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 124 (a). It differs in that it is.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the interval of the sixth round (in the present embodiment, the intervals of the fifth, sixth, and seventh rounds correspond to each other) is the second interval longer than the first interval (0.2 seconds). The interval (4 seconds) is set. By setting this second interval, it is possible to set a period during which the ball is likely to flow into the distribution device 2600 during the jackpot game. Specifically, since the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed for 4 seconds, six balls flow into the sorting device 2600.

That is, when the jackpot is won in the probability variation state, the jackpot B and the jackpot C for which the second interval is set at least once are selected, so that four or more balls are sent to the distribution device 2600 during the probability variation winning valid period. Since the inflow is possible and the probability change state is given after the jackpot game ends with a high probability, the probability change state is given after the jackpot end with a higher probability than when the jackpot is won in the normal game state.

Therefore, if the player shifts to a probabilistic state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, the probabilistic state is likely to continue. It has the effect of suppressing the situation of giving.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) are arranged above and below, and two variable winning devices are arranged in a continuous round game. By alternately opening the winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), the ball launched during the jackpot game is efficiently entered into the variable winning device. Below the two variable winning devices, a sorting device 2600 for distributing balls to the specific general winning opening 630a is provided.

As a result, the ball that did not enter any of the two variable winning devices during the jackpot game, that is, the ball that was previously wasted, flows into the distribution device 2600, and the specific general winning opening 630a It is possible to enter the ball.

Therefore, since it is possible to provide the player with a game using all the balls fired during the jackpot game, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the interval effect executed in the second interval period as the effect during the jackpot game and whether or not the probability change state is given after the end of the jackpot are 6 rounds with respect to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the round effect to be notified during the round game of the eyes is executed.

First, the interval effect will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (a). First, with reference to FIG. 125 (a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 125A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display area displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment is a schematic view showing a portion aimed at by the player with respect to the display screen (see FIG. 76) of the second embodiment described above. Is different in that it is changed to the distribution device 2600, and is the same except for that. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The display screen shown in FIG. 125 (a) shows an interval effect displayed during the interval period (2 seconds) of the fifth round after the fifth round game is completed, and is the first variable winning device 65. This is a screen for notifying the player that both the second variable winning device 650 is closed and the ball can flow into the sorting device 650. It should be noted that this interval effect is an effect that is displayed every time at the interval between rounds in which the second interval is set.

Then, when the interval period of the fifth round ends and the round game of the sixth round starts, the display screen shown in FIG. 125 (b) is displayed. Here, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the round game of the sixth round will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (b). FIG. 125B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the fourth embodiment, the fact that the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a between the start of the probable change winning valid period (see FIG. 124) and the interval period of the fifth round (probability change state after the end of the big hit). Is confirmed), and a round effect is executed to notify the player during the sixth round game.

Here, if it has already been confirmed that the probabilistic state will be given after the jackpot ends, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), an effect of congratulating the player with "GET congratulations" is displayed. On the other hand, if it has not been confirmed that the probabilistic state will be given at the stage when the round effect is executed, an effect that encourages the player is displayed (not shown).

In the present embodiment, since the probability variation prize validity period continues until the final round of the jackpot game is completed, it is confirmed that the probability variation state is given at the stage when the sixth round game is executed. Even if it does not exist, there is still the possibility that a probabilistic state will be given. As a result, the player who has been notified that the probability change state is given by executing the round effect can execute the remaining jackpot game with peace of mind, while the probability change state is given. The player who has been notified that the fact has not been confirmed can be enthusiastically played between the remaining jackpot gaming machines.

In addition to the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game, an effect of immediately notifying when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation prize valid period and a probability variation state are given until the jackpot game ends. You may perform an effect that does not notify the player whether or not the game is played.

Next, returning to FIG. 121, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment, the winning count counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment has been deleted, and the probability variation passing flag 223p has been added.

The probability variation passage flag 223p is a flag indicating that it is confirmed that the probability variation state is given after the jackpot game is completed by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning valid period during the jackpot game. .. By setting the probability change passage flag 223p to ON, a round effect for notifying that the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed is executed (see FIG. 125 (b)). This probabilistic pass flag 223p is used in the specific general winning opening 630a while the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (within the probabilistic winning valid period) in the winning process 4 (S1111) described later with reference to FIG. 126. The voice lamp control device 113 receives a state command (S1453 in FIG. 126) set based on the passage of the ball through the provided probability change switch, and is set to ON (S4952 in FIG. 127). It is set to off (S5106) in the round effect process (S4953) described later with reference to 128.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, since the storage device 600 (see FIG. 2) is deleted with respect to the first embodiment described above, the control process related to the storage valve 607a (see FIG. 8) provided in the storage device 600 is deleted. In the point that the control process related to the flow path switching valve 650d was deleted because the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15) in the second variable winning device 650 was deleted, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35). The difference is that the content of the winning process (S1111 in FIG. 35) to be executed is changed to the winning process 4 (see FIG. 126).

In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment, only the points changed from the first embodiment described above will be described, and the processes not changed from the first embodiment will be described. , And the point that the process is simply deleted will be omitted in detail.

First, the winning process 4 (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process 4 (S1111). The winning process 4 (S1111) is modified so that the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above is executed only when the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (see FIG. 38). S1451), Control content so that the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on by passing (entering) the probability variation switch (specific general winning opening 630a) during the period when the probability variation winning valid flag 203 is set to on. (S1452), and when the probability change setting flag 203h is set to on, the state command corresponding to the probability change passage state is set (S1453), and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, among the processes executed in the winning process 4 (S1111), the processes of S1451 and S1452 are the same as the winning process 3 (FIG. 113) of the third embodiment described above, and therefore have the same reference numerals. , And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning process 4 (S1111) is executed, the processing of S1451 is executed in the same manner as the winning process 3 (see FIG. 113) of the third embodiment described above, and then the first embodiment described above is executed. The processes of S1402 to S1406 are executed in the same manner as the winning process of the form (see FIG. 38). After that, the processing of S1452 is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned winning process 3 of the third embodiment (see FIG. 113), and the processing of S1410 and S1412 is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned winning processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Will be executed.

When the processing of S1412 is completed, next, a state command corresponding to the probabilistic passing state is set (S1453), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S1453, while the probabilistic winning valid flag 203s is set to on (from the start of the first round to the end of the last round in the jackpot game), the ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a. A probabilistic pass command is set to indicate that the ball has entered (the ball has passed the probabilistic switch), that is, it is a state in which it is confirmed that the probabilistic state will be given after the jackpot ends.

This probability variation passage command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command set in the process of S1453, the round effect (see FIG. 125 (b)) executed during the jackpot game is completed by the time the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to notify whether or not the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment is different in that the content of the command determination process 4 of the main process (see FIG. 42) is changed from the first embodiment. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, only the points different from the first embodiment described above will be described, and they have not been changed from the first embodiment. Detailed description of other processes will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 4 (S1811) executed in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S1811). This command determination process 4 (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. , Is a process executed for various commands output from the main control device 110.

This command determination process 4 (S1811) adds a process to be executed when a probability variation passing command is received to the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above, and a winning information command. The difference is that the content of the process executed when the command is received is changed and the content of the process executed when the round number command is received is specified, and the other processes are the same. The processes S1904 to S1910 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above are the processes executed in the command determination process 3 of the third embodiment, but other processes are also executed. It shall be included in the process corresponding to the command (S1919), and the illustration of the process is omitted. Further, among the processes shown in FIG. 115, the same processes as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 127, when the command determination process 4 (S1811) is executed, the processes S1901 to S1903 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation passage command has been received (S4951). When it is determined that the probability variation passage command has been received (S4951: Yes), the probability variation passage flag 223p is set to ON (S4952), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4951 that the probability variation passing command has not been received (S4951: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S1911). Here, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1911: Yes), the data stored in the winning information storage area is updated based on the received command (S4953), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then the processes of S1913 to S1918 are the same as the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43). To execute. Then, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of 1916 (S1916: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4954).

Here, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4954: Yes), the round effect process is executed (S4955). This round effect is a process of determining the content of the effect performed during the jackpot game. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

When the round effect process (S4955) is completed, next, a display round number command is set (S4956), and this process is terminated. This display round number command is currently executed by being output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1802) executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control process 113. The number of rounds of the round game is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 125 (a)).

If it is determined in the process of S4954 that the round number command has not been received (S4954: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1919). As the processing corresponding to the other commands, in addition to the processing described in the above-mentioned command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), the processing of S1904 to 1910 of the command determination processing of the first embodiment is performed. include.

Next, the round effect process (S4955) executed in the command determination process 4 (S1811 in FIG. 127) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect processing (S4955). This round effect processing (4955) is a process of determining the display content of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, and specifically, a process of determining the display content of the round effect shown in FIG. 125 (b). Is executed.

When the round effect process (S4955) is executed, the current number of rounds is first extracted based on the round number command received this time (S5101). Then, it is determined whether the current number of rounds is 6, that is, whether it is the timing when the sixth round is started (S5104).

Here, if it is determined that the current number of rounds is not 6 (it is not the timing when the 6th round is started) (S5102: No), a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is set. (S5103), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the current number of rounds is 6 (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation pass flag 223p is on (S5104).

If it is determined in the process of S5104 that the probability change passage flag 223p is set to ON (S5104: Yes), a display round command indicating that the probability change route has passed (the probability change passage command has been received) is set (S5104: Yes). S5105). By setting the display round command indicating the passage of this probabilistic route, an image congratulating the player with "GET congratulations" is displayed during the sixth round game (see FIG. 125 (b)).

Then, when the processing of S5105 is completed, the probability variation passing flag 223p is set to off (S5106), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5104 that the probability variation passage flag 223p is not set to on (set to off) (S5104: No), the probability variation route is not passed (probability variation passage command is not received). Set a display round command indicating (S5107), and end this process. By setting the display round command indicating that the probabilistic route has not passed, an image that encourages the player to "do not give up" is displayed during the sixth round game (not shown).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the main control device 110 provides information indicating that the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning validity period (see FIG. 124) during the jackpot game. Since it is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, for example, it is possible to notify whether or not the probability change state is given after the end of the current big hit game by the end of the big hit game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the probabilistic winning prize validity period continues until the final round of the jackpot game is completed, the probabilistic change state is given at the stage (intermediate stage) when the sixth round round game is executed. Even if it is not confirmed, there is still the possibility that a probable change state will be given. As a result, the player who has been notified that the probability change state is given by executing the round effect displayed during the sixth round round game can safely execute the remaining jackpot game. On the other hand, the player who has been notified that the probability change state has not been determined can be enthusiastically played between the remaining jackpot gaming machines.

In addition to the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game, an effect of immediately notifying when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation prize valid period and a probability variation state are given until the jackpot game ends. You may perform an effect that does not notify the player whether or not the game is played.

In the fourth embodiment, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) are provided, but the number of variable winning devices may be one. Further, as a configuration of the variable winning device, one variable winning device has two openings on the upstream side and the downstream side in the flow direction of the ball, and the two openings are opened and closed by one opening / closing member. You may do it. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the generation of balls that do not enter the variable winning device between rounds during the jackpot game.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the specific general winning opening 630a is provided below the two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), but other configurations are used. Alternatively, for example, a variable winning device may be arranged below the specific general winning opening 630a. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probable change winning valid period during the jackpot game.

Further, it is preferable to provide a distribution device 2600 above the specific general winning opening 630a. With this configuration, for example, when a big hit (for example, a two-round big hit) where the big hit game ends in a short period of time is won, the specific general winning opening 630a is within the probable change prize valid period during the big hit game. It is possible to provide the playability that whether or not a ball enters the ball is determined by the distribution situation of the distribution device 2600 balls.

For such playability, a specific area (specific general winning opening 630a) to which a probabilistic state can be given by entering (passing) a ball within the probable change winning valid period as in the present embodiment is separated from the variable winning device. It can be realized because it is provided, and even if you win a big hit with a small number of balls to be paid out (a big hit with a short period when the variable winning device is opened, for example, a big hit for 2 rounds), you can execute a game that gives a probability change state. Can be made to.

Therefore, even if the jackpot has a small number of balls to be paid out (a jackpot for which the variable winning device is opened for a short period of time, for example, a jackpot for two rounds), which has been disadvantageous to the player in the past, the effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased. There is.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 149. In the third embodiment described above, the second storage device 1600 is provided, and a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down are provided in the second storage device 1600. It is configured so that it is possible to win a prize in the probabilistic winning opening) 630a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 630b. Further, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1600a capable of storing a ball flowing down a part of the flow path.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the third storage device 3600, the first distribution member 3901, the second distribution member 3902, and the first gate 670 are provided in place of the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment. ing.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the first variable is made in the right side area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the area provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). A winning device 65 is provided, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided below the first variable winning device 65. Since the configurations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are the same as those of the fourth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the second variable winning device 650 is added, and the third storage device replaces the second storage device 1600. The points where the 3600 is provided, the points where the first distribution member 3901 and the second distribution member 3902 are provided, the points where the first gate 670 is provided, and the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. Point, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. , And a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 3 embodiments. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a front view showing the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the right side area (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the variable display device unit) with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. Various configurations provided in the area provided on the right side of 80) are different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 130, the configuration of the right side region of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is an enlarged view of the region of the two-dot chain line CXXX shown in FIG. 129. As shown in FIG. 130, a first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 are arranged vertically in the right area of the game board 13, for a round game continuously executed during a big hit game. By alternately controlling the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 to be opened, it is possible to suppress the generation of balls that do not enter any of the variable winning devices during the jackpot game. It is configured. Since the configuration and operation control of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 arranged above and below are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A plurality of nails are planted below the second variable winning device 650 (nails K10, K11), and a ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 is formed between the nail K10 and the nail K11. It flows down to the opening 3900 or the flow path 3910. Here, the nail K10 and the nail K11 are each provided with a plurality of nails connected to each other, and the ratio of the balls flowing down the opening 3900 can be changed by changing the planting position and the inclination of the plurality of nails. It is configured in.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, one out of every three balls launched by the right-handed game and passing through the second variable winning device 650 is configured to flow down to the opening 3900 (about 33%). Has been done. In the right region, the ball flowing down the flow path 3910 passes through the through gate 67, flows down to a position where the ball can enter the second entry port 640, and the ball that does not enter the second entry port 640 , Is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66 (see FIG. 129).

Further, the sphere flowing down the opening 3900 is distributed to a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 3900a to fourth flow path 3900d) by the first distribution device 3901 and the second distribution device 3902, and finally the second flow path 3900d. The sphere that has flowed down the flow path 3900b and the fourth flow path 3900d passes through the through gate 67 in the same manner as the sphere that has passed through the flow path 3910, flows down to a position where the ball can enter the second entry port 640, and is the second. A ball that has not entered the ball entry port 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66 (see FIG. 129).

On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the third flow path 3900c passes through the first gate 670 and flows down to the third storage device 3600. The third storage device 3600 has a storage valve 3600a configured in the same manner as the storage valve 1601a provided in the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment described above, and when the storage valve 3600a is in the closed state, the third storage device 3600 has a storage valve 3600a. , Retained (retained) on the storage valve 3600a.

As shown in FIG. 130, the third storage device 3600 is provided with a side wall 3600b so that one ball is stored on the storage valve 3600a, and the ball stored on the storage valve 3600a flows down from the upstream. It is configured to stay on the storage valve 3600a even if it collides with another ball that has been used.

Further, when a new ball flows down toward the third storage device 3600 while the ball is stored on the storage valve 3600a, it collides with the ball stored on the storage valve 3600a and flows through the flow path 3911. Will be guided to. The ball guided to the flow path 3911 flows down a position where the ball can enter the second entry port 640, and the ball that does not enter the second entry port 640 has an out port 66 (see FIG. 129). You will be guided to a ball discharge channel (not shown).

Then, when the storage valve 3600a is opened (released), the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 enters the specific general winning opening 630a provided below the third storage device 3600. Since the specific general winning opening 630a has the same configuration as the above-described third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, a characteristic configuration of the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be briefly described. In the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit in the special symbol lottery (win / fail determination) executed based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Later, when the ball passes through the first gate 670, the jackpot type is determined. Then, the jackpot game is started when the jackpot type is determined (the jackpot type is selected).

Further, the storage valve 3600a of the third storage device 3600 is opened when a predetermined time (for example, 16 seconds) has elapsed from the determination of the hit / miss of the special symbol in the hit / fail determination of the special symbol.

Further, as in the third embodiment described above, the specific general winning opening 630a is provided, and the final round game ends after the round game within a specific period (first (first round)) during the jackpot game is started. By entering the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a), a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player is given after the end of the jackpot game.

That is, when it is determined to be a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol, the game shifts to the game state (big hit standby state) in which the big hit game is started by passing the ball through the first gate 670, and the storage valve 3600a is opened (the storage valve 3600a is opened. The count for releasing) is started (for example, 16 seconds). Then, when a ball is passed through the first gate 670 within a predetermined period (for example, within 9 seconds) after the special symbol is determined to be a big hit, the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 is transferred to the third storage device 3600. The jackpot game is started in the stored state.

A round game (first round game) in which any variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65) is released after a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) of opening when the jackpot game is started. Is started. Then, when a predetermined period elapses (for example, 16 seconds elapses) after the special symbol is determined to be a big hit, the storage valve 3600a changes to the open position, and the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 is specified. Enter the general winning opening 630a.

If the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is within the probability variation winning valid period (the period from the start of the first round round game to the end of the final round round game), the jackpot game A probable change state is given after the end.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed according to the period required from when the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot until the ball is passed through the first gate 670. It is possible to change the degree of expectation (probability) to be made.

Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game from when the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (after shifting to the big hit standby state) until the ball is passed through the first gate 670.

In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) are provided in the right area of the game board 13, and the two variable winning devices are used for each round game. By alternately controlling the opening of the ball, the situation in which the ball fired during the jackpot game does not enter any of the variable winning devices is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the ball passes through the second variable winning device 650 and enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning valid period in the jackpot game.

Next, the ball flow in the right region in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130. First, of the balls launched by the right-handed game, about 33% pass through the opening 3900, and 50% of the balls flowing down the opening 3900 are distributed to the first flow path 3900a, and the first flow path 3900a. 50% of the balls flowing down the ball are distributed to the third flow path 3900c, and the balls flowing down the third flow path 3900c enter the specific general winning opening 630a. That is, the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the specific general winning opening 630a at a rate of about 1 in 12 balls.

Further, the ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650, which is in the closed state, passes through the opening 3900 formed by the nail K10 and the nail K11, and flows down the first distribution portion 3901 and the second distribution portion 3902. Then, it is distributed to each flow path. Here, it is configured so that the time required for the ball passing through the opening 3900 to pass through the first gate 670 is about 1 second.

The ball that has passed through the first gate 670 is stored (held) in the third storage device 3600 when the storage valve 3600a is closed, and the specific general prize is awarded when the storage valve 3600a is open (released). Enter the ball into the mouth 630a. Here, it is configured so that the time required for the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is about 1 second.

Further, when the storage valve 3600a is opened (released), the time required for the ball stored (retained) in the storage valve 3600a to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is set to 0.5 seconds. ing.

With this configuration, when the ball passes through the first gate 670 in the state where the jackpot of the special symbol is won (the jackpot standby state), the jackpot game is executed. Then, the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 is stored (held) in the third storage device 3600, and the storage valve 3600a is opened (released) after a predetermined time (for example, 16 seconds after winning the jackpot). Enter the specific general winning device 630a.

Further, even if the right-handed game is continuously executed even after the ball has passed through the first gate 670, the next ball passes through the first gate 670 in about 7.2 seconds (). 100 shots can be fired in 60 seconds, and the number of balls passing through the first gate 670 is 1 in 12). That is, by setting a period shorter than 7.2 seconds (maximum 6 seconds in this embodiment) as the opening period in the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started, and two variable winning devices (first variable) are started during the opening period. It is possible to prevent a ball that has passed through the winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) from entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the round game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the specific winning opening 630a at an unintended timing and provide a fair game.

Further, the present embodiment is configured to be able to determine whether or not the ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 630a is a ball that has been launched by an appropriate game. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 130, a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the opening 3900 (not shown) and a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the second flow path 3900b (not shown). , A sensor (not shown) for detecting a ball passing through the fourth flow path 3900d is provided, and the number of balls fired by the right-handed game can be measured. Then, a command capable of grasping the number of balls passing through the through gate 67 and the number of balls passing through the first gate 670 is configured to be output from the main control device 110.

Based on the signal output from the sensor provided as described above and the command output from the main control device 110, the number of balls that have passed through the opening 3900, the number of balls that have passed through the second flow path 3900b, and the fourth flow. By determining whether or not the total number of balls that have passed through the road 3900d and the number of balls that have passed through the first gate 670 match, the first ball is illegally repeated (one ball is repeated using a ball with a thread). (Act of passing through the gate 670) It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the ball is passed through the first gate 670.

Further, in the present embodiment, since one out of four balls that have passed through the opening 3900b is configured to pass through the first gate 670, the number of balls that have passed through the second flow path 3900b and the fourth. Whether the distribution member properly distributes the balls by determining whether or not the ratio of the total number of balls passing through the flow path 3900d to the number of balls passing through the first gate 670 is 3: 1. It is configured so that it can be determined.

As a result, the distribution member is damaged and the ball is distributed to only one of the routes, or the distribution member is illegally damaged so that the ball is distributed only to the route that is advantageous to the player. It has the effect of being able to easily determine that fraudulent activity is taking place.

When comparing the number of balls of each sensor or each command described above or the total number of balls of them, a predetermined allowable range may be provided. This takes into account the time lag when the ball flows down. Specifically, the determination may be made in consideration of the time (about 1 second) required for the ball passing through the opening 3900 to pass through the through gate 67 or the first gate 670.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment is such that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the electrical configuration in the third embodiment, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The difference is that the configuration of the above is partially changed, and various sensor groups 229 connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 are deleted. Since the other electrical configurations are the same as those in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (a). FIG. 132 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 132 (a), in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, the contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, and the open scenario setting table 202e is opened to the third. The difference is that the scenario setting table is changed to 202g.

Here, the first type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as a result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail determination), after the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is referred to with reference to the first hit type selection table 202b based on the fact that the ball passes through the first gate 670. Is selected.

The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment is defined in each jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot C) with respect to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 100 (b)) in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the contents described above are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those of the first type selection table 202b of the third embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Is stipulated. This jackpot A is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 8 rounds. The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". This jackpot B is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 8 rounds. In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99", the jackpot C is associated and defined. This jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for two rounds.

Of the above-mentioned jackpot types, jackpot A and jackpot B are both jackpots with the same number of rounds (8 rounds), but the opening set in the third opening scenario setting table described later with reference to FIG. 133. In order to make the scenario (motion control scenario during the jackpot game) different in the jackpot in which the same number of rounds (8 rounds) of the round game is executed, the jackpot type is different.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, the jackpot B is associated and defined in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is associated and defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 99". There is. Since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C specified corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the special symbol 1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 50%, the jackpot B is selected at 20%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 30%. If the player wins, the jackpot A is selected at a ratio of 20%, the jackpot B is selected at 70%, and the jackpot C is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the third open scenario setting table 202g in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the third open scenario setting table 202 g in the fifth embodiment.

The third opening scenario setting table 202g is the third opening scenario setting table (normal) 202g1 referred to when the ball passes through the first gate 670 in the state where the jackpot is won in the normal game state (big hit standby state). It has a third open scenario setting table (probability change) 202g2, which is referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state where a big hit is won in a probability change state (big hit standby state), and each is the first hit. The setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the type selection table 202b are defined. If the jackpot is won in the time saving state, the third open scenario setting table (probability change) 202g2 is set to be referred to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 133 (b), the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202 g1 defined in the third open scenario setting table 202 g will be described. FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202 g1. This third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1 is a table referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state where a big hit is won in a normal game state (big hit standby state), and is selected. The opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period in the jackpot game are set according to the jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "6 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is set. If is a big hit B, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "16 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds". When the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "6 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds".

Next, with reference to FIG. 133 (c), the third open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202 g2 defined in the third open scenario setting table 202 g will be described. FIG. 133 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the third open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202 g2. This third open scenario setting table (probability change) 202g2 is a table to be referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state where a big hit is won in a probable change (time reduction) state (big hit standby state), and is selected. The opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period in the jackpot game are set according to the jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "1 second", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is set. If is a big hit B, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "11 seconds", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds". When the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening scenario is set so that the opening period is "1 second", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds".

As described above, in the present embodiment, among the periods (opening period, interval period, ending period) set during the jackpot, the opening period is set to be different depending on the jackpot type. In addition, the opening period and the interval period are set to be different depending on the gaming state (normal state or probability change (time reduction) state).

In this way, by changing the opening period in the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening period (until the start of the first round game) is changed. ..

Therefore, it is possible to provide a jackpot in which the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 is easy to enter within the valid period of the probability variation prize and a jackpot in which it is difficult to enter. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Further, the interval between rounds is set to 0.2 seconds in the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1 referred to in the case of the normal gaming state (see FIG. 133 (b)), and the probability change (time reduction) state. In the third open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202g2 referred to in the case of, it is set to 0.5 seconds.

By setting the period to be long, this inter-round interval lengthens the state in which none of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) is open during the probabilistic winning valid period. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a provided below the second variable winning device 650 during the probabilistic winning winning period.

On the other hand, by shortening the interval between rounds, it is possible to shorten the state in which none of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) is open during the probabilistic winning valid period. can. Therefore, the ball fired during the jackpot game can be efficiently entered into any of the variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650).

That is, in the jackpot game in which the opening scenario is set with reference to the third opening scenario setting table (normal) 202g1, that is, the jackpot game executed in the normal gaming state, the interval between rounds is set to 0.2 seconds. Therefore, almost no ball passes through the second variable winning device 650 during the inter-round interval.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game in which the opening scenario is set with reference to the third opening scenario setting table (probability variation) 202g2, that is, the jackpot game executed in the probability variation (time reduction) state, the interval between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the second variable winning device 650 during the inter-round interval increases.

As a result, in the jackpot game executed in the probability variation (time reduction) state, even if the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 at the start of the jackpot game does not enter the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning validity period. , A ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 during the interval between rounds of the jackpot game can be a jackpot that is easy to enter the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning valid period.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the normal state. It is possible to make it easier to continuously provide an advantageous game state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the interval between rounds is set to 0.2 seconds in all the jackpot games executed when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, but the interval is not limited to this, and various times can be set. It may be set. For example, the period of the inter-round interval in a specific number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) is set to 1.5 seconds, and a game is executed in which the ball is inserted into the specific general winning opening 630a using the inter-round interval. May be good.

Next, the contents specified in the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 134 (a). As shown in FIG. 134A, the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment has a jackpot flag 203t, a storage valve opening flag 203u, and an opening counter 203v added to the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

The jackpot flag 203t is a flag indicating that the determination result of the special symbol is a jackpot. When the ball passes through the first gate 670 while the jackpot flag 203t is set to on, the jackpot type and the opening scenario are set, and the jackpot game is started. The jackpot flag 203t is set to on when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol variation process 5 (S104 in FIG. 141) (S271), and the jackpot type determination process (S1051 in FIG. 143). (S5201). Then, it is set to off in the jackpot type determination process (S1051 in FIG. 143) (S5203).

The storage valve opening flag 203u is a flag indicating that the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit and the counter for opening the storage valve 3600a (opening counter 203v) is in a counting state. While the storage valve open flag 203u is set to ON, a new value is not set in the open counter 203v.

The storage valve opening flag 203u is set to on (S5210) in the storage valve opening process (S1052 in FIG. 144), and is set to off after the storage solenoid 600 is set to on (S5214).

The opening counter 203v is a counter for counting the timing of opening the storage valve 3600a when the determination result of the special symbol becomes a big hit. The opening counter 203v is set with a counter value (S5211) in the storage valve opening process (S1052 in FIG. 144) and is subtracted in the process of S5215.

Next, returning to FIG. 131, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 in the third embodiment in that the expectation degree display selection table 222b is deleted and the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c is added. Hereinafter, the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 134 (b).

FIG. 134 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c. The pseudo-effect number setting table 222c is a table for setting the number of pseudo-effects executed in the first pseudo-effect (see FIGS. 138 and 139) executed when the determination result of the special symbol becomes a big hit. be. This pseudo-effect number setting table 222c is referred to when setting the pseudo-effect number in the pseudo-effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5404).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the number of pseudo-effects set is set according to the game state (normal game state or probability change (time reduction) state) when the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit. It is set, and if the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the number of simulated effects is set to 4 times, and if the jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state, the number of simulated effects is set to 5 times.

Returning to FIG. 131, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment deletes the storage upper limit flag 223k, the special ball flow flag 223m, and the storage valve opening flag 223n with respect to the RAM 223 in the third embodiment described above, and has a pseudo effect flag 223q and a pseudo effect counter. The difference is that 223r and the opening flag 223s have been added.

The pseudo effect flag 223q is a flag indicating that the pseudo effect is being executed. The pseudo effect flag 223q is set on (S5302) in the jackpot related process (S5912 in FIG. 147) and turned off in the pseudo effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5411).

The pseudo effect counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of times the pseudo effect is executed, and is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the pseudo effect is executed. By discriminating the counter value of the pseudo-effect counter 223r, the final pseudo-effect is determined, and different effects can be executed. The pseudo effect counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S5407) in the pseudo effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149), and is reset to 0 (S5405: Yes) when it is determined that the value of the counter is the upper limit (S5413). ).

The opening flag 223s is a flag indicating that the jackpot game has started. This opening flag 223s is output from the main control device 110 based on the fact that the ball has passed through the first gate 670 in the state of winning the big hit of the special symbol (big hit standby state) in the big hit related process (S5912 in FIG. 147). It is set to be turned on when the opening command is received (S5305), and is referred to when setting a symbol to be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5408), after setting the content of the pseudo-effect. It is set to off (S5411).

Here, the flow of the game when the big hit in the fifth embodiment is won will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG. 135 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, and FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the jackpot is won in the probability variation (time reduction) state.

First, as shown in FIG. 135, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, a counter value (for example, a value corresponding to 16 seconds) for opening the storage device (third storage device 3600) is set. Then, based on the passage of the ball through the first gate 670, the jackpot type is determined (selected) (for example, the jackpot A is determined (selected)), and the opening corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined. The scenario is set and the jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game is started, the first round game is started after the opening period (6 seconds) set in the open scenario has elapsed. Then, the period from the start of the first round game to the end of the final round game is set as the probabilistic winning valid period.

In addition, when 16 seconds have passed since the jackpot of the special symbol was won, the storage device (third storage device 3600) is changed to the open state, and the ball is stored in the storage device (third storage device 3600). The ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

Therefore, if the ball is passed through the first gate 670 within 10 seconds after winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the ball passes through the first gate 670 and is stored in the storage device (third storage device 3600). The ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the valid period of the probabilistic winning prize.

If the ball is passed through the first gate 670 within 10 to 16 seconds after winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the ball passes through the first gate 670 and the storage device (third storage device 3600). The balls stored in the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a outside the valid period of the probabilistic winning prize (during the opening period of the big hit game).

Furthermore, if the ball is passed through the first gate 670 16 seconds after the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the third storage device 3600 is already in the open state before the ball is passed through the first gate 670. The ball that has passed through the first gate 670 will enter the specific general winning opening 630a as it is. However, as shown in FIG. 130, since the time required for the ball to flow down from the first gate 670 to the specific general winning opening 630a is designed to be one second, the ball passing through the first gate 670 is designed. , The ball will be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a outside the valid period of the probabilistic winning prize (during the opening period of the big hit game).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball is passed through the specific area (gate 1 670) within a predetermined period (within 10 seconds) after the jackpot of the special symbol is won, which is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be given a probabilistic state, which is a state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game even after winning the big hit of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening period of the jackpot game is set to be different depending on the jackpot type determined by the ball passing through the first gate 670. Specifically, as the jackpot type, when jackpot A is selected, 6 seconds is set as the opening period, and when jackpot B is selected, 16 seconds is set as the opening period.

In this way, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the probabilistic winning prize validity period differs depending on the jackpot type determined by passing the ball through the first gate 670, so the jackpot of the special symbol was won. In this case, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically in order to let the ball pass through the first gate 670 as soon as possible. Further, even if the timing of passing the ball through the first gate 670 is delayed, the ball passing through the first gate 670 has a probable change winning valid period by selecting the jackpot type in which the opening scenario with a short opening period is set. Since the ball is entered into the specific general winning opening 630a, there is an effect that the player can have expectations until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the flow of the game when the jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state will be described. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the probability change (time reduction) state, the timing at which the storage device (third storage device 3600) is released is the same as when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state (special symbol). 16 seconds after winning the jackpot), but the opening period corresponding to each jackpot type selected by the ball passing through the first gate 670 is set to be shortened.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a normal game state, if jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, the opening period is "6 seconds", and if jackpot B is selected, the opening period is "16 seconds", which is a jackpot. When C is selected, "6 seconds" is set as the opening period (see FIG. 133 (b)).

On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the probable change (time reduction) state, the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type for "1 second", and if the jackpot B is selected, the opening period is "11 seconds" and the jackpot C is selected. When selected, "1 second" is set as the opening period (see FIG. 133 (c)).

With this configuration, the ball that has passed through Gate 1 670 will win a specific general prize within the valid period of the probability variation prize if the jackpot is won in the probability variation (time saving) state than if the jackpot is won in the normal game state. It is possible to set a long period during which the ball can enter the mouth 630a. Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability change state is given by the jackpot winning in the normal state. It is possible to make it easier to continuously provide an advantageous game state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the set opening period is different between the case where the jackpot is won in the normal game state and the case where the jackpot is won in the probability change (time reduction) state (the probability change (time reduction) state is the opening period. (Set short) makes it possible to change the probability that the probability change state will be given after the end of the big hit (the probability change (time reduction) state is higher), but other configurations may be used.

For example, the timing at which the storage device (third storage device 3600) is opened may be different depending on whether the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state or the jackpot is won in the probability change (time saving state). Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, the storage device (third storage device 3600) is opened 16 seconds after the jackpot is won, and the jackpot is won in the probabilistic (short time) gaming state. In that case, it is advisable to open the storage device (third storage device 3600) 21 seconds after winning the jackpot.

Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, the probability that the probability change state will be given by the jackpot winning in the probability change (time saving) state is higher than the probability that the probability change state will be given by the jackpot winning in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to easily continuously provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the simulated effect executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a timing chart showing the flow of the simulated effect when the jackpot A is selected. This pseudo effect is an effect of notifying whether a probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed after winning the jackpot, and after winning the jackpot (a special symbol indicating the jackpot as a judgment result of the special symbol is displayed). It consists of a first simulated effect that is executed based on the game content until the jackpot game is started (after the stop display) and a second simulated effect that is executed based on the game content during the jackpot game. ing.

This pseudo effect is executed using a pseudo symbol (see FIG. 138 (b)) having the same aspect as the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the variation of the special symbol. It is an effect, specifically, it is an effect of changing a pseudo symbol for 2 seconds and then stopping and displaying it in a predetermined symbol sequence (for example, "341" or "666"), and a pseudo effect of varyingly displaying this pseudo symbol. Is executed a plurality of times (4 times or 5 times), and the pseudo symbol finally stopped and displayed indicates that the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed.

First, when the jackpot is won (when the third symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81) (see FIG. 138 (a)), the game of passing the ball through the first gate 670 is started. At the same time, the pseudo-effect of the pseudo-symbol is executed a plurality of times on the third symbol display device 81 (first pseudo-effect). The upper limit of the number of times this pseudo-effect is executed is set by the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c (see FIG. 134 (b)).

When the number of times of the pseudo-effect to be executed does not reach the upper limit number of times set by the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c, the pseudo-design is stopped in the stop mode (for example, "341") indicating that the pseudo-effect continues. Display and execute the next simulated effect.

Then, at the timing at which the upper limit number of pseudo-effects set by the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c is executed (in the case of FIG. 137, the timing at which the fourth pseudo-effect is executed), the pseudo-effect process (FIG. 149) described later is performed. (Refer to), it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition (the ball passes through the first gate 670) is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the first simulated effect is displayed. Decide and stop display.

In this case, if it is determined that the sphere has already passed through the first gate 670 (if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the pseudo symbol is given a probabilistic state as a stop display mode. "666" is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, "222" is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode indicating that it is not confirmed that the pseudo-symbol is given the probabilistic state. To.

In this way, in a gaming machine in which it is not possible to determine whether or not a probabilistic state is given after the end of a big hit based only on the determination result of the special symbol, a pseudo effect using a pseudo symbol having the same display mode as the third symbol. By performing the above, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, in FIG. 137, four pseudo-effects, that is, 8 seconds are set as the first pseudo-effect period, and the predetermined condition is satisfied by the timing when the final pseudo-effect is started (pseudo-effect processing (see FIG. 149)). The timing of determination) is set to be 6 seconds after the jackpot is won. This is because if the predetermined conditions are met within 6 seconds from the jackpot winning (when the ball passes through the first gate 670), the ball will be placed in the specified general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning validity period. This is because it is confirmed that the ball will enter.

Further, in the present embodiment, 8 seconds is set as the first simulated effect period, but for example, if the ball is passed through the first gate 670 immediately after winning the jackpot, the first simulated effect period elapses. The jackpot game is started before the game is started, but even if the jackpot game is started, the first pseudo-effect is continuously executed.

Even in such a case, since the opening period during the jackpot game is set to 6 seconds, in most cases, the first simulated production period ends by the time the round game during the jackpot game starts. Can be done.

Further, the number of times of the simulated effect executed in the first simulated effect is set so that the timing of passing the ball to the first gate 670, which enables the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning valid period, is long. It is set so that the number of times is increased as the number of times is increased, and the player is informed that the larger the number of times of pseudo-effects, the higher the possibility of acquiring the probabilistic state.

In addition, in order to notify the player of the length of the ball passing timing to the first gate 670, which enables the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variation winning valid period, the remaining number of times of the pseudo effect. May be configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player will enthusiastically play the game by assuming the remaining time and enthusiastically passing the ball through the first gate 670, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time for one simulated effect is fixed to 2 seconds, but a simulated effect with different effect times may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified whether or not the probabilistic state is given by the stop mode of the pseudo symbol of the final pseudo-effect, but the probabilistic state is given by using a pseudo-effect other than the final pseudo-effect. You may give a notification suggesting the possibility of this.

For example, when a sphere passes through the first gate 670 during the period in which the pseudo-effect 1 is being executed, the pseudo-design is a mode suggesting the possibility that a probable change state is given in the fluctuations of the pseudo-effect 2 and the pseudo-effect 3. It is advisable to change the color of the screen, the color of the background, and the variation mode. As a result, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic state will be given before the final pseudo-effect is started.

Next, the second simulated effect will be described. This second simulated effect notifies that after the first simulated effect is completed, the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probable variation winning valid period, and it is confirmed that the probabilistic state is given after the jackpot is completed. It is a production that is executed using the final round (8th round) of the jackpot game.

Similar to the first pseudo-effect, this second pseudo-effect also executes an effect using a pseudo-design (see FIG. 140). When the jackpot game enters the final round, the pseudo symbol variation is started on the third symbol display device 81, and the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop mode determined by the round effect processing 5 (see FIG. 148).

As described above, the simulated effect in the present embodiment is a game in which a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a within the valid period of the probability variation prize during the jackpot game, so that the probability variation is given after the jackpot game is completed. Since it is possible to notify whether or not it is confirmed that the probabilistic state is given at multiple timings on the machine, the player will see the effect performed with interest and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, since the variable display using the pseudo symbol configured in the same mode as the third symbol is performed as the pseudo effect executed at a plurality of timings, the player can perform the pseudo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By looking at the effect (variable effect of the pseudo symbol), it can be thought that the jackpot symbol "222" stopped at the time of winning the jackpot has been promoted to the probabilistic symbol "777". Therefore, even with the pachinko machine 10 having complicated game performance, it is possible to notify the player of the transition of the game state in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. be.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the above-mentioned simulated effect is executed will be described. It should be noted that each display area displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIGS. 138 to 140 has the same reference numeral in the same place as the display screen shown in FIG. 5 of the first embodiment described above. Is added and the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 138 (a), the display contents when a big hit is won (determined as a big hit) in a special symbol lottery (win / fail determination) will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the jackpot is won, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode "222" indicating that the jackpot is won in the main display area Dm.

Further, a game description for starting a big hit game is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and a portion (first gate 670) aimed at by the player is displayed in the small area Ds2 in a schematic diagram. Further, in the small area Ds3, a guidance display for instructing the player to perform a right-handed game is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138 (b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the first pseudo effect is executed among the pseudo effects will be described. FIG. 138 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 138 (b), a third symbol display area Dmb in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode "222" indicating a jackpot. Will be done. In the center of the main display area Dm, a pseudo symbol having a mode similar to that of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "341".

This state indicates a state in which the "pseudo-effect 1" shown in FIG. 137 has been completed, and the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode "341" indicating that the pseudo-effect is continuously executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the final simulated effect of the first simulated effect (see FIG. 137) is executed will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the case of notifying that the probability variation state is likely to be given in the final simulated effect of the first simulated effect. Therefore, FIG. 139 (b) is an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the case of notifying that it is highly probable that the probability change state is given in the final pseudo effect of the first pseudo effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows. As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the main display area Dm, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode “666” indicating that it is highly probable that the probability variation state is given. By looking at the display mode of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily grasp that the probability change state is given after the jackpot game is completed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 139 (b), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the aspect “222” indicating that it is not certain that the main display area Dm is given the probabilistic state. By seeing the display mode of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player recognizes that the probability change state is not given after the jackpot game ends at this stage, and the probability change state is given during the jackpot game. You will be enthusiastic about playing games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the second simulated effect (see FIG. 137) is executed among the simulated effects will be described. FIG. 140 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content when the second simulated effect is started, and FIG. 140 (b) is an example of the display content when the second simulated effect is completed. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the display area 714 displays the "final round" as the current number of round games, and the display area 717 displays the "last replay" indicating that the second pseudo effect is being executed. The word "lottery chance" is displayed. Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance display for guiding a target location (variable winning device) during the big hit game is displayed. Further, in the main display area Dm, the pseudo symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the pseudo variation by the second pseudo effect ends and the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed, "777" is stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 140 (b).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. The fifth embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the control for executing the jackpot game of the special symbol is changed and the control for opening the storage valve 3600a is changed.

In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, only the points changed from the third embodiment described above will be described, and the processes not changed from the third embodiment will be described. , And the point that the process is simply deleted will be omitted in detail.

First, the special symbol variation processing 5 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 5 (S104). The difference between the special symbol variation process 5 and the special symbol variation process 3 of the third embodiment described above is that the process is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a big hit (S216: Yes). The point is that the contents are different. Since the other processes are the same as the special symbol variation process of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 5 (S104) is executed, the processes S201 to S216 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process 3 of the third embodiment described above. If it is determined in the processing of S216 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processing of S220 to S223 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation processing 3 described above, and the stop command is set (S). S224), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S216: Yes), the big hit flag is set to ON (S271), and then the big hit command is set (S272). Then, a stop command is set (S224), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is not executed after that, and the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (big hit game standby). In the state), the big hit game is started when the ball enters the first gate 670.

Next, FIG. 142, which describes the main process of the main control device 110 with reference to FIG. 142, is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control device 110. In this main process, various processes executed by the main controller 110 are performed. The processes showing the same contents as those of the above-described third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 142, when the main process is executed, the processes S1001 to S1003 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment described above. Next, the jackpot type determination process is executed (S1051). From this jackpot type determination process, the jackpot type is set when the ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state where the jackpot of the special symbol is won (with the jackpot flag 203t set to ON). A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 143.

When the jackpot type determination process (S1051) is completed, the storage valve opening process (S1052) is then executed. By this storage valve opening process (S1052), the storage valve 3600a of the third storage device 3600 is controlled to open based on the fact that the jackpot of the special symbol is won. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

When the storage valve opening process (S1052) is completed, the processes S1004 to S1016 are executed in the same manner as the main process of the third embodiment described above, and this process is terminated.

Next, the jackpot type determination process (S1051 in FIG. 142) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot type determination process (S1051). When the jackpot type determination process (S1051) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5201). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203t is not set to on (set to off) (S5201: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5201: Yes), then whether or not the ball has passed through the first gate 670 is grouped (S5202). If it is determined that the ball has not passed through the first gate 670 (S5202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S5202. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the first gate 670 (S5202: Yes), then the jackpot flag 203t is set to off (S5203), and the first hit type is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is selected from the selection table 202b (S5204). Specifically, it has a means for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see S301 in FIG. 27) acquired when the change of the special symbol won in the jackpot is started in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. (Not shown), the jackpot type corresponding to the stored value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected from the first hit type selection table 202b.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type selected when the ball passes through the first gate 670 is selected by using the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol won by the jackpot. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the first gate 670, and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is obtained. You may use to select the jackpot type.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is selected when the ball passes through the first gate 670. For example, in the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 141), the lottery result of this time is a jackpot. After being determined (S216) and the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S271), a process of selecting the jackpot type may be performed.

By doing so, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the type of jackpot executed by passing the ball through the first gate 670 can be grasped in advance. Therefore, for example, the selected jackpot can be grasped. Based on the opening period set according to the type, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player can be given.

Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game from winning the special symbol to the time when the ball passes through the first gate 670, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. ..

In this case, in the jackpot type determination process shown in FIG. 143, only the process of setting the start of the jackpot based on the already selected jackpot type is performed, so that the processing load of the jackpot type determination process can be reduced. ..

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 143. When the processing of S5204 is completed, next, the opening scenario of the jackpot game is set based on the selected jackpot type and the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation (short time) gaming state) when the jackpot is won (the opening scenario of the jackpot game). S5205). Specifically, the opening scenario is set based on the contents specified in the third opening scenario setting table 202g (see FIG. 133).

The process of setting the opening scenario of the jackpot game may also be executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 141) in the same manner as the process of selecting the jackpot type described above.

Then, when the processing of S5205 is completed, the start of the jackpot is set (S5206), and the jackpot game is started. Next, a jackpot start command is set (S5207), and this process ends.

Next, the storage valve opening process (S1052) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the storage valve opening process (S1052). When the storage valve opening process (S1052) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5208). Here, if the jackpot flag 203t is not set to on (set to off) (S5208: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5208, when the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5208: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage valve opening flag 203u is set to ON (S5209). Here, if the storage valve open flag 203u is not set to on (S5209: No), the storage valve open flag 203u is set to on (S5210), and the open counter value corresponding to the gaming state is set (S5211). ), End this process.

Further, in the process of S5209, when the storage valve opening flag 203u is set to ON (S5209: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the opening counter 203v is 0 (S5212), and here, it is opened. When it is determined that the value of the counter 203v is 0 (S5212: Yes), the solenoid for the storage device 610 (see FIG. 131) is set to ON (S5213), and the storage valve open flag 203u is set to Off (S5213). S5214), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5212 that the value of the open counter 203v is not 0 (S5212: No), the value of the open counter 203v is subtracted by 1 (S5215), and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is not started only by winning the jackpot by the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203t is turned on in the state where the jackpot is won. The jackpot game is executed by the ball passing through the first gate 670, which is a specific area (in the set state).

Then, a storage means (third storage device 3600) that is opened after a predetermined period (for example, 16 seconds) has passed since the jackpot was won is arranged at a position where a ball that has passed through the first gate 670 can enter. The specific general winning opening 630a is arranged at a position where the ball can enter when the storage means (third storage device 3600) is opened.

This specific general winning opening 630a is a privilege that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed by the ball entering the ball within the probability variation winning validity period (from the start of the first round to the end of the final round) in the jackpot game. (Probability change state) is configured to be given.

As a result, whether or not the probability change state is given after the end of the big hit is determined by the time required from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific general winning opening 630a is located at a position where it is difficult to enter a ball when the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) opened by the jackpot game are open. Is arranged so that it is difficult for a ball fired during a jackpot game to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. As a result, there is an effect that the game from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670 can be performed more enthusiastically so that the probability change state is given after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, two variable winning devices that are opened during the jackpot game are provided up and down (upstream and downstream in the flow direction of the ball), and by alternately opening each variable winning device, between rounds. It suppresses the generation of balls that do not win in any variable winning device at intervals. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from frequently entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game (during the probability variation winning valid period).

In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening period of the jackpot game (non-probability change winning valid period), and the round interval period depend on the type of jackpot and the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability change (time reduction) state) when the jackpot is won. The lengths of are different. This makes it possible to set a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot that is unlikely to be given a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of balls that have flowed down between the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) opened during the jackpot game and the specific general winning opening 630a. Distribution members (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902) to be distributed to the flow path are provided. As a result, the ball that has passed through the variable winning device that is closed at the right time during the jackpot game is distributed to various flow paths, so it is difficult to predict whether or not the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It becomes. Therefore, since the player pays close attention to the flow condition of the ball, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game during the big hit game.

Further, the above-mentioned distribution member (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902) is configured to be able to regularly distribute spheres to a plurality of flow paths. Therefore, by allowing a predetermined number (for example, 4) or more of balls to flow down to the distribution member during the jackpot game, it is possible to reliably enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

In addition, as a configuration of this distribution member (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902), by an action other than the operation of distributing the sphere (for example, the contact of the sphere flowing down in the vicinity of the distribution member). The distribution destination of the sphere may be configured to be changeable. This has the effect of preventing the player from grasping the distribution status of the distribution member in advance.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 149, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the content of the command determination process 5 (S1811) of the main process (see FIG. 145) is changed, the pseudo effect process (S1854) is added, and the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 114). ), The time saving medium display process (S1852 in FIG. 114) and the subtraction process of the allowable time counter (S1853 in FIG. 114) are deleted, which is different from the above-described third embodiment. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, only the points different from the third embodiment described above will be described, and they have not been changed from the third embodiment. Detailed description of other processes will be omitted.

First, the main process executed in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process executed in the fifth embodiment. In this main process, the contents of the command determination process 5 (S1811) are changed and the pseudo effect process (S1854) is added to the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 114), the time saving / medium display process (S1852 in FIG. 114), and the subtraction process of the allowable time counter (S1853 in FIG. 114) are deleted. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145, when the main process is executed, the processes S1801 to S1812 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above. The detailed content of the command determination process 5 executed in S1811 is different from the command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above, and the detailed content thereof. Will be described later with reference to FIG. 146.

When the command determination process 5 (S1811) is completed, the process of S1812 is executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above, and then the pseudo effect process (S1854) is executed. To execute. This pseudo effect processing (S1854) is an effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a big hit is won, and is an effect of notifying whether or not a probability change state is given after the big hit game is completed. Is. The detailed contents of this pseudo-effect processing (S1854) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

Then, when the pseudo effect process (S1854) is completed, the processes S1813 to S1817 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above, and the present process is terminated.

Next, the command determination process 5 (S1811) executed in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 5 (S1811). When the command determination process 5 (S1811) is executed, first, the processes of S1901 to S1912 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 115) executed in the third embodiment described above.

In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot has been received (S5911). Here, the commands related to the jackpot include an opening command, a round number command, an ending command, and the like output from the main control device 110.

If it is determined in the process of S5911 that a command related to a jackpot has been received (S5911: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S5912), and this process ends. This jackpot-related process (S5912) is a process executed when a command related to the jackpot is output from the main control device 110, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5911 that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S5911: No), then the other command determination process 3 (see FIG. 115) of the third embodiment described above is performed. The process (S1919) corresponding to the command is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON, as in the winning process 4 (S1111 in FIG. 126) executed by the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above. It is configured to set a probabilistic pass command for output to, and as a process executed in S1919, a process of setting the probabilistic pass flag 223p to on is executed when a probabilistic pass command is received.

Next, the jackpot-related process (S5912) executed in the command determination process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5912). This jackpot-related process (S5912) is a process for executing an effect during the jackpot game.

When the jackpot-related process (S5912) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot command has been received (S5301). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot command has been received (S5301: Yes), the pseudo-effect flag 223q is set to ON (S5302), the jackpot command for display is set (S5303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301 when it is determined that the jackpot command has not been received (S5301: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S5304). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S5304: Yes), the opening flag 223s is set to on (S5305), the jackpot flag 223h is set to on (S5306), and the display opening command is set (S5307). ), End this process.

In the process of S5304, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S5304: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5308). Here, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5308: Yes), the round effect process 5 (S5309) is executed, the display round number command is set (S5310), and this process ends.

This round effect processing 5 (S5309) is a process of determining the content to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during each round of the jackpot game, and is a pseudo stop effect process (second pseudo stop) in the final round. This is a process in which the content of the effect of the effect process) is determined. A detailed description of the contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

On the other hand, in the process of S5308, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5308: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5311). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S5311: Yes), the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off, and the permissible time counter is set to 1 second (S5312). Then, the display ending command is set (S5313), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the ending command has not been received (S5311: No), then the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S5314), and this process is terminated. As a command to be processed in S5314, for example, when a command indicating a currently open variable winning device is received during a jackpot game, the variable currently open to the third symbol display device 81 is received. When a display command is set to display a guide to the winning device, and a command indicating that more balls than a predetermined number (10) have won a prize (so-called over winning) is received in the variable winning device. , A command for causing the voice output device 226 to output a notification sound in which an over prize has occurred is set.

Next, the round effect process 5 (S5309) executed in the jackpot-related process (S5912 in FIG. 147) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect process 5 (S5309). This round effect processing 5 (S5309) is a process of determining the content to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during each round of the jackpot game, and is a pseudo stop effect process (second pseudo stop) in the final round. This is a process in which the content of the effect of the effect process) is determined.

When the round effect process 5 (S5309) is executed, first, the number of rounds is extracted based on the received round number command (S5101). Then, it is determined whether the number of extracted rounds is the final round (S5151). If the number of extracted rounds is not the final round (S5151: No), a display round command corresponding to the number of extracted rounds is set (S5103), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5151 that the number of extracted rounds is the final round (S5151: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation pass flag 223p is set to ON (S5104). The probability variation passage flag 223p receives a command output when the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON from the main control device 110, that is, when it is confirmed that the probability variation state is given after the jackpot game ends. It is set to ON in the process of S1919 of the command determination process 5 (S1811 in FIG. 146).

In the process of S5104, when it is determined that the probability variation pass flag 223p is set to ON (S5104: Yes), it corresponds to the pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "777" as shown in FIG. 140 (b). The display round command is set (S5152), and the probability variation pass flag 223p is set to off (S5106). Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5104, when it is determined that the probability variation pass flag 223p is not set to on (set to off) (S5104: No), the pseudo stop symbol becomes "222". The corresponding display round command is set (S5153), and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, a period during which a probabilistic state can be given between the end of the first simulated effect executed when a jackpot is won and the start of the final round of the jackpot game (valid for probabilistic winning). It is possible to notify the player whether or not the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a during the period) and the probabilistic state is given after the big hit is completed by the effect using the pseudo symbol.

Therefore, it is considered that the player sees the pseudo effect (variation effect of the pseudo symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the jackpot symbol "222" stopped at the time of winning the jackpot is promoted to the probabilistic symbol "777". Can be made. Therefore, even with the pachinko machine 10 having complicated game performance, it is possible to notify the player of the transition of the gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to notify the player that the player is tired of the game. be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, a pseudo effect process (S1854) executed in the main process of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the simulated effect processing (S1854). This pseudo effect processing (S1854) describes the content of the pseudo effect (first pseudo effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81 between the time when the jackpot is won and the time when the ball passes through the first gate 670. It is a process to decide.

When the pseudo-effect processing (S1854) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the pseudo-effect flag 223q is set to ON (S5401). This pseudo effect flag 223q is a flag set to be turned on when a jackpot command is received in the jackpot-related process (S5912 in FIG. 147). Here, if it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223q is not set to on (set to off) (S5401: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the pseudo-effect flag 223q is set to ON (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether the pseudo-effect is being executed (pseudo-variable) (S5402). .. This determination is a process performed to prevent a new pseudo-effect from being started while the pseudo-effect has already been executed. Specifically, an effect indicating that the pseudo-effect is being executed. Determines if the medium flag (not shown) is set to on.

If it is determined that the simulated effect is being executed (S5402: Yes), the process is terminated as it is because a new simulated effect is not started. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo effect is not being executed (S5402: No), it is determined whether the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the process of S5403 that the value of the pseudo-effect counter is 0 (S5403: Yes), the number of pseudo-effects is set based on the pseudo-effect number setting table 222c (S5404), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-effect counter 223r is not 0, that is, when the number of pseudo-effects has already been set (S5403: No), then the value of the pseudo-effect counter 223r reaches the upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is done (S5405).

If it is determined in the process of S5405 that the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is not the upper limit (S5405: No), a display effect command corresponding to the pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "341" is set (S5406). ), The pseudo effect counter 223r is added by 1 (S5407), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo effect counter is the upper limit (S5405: Yes), then it is determined whether the opening flag 223s is set to ON (S5408). The opening flag 223s is a flag set to be turned on when an opening command is received in the jackpot-related process (S5912 in FIG. 147) of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 146).

Here, in the process of S5408, when it is determined that the opening flag 223s is set to ON (S5408: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "777" is set. (S5409), and shift to S5411.

On the other hand, in the process of S5408, when it is determined that the opening flag 223s is not set to on (set to off) (S5408: No), it corresponds to a pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "222". Set the display effect command (S5410), and move to S5411.

After finishing the processing of S5409 or S5410, the pseudo effect flag 223q is set to off (S5411), and the opening flag 223s is set to off (S5412). Then, the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is reset to 0 (S5413), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is not started only by winning the jackpot by the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203t is turned on in the state where the jackpot is won. The jackpot game is executed by the ball passing through the first gate 670, which is a specific area (in the set state).

Then, a storage means (third storage device 3600) that is opened after a predetermined period (for example, 16 seconds) has passed since the jackpot was won is arranged at a position where a ball that has passed through the first gate 670 can enter. The specific general winning opening 630a is arranged at a position where the ball can enter when the storage means (third storage device 3600) is opened.

This specific general winning opening 630a is a privilege that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed by the ball entering the ball within the probability variation winning validity period (from the start of the first round to the end of the final round) in the jackpot game. (Probability change state) is configured to be given.

As a result, whether or not the probability change state is given after the end of the big hit is determined by the time required from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific general winning opening 630a is located at a position where it is difficult to enter a ball when the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) opened by the jackpot game are open. Is arranged so that it is difficult for a ball fired during a jackpot game to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. As a result, there is an effect that the game from winning the big hit to passing the ball through the first gate 670 can be performed more enthusiastically so that the probability change state is given after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, two variable winning devices are provided up and down (upstream and downstream in the flow direction of the ball) that are opened during the jackpot game, and each variable winning device is alternately opened to make a round. It suppresses the generation of balls that do not win any of the variable winning devices in the interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from frequently entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game (during the probability variation winning valid period).

In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening period of the jackpot game (non-probability change winning valid period), and the round interval period depend on the type of jackpot and the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability change (time reduction) state) when the jackpot is won. The lengths of are different. This makes it possible to set a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot that is unlikely to be given a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of balls that have flowed down between the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) opened during the jackpot game and the specific general winning opening 630a. Distribution members (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902) to be distributed to the flow path are provided. As a result, the ball that has passed through the variable winning device that is closed at the right time during the jackpot game is distributed to various flow paths, so it is difficult to predict whether or not the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It becomes. Therefore, since the player pays close attention to the flow condition of the ball, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game during the big hit game.

Further, the above-mentioned distribution member (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902) is configured to be able to regularly distribute spheres to a plurality of flow paths. Therefore, by allowing a predetermined number (for example, 4) or more of balls to flow down to the distribution member during the jackpot game, it is possible to reliably enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

In addition, as a configuration of this distribution member (first distribution member 3901 and second distribution member 3902), by an action other than the operation of distributing the sphere (for example, the contact of the sphere flowing down in the vicinity of the distribution member). The distribution destination of the sphere may be configured to be changeable. This has the effect of preventing the player from grasping the distribution status of the distribution member in advance.

In the present embodiment, one region (first gate 670) through which the ball is passed is provided in order to start the jackpot game in a state where the jackpot is won, but a plurality of regions may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to make the contents of the jackpot game executed when the ball is passed in each of a plurality of provided areas different.

Specifically, a first area and a second area different from the first area are provided as a passing area for executing the jackpot game, and when the ball is passed through the first area, the probability variation prize is valid. A jackpot with a 50% probability that the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a is selected, and if the ball is passed through the second region, the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variation winning period. It is advisable to set so that either a low (20%) jackpot or a high (80%) jackpot with a substantially probability of entering the ball is selected. Further, it may be configured so that the player can select whether to pass the ball through the first region or the second region.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game having different game characteristics, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Further, the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be set to be different between the jackpot when passing through the first area and the jackpot when passing through the second area.

Further, the second distribution member 3902 in the first distribution member 3901 in the present embodiment is located in the right region of the game board 13 through which the fired ball can pass when the right-handed game is executed in the probable change (time reduction) state. Since it is provided, by executing a right-handed game (a game machine that allows a ball to enter the second entrance 640), which is executed to win a jackpot of a special symbol, the first distribution member 3901 and Since the distribution status of the second distribution member 3902 will change, a special symbol is maintained while maintaining a state advantageous to the player (a state in which the next flowing ball is distributed to the path passing through the first gate 670). It is possible to prevent the fluctuation of.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is specified by providing the storage device 3600 for storing (holding) the ball that has passed through the first gate 670. It is not necessary to provide the storage device 3600. In this case, since the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a becomes irregular, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 in which it is difficult for the player to predict the result of the game, so that the game becomes monotonous. It has the effect of suppressing getting bored of the game at an early stage.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. In the third embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 96, a plurality of distribution members 900 to 902 are provided as a configuration for distributing the spheres flowing down in the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths (1603 to 1608). Among the plurality of routes, the balls distributed to the specific route (7th route 1607) are configured to enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the third embodiment, a plurality of distribution members 4900 to 4902 are provided as a configuration for distributing the sphere flowing down in the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths (1603 to 1608). ing. The plurality of distribution members are buried in the game board 13 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 1 second) so that the ball can pass through the evacuation position, and the ball is guided by protruding from the game board 13. It is configured to be variably configured to the guidance position (protruding position) that is in a possible guidance state, and by changing each distribution member to the evacuation position and the guidance position at different timings, the inside of the second storage device 1600 can be changed. It is configured so that the flowing sphere can be distributed to a plurality of routes (1603 to 1608).

Next, the configuration of the distribution devices 4900 to 4902 will be described with reference to FIG. 150. Since the configurations of the sorting devices 4900 to 4902 are the same, only the configuration of the sorting device 4900 will be described here, and the detailed description of the other sorting devices (4901 and 4902) will be omitted.

First, the sorting device 4900 changes to a protruding position protruding from the game board 13 by setting a solenoid (solenoid for sorting device) (not shown) to on, and sets the solenoid for the sorting device to off. Then, the position is changed to the retracted position buried in the game board 13. The operation of this solenoid for the distribution device is controlled by the main control device 110, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the distribution device 4900 changes to the induction position and the retracted position at 1-second intervals. The operation signal is output from the main control device 110 to the solenoid for the distribution device.

As shown in FIG. 150, a rolling plate 4900a having a rolling surface is provided below the distribution member 4900 so that the sphere is inclined downward (inclined to the lower right from the viewpoint of FIG. 150) so as to flow down the fourth path 1604. ing. The upper surface of the distribution member 4900 (the surface on which the sphere can roll at the guidance position) is formed with a rolling surface having a downward inclination (lower left inclination from the viewpoint of FIG. 150) so that the sphere flows down the third path 1603. ..

As a result, the sphere is guided to the third path 1603 when the distribution member 4900 is protruding, and the sphere is guided to the fourth path 1604 when the distribution member 4900 is buried. Therefore, by switching the state of the distribution member 4900, it is possible to distribute the path of the sphere to a plurality of spheres, and there is an effect that the configuration for allocating the sphere can be simplified.

Further, in this modification, three distribution members (4900 to 4902) are provided, and each distribution member is configured to be variable between a guided state and a retracted state at different timings. Specifically, the distribution member 4900 is variable so that the evacuation position (1 second) and the guidance position (1 second) are repeated after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON, and the distribution member 4901 is , The induction position (1.5 seconds) and the regulation position (1 second) are changed to be repeated after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON, and the distribution member 4902 is set to the retracted position (0.5 seconds). , The induction position (0.5 seconds) is variable to repeat.

The variable control for each of the distribution members described above is configured to always perform a constant operation regardless of the gaming state while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON. Further, the variable timing for each distribution member is a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 based on the distribution member variable scenario (not shown) defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is determined by updating (not shown).

Next, the ball flow in the second storage device 1600 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 150. First, in the first flow path 1601, a path is formed so that the stored balls flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds (passing through the storage valve 1601a in the open state) as in the third embodiment described above. The sphere that has passed through the first flow path 1601 flows down toward the distribution member 4900. In the state where the distribution member 4900 is variable to the retracted position, the sphere falls on the rolling plate 4900a, flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4900a, and flows down to the fourth flow path 1604.

The sphere that has flowed down to the fourth flow path 1604 flows down to the distribution member 4901 via the second flow path 1602. When the distribution member 4901 is variable to the retracted position (1 second in 2.5 seconds), it falls on the rolling plate 4901a and flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4901a to flow down the sixth flow path 1606. Flow down to.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 4901 is variable to the induction position (1.5 seconds in 2.5 seconds), it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4901 and flows down to the fifth flow path 1605. .. Then, the ball flowing down the fifth flow path 1605 enters the general winning opening 630b.

Next, when the ball flows down from the first flow path 1601 when the distribution member 4900 is in the induction position (1 second in 2 seconds), it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4900 and the third flow. It flows down to the distribution member 4902 via the road 1603. When the distribution member 4902 is variable to the retracted position (0.5 seconds in 1 second), the eighth flow path flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4902a provided below the distribution member 4902. Flow down 1608. The ball flowing down the 8th flow path 1608 enters the general winning opening 630b.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 4902 is variable to the induction position (0.5 seconds in 1 second), it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4902 and flows down the 7th flow path 1607, and is specified in general. Enter the winning opening 630a.

As described above, in the second storage device 1600 of the present modification, as a configuration for distributing the sphere to a plurality of routes, the route to which the sphere is distributed is switched by variable control (switched according to a predetermined condition). By providing members (4900 to 4902) and different timings (conditions) for each distribution member to switch the route of the distribution destination, the sphere is distributed to a plurality of routes, so that a predetermined timing (guidance) is given. When the ball flows down at the timing (timing when the distribution member 4900 at the position flows down and the distribution member 4902 at the guidance position flows down), the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

With this configuration, unlike the configuration of the third embodiment (distribution members 900 to 902) described above, the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 (the number of balls passing through the first flow path 1601). ) Is a predetermined number (4 in the third embodiment), but it is not certain that the ball will flow into the specific general winning opening 630a, so that the game of inserting the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a is complicated. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the configuration of the third embodiment described above (distribution members 900 to 902), the sphere passes through the distribution members 900 to 902 to determine to which route the next sphere is distributed. However, in the configuration of this modification (distribution members 4900 to 4902), the distribution route is determined by the timing at which the balls flow down, so that the player is in an advantageous state (the next ball is the specific general winning opening 630a). It is possible to prevent the game from being executed while maintaining the state of the distribution member that enters the ball.

Further, in this modification, the storage valve 1601a is configured to be capable of storing four balls in the second storage device 1600, and the four balls are stored in the second storage device 1600. When the valve 1601a is opened (released), the four balls stored at intervals of 0.5 seconds flow down toward the distribution member 4900. Then, as the four balls flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds, the variable timings of the distribution members 4900 and 4902 are set so that one of the four balls enters the specific general winning opening 630a. It is set.

Specifically, since the distribution member 4900 is configured to alternately change between the retracted position and the regulated position at 1-second intervals, when four balls continuously flow down at 0.5-second intervals, among them. The two balls will be distributed to the third route 1603, which can enter the specific general winning opening 630a. The two spheres distributed to the third path 1603 will flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds (continuous spheres) or 1.5 seconds (first and fourth patterns). Then, the sphere flowing down the third flow path 1603 at a predetermined interval (0.5 second interval or 1.5 second interval) reaches the distribution member 4902. Since the distribution member 4902 is configured to alternate between the retracted position and the restricted position at 0.5 second intervals, at least when the ball flows down at 0.5 second intervals or 1.5 second intervals. One ball flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4902, which is the guidance position, and enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

With this configuration, when a ball enters the second storage device 1600 at an irregular timing, it is difficult for the player to predict which ball will enter the specific general entry port 630a. It becomes a storage device 1600, and by storing balls in the second storage device 1600, a predetermined number (4) of balls flow down at regular timing (at 0.5 second intervals) to ensure the balls. Can be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

Therefore, in the state where the storage valve 1601a is opened (released), a game is enthusiastically executed in order to allow as many balls as possible to flow into the second storage device 1600, and the storage valve 1601a is closed. Then, the player is enthusiastically executed to store the upper limit amount of balls, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play in any gaming state.

Further, in this modification, a plurality of nails (P2, etc.) provided in the right side region of the game board 13 make the inflow timing of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 irregular, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the timing (the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general winning device 630a) from being easily targeted.

Further, in the present modification, among the plurality of paths in the second storage device 1600, the path (seventh path) that is advantageous to the player is a solenoid (solenoid for the distribution member) that changes the plurality of distribution members. Must be set to on. That is, it is configured so that the ball does not enter the specific general winning opening 630a in a state where the solenoid is not set to ON due to a disconnection, that is, in a state where a defect occurs. This has the effect of being able to provide a fair game. In addition to this, when a route to the specific general winning opening 630a is configured by using a plurality of distribution members, one distribution member is flowed down with the solenoid set to ON, and the other distribution is performed. The member may be configured so that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a by flowing down with the solenoid set to off.

Further, the configuration using the distribution members 4900 to 4902 used in this modification may be added to other embodiments (for example, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment) and combined, or the existing configuration may be combined. It may be deleted and newly installed.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. In the fourth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 120, the distribution device 2600 is provided below the second variable winning device 650. The distribution device 2600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down, and the ball can enter the specific general winning opening (probability variation winning opening) 630a or the second ball entering device 640 by the flowing flow path. It was composed. On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 151, it is arranged directly below the second variable winning device 650.

With this configuration, the first variable winning device 65 is closed during the opening period (during the period when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is not open) when the jackpot game is executed. And the ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 is in a round game (while the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is being opened), that is, during the probable variable winning valid period. It is possible to suppress the situation where the ball enters the 630a.

Further, in the present modification, unlike the fourth embodiment described above, the second variable winning device 650 provided below in the round game of the odd-numbered round is opened, and the first round game of the even-numbered round is opened. The opening scenario of the variable winning device is set so that the variable winning device 65 is opened. With this configuration, the distance between the variable winning device (second variable winning device 650) that is opened in the first round and the specific general winning opening 630a can be shortened, so that the jackpot game is executed. A ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, which are closed during the opening period (during the period when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is not opened), is rounded. During the game (while the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is open), that is, the situation where the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the probabilistic winning valid period is further suppressed. can do.

Further, a nail for distributing the flow path of the ball is planted between the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and by adjusting this nail, the second variable is in a closed state. It is possible to change the ratio of balls passing through the winning device 650 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

In the third to fifth embodiments described above and the modified examples thereof, a plurality of distribution members (900, 1901, 3901) for alternately distributing spheres to a plurality of paths are provided, and various paths are provided. Although it is configured to distribute the spheres to various paths, other configurations may be used as long as the spheres are distributed to various routes.

For example, instead of the distribution member, a guide member that can be buried or protruded may be provided in the game board 13, and the path of the ball may be switched depending on the state of the guide member (buried state or protruding state). In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of guiding members and set the operation timing of each guiding member so as to be different at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, a first guiding member is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the sphere, and a second guiding member is provided on the downstream side thereof. Then, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be on, the first guide member is variably controlled so as to constantly change between the protruding state and the buried state at 1-second intervals, and after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to on. The second guide member is variably controlled so as to be constantly variable between a protruding state and a buried state at 0.5 second intervals, and at a predetermined timing in which both the first guide member and the second guide member are in the buried state. It is preferable to configure the ball so that the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a. With this configuration, the path (guidance mechanism) composed of the first guide member and the second guide member has a ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a for 0.5 seconds out of 2 seconds. It will be a possible period.

By using such a configuration in place of the distribution member (900 to 902) of the third embodiment described above, it is possible to distribute (induce) the ball flowing down in the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths. In addition, unlike the case where the distribution members 900 to 902 are used, it is not possible to maintain the state in which the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a, so that the ball is entered into the specific general winning opening 630a. It is possible to make the playability to be made more complicated.

Further, when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) with the upper limit amount (4 pieces) of balls stored in the second storage device 1600, the stored balls are stored in the second storage at intervals of about 0.5 seconds. Since it flows down in the device, any one of the stored balls can be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a. Therefore, by storing the ball up to the upper limit in the second storage device 1600, the ball can be surely put into the specific general winning opening 630a, which has an effect of giving a sense of security to the player. In other words, in order to play the jackpot game with peace of mind, the player can be made to continue the game until the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the second storage device 1600, and the operation of the game is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

The number of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 is set to the number that the stored balls can surely enter the specific general winning opening 630a in the present embodiment, but the number is not limited to that, and the upper limit amount is set. It may be three. Even with this configuration, three balls can flow down at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals), so the three balls can be placed in the guidance device at irregular timings without having a storage function. It is possible to increase the probability of a ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a rather than letting it flow down.

Further, the number of pieces that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 may be larger than four. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably enter the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a.

In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters each entry opening (winning opening), the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the entry opening (winning opening) is paid out. , Not limited to this. For example, it is applied to a type of pachinko machine such as an enclosed pachinko machine in which a prize ball is not given as a game value. It may be configured to increase the balance.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (A prize ball is given to the ball that entered the holding device at the time of a big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a ball entry means thereof. Based on the fact that the pachinko ball enters the ball entry means, the specific privilege granting means that grants a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path, and the above-mentioned A first distribution state in which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path as compared with the first distribution state. It is provided with a flow path distribution means that can be changed to a distribution state, and a setting means that can set the state of the flow path distribution means to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the gaming state. The gaming machine A1 characterized by.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a gaming ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep launching the game ball in the same direction until it was a hit. Therefore, when the player launches the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out may not change much. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path is branched into a first flow path and a second flow path. When a ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means. The first distribution state in which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game ball is more easily distributed to the second flow path as compared with the first distribution state. The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, it becomes easier for a specific privilege to be given by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it becomes difficult to grant certain benefits. Therefore, even if the player launches the game ball toward a specific flow path, the benefits given can be different depending on the game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.

In the game machine A1, a predetermined ball is provided based on a normal ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a game ball entering the normal ball entry means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a game value-giving means for imparting a game value, wherein the specific privilege-giving means grants a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, a normal ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the game value is given by the game value-giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the normal ball entry means. The game value is given. By the specific privilege granting means, a game value larger than a predetermined game value is given as a specific privilege.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game ball flows into the specific flow path, as compared with the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the second distribution state. It will be easier to acquire value. Therefore, since the game value given can be different depending on the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machines A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and a privileged game in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. The game state setting means for setting the state is provided, and the setting means sets the state of the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The gaming machine A3, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is a privileged game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Is set to. Based on the fact that the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

As a result, when the game state is set to the privilege game state, in addition to being advantageous to the player depending on the privilege game state, more game value is given by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path. It becomes easy to be done. Therefore, the privileged gaming state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be improved.

In the game machine A3, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first ball entry state in which the game ball can be entered and the second ball entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first ball entry state. Based on the specific value-adding means for adding a specific game value based on the ball entering the variable ball-entry means, and the privileged game state set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized by comprising a variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable entry means is changed between the first entry state in which the game ball can be entered and the second entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means, a specific game value is given by the specific value-giving means. Based on the setting of the privileged gaming state by the game state setting means, the variable control means changes the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means in the privileged game state, so that a specific game value can be obtained by launching the ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Therefore, in the privileged gaming state, it is possible to make the player acquire more gaming value, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game value-giving means adds a predetermined amount of game medium as the predetermined game value when the game ball enters the normal ball-entry means. The game machine A5 is characterized in that when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means, the specific privilege granting means is provided with a game medium in an amount larger than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball enters the normal ball entry means by the game value adding means, a predetermined amount of game medium is given as a predetermined game value. When a game ball enters the ball entry means by the specific privilege granting means, a game medium in an amount larger than a predetermined amount is granted as a specific privilege.

As a result, the player can be made to play the game by the given game medium, so that the game can be played for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means changes the variable ball entry means from the second ball entry state to the first ball entry state based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The gaming state setting means sets the gaming state different from the privileged gaming state based on the variable ball entry means being variable by the variable control means a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second ball entry state to the first ball entry state by the variable control means based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. Based on the fact that the variable ball entry means is varied a predetermined number of times by the variable control means, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the privileged game state.

As a result, in the privileged game state of 1, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player can acquire more specific game value. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the game machines A4 to A6, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the specific value-imparting means is to add a specific amount of game medium as the specific game value.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, a specific amount of gaming medium is given as a specific game value by the specific value-adding means, so that the player is given the given gaming medium. Can be made to play a game. Therefore, since the player can be allowed to play the game for a longer period of time, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A7, a guidance flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the specific flow path is provided, and the variable ball entry means is the specific flow of the game balls flowing into the guidance flow path. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that a gaming ball that has not flowed into the road is provided at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the gaming balls are guided to the specific flow path by the guided flow path, and among the gaming balls flowing into the guided flow path, the game balls flow into the specific flow path. Since the variable ball entry means is provided at the position where the game ball that did not flow in can enter, the player can simply launch the game ball into the guidance flow path in the privileged game state, and the specific flow path and the variable entry ball can be entered. The ball can flow into the means. Therefore, since it is possible to acquire a specific privilege and a specific game value in the privilege game state, it is possible to further increase the merit of the player in the privilege game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, a counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means is provided, and the variable control means has at least a predetermined number of numbers counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state based on the above, and the game state setting means is the privilege game when a specific condition is satisfied in the privilege game state. The game state different from the state is set, and the setting means sets the flow path distribution means at least in a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege game state to the establishment of the specific condition. 1 A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is set to a distribution state.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means is counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state by the variable control means based on at least the number counted by the counting means becomes a predetermined number. When a specific condition is satisfied in the privileged game state, a game state different from the privileged game state is set by the game state setting means. The flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means at least in a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege game state to the establishment of the specific condition.

As a result, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific game value can be limited to the time when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game during the privilege game state in the hope that a larger number of game balls will flow into the specific flow path before the number reaches a predetermined number and the specific privilege will be given a larger number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player with respect to the privileged gaming state can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the ball entry detecting means for detecting that the game ball has entered the normal ball entry means and the ball entry detection means to the normal ball entry means during the privilege game state. The gaming machine A10 is provided with a notification means for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that the game ball has entered.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, it is detected by the entering ball detecting means that the gaming ball has entered the normal ball entering means, and the special gaming is performed by the entering ball detecting means. When it is detected that the game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the state, the notification means executes a predetermined notification, so that the flow path distribution means is set even though the privilege game state is set. When a problem that is not set in the first distribution state occurs, the problem can be made known to the player or the clerk in the hall by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the defect can be quickly resolved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to flow than the second flow path. The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is the first flow path. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the gaming machine A11 is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed into the specific channel is easily guided while the channel is closed.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are played. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easier to flow in than the second flow path. The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided while the first flow path is closed.

Thereby, it is possible to change the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path flows down depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be given, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. ..

In the gaming machine A11, the flow path distribution means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls on the upstream side of the closed position when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. In the second flow path, in a state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls and the game balls flowing into the specific flow path come into contact with each other. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in based on a change in the flow direction.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first flow path is closed as the second distribution state, the game balls are held up to a predetermined upper limit number on the upstream side of the closed position by the flow path distribution means. Based on the fact that in a state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with each other and the flow direction changes. A second flow path is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in.

As a result, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be given, so that the effect that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed. be.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, a display means for displaying an image and a display control means for controlling the display means to display an image according to the state of the flow path distribution means are provided. A featured gaming machine A13.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display control means controls the display means so that an image corresponding to the state of the flow path distribution means is displayed. , There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distribution means.

In the gaming machine A13, the display control means is the specific when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the fact that the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means. A gaming machine A14 characterized in that an image suggesting that a privilege is likely to be given is displayed.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A13, it is specified when the gaming ball flows into the specific flow path based on the fact that the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means. An image suggesting that the privilege of is likely to be given is displayed by the display control means. As a result, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that the merit when the game ball flows into the specific flow path can be easily understood.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch the flow path of another ball with the ball held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path are provided at positions where the ball can enter. The first ball-entry means, the first granting means for imparting the first game value based on the game ball entering the first ball-entry means, and the game flowing down the second flow path. The first game given by the first granting means based on the second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second granting means for imparting a second gaming value different from the value, a first position capable of holding at least one gaming ball flowing into the first flow path on the first flow path, and a first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path as compared to the position is difficult to be held on the first flow path, and the variable means are based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. The variable means includes a switching means for switching from the first position to the second position, and the variable means easily guides the game ball to the second flow path by holding the game ball. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a gaming ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep launching the game ball in the same direction until it was a hit. Therefore, when the player launches the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out may not change much. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path is branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path. The first ball-entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the first-giving means is used based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball-entry means. The game value of is given. Further, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the first granting means is based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A second game value different from the first game value to be given is given by the second giving means. A first position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path on the first flow path, and a game ball flowing into the first flow path as compared to the first position are on the first flow path. The variable means is variable to the second position, which is difficult to hold. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the held game ball.

As a result, even if the player continues to launch the game ball toward the specific flow path, the ball entry means by which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path enters depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied between the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine B1, the first gaming value given by the first granting means has a higher gaming value than the second gaming value given by the second granting means. Pachinko machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, since the first game value given by the first granting means is configured to have a larger game value than the second game value given by the second granting means, the player is provided with the game value. It is possible to make the player feel that the game ball wants to flow into the specific flow path in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player are set based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Variable entry state that can be changed between the game state setting means, the first entry state in which the game ball can be entered, and the second entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state. Based on the means, the specific value-adding means for adding a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball-entry means, and the privileged game state set by the game state setting means. The variable control means is provided to change the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the switching means is set to the privileged gaming state by the game state setting means. Based on this, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is a privileged game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Is set to. The variable entry means is changed between the first entry state where the game ball can be entered and the second entry state where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state, and the variable entry state is changed. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the means, a specific game value is given by the specific value-giving means. Based on the fact that the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable control means.

As a result, in addition to the player being able to acquire a specific game value by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the privileged game state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The player can acquire the first game value. Therefore, since the merit of the player in the privileged gaming state can be increased, there is an effect that the expectation of the player for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

The gaming machine B3 is provided with a guiding flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the specific flow path, and the variable ball entry means is such that the gaming ball flowing down the guiding flow path without flowing into the specific flow path. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific flow path by the guidance flow path. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the induction flow path without flowing into the specific flow path can enter.

As a result, the player can flow the ball into the specific flow path and the variable ball entry means only by launching the game ball into the guide flow path in the privileged game state. Therefore, in the privileged game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be acquired, so that the player's merit in the privileged game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter a position. A third game value different from the second gaming value given by the second granting means based on the provided third ball entering means and the gaming ball entering the third ball entering means. A third granting means for imparting game value is provided, and the variable means holds a gaming ball so that the holding gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be connected to the second flow path and the third flow path. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being easy to guide.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. A third flow path is provided as one of a plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. A third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the third ball entry means, a third game value different from the second game value given by the second granting means is given by the third granting means. When the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held game ball.

As a result, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can enter both the second entry means and the third entry means. Become. That is, since the player can acquire one of the second game value and the third game value, which have different game values from each other, the game value acquired by the player can be given randomness. .. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path enters the first ball entry means, so that the first game value is given by the first granting means. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third granting means has a higher gaming value than the first gaming value given by the first granting means. Pachinko machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third granting means has more gaming value than the first gaming value given by the first granting means. Therefore, it is possible to expect the gaming ball to flow down the third flow path in a state where the gaming ball is held by the variable means. Therefore, since the traveling direction of the game ball flowing into the specific flow path can be observed more interestingly by the player, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the variable means holds the gaming ball on the first flow path, the gaming ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path is the second arrangement of the held gaming ball. It is characterized in that it can be held by a first arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the flow path and a second arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the third flow path as compared with the first arrangement. Pachinko machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5 or B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided to the second flow path as the arrangement of the held game ball. It is held by the arrangement of 1 and the second arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the third flow path as compared with the first arrangement.

This has the effect that the player can determine the flow path through which the game ball easily flows only by confirming the arrangement of the game ball.

In the gaming machine B7, a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the arrangement of the gaming balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and an effect of executing a specific effect showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by comprising an execution means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement is determined by the determination means, and a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means. , There is an effect that the player can more easily determine the flow path into which the game ball is likely to flow.

One of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is characterized by comprising an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the gaming balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path, respectively. The gaming machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the gaming balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path is adjusted by the adjusting means, respectively. Since the adjustment is made, it is possible to make a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the third privilege is easily given according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, an operating means that can be operated by the player and a detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means are provided, and the switching means can be operated on the operating means by the detecting means. The gaming machine B10, characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the detection.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the following effects are played. That is, the operation for the operating means is detected by the detecting means. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the detection of the operation on the operating means by the detecting means.

As a result, it is possible for the player to switch whether or not to let the game ball that has flowed down into the specific flow path flow down to the first ball entry means, so that each player has his or her own taste. There is an effect that it can be set to the state.

A gaming machine B11, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the variable means can hold only one gaming ball on the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one gaming ball is held by the variable means on the first flow path, so that the variable means is changed to the first position. When the player quits the game, the number of game balls remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost when he / she quits the game.

<Characteristic C group> (The probability variation rate can be changed by adjusting the ratio of balls entering the holding device)
A specific flow path that at least branches into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a first entry ball provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. The means, the first privilege giving means capable of giving the first privilege based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the first entering means, and the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path. Based on the second ball entry means provided at the position where the ball can be entered and the game ball entering the second ball entry means, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given. A second privilege granting means capable of this, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down the specific flow path into the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being provided with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a gaming ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep launching the game ball in the same direction until it was a hit. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the ball is launched in the same direction, the ball will continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out will not change much. There was a case. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path is branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down. The first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first privilege granting means is used. The privilege of 1 is given. The second entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and it is different from the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry means. The second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path to the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is adjusted by the adjusting means, respectively.

As a result, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make a gaming machine to which the first privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given. Therefore, even if the model is the same, different playability can be realized by changing the adjustment degree by the adjustment means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a privileged game for granting a privileged game advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. The granting means, the first lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result is high, and the second lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. The first privilege granting means is provided with a settable lottery state setting means, and is characterized in that the first privilege is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege. The gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the game is played when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. The privileged game that is advantageous to the person is given by the privileged game granting means. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result and the second lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. .. As the first privilege, the first privilege granting means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means.

Thereby, the ease of transition to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, it is easy to set the first lottery state according to the business policy of the hall, and it is easy to be in the privilege game state, or it is difficult to set the first lottery state, and it is easy to give the second privilege. You can adjust what to do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the second privilege granting means grants a predetermined amount of gaming medium as the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined amount of the gaming medium is given as the second privilege by the second privilege giving means, so that the predetermined amount of the gaming medium can be easily given. Can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, depending on the business policy of the hall, it is possible to adjust whether the game is easy to be given a predetermined amount of game medium or the first privilege is easy to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the first position where the gaming ball can enter the first entry means and the second position where the gaming ball is less likely to enter the entry means as compared with the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a position, and a variable control means that changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the privilege game is given by the privilege game granting means. , A gaming machine C4 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is variable by the variable means to the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means compared to the first position. Will be done. Based on the fact that the privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means, the variable control means changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, the first privilege is easily given in the privilege game state, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be increased.

In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position at least based on the elapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, at least the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the player to acquire the first privilege until a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the scarcity value of the first privilege can be increased, the importance of adjustment by the adjustment means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects the gaming machine to play the game, the gaming machine can be selected in consideration of the adjustment condition of the adjusting means, so that there is an effect that the pleasure of selecting the gaming machine can be given. ..

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific entry means to which a specific game value is given based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific game value based on the entry of the game ball. The second flow path includes a specific flow path for flowing the game ball down to the specific ball entry means, and the low value ball entry means, which is provided with a low value ball entry means to which a small game value is given. It is branched into a low-value flow path to be flowed down, and is at a first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path and at the first variable position thereof. A gaming machine C6 comprising: a second variable position in which a gaming ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is difficult to be held on the specific flow path, and a position variable means that can be changed.

According to the game machine C6, in any of the game machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is given based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, and the game machine enters the low value ball entry means. A game value less than a specific game value is given based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path that causes the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means and a low value flow path that causes the game ball to flow down to the low value entry means. A first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a game ball flowing into the specific flow path are held on the specific flow path as compared with the first variable position. The position variable means is variable to the second variable position, which is difficult to do.

As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path according to the variable position of the position variable means enters the ball entry means. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine C6 is provided with a holding control means for controlling the position variable means so as to be variable to the second variable position based on the privilege game being granted by the privilege game granting means, and the specific flow path. Is arranged at a position where the gaming ball that has flowed into the second flow path is easier to flow in as compared with the low-value flow path, and the position-variable means holds the gaming ball by holding it. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it facilitates guiding the gaming ball to the low-value flow path by the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position changing means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means based on the fact that the privilege game is given by the privilege game giving means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is easier to flow in as compared with the low value flow path. When the game ball is held by the position variable means, the game ball is guided to the low value flow path by the held game ball.

Thereby, the variable position of the position variable means and the ball entry means into which the game ball flowing into the second flow path enters can be different depending on whether or not the game ball is held by the position variable means. .. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the variable means and the position variable means are composed of one member.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, since the variable means and the position variable means are composed of one member, the position and position of the variable means can be changed by one control. The position of the means can be switched at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means causes the gaming ball to enter the second entry when the ratio of the gaming ball flowing down into the specific flow path to the first entering means is increased. When the ratio of the game ball flowing into the ball means is reduced and the ratio of the game ball flowing into the first ball entry means is reduced, the ratio of the game ball flowing into the second ball entry means is increased. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the game is played when the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down into the specific flow path into the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means. The rate at which the spheres flow into the second flow path is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down into the specific flow path into the first flow path is lowered by the adjusting means, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the second flow path is increased.

This has the effect that the game ball can be more reliably flowed into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

<Characteristic D group> (Increases the probability change expectation during normal games)
A gaming area where the ball can flow down, a ball-entry means provided in the game area where the ball can enter, and a discrimination means for executing discrimination when the ball enters the ball-entry means, and the discrimination thereof. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the means is a predetermined determination result, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing balls, and a storage means thereof. The variable means for changing the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state for releasing the storage state, and the storage means in the game area are changed to the release state by the variable means. In this case, a privilege is provided when the ball stored in the storage means is provided in a specific gaming area where the ball can flow down, the specific ball entry means in which the ball can enter, and the ball enters the specific entry means. The variable means has a privilege granting means capable of granting the above, and the variable means changes the storage means to the released state when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is the predetermined discriminating result. The gaming machine D1 characterized by this.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) and a gaming state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing a ball. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (probability variation, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874). In this case, the prize ball can be obtained by making the variable winning device win the ball during the privilege game, and further, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Was to improve. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, since only the game executed during the privilege game affects the result of whether or not to acquire the game state advantageous to the player, the game other than the privilege game is performed. There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced during the period.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the ball enters the ball entering means provided in the game area where the ball can flow down, the discrimination means is executed by the discriminating means, and the discriminating result is a predetermined discriminating result. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, in the game area, when the discriminant result of the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminant result, a storage means that can be changed from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released by the variable means is provided. Will be. When the storage means is released, a specific entry means is provided in which the ball stored in the storage means can enter, and when the ball enters the specific entry means, a privilege is given after the end of the privilege game. To. As a result, the possibility that the ball enters the specific ball entry means can be increased by changing the storage means to the release state while the ball is being stored. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play in a game other than during the privileged game.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the storage means is configured to be capable of storing a plurality of balls in the gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the storage means is configured so that a plurality of balls can be stored. Therefore, by storing the plurality of balls in the storage means, the balls can be sent to the specific ball entry means. The possibility of entering the ball can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that an ambitious game can be continued for the player until a predetermined determination result is determined by the determination means.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a plurality of paths through which a ball can flow down are provided in the specific gaming area, and a ball flowing down one of the plurality of paths can enter the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine D3, which is characterized in that it is.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of paths through which the ball can flow down are provided in the specific game area, and the ball that has flowed down one of the paths is entered into the specific ball entry means. This has the effect that the game can be executed while enjoying whether or not the ball flowing down the specific game area enters the specific ball entry means.

In the case of having the configuration of the gaming machine D2, since the storage means is configured to be able to store a plurality of balls, it is possible to increase the possibility that the balls stored in the storage means enter the specific ball entry means. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in the game machine D3, a distribution means for distributing the ball to any one of the plurality of paths is provided in the specific gaming area.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the ball is distributed to any of a plurality of routes provided in the specific gaming area by the distribution means, so that the ball is reliably distributed to the plurality of routes. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D4, the distribution means distributes balls to the plurality of paths in a predetermined order, and the storage means is necessary for the distribution means to distribute balls to the first path. A gaming machine D5 characterized in that it can store more balls than the number of balls.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are played. That is, the spheres are distributed in a predetermined order to the plurality of paths by the distribution means. Then, a number of balls larger than the number required for the distribution means to distribute the balls to the first path is configured to be able to be stored in the storage means. This makes it possible to allow the specific ball entry means to enter the ball by storing a plurality of balls in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to store the ball in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, when the end condition setting means for setting the end condition and the end condition set by the end condition setting means are satisfied, the storage means is changed from the release state to the storage state. The gaming machine D6, characterized in that it has a second variable means for varying to.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are played. That is, when the end condition set by the end condition setting means is satisfied, the storage means is changed from the release state to the storage state by the second variable means. With this, by setting the end condition, it is possible to set the period during which the ball can enter the specific entry means and the period during which the ball that can enter the specific entry means is stored. Become. Therefore, since the player executes the game according to the state of the storage means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The end condition set by the end condition setting means is, for example, a predetermined time (a sufficient time for all the balls stored in the storage means to flow down) after the storage means is released by the variable means. When the elapse of seconds) is set as the end condition, or when the privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the allowable state and the restricted state multiple times is executed, the variable ball entry means is set to the allowable state a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). The timing changed to "" may be set as the end condition, or the timing when the privilege game is completed may be set as the end condition. Further, it is preferable to configure the end condition setting means so that a plurality of end conditions can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of periods during which the ball can be entered into the specific entry means and a period during which the balls can be stored in the specific entry means, and the game can be played. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In the gaming machine D6, the ending condition setting means sets the timing at which the privileged game ends as the ending condition.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D6, the timing at which the privilege game ends is set as the end condition by the end condition setting means, so that the game aiming at the specific ball entry means is executed during the privilege game. It is possible to play pachinko, which has the effect of enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, for example, when a variable ball-entry means that changes the ball to a permissible state in which the ball can enter when the privilege game is executed is provided, a specific ball-entry means is provided in the vicinity of the variable ball-entry means. By doing so, it is possible to have the player simultaneously perform a game aiming at the variable ball entry means and a game aiming at the specific ball entry means during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Here, the timing at which the privilege game ends is the timing at which the variable ball-entry means variable to the permissible state by the privilege game changes to the restricted state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the permissible state, and the privilege. It is conceivable that the ending period to be executed after the variable ball entry means changed to the allowable state by the game is changed to the regulated state ends.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the ending condition setting means sets a predetermined timing at which the privileged game is executed as the ending condition.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D6 or D7, the end condition setting means sets a predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed as the end condition, so that while the privilege game is being executed. In addition, it becomes possible to store the ball in the storage means. As a result, the period in which the storage means is in the storage state can be lengthened, so that the storage means can easily store the spheres. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

Here, as a predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed, it is conceivable to set a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 10 seconds have elapsed) after the privilege game has been executed. In this case, it is advisable to set a sufficient time for all the balls stored in the storage means to flow down the game area. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the period during which the storage means is released, and it is possible to facilitate the storage of the spheres in the storage means.

Further, as a predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed, for example, when the privilege game (for example, 8 round jackpot) in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the allowable state a plurality of times (for example, 8 times) is executed, the privilege game is executed. It is advisable to set the stage in the middle of the privilege game (for example, the fourth round) as a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to execute a game in which the ball is entered into a specific ball entry means during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D6 to D8, the end condition setting means can set a plurality of the end conditions, and has a selection means for selecting one of the plurality of end conditions. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the second variable means changes the storage means to the storage state based on the termination condition selected by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D6 to D8, the following effects are played. That is, one of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means is selected by the selection means, and the storage means is put into the storage state by the second variable means based on the selected end condition. It is variable. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the storage means changes to the storage state. Therefore, the period during which the ball can be entered into the specific entry means and the period during which the ball can be stored in the specific entry means should be set at a plurality of timings. Therefore, it is possible to provide a complicated game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, a variable ball-entry means that is provided separately from the specific ball-entry means and can be changed into a permissible state that allows the ball to enter and a regulated state that restricts the ball's entry. The privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means changes the variable ball-entry means to the allowable state, and the privilege granting means is used while the privilege game is being executed. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that when a ball enters the specific ball-entry means, a second privilege different from the privilege can be given.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) and a gaming state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing a ball. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (probability variation, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874). In this case, the prize ball can be obtained by making the variable winning device win the ball during the privilege game, and further, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was something to improve. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls, so that balls that do not win the variable winning device frequently occur during the bonus game. There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the following effects are played. That is, by executing the privilege game, a variable ball entry means that is variable from a regulated state that regulates the ball entry to a permissible state that allows the ball to enter is provided separately from the specific ball entry means. When the ball enters the specific ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed, the second privilege is granted. As a result, when the ball enters the specific ball entry means during the privilege game, the second privilege can be given. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game in which the ball is inserted into the specific ball entry means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be improved.

<Characteristic E group> (A ball that has flowed down a specific route wins a prize at the V probability winning opening)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a permissible state that allows ball entry and a regulated state that regulates ball entry, and the variable ball-entry means to the permissible state based on the establishment of specific conditions. Based on the privileged game execution means for executing the privileged game and the variable ball-entry means, which are provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and the ball can enter the ball, and the ball enters the ball-entry means. A privilege granting means for granting the first privilege is provided, and the privilege granting means includes the first privilege when a ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed. Is a gaming machine E1 characterized in that a different second privilege can be given.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) and a gaming state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing a ball. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (probability variation, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874). In this case, the prize ball can be obtained by making the variable winning device win the ball during the privilege game, and further, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was something to improve. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls, so that balls that do not win the variable winning device frequently occur during the bonus game. There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced.

According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege of changing the variable ball-entry means, which can be changed between the permissible state of allowing the ball to enter and the regulated state of restricting the ball's entry, to the permissible state by the privilege game execution means. The game is played. A ball-entry means that is provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and can be given the first privilege by the ball entering the ball is provided. Then, when the ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege giving means. As a result, when the ball enters a ball entry means other than the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game using a ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be improved.

The gaming machine E1 has a setting means capable of setting a first state in which a ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. The gaming machine E2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed by the setting means, and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than in the first state. The state and is set. As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball while the privilege game is being executed. The game will be played with the expectation that the second privilege will be given to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the setting means has a plurality of paths through which the ball can pass and a sorting means for distributing the ball to the plurality of paths, and the sorting means is at least the first by the setting means. The sphere is placed on either the first path through which the sphere can pass when the state of is set or the second path through which the sphere can pass when the second state is set. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being sorted.

According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2. That is, the first path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set by the distribution means, and the second path through which the sphere can pass when the second state is set. The sphere is distributed to the route. As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball depending on the path through which the ball passes. As a result, the player pays close attention to the flow of the ball, which has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine E3, the plurality of paths have a third path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set, in addition to the first path. The path 1 is for allowing the ball to enter the ball entry means in a shorter period of time than the third path, and the distribution means is the first when the first state is set. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that a ball can be distributed to a path 1 and a path 3 described above.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a plurality of paths, apart from the first path, there is a third path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set, and the first state is set. The sphere is distributed to the first path or the third path by the distribution means. As a result, when the first state is set, the timing at which the ball enters the ball entry means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E3 or E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the distribution means distributes balls in a predetermined order to the plurality of paths.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3 or E4, the balls are distributed in a predetermined order to a plurality of routes by the distribution means, so that a plurality of privilege games are executed while the privileged game is being executed. By letting the ball flow down to the distribution means, it is possible to reliably enter the ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game while the privilege game is being executed.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, a launching means capable of launching the ball toward the gaming area, and a launching intensity adjusting means capable of adjusting the firing intensity of the launching means. , The variable ball-entry means and the ball-entry means are provided in a predetermined game area where a ball launched with a predetermined launch intensity by the launch intensity adjusting means can flow down. Machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are played. That is, when the firing intensity of the launching means capable of launching the ball toward the game area is adjusted to a predetermined firing intensity by the launching intensity adjusting means, the variable ball entering means into the predetermined gaming area where the ball can flow down. A ball entry means is provided. As a result, while the privilege game is being executed, a game in which the ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means and a game in which the ball is inserted into the ball entry means are performed by simply launching the ball with a predetermined firing intensity. Can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to have the player play a plurality of games at the same time, there is an effect that the interest of the games can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a gaming area where the game ball can flow down, a launching means capable of launching the ball toward the gaming area, and a launching intensity adjusting means capable of adjusting the firing intensity of the launching means. The variable ball entry means is provided in a predetermined gaming area where a ball launched with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing intensity adjusting means can flow down, and the ball is launched with a predetermined firing strength by the firing intensity adjusting means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the ball entry means is provided in a gaming area where it is difficult for the ball to flow down.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are played. That is, when the firing intensity of the launching means capable of launching the ball toward the game area is adjusted to a predetermined firing intensity by the launching intensity adjusting means, the variable ball entering means is provided in the predetermined gaming area where the ball can flow down. A ball entry means is provided in a game area where it is difficult for a ball launched with a predetermined firing strength to enter the ball. As a result, while the privilege game is being executed, the game is executed in which the ball is launched at a predetermined firing intensity to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, or the ball is launched at a firing intensity other than the predetermined firing intensity. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not to execute the game of firing and letting the ball enter the ball entering means by operating the firing intensity adjusting means. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game positively while the privilege game is being executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic F group> (Change the winning rate to the V confirmed winning opening with the attacker opening / closing pattern)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between an allowable state that allows the ball to enter and a restricted state that regulates the ball entry and allows the ball to pass downstream, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable ball entry means. A privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game in which the variable ball-entry means is alternately changed between the allowable state and the regulated state by the variable control means based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the variable ball-entry means. Separately provided, the ball-entry means capable of entering the ball and the privilege-giving means capable of granting the first privilege based on the ball entering the ball-entry means are provided, and the privilege granting is provided. The means is capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege when the ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, and the variable control. As the variable control pattern of the means, either a first variable pattern in which a ball can enter the ball entry means or a second variable pattern in which the ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a variable pattern setting means for setting.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) and a gaming state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing a ball. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (probability variation, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874). In this case, the prize ball can be obtained by making the variable winning device win the ball during the privilege game, and further, there is a possibility that the player can obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was something to improve. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls, so that balls that do not win the variable winning device frequently occur during the bonus game. There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced.

According to the gaming machine F1, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the variable ball entry means is allowed to enter the ball by the variable control means, and the restricted state restricts the entry of the ball. It is variable alternately with. Then, apart from the variable ball entry means, a ball entry means is provided in which the first privilege can be granted by the privilege granting means when the ball enters the ball. If the ball enters the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege granting means. Further, as the variable control pattern of the variable control means, either the first variable pattern that can enter the ball entry means or the second variable pattern that is more difficult to enter than the first variable pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. Will be done. As a result, if the ball enters the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game using a ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be improved. Further, as the variable control pattern of the variable control means by the variable pattern setting means, either a first variable pattern in which the ball easily enters the ball entry means or a second variable pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying whether or not to enter the ball into the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a ball that has passed through the variable entering means, which is in the restricted state, can enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the ball entering means is provided so that the ball that has passed through the variable ball entering means in the regulated state can enter the ball, so that the variable control means can be used for variable control. The ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be reliably set based on the variable control pattern to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entry means at an unintended timing, and it is possible to provide an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the variable pattern setting means sets the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern by changing the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the restricted state. A gaming machine F3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are set by different periods during which the variable ball entry means is in the restricted state. There is an effect that the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be easily changed.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable pattern setting means has different timings at which the variable control of the variable ball entry means is started by the variable control means, so that the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern means are started. A gaming machine F4 characterized by setting a variable pattern.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are produced by different timings at which the variable control of the variable ball entry means is started. Since it is set, there is an effect that the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be easily changed.

In the case of having the configuration of the gaming machine F3, the period in which the variable ball entry means is restricted and the timing at which the variable control of the variable ball entry means is started are different from each other to enter the ball into the ball entry means. There is an effect that the ease of playing can be made more complicated and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, apart from the variable ball entry means, a variable state can be set between a permissible state in which the ball is allowed to enter and a restricted state in which the ball is restricted to enter and passed to the downstream side. The variable ball entry means has two variable ball entry means, and the variable control means is such that a ball that has passed through the variable ball entry means in the regulated state enters the second variable ball entry means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the above-mentioned second variable ball-entry means is variably controlled.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, apart from the variable ball entry means, it has a second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a permissible state that allows the ball to enter and a regulated state that regulates the ball entry and allows the ball to pass downstream. The variable entry means and the second entry means are variably controlled by the variable control means so that the ball that has passed through the variable entry means in the regulated state enters the second variable entry means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entry means at an unintended timing while the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

The configuration of the gaming machine F5 is more effective when the privileged gaming shown below is executed. For example, as a privilege game, the period during which the variable ball entry means is opened is one game, and when a predetermined number of games are continuously performed, one game is completed and the next game is performed. By the time the game is started, the variable ball entry means will be changed to the regulated state. In this case, if a ball that has passed through the variable ball entry means enters the ball entry means, there is a problem that a plurality of balls enter the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed. .. According to the gaming machine F5, the game in which the variable ball entry means is released is completed, and the ball that has passed through the regulated variable ball entry means is variably controlled to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entry means at an unintended timing.

<Characteristic G group> (Provides advantages and disadvantages in V gate passage timing)
Based on the variable ball entry means that can be changed to the allowable state that allows the ball to enter and the regulated state that regulates the ball entry, and the establishment of specific conditions, the variable ball entry means is moved to the allowable state. When the grant condition establishment means for satisfying the grant condition for granting the privileged game to be changed, the specific area through which the ball can pass, and the grant condition are satisfied by the grant condition establishment means, the ball passes through the specific area. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game based on the passage, a ball-entry means provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and capable of entering a ball, and the privileged ball-entry means. When the ball enters the ball entry means while the game execution means is executing the privilege game, the privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player and the period for passing the ball through the specific area. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the privilege is easily granted and a disadvantageous period in which the privilege is less likely to be granted than the advantageous period.

Here, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a pachinko machine that starts a big hit game by passing a ball through a specific area after winning a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013). -233181 (Japanese Patent Publication No. 233181). In this case, after winning a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, the big hit game is started by executing a game of passing a ball through a specific area, so that a pachinko machine rich in interest is provided. However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, the game of passing the ball through a specific area executed after winning the big hit is a game only for starting the big hit game, so that further improvement of the interest is required.

According to the gaming machine G1, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the grant condition for granting the privilege game is established by the grant condition establishment means. When this grant condition is satisfied, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means when the ball passes through the specific area. Further, a ball entry means is provided in which the player is given a privilege advantageous to the player by the privilege granting means by entering the ball while the privilege game is being executed. Then, as a period for passing the ball through a specific area, an advantageous period in which the ball easily enters the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed and a disadvantageous period in which the ball is harder to enter than the advantageous period are set. It is set by means. As a result, it is possible to set an advantageous period and a disadvantageous period in the period for passing the ball to the specific area, so that the player can enthusiastically perform the game of passing the ball to the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the period setting means sets a predetermined period as the advantageous period after the granting condition is satisfied by the granting condition satisfying means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the period setting means is set so that the predetermined period is an advantageous period after the granting condition is satisfied by the granting condition satisfying means. When the grant condition is satisfied, the player will enthusiastically play a game in order to pass the ball to a specific area as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 is provided with an advantageous period changing means capable of changing the length of the advantageous period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the length of the advantageous period is changed by the advantageous period changing means, so that the game and the privilege that the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means are hard to be given. It is possible to set a game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

If the gaming machine G2 is configured, the timing at which the advantageous period ends after the granting condition is satisfied is changed. Therefore, whether or not the timing at which the ball is passed through the specific area is during the advantageous period. It has the effect of making it difficult for the player to grasp.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a distribution means for distributing the ball to a plurality of paths is provided, and the ball distributed to one of the plurality of paths passes through the specific area by the distribution means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by being possible.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the ball is distributed to a plurality of paths by the distribution means, and the ball distributed to one of the paths passes through the specific area. Therefore, the timing at which the sphere passes through the specific region differs depending on the distribution result of the distribution means. Therefore, since the ball passes through the specific area at various timings, there is an effect that the fun of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the privilege granting means grants a high probability state in which the probability that the specific condition is satisfied after the privilege game is completed is set higher than usual as the privilege. The gaming machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, there is a high probability state in which the probability that a specific condition is satisfied after the privileged game is completed is set higher than usual by the privilege granting means. Since it is given, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the discriminating means for determining whether the timing at which the ball passes through the specific region is the advantageous period, and the notification based on the determination that the discriminating means is the advantageous period. The gaming machine G6 is characterized by comprising a notification means for performing.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the determination means determines that the timing at which the ball has passed the specific region is an advantageous period, the determination result is determined by the notification means. Is notified based on. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the timing at which the ball has passed the specific area was an advantageous period.

In addition, in the case of having the configuration of the gaming machine G5, since the period from the passage of the ball through the specific area to the granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means is long, the player can be relieved by notifying by the notification means. It is possible to execute a privilege game.

<Characteristic H group> (During the big hit, you can win the V winning prize)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a permissible state that allows ball entry and a regulated state that regulates ball entry, and the variable ball-entry means to the permissible state based on the establishment of specific conditions. Based on the privileged game execution means for executing the privileged game and the variable ball-entry means, which are provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and the ball can enter the ball, and the ball enters the ball-entry means. A ball has entered the ball-entry means while the privilege-giving means for granting the first privilege or the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and the privilege game is being executed. The discriminating means is provided with a discriminating means for determining that, and the privilege granting means is said to be the first when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed by the discriminating means. The above-mentioned specific means, which grants the privilege of 2, and is variable to a permissible position that allows the ball to flow into the ball entry means and a regulated position that restricts the flow of the ball from the permissible position. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a variable control means that changes the variable means to the allowable position based on the condition that the conditions are satisfied.

<Characteristic I group> (V probability expectation is set by the jackpot type determined when passing through the V gate)
Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the grant condition is satisfied by the grant condition establishment means for establishing the grant condition for granting the privilege game to the player, the specific area through which the ball can pass, and the grant condition establishment means. In this case, the privilege game type setting means for setting the type of the privilege game to be given to the player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area, and the privilege game set by the privilege game type setting means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game based on the type, a ball-entry means provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and capable of entering a ball, and the privileged game executing means. When a ball enters the ball-entry means while the privilege game is being executed, the privilege-giving means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player is provided, and the privilege game type setting means is at least. The first privilege game type in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed, and the entry while the privilege game is being executed rather than the first privilege game type. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that any one of the second privileged gaming types in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball means is set.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10, D1 to D11, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1 and I1, the gaming machine is characterized by being a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10, D1 to D11, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1, and I1, the gaming machine is characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area at the operating port. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, C1 to C10, D1 to D11, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, H1, I1, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a variable winning device that is opened during a privileged game (winning game, etc.) and a gaming state (probability change) that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player when the ball passes through. Etc.) (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174874).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced due to the frequent occurrence of balls that do not win the variable winning device during the privileged game.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in a player's motivation to play.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 has a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a permissible state that allows the ball to enter and a regulated state that regulates the ball entry, and specific conditions. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable ball entry means to the permissible state based on the establishment, and a ball entry means provided separately from the variable ball entry means and capable of entering a ball. And a privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, the privilege granting means said the ball entering while the privilege game is being executed. When a ball enters the means, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the first state in which the ball can enter the ball entry means and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. It has a setting means that can set the state.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the setting means has a plurality of paths through which the ball can pass and a distribution means for distributing the ball to the plurality of paths. The distribution means has at least a first path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set by the setting means, and a sphere passes when the second state is set. The sphere is distributed to any of the possible second paths.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, and the plurality of routes can be passed by a ball when the first state is set in addition to the first route. The first path has a third path to allow the ball to enter the ball entry means in a shorter period of time than the third path, and the distribution means has the same path. When the first state is set, the sphere can be distributed to the first path and the third path.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 or 4, wherein the distribution means distributes balls to the plurality of paths in a predetermined order.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a permissible state that allows the ball to enter and a regulated state that restricts the ball-in is permitted by the privilege game execution means. A bonus game that changes to is executed. A ball-entry means that is provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and can be given the first privilege by the ball entering the ball is provided. Then, when the ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege giving means.
As a result, when the ball enters a ball entry means other than the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game in which the ball is inserted into a ball entry means other than the variable ball entry means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the first state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means while the privilege game is being executed by the setting means, and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than in the first state. The state and is set.
As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball while the privilege game is being executed. The game will be played with the expectation that the second privilege will be given to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, the first path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set by the distribution means, and the second path through which the sphere can pass when the second state is set. The sphere is distributed to the route.
As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball depending on the path through which the ball passes. As a result, the player pays close attention to the flow of the ball, which has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3. That is, as a plurality of paths, apart from the first path, there is a third path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set, and the first state is set. The sphere is distributed to the first path or the third path by the distribution means.
As a result, when the first state is set, the timing at which the ball enters the ball entry means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 or 4, the balls are distributed to a plurality of routes in a predetermined order by the distribution means, which is a privilege. By causing a plurality of balls to flow down to the distribution means while the game is being executed, it is possible to reliably enter the balls into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game while the privilege game is being executed.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (game area)
64 First ball entry port (part of the ball entry means)
630a Specified general winning opening ( specific ball entry means)
640 2nd ball entry port (part of the ball entry means)
900 First distribution member ( distribution means )
901 Second distribution member ( distribution means )
902 Third distribution member ( distribution means )
1600 2nd storage device (storage means)
1601a storage valve (variable means)
S216 discrimination means
S1004 Bonus game execution means S1110 Bonus granting means

Claims (5)

A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a permissible state that allows the ball to enter and a regulated state that regulates the ball entry,
A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable ball entry means to the allowable state based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, and a privilege game execution means.
A ball-entry means that is provided separately from the variable ball-entry means and allows a ball to enter,
The ball entry means is provided with a privilege granting means for granting the first privilege based on the ball entering the ball.
The privilege granting means is capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege when a ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine featuring. A claim characterized by having a setting means capable of setting a first state in which a ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. Item 1 The gaming machine. The setting means is
Multiple routes through which the sphere can pass,
It has a distribution means that distributes spheres to the multiple paths,
The distribution means has at least a first path through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set by the setting means, and a sphere passes when the second state is set. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the ball is distributed to any of the possible second paths. In addition to the first route, the plurality of routes have a third route through which the sphere can pass when the first state is set.
The first route causes the ball to enter the ball entry means in a shorter period of time than the third route.
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the distribution means can distribute a sphere to the first path and the third path when the first state is set. .. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the distribution means distributes balls to the plurality of routes in a predetermined order.

Images